project name - St Vrain Valley School District

Transcription

St. Vrain Valley School District
Technical Guidelines and Design Criteria
New Construction and Existing Structures
June 6, 2011
Updated October 9, 2011
Department of Construction + Facilities Operations and Maintenance
St. Vrain Valley School District RE-1J
Technical Guidelines
TABLE OF CONTECTS
INTRODUCTION
DESIGN GUIDELINES
DESIGN SERVICES / DESIGN PROCESS
1
2
6
DIVISION 0 – DOCUMENTS
13
DIVISION 00 00 01
DIVISION 00 00 02
DIVISION 00 00 03
DIVISION 00 10 10
DIVISION 00 20 10
DIVISION 00 30 20
DIVISION 00 40 10
DIVISION 00 40 13
DIVISION 00 50 10
DIVISION 00 50 13
DIVISION 00 60 10
DIVISION 00 70 10
DIVISION 00 70 30
PROJECT MANUAL COVER PAGE
PROJECT DIRECTORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
GENERAL CONTRACT BID FORM/ALTERNATES/UNIT PRICES
BID BOND
AGREEMENT FORM
ASSIGNMENT OF SUPPLIER'S CONTRACTS
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 01 11 00
DIVISION 01 21 10
DIVISION 01 22 10
DIVISION 01 23 00
DIVISION 01 25 00
DIVISION 01 26 00
DIVISION 01 29 00
DIVISION 01 29 20
DIVISION 01 30 00
DIVISION 01 30 20
DIVISION 01 32 10
DIVISION 01 32 50
DIVISION 01 33 00
DIVISION 01 35 00
DIVISION 01 35 10
DIVISION 01 40 00
DIVISION 01 45 00
DIVISION 01 50 00
DIVISION 01 66 00
DIVISION 01 70 20
DIVISION 01 77 00
DIVISION 01 78 20
DIVISION 01 78 39
DIVISION 01 78 43
DIVISION 01 79 00
DIVISION 01 80 00
DIVISION 01 90 00
19
SUMMARY OF WORK
ALLOWANCES
UNIT PRICES
ALTERNATIVES
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
COORDINATION
PROJECT MEETINGS
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS
PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
SUBMITTALS
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION RECYCLING
REFERENCE STANDARDS
QUALITY CONTROL
TEMPORARY FACILITIES and CONTROLS
NON-UTILIZATION OF ASBESTOS MATERIAL
FIELD ENGINEERING
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – LEED FOR SCHOOLS (if applicable)
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS (if applicable)
DIVISION 02 – DEMOLITION
DIVISION 02 40 10
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
DIVISION 03 20 00
DIVISION 03 30 00
DIVISION 03 40 00
DIVISION 03 60 00
49
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PRECAST CONCRETE
GROUTING
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
DIVISION 04 20 00
DIVISION 04 23 00
DIVISION 04 24 00
DIVISION 04 40 00
55
UNIT MASONRY
GLASS MASONRY
ADOBE MASONRY
STONE ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 05 – METALS
DIVISION 05 10 00
DIVISION 05 20 00
DIVISION 05 30 00
DIVISION 05 40 00
DIVISION 05 50 00
DIVISION 05 70 00
59
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
METAL JOIST
METAL DECKING
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
DECORATIVE METAL
DIVISION 06- WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
DIVISION 06 10 00
DIVISION 06 20 00
DIVISION 06 60 00
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
73
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
THERMAL PROTECTION
ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
MEMBRANE ROOFING
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
ROOF AND WALL ACCESSORIES
FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION
JOINT PROTECTION
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
DIVISION 08 10 00
DIVISION 08 30 00
DIVISION 08 40 00
DIVISION 08 50 00
DIVISION 08 60 00
DIVISION 08 70 00
DIVISION 08 80 00
67
ROUGH CARPENTRY
FINISH CARPENTRY
PLASTIC PANELING
DIVISION 07- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
DIVISION 07 10 00
DIVISION 07 20 00
DIVISION 07 40 00
DIVISION 07 50 00
DIVISION 07 60 00
DIVISION 07 70 00
DIVISION 07 80 00
DIVISION 07 90 00
45
89
DOORS AND FRAMES
SPECIALITY DOORS AND FRAMES
ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND CURTAIN WALLS
WINDOWS
ROOF WINDOWS AND SKYLIGHTS
HARDWARE
GLAZING
119
DIVISION 09 00 00
DIVISION 09 20 00
DIVISION 09 30 00
DIVISION 09 50 00
DIVISION 09 60 00
DIVISION 09 70 00
DIVISION 09 80 00
DIVISION 09 90 00
FINISH DESIGN CRITERIA
PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
TILING
CEILINGS
FLOORING
WALL COVERINGS
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
PAINTING AND COATING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 10 10 00
DIVISION 10 15 00
DIVISION 10 20 00
DIVISION 10 40 00
DIVISION 10 50 00
DIVISION 10 70 00
DIVISION 10 80 00
INFORMATION SPECIALITES
SIGNAGE
INTERIOR SPECIALTIES
SAFETY SPECIALTIES
STORAGE SPECIALITES
EXTERIOR SPECIALITES
OTHER SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 11 10 00
DIVISION 11 30 00
DIVISION 11 40 00
DIVISION 11 50 00
DIVISION 11 60 00
DIVISION 11 65 00
DIVISION 11 70 00
175
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
DIVISION 22 10 00
DIVISION 22 30 00
DIVISION 22 40 00
171
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
DIVISION 21 10 00
167
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 14 20 00
161
WINDOW BLINDS
CASEWORK
FURNISHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
MULTIPLE SEATING
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 13 10 00
145
GENERAL EQUIPMENT
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
EDUCATION AND SCIENTIFIC EQUIPMENT
THEATRE EQUIPMENT
ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT
THERAPY EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 12 20 00
DIVISION 12 30 00
DIVISION 12 40 00
DIVISION 12 60 00
135
181
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
23 00 00
23 00 90
23 10 00
23 20 00
23 30 00
23 50 00
23 70 00
23 80 00
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS
HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
CENTERAL HEATING EQUIPMENT
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
DIVISION 25 00 00
26 01 00
26 05 00
26 05 10
26 05 20
26 05 30
26 05 40
26 05 50
26 05 60
26 08 00
26 09 20
26 22 00
26 24 00
26 24 15
26 27 20
26 28 10
26 30 10
26 36 00
26 40 00
26 40 10
26 40 20
26 40 30
26 50 00
26 50 10
26 50 20
27 00 10
27 10 00
27 40 00
27 50 00
27 50 00
27 50 10
27 50 20
27 50 30
27 50 40
27 50 50
27 50 60
245
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SWITCHBOARDS
PANELBOARDS
WIRING DEVICES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ENGINE GENERATOR
TRANSFER SWITCHES
ELECTRICAL FOR AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL FOR THEATRE SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL FOR PRESS BOX SOUND SYSTEM
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS
SPORTS FIELD LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
241
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (OVERVIEW)
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
191
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STRUCTURED CABELING
AUDIO VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS
Security
Public Address (PA) System / Intercom /Bell
Wireless Clock System
Radio re-amplification system (BDA, DAS, IRS, etc)
Electrical Rough-in/Infrastructure
Site Infrastructure
Owner Provided Equipment and Systems
Systems OVERVIEW Matrix
277
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
DIVISION 31 20 00
DIVISION 31 60 20
EARTHWORK
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
32 10 00
32 10 10
32 10 20
32 10 30
32 10 40
32 20 00
32 20 20
32 20 30
32 20 40
32 20 50
32 20 60
32 30 00
32 30 10
32 30 20
32 40 20
32 50 00
32 80 00
32 90 00
299
ASPHALTIC PAVING
CONCRETE PAVING, CURBS, GUTTERS, & SIDEWALKS
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE TENNIS COURTS
PAVEMENT MARKING
SIGNAGE
CINDER TRACK SURFACE
SYNTHETIC TRACK SURFACING
SYNTHETIC TURF
TENNIS COURT SURFACING
BASEBALL FIELD SURFACING
PLAYGROUND SURFACING
ATHLETIC AND RECREATION EQUIPMENT
FENCES AND GATES
WOOD FENCE
SITE FURNISHINGS
GRAVEL PLAY AREAS
UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEM
LANDSCAPING
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
DIVISION 33 10 00
DIVISION 33 40 00
DIVISION 33 40 10
295
319
UTILITY SERVICES
STORM DRAINAGE
SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS
INTRODUCTION
The District's vision is to be an exemplary school district which inspires and promotes high standards of learning and student well
being in partnership with parents, guardians, and the community. For many years, the St. Vrain Valley School District has been committed to providing first-class educational facilities of the highest quality while being constructed at reasonable cost. The School District believes that the successful formula for providing “first-class educational facilities” is to assemble the best team of design consultants, educators, facility planners, maintenance and custodial staff, and parents and to encourage effective communications between
all parties of the team.
This document entitled TECHNICAL GUIDELINES is an attempt by the School District to streamline the communication process by
summarizing, in written form, critical information required by design consultants to “successfully” design all types of educational facilities and support facilities including new buildings as well as additions, renovations, and alterations/maintenance of existing facilities.
The information and criteria presented in these Consultant Guidelines is not to be construed as limiting creative design or functional
and economical considerations, but to assist the design professionals by providing a degree of uniformity for all the St. Vrain facilities
and thereby assist the School District in their effort to standardize facilities and facilitate ease of maintenance.
The information contained in this document is divided into three major categories. Those categories/sections are as follows:
x DESIGN GUIDELINES
x DESIGN SERVICES/DESIGN PROCESS
x TECHNICAL GUIDELINES
Included in the DESIGN GUIDELINES are topics such as School District design philosophy, accessibility, acoustics, maintainability,
energy efficiency/sustainability, flexibility, safety and security, and site selection/site development guidelines.
The DESIGN SERVICES/DESIGN PROCESS portion of this document outlines contractual issues and responsibilities of the School
District and the design consultant for all phases of the design process.
The last and most extensive section of these guidelines is the TECHNICAL GUIDELINES. The detailed information contained in this
section is geared toward assisting the design consultants in preparing bid and construction documents for projects. These technical
guidelines generally follow the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) Manual of Practice and Master Format (2004) of specification sections. These sections are greatly abbreviated and aimed at providing only the “basic technical” information the design consultant will need to prepare complete specifications and contract drawings.
The DESIGN GUIDELINES and TECHNICAL GUIDELINES are intended to be used as advisory documents only. Design consultants
assume full professional responsibility for research, design, engineering, regulatory compliance, and other requirements defined by
statutes and prevailing standards of professional care. Under no circumstances are the TECHNICAL GUIDELINES to be used as
master specifications in the preparation of construction documents. Specific products identified in the TECHNICAL GUIDELINES are
intended to provide a level of quality and acceptable minimum criteria for satisfying a particular need of the St. Vrain Valley School
District. It is the responsibility of the design consultant to verify that listed products and criteria are applicable for the particular design
solution under consideration by the design professional. Should any information or item contained in this document be contrary to
current state-of-the-art practices and materials, it is the responsibility of the design consultants to inform the School District of such
items and provide information on alternatives.
This document represents the St. Vrain Valley School District’s attempt to assemble, in written form, guidelines for design professionals. The School District welcomes any questions, comments, criticisms, and requests for revisions in an effort of providing better and
more accurate information for design professionals. All feedback should be directed in writing to Mr. Brian Lamer, Director of Construction Operations & Maintenance, St. Vrain Valley School District, 395 South Pratt Parkway, Longmont, Colorado 80501, telephone number 303-682-7269.
MODIFICATION PROCESS
In order to furnish the most complete and reliable data for SVVSD projects, this document has been formatted to accommodate record keeping for all revisions. On a quarterly basis, the intention is for the District to update the Technical Specification in order to
maintain a record of modifications , at comment page for edits to be made is provided at the front of each Division . The District Architect will manage the modification process
1
DESIGN GUIDELINES
SCHOOL DISTRICT DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
The St. Vrain Valley School District believes in the importance of the physical environment as a major factor in facilitating the learning
process. The School District design philosophy is that new facilities should be attractive and stimulating while being functional, economical, and sustainable. They should be state-of-the art and harmonize with the environment without being experimental or trendy.
Designs for additions and modifications to existing buildings should reflect, enhance, and unify the existing visual image and environment.
ACCESSIBILITY
All new construction shall be designed to provide full accessibility as defined by the International Building Code (IBC), the ICC/ANSI
A117.1 Guidelines, and ADA Architectural Guidelines (ADAAG). Full accessibility is to be provided not only to students, but also for
teachers and citizens as well. For projects that involve additions to existing facilities or remodeling/renovations to those same facilities, every effort shall be made to provide full compliance with the IBC, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and ADA in the portions of the buildings
being remodeled and in the new additions. Where it is technically infeasible to
provide full compliance, the design consultant, using his best professional judgment, shall provide improved accessibility per the requirements of the International Existing Building Code. Priority shall be given to providing unimpeded access to all educational spaces
and restrooms/toilet facilities.
ACOUSTICS
Appropriate acoustical design is extremely important in all types of educational facilities. The design consultant shall provide acoustical separation or isolate noise-generating activities, areas, and equipment. The spaces shall be designed with appropriate acoustical
separations, acoustical absorption and reverberation time for all intended activities and the various acoustical volumes. As a minimum
standard, the design of classrooms and other core learning spaces shall meet the requirements of “Prerequisite #3, Minimum Acoustical Performance, LEED for Schools for New Construction and Major Renovations, 2007.”
Special attention shall be paid to providing vibration control and sound isolation for mechanical and electrical equipment, particularly
mechanical rooftop units placed above occupied spaces.
MAINTAINABILITY
The appropriate selection of materials and equipment in educational facilities is extremely important in terms of their longevity and
cost associated with their maintenance. Design consultants shall work with the School District to prepare life-cycle cost analysis of
various systems and materials. It is also important to incorporate durable materials that are resistant to vandalism and abuse, provide
adequate access to service, and repair and replace major pieces of equipment (boilers, fans, etc.) and building components (walls,
floors, roofs, window glass, doors, etc.). Attention should also be given to facilitate service and repair
of mechanical and electrical equipment.
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
The cost of operating school buildings is extremely critical in terms of the School District budgets. Every effort shall be made to reduce
energy cost through energy conservation and water conservation. Buildings shall be designed to meet the requirements of the current
adopted International Energy Conservation Code and incorporate natural daylighting in all instructional spaces where economically
feasible. The School District encourages energy efficient design and will consider incorporating energy conserving equipment and
design techniques, provided these techniques can be accomplished within the construction budget and have a reasonable lifecycle
cost. At the beginning of each new school project or major addition/renovation project, the design consultant shall establish, jointly
with the School District, a “reasonable” energy target (BTU’s per gross square foot and watts per gross square foot of building). In
addition, the design consultant together with the School District will review the criteria contained in “LEED for Schools for New Construction and Major Renovations” to determine which requirements will be incorporated into the project and whether the project will be
designed to meet the minimum requirements of a “Certified LEED Project.”
FLEXIBILITY
Educational philosophies and programs are constantly changing to reflect the changing society we live in. Schools must be designed
to be flexible in order to adapt to constantly changing educational philosophies and teaching techniques. The facility design should
allow for cost-effective interior modifications of school buildings without sacrificing functionality and acoustics. Facilities within the
building should also be designed to serve multiple functions including community centers, meeting places, public recreation, and other
after-hour group activities. Appropriate site master planning should also facilitate flexibility. The
building should be located on the site to facilitate ease of expansion of the building in multiple directions.
2
SAFETY AND SECURITY
The safety and security of all students, teachers, and staff in St. Vrain Valley Schools is of utmost importance. Design of school facilities and selection of materials will promote the safety of the occupants. For example, non-slip walking surfaces shall be incorporated
in both interior corridors and exterior sidewalks. Visual Supervision (both electronically and physically) of students shall be an important concept in the shaping of spaces and environments related to educational facilities. The design consultant shall coordinate
with the School District the design and location of video surveillance camera systems and card access systems at all district buildings.
The layout of the site and design of the building shall minimize ice build-ups at building entrances and at pedestrian ways, and the
design of the exterior facade and placement of landscape materials shall discourage unauthorized access to the roof. Site design
incorporating reasonable separation for pedestrians, busses and auto traffic is critical and during construction of occupied school
buildings, safety of students is the primary concern. The construction traffic shall not conflict with student use in anyway.
RECOMMENDED DESIGN HEIGHTS
Design mounting heights for equipment and fixtures for student areas in school buildings are listed in the chart below. These recommended heights are intended to supplement, but not supersede, the requirements of the IBC, ADAAG, ADAAG recommendations for
accessibility standards for children’s environment, ICCI/ANSI A117.1, and other applicable codes. All dimensions are measured from
the finished floor.
ITEM
Lavatories (rim)
Water closets (seat)
Urinals (rim)
Shower head (control)
Shower seat
Drinking fountains (spout)
Eyewash
Mirror (bottom)
Soap dispenser (outlet)
Toilet paper dispenser (outlet)
PRE- SCHOOL
30”
12”
14”
NA
NA
30”
NA
34” max.
32”
17” (1.5” min.
below grab bar,
15” min. above floor)
Hand/hair dryer (nozzle)
NA
Sanitary napkin dispenser (coin slot) NA
Grab bar (center)
25”
Paper towel dispenser
34”
Sinks – work areas (top)
30”
Handrails (top)
26” (34” adult)
Standing counter (top)
30”
Sitting counter (top)
24”
Typing surface (top)
NA
Chalkboard/Markerboard (bottom)
20”
Room identification signs (top)
60”
Fire extinguisher cabinet (handle)
48”
Clock, bell, intercom speakers (center) 88”
Horn/strobe (bottom)
80”
Thermostat (center)
60”
Electrical switch
48”
Fire alarm pull
48”
Elevator call button
48”
Electrical/Telephone/Data receptacles
• Standard (bottom)
15”
• Wall (bottom)
48”
• Counter (bottom)
6” above counter
ELEMENTARY
SCHOOL
34” max.
15” (17” ADA)
17” max.
NA
NA
30” (38” adult)
NA
34" max.
32”
19” (1.5” min.
below grab bar,.
15” min above floor)
NA
40”
33”
34”
30” (34” ADA adult)
28” (34” adults)
30”
27”
26”
24”
60”
48”
88”
80”
60”
48”
48”
48”
MIDDLE & HIGH
SCHOOL
34”
19”
24” (17” ADA)
42”
19”
38” (36” ADA)
36”
38” max.
38” max.
24” (1.5” min.
below grab bar,.
15” min above floor)
48”
40”
36”
38”
34”
34”
36” (34” ADA)
30”
27”
36”
60”
48”
96” (88” @ 8’ ceilings)
80”
60”
48”
48”
48”
15”
48”
6” above counter
15”
48”
6” above counter
3
SITE DEVELOPMENT GUIDES FOR SCHOOLS
The following standards provide data regarding the design of school sites:
1. Site topography guides:
MAXIMUM SLOPE
MINIMUM SLOPE
a) Driveways
6% (without attached sidewalks) 1.5%
b) Parking areas
per ADA/ANSI
1.5%
c) Pedestrian sidewalks
per ADA/ANSI
1.5%
d) Grassed play fields
3%
2%
e) Grass swales
10%
3%
f) Terraces, embankments
25%
2%
g) Play pads
3%
1.5%
h) Tennis courts
1%
1%
i) Athletic fields
2.4%
1.6%
j) High school football
18” crown
18" crown
2. Note: slope all adjacent grade away from bldg. at a min. 2% slope.
3. Driveway, parking, sidewalks:
a. School bus circulation
x One way traffic 16' minimum width drive (24’ min. if fire lane)
x Two way traffic 24' minimum width drive
x Inside turning radius 35' minimum
x Outside turning radius 50' min (one-way traffic) 60' min (two-way traffic)
x Bus length 40'
b. Parking
x Preferred parking configuration 90°
x Parking spaces disabled per IBC/ICC/ANSI A117.1 standard: 9' x 18'
x Drive aisle width 24' minimum
x Separate drop-off lane in front of building from parking lot.
x Parking islands keep to a minimum
c. Pedestrian walks
x Ramps and curbs per ADA/ANSI
x Minimum width 6’ (8' preferred)
District Educational Specifications: Consultants should refer to the School District’s most recent Educational Specifications for elementary, middle, high schools and other special schools/support facilities for more specific criteria relating to site elements. The site
design should also incorporate specific requirements of the jurisdiction within which the facility is located.
SITE SELECTION CRITERIA FOR NEW SCHOOLS
Occasionally, the School District will request the services of a design consultant to assist in the analysis and selection of the school
sites. The following criteria are used by the School District to analyze potential school sites:
Size and Shape of Site - The net useable area of the site should be a minimum of 10 acres for an elementary school, 24
acres for a middle school, 80 acres for a high school, and 110 acres for a combined middle school/high school. Note that
these acreage requirements exclude areas of the site which are extensively hilly, composed of setbacks or easements, required for on-site detention of storm water, etc.
The ideal school site will be rectangular in shape no further from square than 3 by 5 proportions. Primary site access would
be on the long side of the rectangle. The overall site would slope uniformly and would have no other features (easements,
access limitations, flood plains, etc) which might reduce the usefulness of the site or constrain its planning.
Location - The selected site would be central to the population served, while being located suitably with respect to other
schools in the School District. The site would be favorably located, relative to off-site amenities such as libraries, recreational facilities, fire stations, and other public facilities and services.
Environmental Factors and Neighborhood Impact - The impact of this land use on neighboring properties should be considered. Impact mitigation measures and their cost should also be studied. The site should have a high percentage (85% or
4
more) of reasonable topographic slope (2%-8%). Slopes lower than 2% will not drain properly; slopes higher than 8% are
too steep to use efficiently given the vertical slope limitations. Drainage onto and off of the site should be manageable, ideally, directly to a regional drainage system. Otherwise, the cost of constructing on-site detention and stormwater management must be added to the cost of the site.
The site should not be in a 100 year flood plain; although this is manageable for some site uses (playing fields, parking lots,
etc.), it is never desirable. Wetlands on the site should be minimal or non-existent. The site should slope generally south to
provide good sun exposure for snow melting with no major obstacles to good solar exposure. The site should not be excessively windy. The site should have good views for orientation of major public spaces, as well as good views onto the site to
allow for easy observation and after hours surveillance.
Soils should not be expansive (if possible) and with appropriate depths of topsoil on the site. It should be feasible to grade
the site as required and yet obtain a balance of cut and fill on the site. Ground water is not desirable within 12 feet of the
surface.
Other miscellaneous items such as archeological artifacts, proximity to industrial or utility uses, and railroads or major highways can deduct from the desirability of the site.
Accessibility and Traffic Flow - Ideally, an elementary school should front on a collector street and a secondary school site
should front on two collector streets. If a secondary school has only one street available, two entrance locations (one for
busses and one for automobile traffic) should be available on the long side of the site with adequate separation to allow safe
full motion access. These collector streets should lead directly to an arterial street at a point controlled by traffic lights.
Relationship to non-school intersections should be safe and conducive to circulation. Streets should not have horizontal or
vertical curves which inhibit safe circulation. Arrangements should discourage Uturns, drop-offs on the opposite side, and
on-street parking.
Pedestrian access should be on sidewalks with a slope of no more than 5% (ADA/ANSI requirement). Pedestrian crossings
should be clearly visible and protected by traffic lights or flashing crossing signals. Pedestrians should not have to cross onsite bus or car drop-off areas for normal access to the school.
Utilities and Public Services - To minimize investment in off-site utility work, all public utilities should be in place at or near
the site
boundary at the time of development. All such utility systems should have adequate capacity to carry the load of the proposed new school. Existing taps or connection points (if any) should be in appropriate locations.
Desirable secondary school sites might be near the following public safety or cultural amenities: fire station, police (or sheriff) substation, hospital and/or ambulance dispatch, public transit, museums, auditoriums, and social services offices.
Cost of Land - The total cost of land acquisition by the School District should be as low as possible. Total cost should account for land purchase plus all special access requirements, participation fees, off-site extensions of utilities, roads, etc.
Land-use and Zoning - The site should be platted, zoned correctly, incorporated into the appropriate city and/or other improvement districts, and have the appropriate neighboring uses.
5
DESIGN SERVICES / DESIGN PROCESS
CONSULTANT AGREEMENT
For most projects, the St. Vrain Valley School District uses the American Institute of Architects, Owner Architect Agreement B-141 –
1997 Parts 1 and 2 with modifications. This document contains the general responsibilities, obligations, and other requirements of
both the consultant and the School District for accomplishment of the work.
REFERENCED STANDARDS OF PROFESSIONAL CARE
St. Vrain Valley Schools realizes that it is impossible to define all the critical data and information required to accomplish the design
and construction of new and renovated facilities in this manual. To supplement the information contained in this document, other information, recommendations, and latest standards/document editions of the following organizations shall apply:
x AIA Architects Handbook of Professional Practice
x AIA Architectural Graphics Standards
x AIA/AGC Guidelines for Better Communications and Understanding Within the Construction Industry
x CSI Manual of Practice Including Master Format
x CSI Uniform Drawing Standard
x CSI Standard Abbreviations
x CSI Standard Reference Symbols
x ASHRAE Handbook for Mechanical Issues
x LEED for Schools for New Construction and Major Renovations
RESPONSIBILITIES/INFORMATION PROVIDED BY ST. VRAIN VALLEY SCHOOLS
Site Survey - St. Vrain Valley Schools will furnish an up-to-date survey for the site. The survey will include information required by the
consultant to accomplish the work. This information may include existing improvements, topography, utilities, underground and overhead utilities, easements, landscaping, etc. Prior to obtaining the site survey, the consultant will be required to submit to the School
District a list of any special survey requirements required for the specific project. The consultant may use AIA Document G501, Request for Proposal – Land Survey, 1994 Edition
Geotechnical Investigation - For new building projects and additions to existing facilities, St Vrain Valley Schools will furnish the services of a geotechnical engineer to provide the testing and recommendations required. The design consultant will assist the School
District by providing preliminary drawings indicating building placement, floor elevations, and paving locations for parking lots/drives to
the geotechnical engineer. The geotechnical engineer will use this information to prepare the foundation/slab/paving recommendations to be contained in the geotechnical report for the project.
The School District requires that, prior to construction, the specifications prepared by the design consultant be reviewed by the geotechnical engineer to verify that all recommendations and requirements contained in the geotechnical report have been properly
interpreted and adequately covered by the construction specifications prepared by the design consultant.
Testing Agency - St. Vrain Valley Schools will employ the services of a testing agency to perform
required tests and inspections during the construction phase. The following tests are typically provided
by this testing agency:
a. Soils
b. Concrete
c. Masonry grout/masonry reinforcing
d. Structural steel/welding
e. Asphalt paving
f. Other testing as required
Record Documents (Existing Conditions) - St. Vrain Valley Schools will furnish one set of prints or photo copies of all available information (reports and drawings) of existing buildings including, where available, civil, landscape, architectural, structural, plumbing,
mechanical, electrical drawings, and specifications. The School District will also make available information from AHERA reports indicating the known presence of materials containing asbestos in existing buildings. The School District will
reproduce copies of any available ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) studies and/or recommendations that have been previously
prepared. In many cases, the existing drawings and specifications are not “as built” and, as such, the School District cannot guarantee
the accuracy of these documents.
6
Assistance by Representation of St. Vrain Valley Schools - Representatives of the School District will join with the consultant in attending meetings/conferences with regulatory agencies to obtain required information, as well as to assist in filing applications that
may be required for building permits, location and extent site review submittals and other permits/variances. Representatives of the
School District will also assist the consultant by furnishing additional technical, educational, and construction criteria for special issues
which may arise during the design and construction phases.
Architect/Consultant Responsibility (Special Issues) – The following special issues are part of the design consultants responsibilities.
1.
Remodeling/Retro-Fit Projects: The consultant shall be required to field verify information provided by the School District
that relates to areas being remodeled. The consultant shall also field verify critical conditions and dimensions required to interface new construction with existing conditions. On the construction documents, the Design Consultant shall clearly distinguish between existing, salvaged, relocated, demolished, removed, and new construction; and shall clearly define the disposition, delivery, and storage of salvaged items.
2.
Design Coordination Committees: Working with the Design Consultant, in an open collaborative process, will be a design/Coordination Committee composed of technical and nontechnical School District staff, students, parents, citizens, and
other involved stakeholder groups. They will assist the Consultant in analyzing specific needs for the project and will review
recommendations/design options prepared by the Design Consultant. The committee’s primary involvement will be during
the programming (educational specifications), schematic design, and design development phases of the project.
3.
Site Plan Review by Public Agencies: The Design Consultant, working together with representatives of the School District
will be responsible for preparing site planned submittals (Location and Extent) required by the City where the project is located the County if not located within a city. The Design Consultant will also prepare, coordinate, and review drainage study
and erosion control documents required by the appropriate jurisdictions and submit and obtain approval of any required civil
construction documents required for public improvements including, but not limited to, utilities, public streets/sidewalks,
drainage/water quality structures, etc.
4.
Building Code Reviews/Building Permit: The Design Consultant will be responsible for meeting with appropriate building officials to review code issues and make submittals required to obtain a building permit for the project. Projects will be reviewed by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment, Division of Oil and Public Safety and permits for general
construction, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical will be obtained from the State: (see website for specific requirements).
5.
Fire Department Review and Permit: The Design Consultant shall meet with and submit documents required by the appropriate fire districts and also submit these same documents to the State Division of Fire Safety.
6.
Health Department Review: Educational facilities are required to be designed to meet the criteria set forth in the “Rules and
Regulations Governing Schools in the State of Colorado”, administrated by the Colorado Department of Public Health and
Environment. The Design Consultant shall coordinate all submittals required by this State Agency. Usually, this agency delegates its authority to review schools to the Tri-County Health Department.
7.
Budgetary Requirements: The Design Consultant shall make every effort to design the project within the budgetary requirements set by St. Vrain Valley Schools. The budget will be set by the School District prior to the commencement of design
services and will be reviewed at each subsequent phase prior to construction. If the low bid exceed the budget established
by the School District, the Architect will work with the School District to bring the project into budget.
8.
Bidding Phase: The construction of new and renovated projects by the School District is generally accomplished by a conventional bid procurement process whereby the School District prequalifies all general contractors and, for larger projects,
major subcontractors. The Design Consultant shall be responsible for coordinating this prequalification process and will assist the Owner in obtaining and reviewing the submittals from prospective contractors/subcontractors. Typically the School
District uses AIA Document A305 as the required submittal document from the prospective contractors/subcontractors. Occasionally, the School District will select a construction manager/general contractor for the project. When this delivery process is used, the Design Consultant will generally be included in the selection process.
FORMATS FOR DELIVERABLES FROM CONSULTANTS:
Electronic Media (Graphic or Non Graphic) - The School District requires all plans (site, floor, ceiling, roof, HVAC, plumbing, electrical
technology, etc.) be prepared in CAD electronic media. The program for preparation of these plans shall be AutoCAD, and the information shall be submitted in CD format. The version of AutoCAD to be submitted shall be verified with the School District. Provide the
following:
7
All submitted drawings shall be in ACAD 2009 with xref attached along with a final pdf image of each drawing sheet. Only
one project per record CD.
Hard Copy Media - All presentation boards shall be maximum size 30" x 42". All reports (educational specification, planning studies,
schematic designs/design development reports, project manual, etc.) shall be in 8 ½" by 11" format unless otherwise authorized by
the School District. All original construction document paper prints (updated with as-built information) shall be in 24" x 36" or 30" x 42"
format and must have a cover sheet with index of all volumes of drawings.. Provide the following:
One (1) xerox printed full size set of document – OWNER COPY
Three (3) xerox printed full size set of document – O&M COPY
One (1) Project Manual / Specifications – marked RECORD COPY
One (1) binder with all warranties, collated by CSI numbering – O&M copy
Project Development and Construction Schedules - Project development schedules prepared by the Design Consultant shall show
sufficient detail that all phases of the project from redesign through close-out are indicated and the information shall be provided in
either 8 ½ “ x 11" or 11" x 17" format. Schedules are to be updated at the completion of each phase of the project.
Construction Cost Estimates - The construction cost estimates prepared by the Consultant shall reflect “all” costs related to the project
including, but not limited to, the following:
x Site Acquisition
x On-site construction
x Off-site construction
x Professional services/fees
x Furniture and equipment
x Technology
x Utility connections and development fees
x Miscellaneous Owner’s costs
x Bid reserve
x Construction reserve
x Any proposed construction alternates
Costs relating to site acquisition, furniture and equipment, technology, miscellaneous Owner’s costs, and the reserve costs will be
furnished by the School District for inclusion in the estimate by the Design Consultant.
Building Code Analysis - The design consultant shall prepare a building code analysis at the schematic design phase of the project
and shall document that analysis in written format. The code analysis shall be updated at the design development and construction
document phases and a summary of the code analysis shall be included on the first sheet of the construction documents. This code
analysis is in addition to any submittal information required by the State Division of Oil and Public Safety. The building code analysis
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
x Fire zones
x Occupancy groups
x Description of existing and proposed construction types/systems
x Fire protection
x Occupancy/area separations/fire walls
x Allowable floor areas
x Allowable area increases
x Actual/proposed gross area tabulations
x Height, number of stories
x Exiting
x Fire extinguishing systems
x Roof design, fire retardancy, and drainage
x Mechanical systems
x Plumbing fixture counts
x Electrical systems
x Energy code compliance calculations
8
Bid Tabulations - The design consultant shall prepare, print, and distribute at the bid opening a bit tab spreadsheet matrix with the
following labels:
x Bidders names
x Bid signed and sealed
x Bid security
x Acknowledgment of each addendum
x Completion date
x Base bid
x Each bid alternate
x Unit prices
x Names of major subcontractors (Verify subcontractors to be included on the bid form with the School District.)
x Acceptance of assignment of items pre-ordered by the School District, if required.
Conference Records - The design consultant shall be responsible for the preparation, printing, and distribution of conference records
summarizing the discussion/action at all committee and coordination meetings. The format shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
x Project title
x Project meeting date/time
x Project meeting location
x Attendees
x Purpose of meeting
x Items discussed, decisions made, assignment of responsibility for resolution of issues
x Attachments (handouts used during the meeting)
x Distribution list
Project Meeting Minutes/Field Reports - The design consultant shall be responsible for preparing project meeting minutes/field reports
during the construction phase. Typically these reports are prepared on a weekly basis during construction. The format shall include
but not be limited to the following topics:
x Project title
x Project meeting date/time
x Project meeting location
x Attendees
x Review/approval of minutes of previous meeting
x Safety Issues
x Commissioning and Testing
x Quality Control – daily reports
x Field Observation reports – observation log
x Notice of Non-compliance work – log
x Schedule Review – short term
x Submittals status – GC review log
x Requests for Information status – GC review log
x Proposal Request status – Architect review log
x Construction Change Directives – GC/architect review
x Change Orders
x Pay Applications
x Recycling Status
x LEED submittal status (if applicable)
x Other business as required
x Upcoming Meetings / Events
Asbestos Abatement Services - The scope of services shall generally include the following:
1. Review background information from the School District including archived drawings, AHERA management plan, preliminary project scope statement, schematic design documents from separate design consultant, design development documents from separate design consultant, and construction documents from separate design consultant.
2. Attend meetings with School District staff.
9
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Conduct on-site physical inspections of the existing facilities to survey asbestos-containing materials in the building and obtain sampling as required and approved by the School District.
Prepare a written and graphic report quantifying all asbestos-containing material impacted by proposed renovation. The report shall include a summary of alternative solutions with pros and cons noted, plan graphics, recommendations regarding
priorities, alternatives, costs, scheduling, and feasibility. The report shall include the discussion of any unresolved issues
present at the time of the preparation of the report.
Prepare contract documents (plans and specifications).
Administer the bidding phase and awarding of contract to successful bidder.
Construction contract administration including close-out. This construction phase shall include the following services:
x Preparation of daily logs and checklist
x Visual observation reports before, during, and after construction
x Air-monitoring reports before, during, and after construction
x Close-out report
10
DIVISION 0 - DOCUMENTS
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
11
12
DIVISION 0 – DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 00 00 01
PROJECT MANUAL COVER PAGE
A. GENERAL
1. Format: No specific format as long as the following information is included:
a. The words "PROJECT MANUAL" as the title.
b. Official project name/title (the name of the facility or site).
c. School District Name: ST. VRAIN VALLEY SCHOOL DISTRICT, LONGMONT, COLORADO.
d. Date
e. Design Consultant firm name, address, phone number, and fax number.
DIVISION 00 00 02
PROJECT DIRECTORY
A. GENERAL
1. Format: No specific requirements as long as the names, addresses, telephone numbers, and fax numbers of all consultants
and subconsultants are listed.
DIVISION 00 00 03
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. GENERAL
1. Format: No specific requirements as long as all documents, divisions, and section names/ numbers are listed.
DIVISION 00 10 10
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
A. GENERAL
1. Format: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard - see sample attached in Appendix.
2. Verify with the School District the following data:
a. Bid time and date for base bid and alternates.
b. List of Pre-qualified General Contractors
c. Number of bid sets available to the general contractors and major subcontractors.
d. Dollar amount of deposit for each set of construction documents.
e. Location, date, time and attendees of mandatory pre-bid conference.
DIVISION 00 20 10
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. GENERAL
2. Verify with the School District the following information/data:
a. Prequalification criteria for general contractors and major subcontractors.
b. Subcontractors required to furnish a 100% Performance and Payment Bond to the successful general contractor.
c. Desired completion date for the project and amount of liquidated damages for failure to complete the project on time
FORM A – SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
A. GENERAL
DIVISION 00 30 20
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
A. GENERAL
1. Format: No specific format as long as the following information is included:
a. Project name, consultant name, date, and project number as it appears on the geotechnical study/report for this project.
b. Project name, consultant name, date, and project number as it appears on the site survey for this project.
c. Project name, consultant name, date, and project number as it appears on any addendums to the site survey or geotechnical study/report for this project.
13
d.
e.
Name and date of any previous bid packages or other construction documents that relate to this project.
Locations where these documents can be reviewed by prospective bidders. Typically these documents are available at
the School District and plan rooms listed in the Instructions to Bidders, Section 00100.
DIVISION 00 40 10
GENERAL CONTRACT BID FORM/ALTERNATES/UNIT PRICES
A. GENERAL
1. Format: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard - see sample attached in Appendix
2. Verify with the School District the following information/data:
a. The suppliers with whom the School District has issued purchase orders for materials and/or
b. equipment that will be assigned to the successful general contractor and the amount of each purchase order.
c. The major subcontractors whose names will be required on the completed bid form.
d. The required completion date and amount or liquidated damages.
e. Description and listing of each alternate.
f. Description and listing of each unit price.
g. Subcontractors exceeding 5% listing – Form C – see sample attached in Appendix
h. Expanded Subcontractors Listing – From D - see sample attached in Appendix
DIVISION 00 40 13
BID BOND
A. GENERAL
1. Format: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard - See sample attached in Appendix
DIVISION 00 50 10
AGREEMENT FORM
A. GENERAL
1. Format: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard (standard form of agreement between Owner and contractor, AIA Document A101, 2007 Edition, as issued by the American Institute of Architects consisting of Pages 1 through 5 as modified, plus
Attachments 1 and 2. See sample attached in Appendix.
2. Verify with the School District:
a. Pre-order of material and/or equipment.
DIVISION 00 50 13
ASSIGNMENT OF SUPPLIER'S CONTRACTS
A. GENERAL
1. Format/Language: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard - See Appendix.
2. Verify with School District:
a. Materials and/or equipment to be pre-purchased and the contract assigned to the general contractor.
b. Inclusion of the suppliers’ proposals in the project manual or addition by addendum.
DIVISION 00 60 10
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
A. GENERAL
1. Format/Language: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard, (1984 edition of the Performance Bond and Payment Bond,
AIA Document A312, as published by the American Institute of Architects) - See Appendix.
DIVISION 00 70 10
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. GENERAL
1. Format/Language: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard (AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction as published by the American Institute of Architects) - See Appendix.
DIVISION 00 70 30
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
A. GENERAL
1. Format/Language: St. Vrain Valley School District Standard - Modified as approved by the School District - See Appendix
14
2.
3.
Verify with School District:
a. Building permit issued by the Colorado Division of Labor.
b. Wording for extensions of time - the typical conditions for extension of time are included in the sample supplementary
conditions in Appendix. For projects with extremely tight time schedules, the following statement shall modify the general conditions: "Extensions of time for weather delays, minor changes in the work, and labor disputes will not be included in this project."
Insurance: The amount of comprehensive general and automobile liability to be included as modifications to Article 11. Also
verify the deductible amount the contractor shall pay when making a claim against the Owner's Builder’s Risk Property Insurance Policy.
15
16
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
17
18
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
A. GENERAL
1. Format: No specific requirements, as long as the following information is included after verification with the School District:
a. Examination of the site by the contractor with wording similar to:
Failure to visit site will in no way relieve any Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or performing work that
may be required to complete work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications without additional cost to Owner.
The locations of all existing utilities, as indicated on the Site Survey and on the various Site Plan Drawings, are approximate. General Contractor shall be responsible for verifying location of all underground and above ground utilities indicated on the Site Survey or on the Civil, Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Site Plans prior to construction. Any
damage to these utilities shall be the Contractor's responsibility and they shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
b. Definition of other bid packages/separate contracts such as site grading, utilities, etc.
B.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1. Insert paragraph on scope of work and project size, indicate phasing of work if applicable.
2. Insert paragraph on intentions for LEED certification, if applicable.
3. Insert paragraph on type of contract and single prime contractor, if applicable.
C. PROJECT INFORMATION
1. Project Identification: provide name of project, indicated SVVSD and project address.
2. Owner: St. Vrain Valley School District, 395 S. Pratt Parkway, Longmont, Colorado 80501.
3. Architect: insert name and address
D. WORK BY OWNER
1. Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed Products (OFCI):
a) Paper towel dispensers.
b) Soap dispensers.
c) Primer, seam sealer, glue, carpet base (for carpeted areas), floor mats and carpet, will be a case by case basis. Confirm scope with District for all projects.
2. Owner-Furnished, Owner Installed Products (OFOI):
a. Furnishings (desks, chairs, concession equipment etc.)
b. Classrooms, Concession, Hallways
c. Recycle bins/containers
d. Trash yard/Enclosure: Compost containers and trash containers.
e. Chemical rinse device at mop sinks (Contractor installs plumbing/hose bib with backflow preventer).
3. Work to be accomplished by others that will affect the work included in this project. This typically refers to site grading performed by a separate contractor. The wording might be similar to:
a. Site Grading: Rough site grading will be accomplished by the Bid Package "A" Contractor prior to general contractor
move-in. All fill placement will be controlled and tested by the geotechnical engineer.
b. Site Certification: Following completion of the site grading, the Bid Package A Contractor will be required to certify the
final grades prior to acceptance by the Owner.
c. Site Survey: Following completion of the Bid Package A Site Grading, the Owner will obtain a final topographical survey which will be made available to bidders by Addendum.
d. Acceptance of Site: Prior to move-in, the General Contractor will be required to compare the grades indicated on the
Site Development Plan with on-site grades established by the Bid Package A Site Grading Contractor and accept the
site in writing "as-is" or notify the Owner in writing of any discrepancies that do exist. No extras will be allowed for discrepancies between drawings and actual on-site conditions after such acceptance.
e. Commencement of on-site construction by the Contractor prior to Receipt of Letter of Acceptance by the Owner shall
also constitute acceptance of on-site conditions by the General Contractor.
4. Listing and brief definition of separate contracts between the Owner and other contractors that might include, but not be limited to, testing of radio signal strength for public safety radio systems; on-site gas lines; power service to the site; telephone
service to the site; off-site streets, utilities, sidewalks; technology wiring/equipment; mechanical systems testing, adjusting,
and balancing. The wording/brief description of these separate contracts might be as follows:
a. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: The hydronic and air distribution testing and balancing shall be done by an independent consultant separately contracted by the Owner.
19
b.
c.
The Mechanical Subcontractor under this Contract shall coordinate with the owner’s separate Test and Balance Consultant to verify that all items such as: the thermometer wells, pressure test cocks, access doors, etc., are furnished
and installed as required to allow tests and adjustments to be performed by the separate Test and Balance Consultant.
The Mechanical Subcontractor shall coordinate with the Owner's separate Testing and Balance Consultant as required
to ensure that the testing and balancing of the mechanical system will be completed prior to the listed date of substantial completion.
E.
WORK SEQUENCE
1. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect.
2. Contractor to coordinate delivery of Carpet with Owner. Notify Owner when Carpet must be delivered in order to maintain
construction schedule. Owner to receive notice a minimum of 12 weeks prior to required delivery date.
3. The special systems that require Contractor installation/wiring and Owner installation of equipment are to be completed
three (3) weeks prior to the Substantial Completion Date. Contractor is responsible for correcting any defects found by testing of complete system.
4. The Work shall commence with the Notice to Proceed and shall be Substantially Complete per the Contract Documents.
5. Work sequence if the project has phased completion dates. An example might be as follows:
a. PHASE 1: Early completion site elements: This first phase shall include, but not be limited to the following construction
activities that shall be completed on or before (date).
b. Installation of water meter, supply lines and backflow preventer for irrigation system, irrigation lines serving the fields,
irrigation controller, field building and temporary power to irrigation controller in the field building.
c. Running track with drainage system, asphalt pads, runways, tennis courts, chain link fencing, backstops, and other athletic field amenities indicated on the drawings.
d. Soil preparation, fine grading, seeding of playfields, native grass seeding of disturbed areas, and other landscaping as
included on the drawings.
e. This completed work will be turned over to the School District for their maintenance and this early completion area will
not be used for athletic or P.E. activities until (date).
f. PHASE 2: All Remaining Sitework and Buildings: All remaining sitework including the balance of landscape work shall
be completed on or before (date). The Building shall also be completed on or before (date).
F.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
1. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work.
2. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before
Owner occupancy.
3. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.
4. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.
5. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building
G. PRE-ORDER PRODUCTS
1. Pre-ordered products and/or shop drawings – an example might be as follows:
a. In order to conserve construction time, the Owner has pre-ordered and paid for shop drawings for steel joists and steel
deck from an independent shop drawing service. These shop drawings will be completed and reviewed by the Structural Engineer prior to date of Notice of Award.
b. Following Notice of Award, shop drawings for steel joists and steel deck will be turned over to the General Contractor
for use by his subconsultants.
H. ACCESS TO SITE
1. Access to Remodel vs. New Construction will be different and should be reviewed in advance with St. Vrain Valley School
District.
2. Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
3. Contractor's use of the Owner's site/premises including a definition of the limits where the contractor will be working, the related staging areas, and restrictions regarding construction access to the site. An example might be as follows:
a. Limitations: Operations of the General Contractor shall be limited to areas where work is indicated on the drawings.
20
b.
c.
All construction traffic access to building site shall be limited to Street X only. No construction traffic is permitted on
Street Y. Parking of construction vehicles shall be on site only.
The asphaltic base course for access drive and parking lot on the south side of the building shall be completed as soon
as possible to permit their use as staging areas for building construction and to provide the access required by the Fire
Department. Prior to completion of the project and as directed by the Architect, the Asphalt Paving Subcontractor shall
return to the site at which time he shall clean the base course, apply a tack coat and complete installation of the asphaltic concrete surface course.
I.
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS:
1. Allow for continued occupancy of, access to, and egress from non-construction areas in compliance with applicable codes.
2. The construction work, including disruptive noise, shall not interfere with school testing.
3. The construction work shall not interfere with before or after hour school functions.
J.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
1. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 2004 Version-Division Format
and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
K.
TYPE OF CONTRACT
1. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents (choose one).
a) Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
b) Project will be constructed under multiple contracts.
L.
INFORMATION AVAILABLE BUT NOT PART OF CONTRACT
1. Geotechnical Report
2. Report of Mine Subsidence Evaluation (if applicable)
DIVISION 01 21 10
ALLOWANCES
A. SUMMARY:
1. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing lump-sum allowances.
2. Typical unit price items may include, but not be limited to:
a. Graphics or logosl
3. Restrictions/Critical Criteria: All allowances shall include labor, materials, equipment, services, delivery to the project, overhead, profit, insurance and other incidental expenses to complete the work specified. Work covered by allowances shall be
performed in accordance with requirements of the applicable sections of the Specifications.
DIVISION 01 22 10
UNIT PRICES
A. SUMMARY:
1. Section includes listing of items and related sections for which unit prices will be taken. Typical unit price items may include,
but not be limited to:
b. Drilled Piers
c. Landscape Materials
d. Earthwork Structural Fill
2. Restrictions/Critical Criteria: All unit prices shall include labor, materials, equipment, services, delivery to the project, overhead, profit, insurance and other incidental expenses to complete the work specified. Work covered by unit prices shall be
performed in accordance with requirements of the applicable sections of the Specifications.
DIVISION 01 23 00
ALTERNATIVES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes a listing of items and related sections for which alternate prices will be taken.
2. Definitions/Restrictions/Critical Criteria:
a. Definitions and Explanations: "Alternates" are defined as alternate products, materials, equipment, systems, methods,
units of work, or major elements of the construction, which may, at the Owner's option be selected for the work in lieu
of the corresponding requirements of the Contract Documents. Selection may occur prior to the Contract Date, or may
21
b.
be deferred for possible selection at a subsequent date. Alternates may or may not change the scope and general
character of the work substantially.
Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and distribute to each entity
or person to be involved in the performance of the Work, a notification of the status of each alternate scheduled and including those subsequently added by notification during bidding. Indicate which alternates have been: 1) accepted,
2)rejected, and 3) deferred for consideration at a later date as indicated. Include full description of negotiated modifications to alternates, if any.
DIVISION 01 25 00
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes administrative procedural requirements for submitting Substitutions
a. Procedure is for during the bid period.
b. Separate procedure / requirements for Requests for Substitutions after the project has been awarded.
DIVISION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes administrative procedural requirements for modifying the Contract during construction
a. Authorized personnel
b. Documentation
c. Preliminary Procedures (RFI)
a. RFI response period is 12 days
d. Proposal Request
a. Issued by Owner through Architect
e. Change Order Request
a. Issued by Contractor
f. Lump sum and Time and Material Changes will be issued on a per-case basis.
3. Approval of Changes
a. Construction Change Directives will be issued for all PR’s and COR’s giving Notice To Proceed and will be finalized
with the issuance of a Change Order.
b. Change Orders cannot be included in the Application for Payment until approved by the authorized St. Vrain Valley
School District representative.
4. Correlation
a. Revise the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms.
b. Revise Cash Flow Plan and CPM schedules to reflect any approved change in Contract Time and resubmit.
5. Overhead and profit fees applicable for Changes in the Work.
a. Verify with St. Vrain Valley School District personnel current allowed mark-ups for subcontractors, general contractors.
DIVISION 01 29 00
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes:
a. Format – AIA document G702
b. Preparation – Reference St. Vrain Valley School District Project Number and Purchase Order Number.
c. Change Orders – listing of each required with individual items (CCD) itemized
d. Retainage – 10% up to 50% of work. Then 5% upon written request.
e. Submittal Procedures
1. (4) copies required
2. Updated CPM schedule and one planned progress curve – disk and hard copy
3. (1) set of photographs showing construction progress
4. Recycling summary
5. Schedule narrative
6. Updated Cash Flow Progress Curve
f. Substantiating data – stored materials
g. Quality assurance.
22
DIVISION 01 29 20
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. SUMMARY
a. Format – AIA documents G703 arranged by CSI Division Section
1. Coordinate with Contractor’s Construction Schedule
b. Detail.
1. Accepted by Owner and Architect prior to acceptance of the 1st Application for Payment
2. Separated by phases and/or areas of the work and by CSI Division and Section
3. Include line item for the completed CPM baseline project schedule, O&M Manuals, and Record Documents.
4. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items
a. Separate line items for Materials and Labor
c. Updating
d. Submittal Procedures
1. (2) copies submitted to the Architect and Owner at the Pre-construction Conference.
2. Revise and resubmit within ten days after the review.
3. Review and approval correlates with the status of the CPM Baseline Schedule
DIVISION 01 30 00
COORDINATION
A.
SUMMARY Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
Coordination of Work
2.
Coordination of Submittals
3.
Coordination drawings.
4.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
5.
Project Web site.
6.
Project meetings.
7.
General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with Owner's Commissioning Authority if
applicable
B.
COMPLETE SYSTEMS
1.
It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all systems, including mechanical and electrical, be complete and functional to provide the intended or specified performance. The Contractor shall provide all incidental items and parts
necessary to achieve this requirement.
2.
Provide correctly sized power, utilities, piping, drains, services and their connections to equipment and systems requiring them, whether or not specific items are listed in the schedule included in this section.
C. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION:
1. Section includes a listing of mechanical and electrical equipment and defines responsibilities of the mechanical (MC),
and electrical (EC), and controls (TC) contractors for furnishing, setting, providing power wiring, and providing control
wiring for this equipment. An example for a typical school would be as follows:
Equipment Motors
FURNISHED
ITEM BY
MC
SET
BY
MC
POWER
WIRING
EC
CONTROL
WIRING
-
Motor Starters &
Overload Heaters
MC
EC
EC
MC
Fused & Unfused
disconnections,
Switches, Thermal
Overload & Heaters
EC
EC
EC
-
Manual Operating & Speed
Switches (Carrying load
Currents)
MC
EC
EC
EC
23
Control Relays
& Transformer
TC
TC
EC
TC
Interface of Mechanical
Systems & Devices with
Fire Alarm System
EC
EC
EC
EC
Thermostats
(Line Voltage)
TC
TC
EC
TC
Temperature
Control Panels
TC
TC
EC
TC
Fire & Smoke
Detectors, including
Relays for Fan Shutdown
& Smoke Damper Closure
EC
EC
EC
EC
Smoke Dampers &
Combination Fire/Smoke
Dampers
MC
MC
EC
EC
Motor & Solenoid
Valves, Damper Motors,
Control Valves, Fan
Interlocking Wiring,
Low Voltage Thermostats
TC
TC
TC
TC
Freezestats, Aquastats
TC Flow Switches
TC
MC
-
TC
Pushbutton Stations
& Pilot Lights
(Manually Operated Switches
not carrying Load Current)
EC
EC
-
TC
Boiler and Water Heater
Controls including F.I.A.
Gas Train
MC
MC
EC
TC
Temporary Heating
Connections
MC
MC
EC
TC
Heat Tape
EC
EC
EC
EC
Variable Frequency Drives
MC
EC
EC
TC
D. RESTRICTIONS/CRITICAL CRITERIA:
1. All motor starters shall be furnished by MC and shall be complete with three O.L. heaters and shall conform to NEC
and NEMA requirements.
2. Control relays and control transformers shall be furnished by TC except where furnishing such items is specifically required by electrical specifications and/or drawings.
3. Pushbutton stations carrying full load current are to be wired by EC.
4. Exhaust Fans: The Electrical Contractor will furnish and install circuits, feeders and disconnect switches, and make all
connections to motors and controls. Where exhaust fans are switched with lights, a two-pole toggle switch will be provided by the EC. Where exhaust fans are controlled by sixty (60) minute timer switches, electrical contractor shall provide and install the switch(es). Where exhaust fans are interlocked with other mechanical equipment, the interlock wiring will be furnished by the TC.
5. If disconnect switches are furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by EC.
24
6.
If float switches, line thermostats, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, or heating element or other similar item, they shall be furnished by TC. They shall be set in place and connected by the EC, except
that where such items are in integral part of the mechanical equipment or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc.; they
shall be set in place under the MC and connected by the EC. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any
motor, they shall be furnished, set in place, and wired by TC.
7. Wiring from alarm contracts to alarm system shall be by EC, all control function wiring by TC.
8. Smoke dampers and combination fire smoke damper actuators shall be 110 Volt.
9. Fire and smoke detectors in ductwork on mechanical equipment are mounted by MC. All others are mounted by EC.
Locations to be determined by EC (Fire Alarm Sub).
10. EC shall coordinate quantity and location of mechanical control panels with mechanical plans and specifications and
with MC. Provide a 120 Volt, 1-pahse dedicated circuit from each control panel on group of control cabinets to the
nearest panelboard of correct voltage characteristics.
11. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor (MC) to transmit to the General Contractor, all changes of
electrical characteristics which result from substitution of equipment. Any and all charges for such changes shall be the
responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
12. MC shall not fabricate ductwork until he has inspected the space in which the ductwork will be installed, coordinated
the location of ductwork with the light fixtures to be installed by EC and assured that all ductwork will fit the space provided. EC shall transmit final approved shop drawings and product data showing sizes, heights, and locations of light
fixtures to the General Contractor and MC to allow the coordination to take place. MC and EC shall coordinate the layout and installation of mechanical and electrical equipment in Mechanical and Electrical Rooms.
DIVISION 01 30 20
PROJECT MEETINGS
A. SUMMARY
1. Section defines the various types of required project meetings.
B.
RESTRICTIONS/CRITERIA:
1. Preconstruction Meetings
a. A meeting will be scheduled by the Architect within ten (10) days following Notice of Award, at which time the Contractor, will submit executed bonds and insurance certificates. Administrative requirements including but not limited to,
subcontractor lists, schedule of values, payment applications, change order procedures, sales tax records and project
closeout will be reviewed in detail.
b. Site Mobilization Conference: A meeting will be scheduled by the Architect at the site immediately prior to Contractor
move-in. Representatives of the Contractor, Geotechnical Engineer, Owner, and Architect will be present. Job site procedures, to include the following items, will be discussed:
x Procedures for maintaining record documents
x Owner's requirements
x Construction facilities and controls
x Temporary utilities
x Security and housekeeping procedures
x Materials testing
x Services of Geotechnical Engineer
x Building layout
x Use of Architect's Consultants
2.
Weekly OAC Progress Meetings
a. Regular weekly OAC meetings lasting approximately one hour shall be scheduled with the District project manager,
the Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent, and Architect will be present. Minutes of progress meetings
shall be kept and distributed by the Architect. The following items will be discussed:
x Review and Approval of Previous Meeting Minutes
x Safety Issues on site
x Commissioning and Testing
x Quality Control – daily reports
x Field Observation Reports – distribute logs
x Notice of Non-compliance – distribute/review log
x Schedule – GC review short term schedule
25
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Submittals – GC review status of submittals
Requests for Information – GC / Architect review status of RFI log
Proposal Requests – Architect review status of issued PR’s
Construction Change Directives – Architect review status of issued CCD’s
Change Orders – Architect review any Change Orders pending
Payment Applications – Review status of pay application
Recycling – Review status of project recycling
LEED Submittal Status – if applicable
Other items as required
Upcoming Meetings / Events
DIVISION 01 32 10
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS
A. SUMMARY
a. Photographs
b. Prints
c. Submittals
2. One complete set of the site prior to any work commencing
3. Site clearing, excavations, foundation work, structural framing, enclosure of building, interior views, substantial completion
as applicable.
B. Camera – Digital with date recognition / stamp on each photograph taken.
C. Prints – color, 4 x 6 minimum size – 2 per page
D. Submittals:
a. Provide (1) disc with all photos taken with Close Out documentation
b. Provide (1) copy of prints in clear plastic protector with each Pay Application
1.
Each photograph to be identified with project name, number, subject, orientation of view, approximate time of
day, date imprinted ON picture by camera, signature of person taking photograph.
2.
Photographs to be taken within 7 days of Pay Application
DIVISION 01 32 50
PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
A SUMMARY OF WORK
1. Section includes administrative procedures for project-required schedules and reports
B. FORMAT
1. RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor will be responsible for planning, scheduling, managing and reporting the progress of the
Work in accordance with all of the specific methods and submittals described in this section. Although Owner and Architect
will be reviewing, commenting and finally approving the “Baseline” schedule format, the Contractor is the construction expert
and is responsible for creating/maintaining/complying with the Project Schedule.
2. CRITICAL PATH METHOD. The Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation shall be used to generate the Project
Schedule. The Contractor shall provide the Project Schedule in the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM).
3. COMPETENT SCHEDULER. The Construction Schedule shall be prepared by a competent scheduler, and used by the
Contractor to plan, prosecute and coordinate the Work in an orderly and expeditious manner. The Schedule will be used by
the Contractor, Owner and the Architect to evaluate progress and status at the various stages of the Project, allocate funds,
determine the impact of any changes to the Contract, and establish the basis for progress payments.
4. SOFTWARE APPLICATION. The CPM schedule shall be developed using either of the following scheduling applications:
x Primavera Project Planner (P3)
x Primavera Project Planner (P3 e/c)
x Primavera Contractor
x Primavera SureTrak
x Microsoft Project
5. OWNER REVIEW. Schedule submittals will be reviewed by the Architect and Owner; such review shall not constitute an
approval or acceptance of the Contractor’s construction means, methods, sequencing or its ability to complete the Work in a
timely manner.
6. CONTRACT DURATION. The Schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. In calculating
activity durations normal inclement weather shall be considered.
26
7.
LEVEL OF DETAIL. The Construction Schedule shall contain all salient features of the Work. In addition to construction
activities, the Baseline Schedule shall include: the preparation, review and approval of each individual submittal, including
those for Owner furnished items; the procurement, delivery and installation of materials and equipment; significant testing,
inspection, and building commissioning activities; coordination of work with separate contractors; schedule or operating
constraints imposed by the Owner: including Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, Final Completion
and any other intermediate or other contractual milestone dates. Activities related to separate buildings and features shall
be separately identifiable by coding or use of sub networks. The selection, coding and number of activities shall be subject
to the Owner and Architect’s review. Also include the following activities at a minimum:
a. Permits
b. Submission and approval of mechanical/electrical coordination drawings
c. Milestone for Completion of Area _____.
d. Milestone for Completion of Area _____.
e. Milestone for Completion of Area _____.
f. 6.Submission and approval of O&M manuals.
g. 7.Submission and approval of as-built/record drawings
h. 8.Submission of testing and balancing of HVAC reports.
i. 9.Systems Testing
j. 10.Commissioning activities – to be completed for Substantial Completion
k. 11.Pre-Final Inspection and Contractor Punchlist
l. 12.Test and Balance
8. DURATIONS. No activity on the Schedule shall have a duration longer that fifteen (15) workdays, except for submittals
and/or fabrications and delivery, without prior approval of the Owner.
9. CONSTRAINTS. The Construction Schedule shall contain NO date constraints to activities except the start and finish activities and as permitted by the District.
10. PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSORS. All activities shall have successors except the final Project Complete activity. All activities shall have predecessors except the Start Project activity. Illogical relationships will not be accepted.
11. ACTIVITY LAG TIMES. Negative lags shall NOT be used at any time.
12. OWNER ACTIVITIES. Include those construction activities requiring coordination with the Owner; it’s consultants and contractors (i.e.: OFOI and OFCI items).
13. PROCUREMENT. Tasks related to the procurement of long lead or fabricated material or equipment shall be included as
separate activities in the Project Schedule.
14. CRITICAL PATH. Illustrate complete sequence of construction by activity, including highlighting the critical path, using a
level of detail the same as, or greater than, the Schedule of Values.
15. ACTIVITY CODES. All activities shall be identified in the Project Schedule by the work area in which the activity occurs, the
CSI code associated with the activity, and the contractor or subcontractor performing the work. All activities shall be identified in the Project Schedule by the phase in which the activity occurs (procurement, submittals, mobilization, close-out).
Coordinate construction activities within all CSI Divisions within each phase or area as shown in the Schedule of Values.
Each activity shall be identified by the appropriate CSI Division Number in order to tie into Contractor’s Application for Payment.
16. PAYMENTS. Include the completed baseline schedule as a line item on the Schedule of Values. No Applications for Payment will be approved until the Baseline Schedule Documents are approved.
17. SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS. Failure to provide the required schedule information at the required times will result in denial of
the relative portion of progress payments until such time that the schedule information is submitted in the correct format at
the sole option of the Owner.
C. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: Submit, in triplicate to the Owner and Architect, the following preliminary documents
defining planned operations:
1. Preliminary schedule that will illustrate, at a minimum, a schedule for those activities commencing within the first thirty (30)
calendar days after the Notice of Award is issued by the Owner.
2. Time Scale Logic Diagram acceptable. A Milestone Table may accompany the Diagram to further convey the important
immediate milestone dates.
3. Cash Flow Progress Curve
4. Submit three (3) hard copies of each document and one (1) electronic copy of each readable in the software application in
which they were developed.
D. SCHEDULE REVIEW MEETING:
1. Within ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Pre-construction Conference, the Contractor, including its primary superintendent, will participate in a Schedule review meeting with the Owner and Architect. As part of the review meeting, the
Contractor will be prepared to explain its approach to the scheduling, sequencing of the work, site utilization plan and its
cash flow forecast.
27
E.
F.
BASELINE SCHEDULE DOCUMENTS
1. The complete Baseline Schedule Documents consist of a Project Network Diagram, a Bar Chart, a Cash Flow Progress
Curve, a tabular Predessesor/Succesor Report, a Total Float Report and a Milestone Table. The Baseline Documents shall
integrate the activities of the preliminary schedules, and include all activities required for contract completion. Requirements
for each document are set forth herein.
2. PROJECT NETWORK DIAGRAM (Precedence diagramming method)
a. Show the sequence of activities, their activity ID numbers and descriptions, original duration, early start and early finish
dates, total float, and logic relationships. The Critical Path shall be clearly indicated. Provide a legend for symbols and
abbreviations used. The activities shall be sorted in order by building/area (if applicable), early start date, and total
float. Each submittal shall be submitted in hard-copy format, sized at 30” x 42”.
b. Dependencies between activities shall be indicated so that it may be established as to the effect the progress of any
one activity would have on the Schedule. Dependencies shall not make use of negative lags.
c. Contractor’s original Project Network Diagram submittal shall become the Baseline schedule once it is found acceptable by the Owner. The approved Baseline Schedule shall be utilized as the “Current” schedule. A Project Network Diagram will not be required again once the baseline schedule documents are approved. The Baseline schedule will be
saved as such and future updates will be made to a copy of the approved baseline schedule.
3. BAR CHART/GANTT (with links between interrelated activities, Time Scale Logic information shown)
a. Submitted monthly until Final Completion with the payment application.
b. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
c. For Construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage
in 10 percent increments within time bar.
4. CASH FLOW PROGRESS CURVE
a. The Baseline Cash Flow Progress Curve will show the cumulative, expected cash flow from the beginning of the project through the end, incremented on a monthly basis. The baseline curve will be predicated on the cash flow as dictated by the baseline construction schedule.
b. The Cash Flow Curve shall be the Contactor’s best estimate of monthly billings.
c. Contractor’s planned progress curve shall be produced using an acceptable spreadsheet software application.
d. A cumulative curve of actual expenditures will be shown plotted against that of the budget curve. The updated curve
will be submitted with each pay application, and will reflect a cumulative total of actual costs, as provided by each pay
application.
e. The baseline cumulative curve will include a graphical representation of the curve as well as an organized set of the
relevant data.
f. Cash Flow Progress Curve to be updated and submitted monthly to incorporate actual expenditures to date with the
Application for Payment (graphical only).
g. Curve may be produced in Excel with tabular and graphical data submitted.
5. PREDECESSOR / SUCCESSOR REPORT
a. Document should be formatted with the following Columns: Activity ID, Activity Description, Original Duration, Early
Start and Finish Dates
b. A predecessor / successor report will not be required again once the baseline schedule documents are approved unless specifically requested to further review updated schedule information during construction.
6. TOTAL FLOAT REPORT: A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total float. Activities which have the
same amount of total float shall be listed in ascending order of Early Start Dates.
7. MILESTONE TABLE: A brief report from the complete Baseline Schedule hi-liting the specific milestone dates for contract
completion. A Milestone Table will not be required again once the baseline schedule documents are approved unless specifically requested to further review updated schedule information during construction.
SUBMITTALS
1. Within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of the schedule review meeting, based on comments provided by the Owner
and Architect, as well as agreed to changes by all parties, the Contractor will revise and submit the Baseline Schedule Documents
2. Within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of the complete Baseline Schedule Documents, the Owner and Architect will
communicate in writing its comments and concerns to the Contractor.
3. Within ten (10) calendar days, the contractor shall adjust the Schedule and Progress curve to incorporate the Owner’s and
Architect’s comments and return them to the Owner and Architect.
4. Upon Owner and Architect receipt and acknowledgment of revisions to the “Baseline” schedule and progress curve, they
shall become part of the Contract Documents. Payment to the Contractor shall be withheld until such schedule, satisfactory
in form and substance to the Owner and Architect, has been received.
28
G. UPDATING SCHEDULE DOCUMENTS
1. Updated schedules shall accompany the monthly Application for Payment, reflecting progress since previous month’s submittal.
2. Submit two (2) updated Cash Flow Progress Curves.
3. Submit three (3) 8.5 x 11 OR 8.5 x 14 OR 11 x 17 inch Bar Chart schedules
4. Submit two electronic copies of the updated schedule, in the software application from which the schedule was developed.
5. The schedule update shall show the status of all activities, including those in progress, completed, or not started, indicated
by start and finish dates, whether forecasted or actual, completion percentages based on time, original and remaining durations, and any changes in network logic or activity durations, and any other relevant information.
6. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, changes associated with approved Change Orders, and any other identifiable changes.
7. With each update, the Contractor shall submit a brief narrative report, including descriptions of schedule revisions such as
changes in network logic, planned activity start dates, durations, or in the critical path. The report will include a description
of the amount of progress during the last month, a description of any problem areas, current or anticipated delays and their
estimated schedule impacts. In the narrative report, the Contractor shall provide explanation for any slippage in contractual
completion or other milestone dates. Provide an explanation for all negative float activities and actions taken to mitigate
negative float and delays to the Project. The Contractor shall propose remedial measures necessary to recover any lost
time, whether actual or forecasted. Contractor shall take such additional steps as are necessary in order to effectively eliminate or minimize such delays and to comply with the Contract Schedule.
8. The Contractor Applications for Payment for each pay period shall be based upon physical percentages of completion for
each scheduled activity as agreed between the Owner, Architect, and Contractor.
9. The Contractor shall utilize and conform to its most recent schedule.
H. SCHEDULE REVISIONS
1. Updating the schedule to reflect actual progress made up to the data date of a schedule update shall not be considered revisions to the Baseline schedule. If, as a result of a schedule update, it appears the baseline schedule no longer represents
the actual prosecution and progress of the work, the Architect or Owner may request a proposed completion schedule from
the Contractor. The revision shall address the Contractor’s current construction plan for completing the work without impacting contract time and cost. Approved revisions to the schedule shall be incorporated into the Baseline schedule at the
next schedule update submission.
2. The Contractor may also request revisions to the Baseline schedule in the event the Contractor’s planning of the work is revised. If the Contractor desires to make changes in the Baseline schedule to reflect revisions in its method of operating and
scheduling of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and Owner in writing, stating the reason for the proposed revisions. The revision shall address the Contractor’s current construction plan for completing the work without impacting
contract time and cost. Approved revisions to the schedule shall be incorporated into the Baseline schedule at the next
schedule update submission.
I. TIME EXTENSIONS
1. Extensions of time to the Contract may be granted only for delays to activities on the critical path that actually delay the Project completion beyond the date of Substantial Completion or contract milestone date.
2. For any period in which a change in Contract Time is anticipated or proposed by the Contractor whether for a change order,
proposal request, change order request, construction change directive, or a delay, with impact to contract specified Milestones and/or Substantial Completion, a Time Impact Analysis (TIA) is to be submitted to the Architect and Owner. Each
Evaluation shall include a detailed bar chart schedule demonstrating where the Contractor proposes to incorporate the
change or delay in the current schedule. The detailed bar chart schedule shall show the current activities affected by the
change or delay and the proposed activity logic relationships due to the change or delay. The TIA shall demonstrate the
time impact based on the date the modification is given to the Contractor or the date the delay occurred; the status of construction at that point in time; and the event time computation of all affected activities. The event times used in the TIA shall
be those included in the latest schedule update or as adjusted by mutual agreement. A narrative shall be provided containing the rationale used in developing the evaluation, plus a description of the Contractor’s efforts to reschedule work in order
to mitigate the impact of the changes to the schedule. The preparation of the TIA is considered part of the construction process and will be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. A contract change shall only be authorized when a TIA indicates impact to a Contractual/Milestone date or the Substantial
Completion date. The Baseline schedule shall be revised only upon Contractor’s receipt of an approved Change Order to
the Contract. The revision shall then be incorporated into the next schedule update submission.
4. Following the receipt of an executed Change Order, the activity data and logic relationships in the TIA shall be incorporated
into the current detailed CPM schedule during the next scheduled progress update. Change Order activities shall be identified in the same format and level of detail as contained in the Baseline schedule, and coded in a manner that they can be
identified to the specific Change Order.
29
5.
J.
K.
Weather Delays: If abnormal weather conditions are the basis for a request for an extension of the Contract Time, such request shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were unusually severe for the period of time, and
could not have been reasonable anticipated. To establish the existence of abnormal weather, the Contractor must submit
documentation which establishes that the weather conditions experienced fall outside of the extreme ranges of weather data
published by the National Climatic Data Center for the Longmont Metropolitan Area for the ten (10) year period immediately
preceding the date of the Contract. Regardless of actual weather conditions, any Day in which the Contactor is able to work
eighty percent (80%) or more of its scheduled work force shall not be counted as an abnormal weather Day for purposes of
calculating weather related time extensions.
THREE WEEK LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULE
1.. The Contractor shall provide a three week detailed short-interval schedule for each building or area of the Work, at regularly
scheduled progress meetings. The format shall be satisfactory to the Owner and Architect. Short interval schedules shall
be based upon the most current approved/updated project schedule, and will indicate the actual progress achieved the previous week as well as the detailed activities scheduled for the next two weeks and will show anticipated durations, start and
completion dates for activities.
REPORTS
1. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at
Project site:
a. List of subcontractors at site
b. List of separate contractors at site and approximate count of total personnel at site
c. Equipment, material deliveries
d. High and low temperatures and general weather condition, including presence and amount of rain or snow. Wind and
other factors that may be affecting work should also be documented.
e. Accidents on site
f. Any meetings with OR directives from authorities having jurisdiction
g. CCD, Change Order work summary
h. Equipment or system tests and startups
2. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents,
prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing
conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
3. Recorded Logs: Updated daily logs are mandatory for the following administrative activities. Contractor responsible for
logs:
a. Permits and approvals
b. Quality control: testing and inspection
c. Requests For Information and responses
d. Architect’s Supplemental Instructions/Field Orders
e. Change Orders
f. Proposal Requests
g. Submittals
h. Construction Change Directives
DIVISION 01 33 00
SUBMITTALS
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes submittal requirements/process for general information submittals and for shop drawings, product data and
samples.
B. SUBMITTALS REQUIRED:
1. Administrative submittals relating to provisions of the contract documents:
a. Submittal schedule
b. Expanded Construction Progress Schedules
c. Construction Progress Schedule
d. Schedule of Values
e. Shop Drawings Submittal Schedule
f. Manufacturer’s Instructions
g. Hazardous Materials
h. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
i. Mock up Schedule
30
C. RESTRICTIONS/CRITICAL CRITERIA:
1. General: In conjunction with the first progress schedule, the contractor shall submit to the Architect a shop drawing submittal
schedule outlining dates for submittal of all shop drawings and product data.
a. Submittals shall be made early enough to allow a fifteen (15) day time period from the received date for review by the
Architect. Shop drawing submittals will note verified field-measured dimensions, as-built conditions, or special coordination conditions with other contractors. All on-site measurements shall be made before shop drawings are reviewed
by the Architect.
b. Shop drawings shall not be reproductions of contract documents, they shall be original drawings prepared by the supplier or subcontractor. Drawings information shall be prepared specifically for this project and drawn to accurate scale.
Deviations from the contract documents shall be clearly identified and shall reference applicable construction drawings
or specification sections.
c. Product data for each element of construction or system shall be a single submittal and shall include printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, rough-in data, wiring diagrams and performance
information. Shop drawings and product data submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the contractor for completeness, accuracy, and conformity with the contract documents. Notes and corrections shall be made on all copies of
submittals, signed by the individual reviewing the documents, and stamped with the contractor's date/review stamp.
Every sheet of shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by the contractor.
d. Shop drawings and product data not stamped and signed by the contractor will be rejected and returned by the Architect.
2. Shop drawings: Each submittal or resubmittal shall consist of a minimum of one correctable reproducible translucent and
three prints.
3. Product Data: Each submittal or resubmittal shall consist of a minimum of six copies of brochure material and related samples. Each copy shall clearly show applicable choices and options.
4. Job site documents: Only accepted shop drawings or product data shall be kept at the job site. The Contractor shall keep a
complete set of such documents on file at the job site.
5. Color selection samples: The Contractor will provide a checklist indicating materials where color, texture or finish is subject
to selection by the Architect and as defined in the various specification sections. Certain other samples may also be requested for use by the Architect in preparation of color and material sample presentations for the Owner. With the checklist,
the Contractor shall promptly (30 +/- days after award) assemble and deliver to the Architect two (2) complete collections of
all required samples. Upon receipt of a complete collection of samples the Architect will, with reasonable promptness, make
the selections and prepare and deliver to the Contractor a schedule covering all items subject to selection. The Architect reserves the right not to make individual determination or selections until all samples of materials are furnished to him.
6. Contractor shall maintain and accurately update a submittal log showing the current status of the submittals. The updated
log shall be reviewed with the architect and owner at the project meetings.
DIVISION 01 35 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. SUMMARY
1. Summary: Section includes listing of approval and recommendation agencies - Verify reviewing agency and current codes
(Colorado Division of Oil and Public Safety).
B. REFERENCED STANDARDS/MINIMUM CRITERIA:
x Colorado Division of Labor
x International Building Code, (Current) Edition
x International Fire Code, (Current) Edition
x International Plumbing Code, (Current) Edition
x International Mechanical Code, (Current) Edition
x International Energy Conservation Code
x National Electrical Code (NFPA 70-2008)
x ANSI-A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators
1. Require compliance with all requirements and codes adopted by the Fire Department, Utility Company, and Health Department having jurisdiction. Require compliance with all other requirements of State Division of Oil and Labor, Public Safety
Section, and any other local, state or federal requirements which are applicable, particularly any local or state regulations
regarding dust control, noise abatement, permissible hours of construction, water management and erosion control.
2. In case of a conflict between referenced applicable codes, or other requirements, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. Where governing codes or requirements indicate that the drawings or specifications do not comply
with the minimum requirements of the codes or requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for informing the architect
31
of the condition that may be in violation with the code obtain direction on how to proceed. Drawings and specifications shall
be followed where they are superior to code requirements.
3. Protection of life, health and public welfare as it relates to the execution of the construction contract is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
4. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for compliance, on the job site with all applicable portions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act and compliance with the Equal Employment Opportunity Act.
D. SECURITY PROCEDURES
1. Criminal Record Verification: Contractor will be required to complete Criminal Record Check on all employees who work on
the Project. Employees who are not able to work in the USA legally and/or have been convicted of a felony, including but
not limited to crimes involving physical assault, drug use, and crimes that require registration on the National Sexual Offender Registry will not be allowed to work on the project. The Owner reserves the right to disqualify other employees who
have a felony conviction. Contractor must complete and submit the Owner’s Criminal Records Check Certification form prior to starting work. Each Contractor will be responsible to adhere to any Federal, State or Local privacy and confidentiality
requirements.
DIVISION 01 35 10
CONSTRUCTION RECYCLING
A. SUMMARY: The St. Vrain Valley School District is committed to being a responsible steward of our natural resources. This is a
recycling project. For this reason, the St. Vrain Valley School District is requiring that the Contractor participate in utilizing construction methods that minimize waste generation; and salvage construction and demolition waste material from the construction
site for recycling.
B.
RESTRICTIONS/CRITICAL CRITERIA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General Contractor to require all contractors and sub-contractors to participate in Construction Recycling. General Contractor to commit to and accomplish an overall minimum Project diversion rate of 75%.
A professional Recycling Contractor is to be retained by the General Contractor for the work described herein.
a. This Recycling Contractor is to be experienced in construction waste removal and recycling with at least 3 similar size
projects completed with similar diversion rates achieved.
b. The Recycling Contractor will provide information and meet with contractors, superintendents, subcontractors, Owner
and Architect to discuss acceptable construction waste recycling practices. The plan shall include on-going coordination and removal of recyclable construction and demolition waste from each recycle center created on site and may be
in addition to standard garbage/waste removal activities.
Recycling centers shall be planned by the Recycling Contractor based on site space, square footage, and production
schedule in coordination with and by approval of the General Contractor.
a. Each container at the recycling centers shall be clearly labeled for content in English and Spanish.
b. The Recycling Contractor will routinely inspect the containers for contamination and compaction to maximize haul results and minimize overall costs. Any costs for disposing of or modifying contaminated containers to meet recycling
requirements will be the responsibility of the General Contractor.
c. A variety of containers shall be provided for all recyclable materials and general waste (i.e.: 3yd, 30yd, etc. as needed).
d. General waste shall be kept separate but be included in the reporting of overall garbage removed and material recycled (diversion rate). The General Contractor may prefer to retain separate Contractors for Recycling and General
Waste.
A qualified Recycling Contractor will be aware of the requirements for recycling and the method for calculating a project’s
diversion rate. The Recycling Contractor will track all waste material leaving the project and provide a monthly diversion
rate and summary report. A report showing total trash hauled off site and what was able to be recycled showing the diversion rate clearly will be required in addition to haul tickets certified by the disposal facility. This information shall include any
information on contaminated hauls.
Recycling will be addressed weekly as an agenda item during the progress meetings. Any changes to the recycling centers
including location, containers, and coordination will be discussed.
DIVISION 01 40 00
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. SUMMARY:
1. Section includes the definition and application of referenced standards.
32
B.
RESTRICTIONS/CRITICAL CRITERIA:
1. Where workmanship or products are specified incorporating trade or federal standards or by association, the requirements
of the referenced standard shall apply except where more rigid standards are specified or are required by applicable codes.
2. Where referenced standards are required, a copy of the standard shall be maintained by the contractor at the job site during
the work.
3. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the date on the project manual except when a specific date is specified or
when the standard is part of an applicable code which includes an edition date.
DIVISION 01 45 00
QUALITY CONTROL
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes description of the various tests required to provide appropriate quality control and identifies who pays for
the tests.
B. REFERENCED STANDARDS/MINIMUM CRITERIA:
1. Tests shall be made by an accredited testing laboratory. Except as otherwise provided sampling and testing of materials
and the laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and methods of the
American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). Where additional or specific information concerning testing methods,
sample sizes, etc., is required, requirements are included under the applicable sections of the Specifications.
1. Contractor shall provide equipment and facilities required for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. Contractor shall not use any materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required, have been made
and the materials or equipment are found to be acceptable. Any product deemed unfit for use shall not be incorporated into
the work.
2. All materials or equipment proposed for use may be tested at any time during their preparation or use. Contractor shall furnish the required samples without charge and shall give sufficient notice of the placing of orders to permit the testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at the site of the work.
3. Control tests of concrete work shall be made at the Owner's expense at such times and number as directed by the Owner.
4. Control tests of masonry work including masonry reinforcing shall be made at the Owner’s expense at such times and number as directed by the Owner.
5. Drilled pier and related concrete operations shall be observed by a Geotechnical Engineer selected and paid by the Owner.
6. Control tests of fill and backfill shall be made at the Owner's expense by the Geotechnical Engineer Laboratory. The Geotechnical Engineer will make sufficient tests at the expense of the Owner to assure himself that fill and backfill complies
with material and compaction requirements in the specifications. Control tests of masonry work shall be made at the Owner's expense in accordance with directions issued by the Owner or Architect.
7. Testing of structural welds shall be made at the Owner's expense in accordance with other specific sections of the specifications.
8. Control tests of asphaltic concrete paving and base course shall be made at the Owner's expense by the Geotechnical Engineer Laboratory. The Geotechnical Engineer will make sufficient tests to assure himself that asphaltic concrete paving and
base course complies with material and compaction requirements in the specifications.
9. Other testing:
a. Any other tests required by specific sections of the Contract Documents to be paid for by the contractor.
b. Any additional tests required because of any tests that fail.
10. Proof of Noncompliance: Contractor liable for corrective action which Architect feels is required including complete removal
and replacement of defective material.
11. Material Substitution: Any tests of material or equipment offered as substitute for specified item on which a test may be required in order to prove its compliance with specifications.
12. Records: The contractor shall document and maintain records of all inspections and tests performed whether by the Owner’s separate consultants or as required by specific sections of the specifications.
13. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Either interior (finishes) or exterior as project requires.
14. Surveys: Contractor to conduct and maintain site survey; maintain controls, protect staking throughout project duration.
Surveyor to be certified and licensed to conduct required survey in the State of Colorado. Project Survey (As Built) is required for Project Closeout. Horizontal and vertical control to be established. Survey information shall include, but not be
limited to: Manholes, sewer lines, curb and gutter, light poles, sidewalk edges, all building footprints, certified grade, finish
floor elevations.
15. Underground Utility survey: Contractor shall GPS underground utilities as follows:
a. Survey coordinate system – State Plane
33
b. Water, Gas, Electric, Fiber Optic, Sewer, Storm Water, Irrigation main lines, Fire line, property line, property lines and
benchmark control points..
c. Top of line, finish grade at each starting point of the utility and every 20’ thereafter.
d. All bends, beginning, apex, end.
e. Each manhole, vault box
f. Color coding for all utilities shall follow coding for the Utility Notification System.
g. Final record survey and information to be submitted in electronic and hard copy with Close Out Documents.
DIVISION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES and CONTROLS
A. SUMMARY:
1. Section includes a description of temporary construction facilities and controls required by the contractor to facilitate construction including temporary electricity and lighting, temporary heat/enclosures, temporary water, temporary sanitary facilities, temporary protective facilities, elevators, scaffolding/runways, construction fence, and temporary controls.
B. RESTRICTIONS/CRITICAL CRITERIA:
1. Temporary electricity and lighting shall be provided by the contractor and removed upon completion and operation of permanent electrical service/distribution and permanent lighting. Receptacles shall not be used for construction power.
a. Includes temporary electrical service and meter.120/240 volt, 1 phase, 3 wire.
b. Sufficient circuits and duplex 120v single phase outlets located that any part of the work can be reached with a 75 ft.
extension cord to accommodate normal power tools and supplemental lighting.
c. Temporary light to levels and as required by governing regulations but not less than minimum 5 footcandle illumination
in all areas accessible to workers during hours they are at the job; minimum 10 footcandles for shop areas; 20 footcandles or more where detailed or finishing work is being done, supplemented as may be required.
d. Provide additional exterior and interior lighting as required for warning, public safety, and project security.
e. Contractor shall pay for all electricity used through temporary and permanent systems up to date of substantial completion for new construction. For renovation projects where the existing electrical service will be available, the Owner will
pay for electricity used.
f. Use of permanent systems criteria:
x Contractor responsible for damage to permanent wiring or fixture as a result of temporary use and shall replace
receptacles and device plates showing wear.
x Clean permanently installed light fixtures using methods recommended by manufacturer.
x Remove temporary lamps and replace with new lamps at completion of the work.
2. Temporary heat and enclosures required by Contractor
a. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat necessary for execution of work. Install, maintain and operate temporary
heating apparatus in manner to facilitate work, so work can continue and so finished work will not be damaged. No fuel
type of any kind (gas, propane, etc.) shall be stored inside of building.
b. Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures necessary for holding temporary heat for masonry and concrete work and
for thawing frozen ground.
c. After the building is entirely permanently enclosed and a permanent heating system is installed and capable of being
adequately controlled, the permanent heating system may be used to provide heat for the building subject to approval
of the Owner and Architect. Contractor shall pay for gas and electricity used in connection with the operation up to the
date set in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. For renovation projects where the existing permanent heating system will be used, the owner will pay for the gas/electricity used. In using the permanent heating system, Contractor
shall assume complete responsibility for its proper operation and for correction of any damage which may occur to
permanent heating system. Use of permanent heating system by Contractor shall in no manner compromise the warranty of the system.
d. Warranty of the system will commence at date set in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
3. Temporary Water: Contractor shall provide water required in the work as well as temporary connection, plumbing, piping,
etc., necessary to convey same to places needed. Bulk water for site grading shall be provided by site grading contractor.
4. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: Contractor shall provide and maintain, in a neat and sanitary condition, adequate chemical
toilet facilities for the use of employees engaged in the work. Any graffiti vandalism on sanitary facilities shall be removed
immediately by the Contractor.
5. Temporary Protective Facilities/Scaffolding and Runways: Contractor to provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for protection of public and general protection of workmen on project.
a. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers and active fire hydrants where required. Maintain fire lanes to hydrants and
other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction.
34
b.
Provide temporary walks, scaffolding, platforms, roadways, trench covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger
lights and signals, etc. required for work by applicable safety laws and building codes.
c. Maintain temporary protective facilities in good condition throughout term of work. Remove at completion of work. Repair and replace work damaged by temporary protective facilities.
6. Elevators: Usage of any elevator by the Contractor shall not affect any conditions of warranty or warranty period for elevators as specified.
7. Construction Fence: Contractor shall erect construction fencing as indicated for protection of the public. The fence shall be
6'0" high, constructed of chain link with steel posts at 8'0" on center, maximum. Top of fence fabric shall be knuckled for
safety. Provide gates where required. Gates shall be kept closed and locked after working hours. At completion of exterior
work, fences shall be removed from the site.
8. Field Office and Other Temporary Structures: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the project site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings.
9. Security: Provide security program and facilities to protect work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrance to prevent unauthorized
entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. Verify with owner if a full time security person is required at the
site for times when work is not in progress.
10. Temporary Controls – by Contractor:
a. Noise Control: Minimize noise at all times near residential areas. All equipment shall be properly muffled. Do not operate noise equipment after hours.
b. Dust Control: When construction procedures result in dust which becomes a nuisance to the Owner, private property,
or traffic, control said dust.
c. Water Control: Provide such means as necessary to control flow of water at the work to prevent damage to the Owner's property and adjacent property.
d. Debris Control: Continually police the work to prevent collection and scattering of debris, loose debris, or debris caused
by execution of the work.
e. Pollution control: Take extreme caution to prevent spilling or littering of water polluting substances. Do not pump any
foreign materials into the sanitary or storm sewer collection systems. Provide such labor, equipment, and materials as
necessary to remedy such pollution. No burning of debris, nor any other air polluting methods or equipment, shall be
allowed.
f. Erosion Control: Provide such facilities as might be necessary to prevent erosive damage to the Owner's property or to
adjacent properties.
DIVISION 01 66 00
NON-UTILIZATION OF ASBESTOS MATERIAL
A. SUMMARY: No asbestos or asbestos containing products shall be used in this construction or in any tools, devise, clothing or
equipment used to affect this construction. Specific exceptions to this exclusion are as follows: vehicles with asbestos containing
material (ACM) brake linings; elevator brake linings; laboratory muffle furnace with interior ACM insulation.
1. Asbestos and/or asbestos-containing products shall be defined as all items containing chrysotile, crocidolite, amosite, anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite.
2. Any or all material containing greater than one tenth of one percent (0.1%) asbestos shall be defined as ACM.
3. Any disputes involving the question of whether or not material contains asbestos shall be settled by electron microscopy;
the costs of any such tests which confirm the presence of ACM shall be paid by the Contractor; if no ACM is found, the cost
of such tests shall be borne by the Owner.
B. REMEDIATION: All work or materials found to contain asbestos or work or material installed with asbestos-containing equipment will be immediately rejected upon discovery and this Work will be remediated at no additional cost to the Owner. Such cost
for remediation shall include, but is not limited to, cost of; the asbestos contractor, insurance, asbestos consultant, analytical and
laboratory fees, and any other additional cost as may be incurred by Owner.
C. CERTIFICATION: The Contractor shall certify, on the Certification of Nonuse of Asbestos Form – Attachment C, that to the best
of his knowledge no ACM was used as a building material in the construction of the Project. Attachment C is to be submitted in a
separate folder with the closeout documents. Attachment C follows this section.
DIVISION 01 70 20
FIELD ENGINEERING
A. SUMMARY:
1. Section includes Field Engineering Services
35
B.
REFERENCED STANDARDS/MINIMUM CRITERIA:
1. Professional engineer or land surveyor performing field engineering services shall be registered in the State of Colorado.
Professional engineer or land surveyor may be employee of the contractor.
C. SUBMITTALS REQUIRED:
1. Surveyor/Engineer: Contractor to submit name and address of surveyor or professional engineer to be employed by Contractor for review by Owner and Architect before beginning work at the site.
2. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or engineer employed by contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate log of all
control and survey work as it progresses. On request of the Architect, submit documentation of field engineering work.
3. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of the work, contractor shall submit to Architect a certificate signed by surveyor or
engineer employed by Contractor certifying that elevations and locations are in conformance or non-conformance with Contract Documents.
1. Engineer or land surveyor employed by contractor shall be responsible for location of building and major site elements, location of drilled piers, centerline and offset staking for utility lines, installation of control stakes for site grading as required and
final certification that finish grading has been completed within the tolerances specified.
2. Permanent Bench Marks: Engineer or Surveyor employed by Contractor shall establish a minimum of two permanent bench
marks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points.
3. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Contractor shall carefully preserve all monuments, bench marks, property markers,
reference points, and stakes. Permanent monuments or bench marks which must be removed or disturbed shall be protected until properly referenced for relocation.
DIVISION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. SUMMARY: Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for final acceptance.
B SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
1. Courtesy Inspection: When Contractor considers Work or designated portion of Work is nearly or substantially complete, he
shall submit written notice and request a courtesy inspection by the Architect. If the courtesy inspection indicates Contractor is ready for Substantial Completion Inspection, it will be scheduled at this time. Contractor to provide 10 days notice.
2. Contractor is to conduct Punch List inspection prior to Substantial Inspection. Contractor is to submit the punch list with the
request for Substantial Completion Inspection. Punch List by Contractor should show all items found, noting which remain
deficient, indicating the minimal items that might remain.
3. Contractor is to have completed functional performance testing with the commissioning authority. Deficiencies and issues
that are identified through the commissioning process are to be substantially resolved prior to substantial completion. The
commissioning authority and the owner and design team will make the judgment on whether or not this has occurred at the
time of submission for substantial completion
4. Substantial Completion Inspection: Upon written notice, and submission of Contractor’s deficiency list, the Architect will inspect the project with the Contractor. Additional deficiencies will be noted and a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected shall be prepared by the Architect.
a.
During the inspection, should the list become too extensive in the judgment of the Architect to constitute Substantial Completion, the inspection may be terminated and the Contractor notified in writing. Reinspection will not take
place until the majority of deficiencies are corrected. Contractor would have to formally request the reinspection.
b.
Reinspection Fee: Should the Contractor fail to complete and correct punch list items such that numerous additional inspections are required by the Architect, the Contractor will be billed at $95 per hour for the Architect’s
and/or his consultants time or additional services. The Architect shall inform the Contractor prior to coordinating
inspections that will be charged in this manner. If the Contractor has any questions with regard to any items on
the punch list, he shall request clarification before final inspection. The Architect is to conduct a Substantial Completion Inspection and a Final Inspection for each area as agreed upon during the Project.
c.
Should the Architect find the Work is Substantially Complete after reviewing the list, a Certificate of Substantial
Completion shall be prepared in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract Documents
(Refer to section 9.8 of the AIA A201). The list of deficiencies shall be attached to the Certificate of Substantial
Completion. List shall include all inspections i.e. mechanical, electrical, landscaping, structural depending on portion of work being inspected for Substantial Completion.
d.
Should the Architect’s inspection find Work that is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify Contractor in
writing, listing observed deficiencies.
e.
Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of Substantial Completion.
C. FINAL COMPLETION
1. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification:
a. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
36
b.
c.
Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected in full.
d. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully operational.
e. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner’s personnel.
f. Operation of HVAC and lighting control systems have been demonstrated to Commissioning Authority through functional performance testing. Associated deficiencies and open issues are to be closed out and completed prior to receiving final completion.
g. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
h. Contractor to allow 10 days notice for coordination of Final Inspection.
2. Should the Architect find Work incomplete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing listing observed deficiencies.
3. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of final completion.
4. When the Architect finds work is complete, closeout submittals will be considered.
D. REINSPECTION FEES
1. Should status of completion of Work require reinspection by the Architect due to failure of Work to comply with Contractor’s
claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect’s compensation for reinspection services from final
payment to Contractor.
E. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities, governing entities, and governing utility companies:
a. Certificate of Occupancy (permit sign off)
b. Certificate of Inspection required for fire alarm, sprinkler, sound, mechanical and electrical systems (others as applicable).
c. Letter of Acceptance from governing entity for all offsite improvements.
d. Letters of Acceptance from sanitation district, water district, electric company, gas company and telephone company.
e. Completion of Final Inspection Punchlist items.
2 .Project record documents: under provisions of Section 01 78 90.
3 .Operation and Maintenance Data: under provisions of Section 01 78 30.
3. Warranties and Bonds
4. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: under provisions of Section 01 78 40.
5. Keys and keying schedule: under provisions of Section 08 71 20.
6 Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: in accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
7. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
8. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: in accordance with Supplementary Conditions.
9. Contractor’s one year guarantee of materials and workmanship
10. All guarantees, warranties and submittals, as specified
11. Receipts for extra materials delivered to the Owner
12. Miscellaneous keys, switches, etc.
13. Final Application for Payment
14. HVAC Test and Balance Report
15 .Spare Parts
16 Construction Photographs
17. Survey per Section 01 72 20.
18. Non-utilization of asbestos material –Section 01 60 50.
F.
STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
1. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indication.
a Original Contract Sum
b. Previous change orders
c. Changes under unit prices
d. Deductions for uncorrected work
e. Deduction for liquidated damages
f. Deductions for reinspection fees
g. Other adjustments to Contract Sum
h. Total Contract Sum as adjusted
i. Previous payments
j. Sum remaining due
2. The Architect will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by
change orders.
37
G
APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
1. Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents.
2. Final Payment will be made to the Contractor after all listed deficiencies have been corrected, all closeout submittal have
been received/approved, all certification(s) and/or authorizations from the Colorado State Labor Commission and the State
Industrial Insurance System (SIIS) have been received and approved by the Owner.
DIVISION 01 78 20
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. SUMMARY: Section includes format and content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Instruction of Owner’s personnel and
Schedule of submittals.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Provide complete instruction manuals and data prepared by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.
C. FORMAT
1. Provide data in the form of an equipment and system instructional manual
2. Binders: commercial quality, 8.5 x 11 inch, three ring binders with hard back, cleanable plastic covers. Three-inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.
3. Cover: identify each binder with typed or printed information:
a. Title: “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”.
b. Project name, number
c. Contents of each binder
4. Arrange contents by system under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual.
a. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system with typed description of product and major component
parts of equipment.
b. Text: all printed. Manufacturer’s printed data and contractor provided documentation.
c. Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to the size of text pages.
D. CONTENT, EACH VOLUME
1. Table of Contents: provide title of Project, names, addresses and telephone numbers of Architect, sub consultants, and
Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
2. Warranty matrix: Summary spreadsheet listing every item under warranty indicating: length of warranty, start/end dates,
contact (name, address, contact, phone/fax numbers), and the corresponding tab under which item can be found. Tab to
correlate to CSI divisions in Project Manual.
3. For each product or system: list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local
source of supplies and replacement parts and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
4 .Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems to show control
and flow diagrams. Do not use project record documents as maintenance drawings.
5. Type text: as required to supplement product data.
6. Warranties and bonds: under corresponding equipment tab.
7. Materials matrix: Summary of all materials used including color and texture, as listed by CSI divisions in Project Manual.
8. Additional requirements: as specified in individual product specification sections.
E.
MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
1. Each item of equipment and each system: include description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function,
normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data and tests and
complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Panelboard circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications.
3. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed.
4. Operating procedures: include manufacturer’s start up, break in and routine normal operating instruction and sequences.
Include regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter and any special operating instruction.
5. Maintenance requirements: include manufacturer’s routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting, disassembly, repair
and reassembly instructions. Alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions to be included.
6. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required.
7. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
38
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
F.
Provide original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
Provide Contractor’s coordination drawings with color-coded piping diagrams as installed.
Provide list of original manufacturer’s spare parts, current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
Additional requirements as specified in individual product specification sections.
SUBMITTALS
1.Submit to the Architect adequate original manuals to allow the Owner to keep two (2) complete/approved manuals containing
all equipment and system manufacturer’s product data. Manual contents and organization shall be as required herein.
a. Architect to inspect for compliance in format and content prior to submittal to Owner.
2. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten (10) days after acceptance. Additional copies of any such documents shall also be provided in final manual.
3. Two (2) each: Warranty manual to include, but not be limited to:
a. Warranty matrix
b. All warranties for the project – tabbed by either system as listed herein or warranty number correlating to the warranty
matrix.
DIVISION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. SUMMARY: Section includes administrative procedure for maintenance and submittal of Record Documents
1. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site one record copy of:
a. Contract Drawings
b. Specifications
c. Addenda
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract
e. Reviewed shop drawings product data, and samples
f. Inspection certificates
g. Manufacturer’s certificates
2. Store record documents and sample in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks and secure storage for record documents and samples.
3. Label and file record documents and samples in accordance with section number listings in Table of Contents of the Project
Manual. Label each document “PROJECT RECORD” in neat, large, printed letters.
4. Maintain record documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
5. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Architect.
B.
RECORDING
1. Contract drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:
a. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.
b. Field changes of dimension and detail.
c. Changes made by modifications
d. Details not on original contract drawings.
e. References to related shop drawings and modifications.
f. Daily record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings and in a copy of a Project Manual, provided by Owner.
g. Any GPS info as is conducted on site.
2. Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:
a. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
b. Changes made by addenda and modifications.
c. Daily record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project Manual, provided by Owner.
d. The information in this document to be copied to a 3-ring bound Project Manual and submitted as the Project Record
Specification at Final Completion.
e. Architect to make changes to electronic Record Specification as is done with Drawings.
3. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information.
4. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
5. Other documents: maintain manufacturer’s certifications, inspection certifications required by individual specifications sections.
39
C. SUBMITTALS
1. At Contract closeout, deliver record documents and samples under provisions of Section
01 78 90 to the Architect.
2. Record documents required, include but are not limited to the following list:
a. Record drawings
b. Record specifications
c. Record survey (including Record GPS survey)
d. Contractor’s certified punch list.
3.
4.
5.
Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor’s name, address, and telephone number
d. Number and title of each record document
e. Signature of Contactor or authorized representative
Contractor is to sign each sheet of the record drawings that are turned over to the Architect. Subcontractors are to sign their
respective sheets of the Work.
Final payment to the Contractor is contingent on the satisfactory completion of items A-D above and confirmation from the Architect that all of the project information needed to complete a Record Set of Documents has been provided.
DIVISION 01 78 43
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. SUMMARY: Section includes a listing of spare parts, delivery and storage procedures
B
PRODUCTS REQUIRED
1. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to
be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of Work.
2. Products: identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original purchase from supplier to avoid variations in
manufacturer.
3. Summary reference schedule to supplement individual Sections is included in this Section.
C. STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE
1. Store products with products to be installed in the Work, under provisions of Section
01 60 00.
2. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining conditions required for storage and
not required for Contract Work or storage, spare products may be stored in available space.
3. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner. No opened or partially
used cans of paint will be accepted.
D. DELIVERY
1. Coordinate with Architect/Owner:
a. Provide Architect with list of all items (see paragraph 1.06 of this Section) required per the specifications, for review and approval, listing:
1. Section
2. Paragraph
3. Item
4. Requirement (quantity, color, etc.)
2. Upon approval, Contractor will deliver and unload spare products at Project Site and coordinate inspection by the Architect.
3. Architect will confirm all required items are provided in acceptable condition and accept the materials in writing. Contractor to obtain receipt prior to final payment.
2. All items to be stored on site by Contractor until turn over at Substantial Completion. No partial submittals during the construction of the project will be accepted.
E
SCHEDULE OF SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
1. Design Team to provide tabulated summary of material from body of specifications. Separate the summary of materials by:
Architectural, Mechanical/Plumbing, Electrical. Use the Districts standard format as follows:
40
ARCHITECTURAL (SAMPLE ONLY)
Section
071920
Paragraph
1.7
Item
Requirement
Graffiti-resistant coating and graffiti removal compound
An additional 5 percent, but not
less than 1 gal. each.
Architect’s acceptance
(date)
DIVISION 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. SUMMARY: Section includes procedures for demonstration of equipment operation and instruction of Owner’s personnel.
1. All systems and equipment supplied and installed by the Contractor or their subcontractors will require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner’s personnel, and provide written report that demonstrations and instruction have been completed.
2. Owner/Architect will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and will assist in coordinating their attendance at
agreed-upon times.
3. Submit preliminary schedule for Architect and Owner’s approval, listing times and dates for demonstration of each item of
equipment and each system, two weeks prior to proposed dates.
4. Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstrations, that demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily complete. Give time and date of each demonstration, and hours devoted to demonstration, with a list of persons
present.
5. Verify equipment has been inspected and put into operation in accordance with Section 01650 – Testing, Adjusting and balancing has been performed in accordance with Section 01660, and equipment and systems are fully operational.
6. Commissioning must be Substantially complete prior to demonstration and training.
7. A set of approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be available for use in demonstrations and instructions, in a
form as approved by Architect and Owner, appropriate for the level/intensity of training required.
8. Commissioning must be completed prior to demonstration and training.
9. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner’s personnel two weeks prior to date of final
inspection. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instruction for other seasons within nine months.
10. Use Operation and Maintenance manuals and HVAC test and balance reports as basis of instruction. Review contents of
manual and reports with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
11. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item
of equipment at agreed-upon times at equipment location.
12. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when needed for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
13. The cost of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is to be included in the base bid.
DIVISION 01 80 00
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – LEED FOR SCHOOLS (if applicable)
A. SUMMARY: Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC LEED prerequisites and
credits to obtain certification. LEED rating system and certification level shall be established for each individual project after consulting with St. Vrain Valley School District. Current version of USGBC’s LEED For Schools shall be used and individual requirements verified. Current Project Scorecard should be inserted in this section outlining specific credits being sought.
DIVISION 01 90 00
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS (if applicable)
A. SUMMARY: Section includes general requirements and procedures for commissioning. Commissioning is a systematic process
of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs.
Commissioning requirements shall be established by the Design Team and St. Vrain Valley School District at project inception.
41
42
DIVISION 2 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
43
44
DIVISION 02 – DEMOLITION
DIVISION 02 40 10
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. SUMMARY
a. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
b. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
c. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B.
1. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to
that indicated for this project.
2. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA approved certification program.
3. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
5. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
x Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
x Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
x Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment,
and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
x Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
x Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
C. SUBMITTALS REQUIRED:
1. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
a. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure
Owner’s on-site operations are uninterrupted.
b. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
c. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
d. Locations of proposed dust-and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress.
e. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner’s partial occupancy of
completed Work.
f. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
2. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
3. Pre-demolition Photographs/Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damaged caused by selective demolition operations.
1. Owner may occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so
Owner’s operations will not be disrupted.
2. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative
plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective
demolition remain Owner’s property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and
deliver promptly to Owner.
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect hem against
damage during selective demolition operations.
3.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
a. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
b. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition
provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
45
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or
conduit after bypassing.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
a. Clean salvaged items.
b. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
c. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
d. Transport items to Owner’s storage area designed by Owner or as indicated on Drawings.
e. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
a. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
b. equipment to match new equipment.
c. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
d. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
e. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
f. materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.
When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition
and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
Recycle existing materials to the greatest extent possible.
Ownership of salvageable material/equipment to be determined by School District.
a. Owner to maintain salvage rights to all copper, piping, fitting, coils and plumbing fixtures.
Typical owner salvaged items might include:
a. Door hardware
b. Markerboards, tackboards
c. Cabinets, countertops
d. Wall shelving
e. Mechanical units, equipment
f. Electrical panels, breakers
g. Clock/bell/intercom components
h. Fire/security detection and alarm components.
i. Emergency generator
46
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
47
48
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
DIVISION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
1. Fibrous reinforcement preferred for on-grade interior flatwork
2. Specify epoxy-coated rebar for areas expected to receive salt for de-icing (stairs, ramps landings etc).
3. Fibrous reinforcement preferred for on-grade interior flatwork.
4. Specify placement methods and reinforcement coverage’s.
5. Specify epoxy-coated rebar for areas expected to receive salt for de-icing (stairs, ramps, landings, etc.).
DIVISION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. SUMMARY
1. General Design Criteria:
a) In the absence of other information, standards of the following organizations are adopted:
1) American Concrete Institute (ACI)
2) Portland Cement Association (PCA)Colorado Reddy Mixed Concrete Association (CRMCA)
3) Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
4) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2. Specification description of methods and materials shall clearly outline all requirement of the work. ACI and ASTM Standards numbers should be used as reference only to expand or substantiate the basic information shown in the specification.
3. Shop drawing for reinforcement, mix designs, and prestressed units shall be required.
4. Concrete Testing - Testing agency shall be designated, secured, and services paid for by the Owner. Testing will be done
per specified procedures. Architect will consult with Owner if additional testing is needed. Architect will consult with Owner
regarding the number of tests, number of cylinders, etc.
B.
LEED REQUIREMENTS:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4 Recycled Content: Indicate separate percentage, by weight, of pre-consumer and postconsumer recycled content per unit of product.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 5 Regional Materials: Indicate location of material extraction or harvest as well as location of
product manufacture including distance from said locations to the Project site.
C. RECYCLED CONTENT:
1. Concrete shall have a fly ash content of 25% maximum replacing Portland cement. Fly ash content shall be added depending on application (consult with Structural Engineer).
2. Reinforcing steel with a minimum of 90% post consumer recycled content.
3. Use recycled aggregate (type, quality and quantity to be reviewed by structural engineer).
4. Remove and recycle excess material as required by the construction waste management program.
D. CONCRETE MATERIALS
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II - Moderate.
2. Fine and Course Aggregates: ASTM C33.
3. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
E.
CONCRETE MIX
1. Concrete Type: Per geotechnical and structural engineer.
a) Use Class A concrete for all cast-in-place concrete inlets, concrete walks, curb and gutter; manhole bases; and irrigation structures.
b) Use Class B concrete for all unspecified cast-in-place concrete.
2. Specified design mixes shall be submitted to and approved in writing by Architect prior to placement of any concrete. Send
copy to Owner. The Contractor shall furnish evidence satisfactory to the Architect that all materials to be used and proportions selected will conclusively and uniformly produce concrete of the quality specified. Mix designations of approved mix
design shall appear on all truck delivery tickets.
3. Specify, size of aggregate, minimum and maximum strength slump for each class of concrete, air content percentages and
minimum strength at 28 days.
49
F.
ADMIXTURES
1. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
a) Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
b) Chemical: ASTM C494/C494M.
c) Fly Ash: ASTM C618 Class C or F.
2. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
3. Use calcium chloride only when approved by Engineer.
4. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer.
G. ACCESSORIES
1. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin.
2. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745 Class A B C; 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film; type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint tape recommended by manufacturer.
3. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in
28 days.
4. Joint Filler: ASTM D1752; Premolded sponge rubber fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent.
5. Waterstops:
a) Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops (rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic material for
adhesive bonding to concrete).
b) Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent
passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1) Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb or ribbed with center bulb.
2) Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.
H. UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
1. Install vapor barrier in all slab on grade interior applications. Vapor barrier must be contact with underside of slab.
2. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643-98.
4. Unroll Vapor Barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.
5. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.
6. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a) Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap (15 mil) Vapor Barrier (Basis-of-Design).
b) Stego Tape.
c) Stego Mastic.
I.
EXECUTION
1. Structural Engineer inspection and acceptance of formwork and reinforcing is required in advance of concrete pour.
2. 45 degree 1-inch chamfer required at exposed exterior corners.
3. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack
solid with non-shrink grout.
4. Exterior concrete slabs at doors should be doweled to foundation to minimize movement.
5. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler.
6. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
7. Specify design for lateral pressure and loads in accordance with ACI and wind loads as per applicable sections of the controlling
local building code.
8. List form and shoring removal times.
9. Exterior stairs: Cast-in metal nosings prohibited; detail continuous 1" radius concrete nosing.
10. Air entrainment is required for all exterior concrete.
11. Calcium chloride admixtures are prohibited.
J.
CONCRETE FINISHES
1. Colored concrete shall not be employed except with specific approval by the District.
2. Concrete sealer/hardener: Methyl methacrylate reactive resin type.
50
3.
4.
a) May not be able to use if concrete is to be stained. Check if special finish is to be applied pos-pour before using
b) Compatible sealers and curing compounds shall be specified for specific floor finishes (i.e. epoxy, VCT, carpet, etc.)
Slip-Resistive Emery Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing,
moisture, and cleaning materials with 100 percent passing 3/8-inch sieve.
a) Available Products:
1) Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Emery.
2) Dayton Superior Corporation; Emery Non-Slip.
3) Emeri-Crete, Inc.; Emeri-Topcrete.
4) Lambert Corporation; EMAG-20.
5) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Grip It.
6) Metalcrete Industries; Metco Anti-Skid Aggregate.
Diamond Polished Concrete Finish: Based upon prior approval from the District, provide consistent finish in all contiguous
high traffic areas. No type of film forming product will be allowed.
a) Sequence and System - No adjustment to this system will be allowed. All edges will need to be done for every grit and
made to blend in with the rest of the floor.
b) Sequence with course to fine frit using a wet and dry method.
c) Approved machines are Prep Master 44/30 nothing smaller.
1. FF50 Smooth finish concrete can be started with 50 resin wet 3 pass system. Grinding and Polishing Steps All 3
pass or more:
50 Wet
120 Wet
220 Wet
400 Wet
2. Vivid Dye concrete
2 Coats of FGS Hardner to Concrete.
800 Dry
1800 Dry.
3. FGS Hardener Plus, Hardener Densifier
First coat at 250 ft2/gal
Second coat at 350 ft2/gal
d) Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be included, but are not limited to, the following:
1) L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (Basis-of-Design):
2) Hardener, Sealer, Densifier: L & M Construction Chemicals-FGS Hardener Plus.
3) Joint Filler: L & M Construction Chemicals - Joint Tite 750.
4) Concrete Dyes: Vivid Concrete Dyes.
5) Cleaning Solution: L&M Construction Chemicals, FGS Concrete Conditioner
e) Performance Requirements: Provide polished flooring that has been selected, manufactured, and installed to achieve
the following:
1) Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779, Method A, high resistance, no more than 0.008 inch (0.20 mm) wear in 30
minutes.
2) Reflectivity: Increase of 35 percent as determined by standard gloss meter.
3) Waterproof Properties: Rilem Test Method 11.4, 70 percent or greater reduction in absorption.
4) High Traction Rating: NFSI 101-A, non-slip properties.
f) Design Requirements:
1) Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength: 3500 psi
2) Normal Weight Concrete: No lightweight aggregate.
3) Non-air entrained.
g) Placement Properties:
1) Natural concrete slump of 4-1/2 inches to 5 inches.
2) Flatness Requirements: Overall FF 50, Local FF 25.
h) Manufacturers Criteria:
1) Compliance Comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. SPEC_DATA
sheets.
2) A L7M certified FGS/PermaShine installers must be used in order to receive a 10 year warranty.
51
5.
Other Finish Requirements:
a) Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed sand float finish.
b) Steel trowel surfaces which are indicated to be exposed.
c) Exterior Flatwork: Light to medium broom finish
d) Interior slab to receive finish flooring: float finish
e) Exposed, rough texture finish concrete prohibited for interior finish.
f) Unfinished interior concrete walls require sealer.
g) Interior Concrete floor slab: Float
h) Specify and show type, size and location of all control joints and expansion joints.
DIVISION 03 40 00
PRECAST CONCRETE
A. SUMMARY
1. No special requirements.
DIVISION 03 60 00
GROUTING
A. SUMMARY
52
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
53
54
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
DIVISION 04 20 00
UNIT MASONRY
A. STANDARDS
1. In the absence of specific requirements, the standards of the following organizations apply:
a) Brick Institute of America (BIA)
b) American National Standards Institutes (ANSI)
c) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2. Standard/traditional masonry sizes, textures, colors only. Specify exact requirements and tolerances.
3. Delivery time and future availability are critical, often determining, specification criteria.
4. Modular dimensioning is critical for all Division 04 work.
5. Consider use of moisture resistant admixture in concrete unit masonry, in lieu of after-applied sealants.
6. Steel Lintel Design: l /600 maximum permitted deflection.
7. Require prism tests, if size of project warrants, will be paid for by Owner.
8. Architect shall require physical samples of each type of brick and block and sample panels of wall as designed.
B.
CONSTRUCTION SHORING:
1. Specify requirements for construction shoring by Contractor. Wind danger is high in much of the School District.
C.
RECYCLED CONTENT:
1. Replace Portland Cement with 30% fly ash content by weight
2. Use recycled aggregate where possible.
D.
MORTAR:
1. Specify all mortar materials. Use ASTM designation numbers for each.
2. Admixtures and additives prohibited without prior Owner approval.
3. Specify weakest mortar that will meet project requirements.
4. Exception: Due to freeze-thaw considerations, use of type "O" mortar is not allowed.
E.
CLAY MASONRY:
1. Brick: Grade SW per ASTM C216-86.
F.
CONCRETE MASONRY:
1. Face shell thickness = 1-3/8" minimum.
2. Bull nose profile required at exterior corners in the following locations:
3. Split faced, ribbed, and heavy textured units prohibited on exterior and below 8' -0" on interior.
4. Acoustical Units: Standard sized CMU slotted 1 side containing noncombustible sound absorbing material. N RC = 0.65 (minimum).
G. PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATING
1. Refer to Division 07 10 00 for product information.
H.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1. Single kiln run preferred.
2. Encourage contractors to utilize approved suppliers who manufacture their materials within 500 miles of the project site.
I.
EXECUTION
1. Exterior masonry joints are limited to concave round
2. Expansion/Control Joints: Minimum per BIA, NCMA.
3. Grout all HM door frames set in masonry, interior and exterior.
4. Exterior recessed courses discouraged:
5. Define responsibilities for removing efflorescence, especially if due to work in other sections of the specifications.
6. Muriatic acid prohibited.
7. High-pressure spray prohibited.
DIVISION 04 23 00
GLASS MASONRY
A. Glass Unit Masonry: Discouraged.
55
DIVISION 04 24 00
ADOBE MASONRY
A. Adobe Unit Masonry: Discouraged.
DIVISION 04 40 00
STONE ASSEMBLIES
A. SUMMARY
1. Native, local stone.
2. Retrofit: Match existing.
3. Source documentation required.
B.
PRODUCTS
1. Provide stone quarried and fabricated within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
2. Where possible, use salvaged stone. Recommended minimum for project shall total 30%.
56
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
57
58
DIVISION 05 – METALS
DIVISION 05 10 00
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
A. LEED PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:
1. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 4: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed
that retains material integrity.
2. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 5: Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within 500
miles of the Project site whenever possible.
B.
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
1. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
2. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
3. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
4. Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50 (345).
5. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
C. PRIMER
1. Only required at structural steel elements permanently exposed to view.
2. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and
compatible with topcoat.
D. GROUT
1. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and
nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
E.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and highstrength bolted connections.
DIVISION 05 20 00
METAL JOIST
A. Section includes the following:
1. K-series steel joists.
2. KCS-series steel joists.
3. K-series steel joist substitutes.
4. Long-span steel joists.
5. Joist girders.
6. Joist accessories.
B.
PRODUCTS
that retains material integrity. Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within 500 miles of the
Project site whenever possible.
C. MATERIALS
1. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.
2. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
3. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel,
hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
4. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
5. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts;
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
59
D. PRIMERS
1. Primer: VOC compliance certificate signed by manufacturers certifying compliance of their products with regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction over volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
2. Priming Limits: Prime steel surfaces, except surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, galvanized
surfaces.
E. LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS
1. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan
Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end
and top-chord arrangements as indicated.
2. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
F.
JOIST GIRDERS
1. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle
top- and bottom-chord members; with end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.
2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
G. JOIST ACCESSORIES
1. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
2. Shop Painting: Do not shop paint joists to receive fireproofing.
H. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted
connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.
DIVISION 05 30 00
METAL DECKING
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes the following:
a) Roof deck.
b) Acoustical roof deck.
c) Composite floor deck.
d) Noncomposite form deck.
B.
LEED PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 4: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.
2. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 5: Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within
500 miles of the Project site whenever possible.
C. MANUFACTURERS
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated, but are not limited to,
the following:
a) Consolidated Systems, Inc.
b) Epic Metals Corporation.
c) Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division.
d) Verco Manufacturing Co.
2.
Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30.
3.
Acoustical Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and
Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30.
a) Acoustical Perforations: Deck units with manufacturer's standard perforated vertical webs.
b) Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip of glass or mineral fiber. Factory install
sound-absorbing insulation into cells of cellular deck.
60
D. ACCESSORIES
1. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as
deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
2. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as
deck, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the
field.
4. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains,
cut holes in the field.
DIVISION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
A. SUMMARY
a) Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
b) Ceiling joist framing.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.
C. PRODUCTS
D. MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing, but
Allied Studco.
AllSteel Products, Inc.
Innovative Steel Systems.
SCAFCO Corporation.
Steel Construction Systems.
E.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
1. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and
as follows:
a) Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
2. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges,
and as follows:
a) Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward
vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
4. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of
web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral
loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
5. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer
tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
6. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical
displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.
F.
CEILING JOIST FRAMING
1. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with enlarged service holes, with stiffened flanges.
61
DIVISION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
A. SUMMARY
a) Steel ladders
b) Loose steel lintels.
c) Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.
d) Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
e) Tube Steel bollards.
f) Steel pipe and tube handrails and railing systems.
B.
PRODUCTS
1. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 4: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.
2. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 5: Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within
500 miles of the Project site whenever possible.
C. FERROUS METALS
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
3. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural
loads.
D. ALUMINUM
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
2. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061-T6.
E.
F.
PAINT
1.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with
performance requirements in equal to “Carboline-Shop Primer No. 2,” selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems. Primer shall be applied at a minimum film thickness of 2.0 drymils.
STEEL WALL LADDERS
1. Provide wall ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with structural-steel channel or steel plate
stringers, steel pipe handrails, and steel bar grating treads, unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings
for installation.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for steel pipe railings.
3. Galvanize wall ladders, including brackets and fasteners at exterior locations only.
G. TUBE STEEL BOLLARDS
1. Fabricate bollards from Schedule 40 tube steel (minimum 3” x 6”).
2. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.
3. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 4” inches greater
than OD of bollard. After bollards have been inserted into holes, fill annular space surrounding bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up
approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.
4. Coordinate location with door swing (minimum 90 degrees), factoring in the function, and position of hardware
and allowing for the space required for a hard rubber bumper.
5. Cap bollard with ¼” steel.
H.
HANDRAILS AND RAILING SYSTEMS
1. Weld, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985.
62
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing systems are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of
other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
Fabrication: Assemble handrails and railing systems in the shop to greatest extent possible.
a) For railing posts set in concrete, provide present sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions.
b) Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
c) Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
Attachment: Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face
of handrail to finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated at spacing required to support structural loads.
DIVISION 05 70 00
DECORATIVE METAL
A. SUMMARY
63
64
DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
65
66
DIVISION 06- WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
DIVISION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. SUMMARY
a) Wood supports.
b) Wood blocking.
c) Wood nailers.
d) All wood products used on the Project must be non-combustible.
e) Wall sheathing.
f) Parapet sheathing.
g) Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.
h) Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.
B.
1. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.
2. Materials/products shall be FSC Certified whenever possible.
3. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.1 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings and IEQ 4.2 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants.
4. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products.
5. All composite wood and agrifiber products as well as adhesives used in-shops or on-site for laminating must contain no
added urea formaldehyde.
C. WOOD PRODUCTS
1. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
D. FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
1. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal
fasteners. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. Kiln-dry material to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
E.
WALL SHEATHING
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation.
ASTM C 1177/1177M.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
F.
PARAPET SHEATHING
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensDeck Prime" by G-P Gypsum Corporation.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
G. AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
1. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and
450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
5. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company)
Tyvek CommercialWrap
H. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
1. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded
to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
67
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered Flashing.
MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.
Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
Protecto Wrap Company; BT-20 XL.
Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate.
DIVISION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
A. SUMMARY
a) Interior standing and running trim.
b) Plastic-laminate countertops.
c) Solid-surfacing-material sills.
d) Stair handrails.
e) Reclaimed sorghum straw panels.
f) Laminated translucent panels.
g) Sunflower seed board.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Quality Standard: Interior Woodwork shall comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for “custom”
grade of interior architectural woodwork indicated for finishes, installation, and other requirements.
Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
Custom made cabinetry for classroom, science and other uses may be considered if quality and cost are approximately
equal to pre-built cabinets. Verify and coordinate with BVSD.
Fabricate millwork cabinets, shelves, etc., of hardwood-surfaced plywood, or of plastic laminate finish on medium-density fiberboard of sufficient density to prevent screw pullout at below 300 pounds.
2. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 7: Materials/products shall be FSC Certified whenever possible.
3. All adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings used on the inside of the building shall comply with LEED VOC limitations.
5. All composite wood and agrifiber products as well as adhesives used in-shops or on-site for laminating must contain no
added urea formaldehyde.
C. MATERIALS
1. Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade
specified, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with the following:
a) Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
b) Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
c) Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semi-exposed
edges.
D. RENEWABLE PANEL PRODUCTS
1. General - products that are manufactured with rapidly renewable and recycled content, as well as low- or no-added-ureaformaldehyde
2. Sorghum Straw: Minimum 90 percent post-industrial recycled material. No added urea formaldehyde.
a) Material – Sorghum Straw
b) Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers, but are not limited to, Kirei Board.
3. Kirei Bamboo: Minimum 90 percent post-industrial recycled material. No added urea formaldehyde.
a) Material - Fast-growing Moso Bamboo
4. Kirei Wheatboard: Minimum 90 percent post-industrial recycled material. No added urea formaldehyde
a) Material: Wheat Straw
5. Kirei Coco Tiles: 30-40% post-industrial recycled material: Coconut Shells
68
6.
a) Material: Wheat Straw
Sunflower Seed: Sheet material comprised of sunflower seed hulls.
a) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers, but are not limited to, the following:
b) Straw Sticks & Bricks; Dakota Burl
E.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
1. Wood Species and Cut:
a) Red oak or Maple
F.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS or HGP.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Metalic finishes are discouraged
3. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.
4. Core Material: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) with exterior grade glue only.
5. Edge Treatment: No Laminate edge banding. Use ¾” x 2” minimum hardwood edge. Countertop laminate should lap over
hardwood edge with chamfered or similar top edge detail. Ease all corners. No sharp edges or corners.
6. At lavatories, water resistant marine grade plywood is required substrate.
7. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Wilsonart
Nevamar
G. SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL SILLS
1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), unless noted otherwise.
2. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Solid-Surfacing Material: Composite solid sheets of filled paper resin complying with ISSFA-2. Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
Corian
du Pont de Nemours and Company.
Formica Corporation.
LG Chemical, Ltd.
DIVISION 06 60 00
PLASTIC PANELING
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.
B.
PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
2. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.075 inch
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Kemlite Company Inc.
Marlite.
Nudo Products, Inc.
C. ACCESSORIES
1. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer.
3. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of
factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate.
4. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
69
70
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROCTECTION
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
71
72
DIVISION 07- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
DIVISION 07 10 00
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
A. SUMMARY
a) Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing at typical foundation walls.
b) Rubberized-asphalt waterproofing membrane, reinforced.
c) Molded-sheet drainage panels.
d) Penetrating water-repellent and graffiti-resistant treatments
B.
C. PRODUCTS
1. COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
a) Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
b) Fiber-Free Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
c) VOC Content: 24 g/l or 0.20 lb/gal. (30 g/L) or less.
d) Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following:
BASF (The Chemical Company).
ChemMasters Corp.
Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.
Tamms Industries, Inc.
e) Protection Course for Damproofing: Asphalt-Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, multiply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated
felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.
2.
DAMPPROOFING APPLICATION
a) Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains
b) Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces unoccupied space.
c) Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm)
over outside face of footing.
d) Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view
when Project is completed.
3.
DAMPPROOFING WARRANTY
a) Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and
sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
4.
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
a) Hot Fluid-Applied, Rubberized-Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane: Single component; 100 percent solids; hot fluidapplied, rubberized asphalt.
b) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
American Hydrotech, Inc.; Monolithic Membrane 6125.
American Permaquik Inc.; Permaquik 6100.
Barrett Company; Ram-Tough 250.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-500R.
Henry Company; 790-11.
Tamko Waterproofing; TW-Hot Melt.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremproof 150.
5.
WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
a) Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: 50-mil- minimum, uncured sheet neoprene as follows:
b) Tensile Strength: 1400 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C.
c) Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412.
d) Tear Resistance: 125 psi minimum; ASTM D 624, Die C.
73
e)
f)
g)
h)
Brittleness: Does not break at minus 30 deg F; ASTM D 2137.
Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars; approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and nominal thickness of 1/4 inch
6.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS - WATERPROOFING
a) Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve, laminated to one side
with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core,
with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm/ft.
7.
PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATING
a) Clear silicone rubber, non-staining, penetrating water repellent and graffiti-resistant coating: Graffiti resistant coatings
shall be unaffected by ultraviolet light, ozone, water, deicers and acids. Coating prevents water and paint from penetrating while permitting water vapor transmission.
b) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
Professional Products of Kansas, Inc.; Professional Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant.
PROSOCO, Inc; Blok-Guard® & Graffiti Control.
BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Thoroclear Special.
c) Graffiti Removal Compound: As recommended by coating Manufacturer
d) Obtain Architect's approval of field samples before applying water repellents.
8.
WARRANTY - WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATING
a) Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency and graffiti resistance within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 5
years from date of Substantial Completion.
DIVISION 07 20 00
THERMAL PROTECTION
A. SUMMARY
1. Section Includes:
a. Foam-plastic board insulation
b. Mineral-wool board insulation.
c. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
d. Vapor retarders.
e. Sound Attenuation batts
f. Roof Deck Insulation
g. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
h. Sheet Air and Moisture Barriers
B.
C. FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
a. Type VII, 60 psi (414 kPa).
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company (The).
Owens Corning.
Pactiv Building Products.
74
2.
3.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or Class 2, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
Rmax, Inc.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
D. MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION
1. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15
and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
a. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m), Types IA and IB.
b. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m), Type II.
c. Nominal density of 8 lb/cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m), Type III.
d. Fiber Color: Darkened, where indicated.
2. Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612; faced on one side with foil-scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor
retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 5, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
a. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m), Types IA and IB.
b. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m), Type II.
c. Nominal density of 8 lb/cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m).
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
Fibrex Insulations Inc.
Isolatek International.
Owens Corning.
Thermafiber.
E.
MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION
1. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface
with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim,
foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.
Owens Corning.
Roxul Inc.
Thermafiber.
F.
VAPOR RETARDERS
1. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.
2. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
G. FOUNDATION INSULATION
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength Type VII, 60 psi (414
kPa) indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
DiversiFoam Products.
Owens Corning.
Pactiv Building Products.
75
2.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or Class 2, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
Rmax, Inc.
H. SPRAY-APPLIED INSULATION
1. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation (Closed-Cell): ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m)
Demilec (USA) LLC; Heat-Loc Soy
BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.
ERSystems, Inc.
Gaco Western Inc.
I.
SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS
1. Sound Attenuation Batts: 2-1/2" Unfaced fiberglass batts in walls and ceilings as indicated on the drawings.
2. External ceiling batts over walls below ceiling system 4 ft. either side of wall minimum.
3. Fit snugly into wall cavities indicated.
J.
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
1. Asphaltic Perlite Concrete Deck: Prohibited.
2. Roof Board Insulation.
a. Net insulation design goals: Roof system: R-20 or better
K.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
1. Use of this material and system is prohibited
L.
SHEET AIR AND MOISTURE BARRIERS
1. Air infiltration and moisture barrier at exterior locations: Provide ASTM E1677, Type I air retarder, with flame spread and
smoke indexes of less than 25 and 450 respectively when tested; UV stabilized. Provide a flash spun bonded olefin, nonwoven, non-perforated secondary weather resistant barrier.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following:
DuPont Tyvek Commercial Wrap
DIVISION 07 40 00
ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes
a. standing-seam metal roof and soffit panels.
b. concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
c. metal-faced composite wall and soffit panels
2. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with Uplift Rating: UL 90.
3. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-105.
4. Hail Resistance: SH.
B.
C. WARRANTY
1. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
76
2.
3.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace
metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. Finish
Warranty Period: 35 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including
leaks, within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
1. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer
when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
2. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
3. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application
E.
PANEL MATERIALS
1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the
coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150
coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality.
3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
5. Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 coating, 0.8 to 0.9 mil fluorocarbon full strength 70 percent Kynar 500 finish coating over 0.2 to 0.3
mil urethane primer.
6. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish,
consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil
F.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
1. Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent
panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side
laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
2. Standing-Seam-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Roof Panels: Formed with raised, curved-top, standing-seam-shaped
major rib at panel edge and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major rib and panel edge.
3. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.022-inch nominal thickness.
4. Color: custom colors not allowed.
AEP Span.
Berridge Manufacturing Company.
Englert, Inc.
G. METAL SOFFIT PANELS
1. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of
adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
2. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof panels.
3. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal roof panels..
4. Metal Soffit Panels Types: AEP Span; Prestige Series
.
H. CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
1. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
2. Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically
spaced between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
CENTRIA Architectural Systems
ATAS International, Inc.
Berridge Manufacturing Company.
Metecno-Morin.
77
4.
5.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide
closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings,
fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS
1. Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal-faced composite wall and soffit panels fabricated from two metal facings
bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system.
2. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall and Soffit Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet
facings.
3. Core: Standard.
4. Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer high-performance coating.
5. Attachment System Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
6. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Alcoa Inc.
CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
ALPOLIC, Division of Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc.
Citadel Architectural Products, Inc.
Protean Construction Products, Inc.
J.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
DIVISION 07 50 00
MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. SUMMARY
a. Built-up asphalt roofing.
b. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system.
c. Roof insulation.
2. General Performance: Installed built-up roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures (calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7), thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation. Built-up roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
3. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by built-up roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
4. Roofing System Design: For the field of the roof is I-90 with prescriptive enhancement of insulation attachment at corners
and perimeters.
5. Provide waterflow/flood test for all roof areas, coordinate review with District personnel.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of built-up roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Special warranty includes built-up roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roofing accessories, roof pavers, and other components of built-up roofing. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer,
covering the Work of this Section, including all components of built-up roofing such as built-up roofing membrane, base
flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, and roof pavers, for the following warranty period: Warranty Period: Two
years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. BUILT-UP ROOFING MANUFACTURERS
78
Johns Manville
Firestone Building Products
GAF
TAMKO
Celotex
D. ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES - BUR
1. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Glass Ply Premier – 4 plies, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
2. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601 Perma Ply 28, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
3. Granule-Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6221, Grade G, Type I, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified.
4. Metal-Foil-Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6298, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; suitable for application method specified, Aluminum coating.
5. Glass-Fiber Fabric: Woven glass-fiber cloth, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668, Type I.
E.
SUBSTRATE BOARDS - BUR
1. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, factory
primed.
F.
ROOF INSULATION - BUR
1. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.
2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
3. Provide ISO insulation package with R Value 30.
4. Provide insulation package with minimum thickness two layers of 2-1/2 inches.
5. Perlite Cover Board: ASTM C 728, 1/2 inches thick.
6. Tapered Isocyanurate Insulation only.
G. AUXILIARY MATERIALS - BUR
1. Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing.
2. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Flashing: Johns Manville; PermaFlash® Bituminous Flashing System (Basis-of-Design).
4. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying.
5. Gravel Surfacing (1/2 – 5/8 inch): ASTM D 1863, No. 6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, water-worn gravel or crushed stone,
free of sharp edges or crushed slag, free of sharp edges.
H. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING
1. Materials: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.
2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Black, white for special applications or based upon energy modeling.
4. Uplift pressure for the field of the roof is I-90 with prescriptive enhancement of insulation attachment at corners and perimeters.
Johns Manville.
Firestone Building Products – EPDM warranty provided.
6. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, according to application.
7. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
8. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch
(25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
9. Roof Drains: Set 48-by-48-inch (1200-by-1200-mm) metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed roofing.
Cover metal flashing with roofing cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) beyond edge of metal
flashing onto field of roofing. Clamp roofing, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
I.
ROOF INSULATION - EPDM
1. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
2. Provide ISO insulation package with R Value 30.
79
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
Provide insulation package with minimum thickness two layers of 2.50 inches.
Uplift pressure for the field of the roof I-90 with perspective enhancement of insulation.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain.
Fabricate to slopes indicated.
Tapered Isocyanurate Insulation only.
WALKWAYS - EPDM
1. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or
rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
DIVISION 07 60 00
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
A. SUMMARY
a. Manufactured through-wall flashing and counterflashing.
b. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
c. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
d. Formed equipment support flashing.
e. Formed overhead-piping safety pans.
f. Formed metal copings.
g. Formed gravel stops.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet
metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. LEED PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
D. SHEET METALS
1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the
coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
2. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-Coat Fluoropolymer; AAMA 621, Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting
of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
E.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
2. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick
DIVISION 07 70 00
ROOF AND WALL ACCESSORIES
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes,
a. Metal-flanged, bellows-type roof expansion assemblies.
b. Roof curbs.
c. Hatch-type heat and smoke vents.
d. Roof hatches.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace roof expansion assemblies that leak, deteriorate in excess of rates specified in manufacturer's published product literature, or otherwise fail to perform within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
80
D. BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
1. Metal-Flanged, Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard assemblies of sizes and types
indicated, with prefabricated units for corner and joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to
other building expansion joints, splicing units, adhesives, coatings, and other components as recommended by roof expansion assembly manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate assemblies specifically for roof-to-wall applications, unless
indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
2. Provide assemblies consisting of exposed polymeric sheet over foam bellows, securely anchored at both edges to 3- to 4inch- (76- to 100-mm-) wide sheet metal nailing flanges, either flat or angle formed to fit cant or curbs as required. Insulate
bellows with closed-cell, flexible rubber or plastic foam not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick; adhere bellows to underside of
polymeric sheet.
Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; T Series Roof Expansion Cover.
Balco Metalines, a division of Balco, Inc.; Type BRBG-CN and BRBG-SN Roof Bellows.
BMCA Insulation Products, Inc., GAF Materials Corporation; Metalastic.
Johns Manville; Expand-O-Flash.
MM Systems Corporation; Series ERJ and ERJL.
Sika Corp.; Sarnafil® Saranaflash Expansion Joint Assembly.
Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; Model EEJ and EEJ/C.
E.
ROOF CURBS
1. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units with integral spring-type vibration isolators and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof
insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
AES Industries, Inc.
Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
Metallic Products Corp.
Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Roof Products, Inc.
F.
HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS
1. Hatch-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 54 inches (750 by 1370 mm), unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Fabricate with insulated double-walled lid and continuous weathertight perimeter lid gaskets, and equip with automatic
self-lifting mechanisms and UL-listed fusible links rated at 165 deg F (74 deg C).
2. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
3. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height that is constant. Equip
hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
Bilco Company (The).
Bristolite Skylights.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
G. ROOF HATCH
1. Roof Hatches: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 50 inch. Aluminum roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded
or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deckmounting flange at perimeter bottom.
2. Hardware: Galvanized-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and
outside.
3. Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches (2130 mm).
81
4.
5.
Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access ladder. 42 inches (1060 mm)
above finished roof deck.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
AES Industries, Inc.
Metallic Products Corp.
H. ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
1. Roof Expansion Assemblies: Continuous (rolled) expansion covers preferred over segmented type (to minimize joints). Detail and specify manufacturers standard prefabricated transition and termination pieces.
DIVISION 07 80 00
FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes the following:
a. Concealed SFRM.
b. Exposed SFRM.
c. Mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC).
d. Pentration firestopping
2. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during,
and for 24 hours after product application.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years
from date of Substantial Completion.
D. CONCEALED SFRM
1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and
lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and
application.
2. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
3. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Concealed Cementitious SFRM:
Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6 Series.
Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300.
E.
EXPOSED SFRM
1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or chloride-free formulation of gypsum or
portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for
conveyance and application.
2. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605
or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than
39 lb/cu. ft. (625 kg/cu. m).
82
3.
4.
F.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following:
Exposed Cementitious SFRM:
Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z106G.
Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 400.
MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS
1. MIFRC: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation or factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad 800 and Albi Clad TF.
Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.; AD Firefilm III.
Isolatek International; Cafco SprayFilm-WB 3 and Cafco SprayFilm-WB 4.
G. AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
1. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product. Primer's bond strength complies
with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per
ASTM E 736.
2. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs
indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of SFRM.
H. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP
1. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the ThroughPenetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article.
Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.
2. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an
outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening
to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
3. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.
4. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit
specific diameter of penetrant.
I.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
1. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
a. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, W-J-, W-L-00010999.
a. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, C-BK-, F-A-,
F-B-, F-C-, W-J-, W-K-, W-L-1001-1999.
b. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-B-,
F-C-, W-J-, W-L-2001-2999.
c. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-B-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L3001-3999.
d. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays:Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-B-, F-C-, W-J-, W-K-, W-L4001-4999.
e. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L-50015999.
f. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, F-A-, W-L-60016999.
g. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L7001-7999.
h. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants: Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L8001-8999.
83
J.
MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System
Schedule at the end of Part 3 that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:
Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.
Hilti, Inc.
Johns Manville.
3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
USG Corporation.
DIVISION 07 90 00
JOINT PROTECTION
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:
a. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
b. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints between metal panels.
e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
f. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
g. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
h. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
i. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
j. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances.
k. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
B.
GENERAL
1. "Caulk" applications are limited to non-moving interior fill conditions.
2. "Sealant" is required at interior and exterior conditions where movement is anticipated and joints
3. between dissimilar materials.
4. Self-leveling compound preferred for horizontal applications.
5. Substrate preparation is critical to sealant performance.
6.
C. WARRANTY
1. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants
that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. LEED PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
All adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings used on the inside of the building shall comply with LEED VOC limitations.
E.
JOINT SEALERS
1. Materials:
a. Primer – as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
b. Interior Sealants and Under Thresholds – Latex acrylic
c. Interior Fire Rated Joint Sealant – One or two-component acrylic, silicone or polyurethane having UL listing. Joint sealants for walls and ceilings shall be paintable.
d. Control joints and Expansion Joints in Interior Floor Slabs, Exterior Sidewalks and Slabs on Grade – To-component
pourable self-leveling polyurethane.
e. All Remaining joint Sealants – Two-component polyurethane, Type II, Class A, nonsag.
2. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tapes as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
84
Tremco Manufacturing.
Dap Inc.
General Electric.
Pecora Corporation.
Maneco International.
Sika Corporation.
Sonneborn Building Products.
F.
ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS
1. Wall-to-Wall Joint Systems: Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems Corporation, Flushline Systems, Model FSWP-100.
2. Wall-to-Ceiling Joint Systems: Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems Corporation, Flushline Systems, Model FSWPL-100.
3. Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint Systems: Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems Corporation, Flushline Systems, Model FSWP100.
4. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems: Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems Corporation, Flushline Systems, Model FSST-150 and
FSSR-150.
5. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following:
MM Systems Corporation.
Balco, Inc.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
Johns Mansville
Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
G. ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS
1. Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Walls: MM Systems Model ESS-100 (Exterior) MM Systems Corporation.
MM Systems Corporation (Basis-of-Design).
Construction Specialties, Inc.
Larsen Products Corp.
Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
85
86
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
87
88
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
DIVISION 08 10 00
DOORS AND FRAMES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes hollow metal doors and frames.
2. Section includes flush wood doors with veneer face.
B.
C. GENERAL CRITERIA
1. Structural Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph
2. Locate and design entrances to maximizes wind protection
3. Locate and design building entrances and exit locations to limit weather/water exposure.
4. ANSI A250.4-2011 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria
5. No door vision lites shall extend below 43” AFF or closer than 8” to lock side edge, unless approved by Owner (SVVSD
Lockshop) in writing.
D. STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
1. Standard size and types preferred. Maximum door width is 3’-6”. Maximum door height is 7’6”. Any sizes larger than these
must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
2. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of materials, flush panel design, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
3. Provide full welded and filled seams and beveled edges on both door sides. Universal hinge preparations are prohibited.
4. Provide inverted channel top and bottom of door.
5. Interior 16 gage doors: Grade III, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless, minimum 0.053” / 1.3mm thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces.
6. Exterior 14 gage (steel stiffened) doors: Grade IV Extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless, minimum 0.067” / 1.7mm thick galvanized steel sheet faces. (A60 Galvanneal)
7. Hinge reinforcements shall be 7 gage for 1-3/4” doors. Lock reinforcements shall be 16 gage and closer reinforcements 14
gage box minimum 20” long. Hinge and lock reinforcements shall be projection welded to the edge of the door. Galvanized
doors shall have galvanized hardware reinforcements. Adequate reinforcements shall be provided for other hardware as required. Furnish “high frequency” top hinge reinforcements.
8.
E.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
1. Fabricate all hollow metal frames with die-mitered interlocking tabs. Face welding 3 sided frames is acceptable. Saw cut
miters are not allowed on 3 sided frames.
2. Use 16 gage steel on interior frames. Use A-60 Galvanneal on any frames installed in masonry openings.
3. Use 14 gage A-60 Galvannealed steel on exterior frames. Once painted, store frames in a sealed container.
4. Exterior Frames and Interior Frames Larger than 3 Feet Wide: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet, 14 gauge.
5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.
6. Fabricate metal frames with minimum 3/16” steel hinge plates and “high frequency” hinge reinforcements.
7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating
or where indicated. (Note: Double fire doors using coordinators and automatic flushbolts are strongly discouraged. Use of
keyed removable mullions is preferred.)
8. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not
more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:
b. Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
c. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
d. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
e. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96
inches (2438 mm) high.
f. Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
89
9.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.
NOTE: Per ANSI A250.11-2001 Revision of SDI-105, Section 4.1: Install rubber silencers before frame erection to avoid grout
filling rubber silencer holes.
10. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.
11. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
12. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.
1. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch-thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where
mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
2. Grout: When required in masonry construction, contractor shall field apply a bituminous coating to backs of frames that are
filled with mortar, grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents.
Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
Republic Door and Frames
CECO Door Division
Curries Company
Southwestern Hollow Metal
Other: Must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop)
13. Clearances
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
14. Installation
a.
F.
The clearance between the door and frame head and jambs shall be 1/8” in the case of both single swing
and pairs of doors.
The clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 3/16” ± 1/16”.
For fire rated applications, the clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 1/8” ± 1/16”.
The clearance at the bottom shall be minimum 3/8”, maximum 3/4”.
The clearance between the face of the door and door stop shall be 1/16” to 1/8”.
All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified, subject to a tolerance of ± 1/32”.
Note: To ensure installation is in compliance with Positive Pressure criteria as required by UBC7-2, UL10C,
ICC, and NFPA5000 and all applicable local, state, and national code jurisdictions, all Steel Frames Shall be
accurately installed per Manufacturers installation instructions to provide proper Fire and Smoke Gasketing
as tested and listed using a PL2 Frame Set Tool or similar method. For Tool information, consult
http://www.PL2frameset.com.
WOOD DOORS
1. Quality Standards: Provide doors meeting or exceeding the minimum standards as set forth by the following organizations.
a. WDMA I.S. 1A 2011 – Window and Door Manufacturers Association Latest Edition. (Extra heavy duty construction).
b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
2. Warranty: Manufacturers standard lifetime warranty, including reasonable re-hanging and re-finishing.
G. LEED PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS (WOOD DOORS)
3. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.4: All composite wood and agrifiber products as well as adhesives used in-shops or onsite for laminating must contain no added urea formaldehyde.
H. DOOR CONSTRUCTION (Interior Solid-Core Doors)
1. Minimum door size: 36" wide x 7'-0" high.
2. Maximum door width is 3’6”. Maximum door height is 7’6”. Any other size must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD
Lockshop).
3. Provide vision panels in all doors of classrooms and offices. No vision panel should be lower than 43” a.f.f. or closer than 8”
to the lock side edge of the door.
4. Wood doors are not allowed at exterior applications.
5. Mineral Core Fire doors are strictly prohibited. Any alternative must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop)
90
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Door veneer to be WDMA I.S. 1A - 2011 Custom A grade either rotary cut natural birch or plain sliced red oak, minimum
.050” thick before sanding, running book matched, and hardwood edges minimum .25” thick compatible with face veneers.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of
cutouts, and mortises. Finish doors at factory.
Transparent Finish: WDMA UV cured catalyzed polyurethane system. Grade: Custom.
Solid-Core Doors: . Structural Composite Lumber Core (Particleboard Core is strictly prohibited)
Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
Vertical stiles must be minimum ¼ ” laminate to SCL or hardwood compatible with face veneer. Do not veneer these edges.
Mineral Core Fire doors are strictly prohibited. Any alternatives or exceptions must be approved in writing by Owner
(SVVSD Lockshop)
Louvers and Light Frames:
a. Wood Frames for vision lites are prohibited.
b. Metal Frames for Light Openings: Cold rolled 20-gage steel with primer and finish paint. Tapered, low profile, beveled
glass stop with tight mitered corners. (NOTE: Veneered metal frames are strictly prohibited)
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following:
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Eggers Industries.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Doors
VT Industries, Inc.
DIVISION 08 30 00
SPECIALITY DOORS AND FRAMES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes access doors and frames for walls, floor and ceilings.
2. Section includes service overhead coiling doors (Insulated and Non-insulated).
3. Section includes Fire-rated service doors.
4. Section includes Counter doors (Rated and Non-rated)
5. Section includes open-curtain overhead coiling grilles.
6. Section includes sectional doors.
B.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
1. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
3. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coatea2d steel sheet to receive joint compound.
4. Hinges: Continuous piano.
5. Provide non-rated or fire-rated access doors to match fire-resistive rating of surface which access door is to be installed
within, complete with key-operated cam locks.
6. Door (Ceiling): 30-inch by 30-inch; 24-inch minimum net opening dimension. Review size with Owner.
7. Door (Wall): Sized to meet equipment and maintainace requirements. Review size with Owner.
Milcor
Bilco
J.L. Industries
Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.
Nystrom
C. FLOOR DOORS:
1. Concrete Floors without Floor Finishes: Bilco Type Q-4, 3' x 3' single leaf steel (1/4" diamond pattern), automatic hold open
arm, and steel frame or equivalent of other acceptable manufacturer.
2. Concrete Floors with Floor Finishes: Bilco Type T-4, 3' x 3' single leaf aluminum (1/4" smooth aluminum plate), automatic
hold open arm, molding to receive carpet or resilient flooring.
Bilco
Babcock – Davis
D. SERVICE DOORS
91
1.
The insulated overhead rolling manually operated service door is typically used on field buildings of a middle school or
high school.
a. Locking Device: The door is hand chain operated and lockable by means of padlock provided by the Owner.
2. The face panels are interlocking 24 gauge steel flat front slat and back with foamed-in-place polyurethane insulation and are
factory galvanized and primed for field application of final paint or factory finish.
3. The motorized overhead rolling fire doors are typically used in fire rated corridor where openings are wider than 6'-0" and
the height of the opening is greater than 6'-0". Criteria is similar to rolling counter fire door with the exception that a motor
operation has been added interlocked with a three (3) position keyed switch (as specified below).
4. Motorized rolling door to have switch function as follows:
a. Open: Momentary Contact – Turn key and return to center, door will continue to open unless stop button is
pushed.
b. Close: Constant Pressure – Key must be turned and held until door is completely closed.
c. Locking Device Assembly - Electrical: Provide a wall mounted flush or surface mounted SFIC keyed switch as
specified below (or equivalent):
Surface mount: MMTC Keyed Switch - 1KFS w/ TP-1 & TSD-1 (Tamper proof)
Flush mount: MMTC Keyed Switch – 1KFS w/ TP-1 & TSD-1 (Tamper proof)
5. Door shall have both fusible link and electromagnetic release devices. Door to have “automatic stop” if an obstruction is encountered. Fire release to be automatic reset, no mechanical resetting allowed.
6. Locate fusible links above ceiling for fire-rated doors immediately above ceiling louvers. Coordinate with fire alarm system
installation. Doors activated by smoke detectors and fire alarms shall be tested in the presence of the School District, Architect, and local Fire Official prior to acceptance.
7. Provide adequate size access to door/opening directly below fusible links and motors for maintenance
8. Safety Eyes or Edge: Provide safety features on motor-operated doors as required by applicable codes considering the
above specified switch functions.
9. Fire Rating: Provide fire rated units as required.
10. Hoods: Minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel, lateral reinforcement and intermediate support at openings wider than 10’-0”.
11. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type, housed in steel pipe, and designed to include an overload factor of 25%. Minimum life CCH rating = 80,00 or greater. Grease pack and mount springs on a cold rolled steel inner shaft, with torsion adjustment from outside of end bracket plate. Furnish sealed ball bearings to minimize wear of pipe shaft rotation around inner
shaft.
E.
FOLDING GATES – Folding Gates are strictly prohibited.
F.
COUNTER DOORS
1. The overhead rolling counter fire doors are typically used at dish return areas in dining areas and smaller openings in rated
corridor walls where the width is 4'-0" ± and the height of the opening is not more than 6'-0" ±. The fire door has a manual
push-up operation with slide bolt latch on room side. The face panels are constructed of 22 gauge steel flat interlocking
slats, factory galvanized and primed for field application of final paint. Door to close at governed speed of approximately 6"
– 9” per second when released by fusible link or by factory supplied electro-mechanical solenoid releasing device normally
de-energized and activated by 24 volt DC smoke detection system only. Door shall not close in case of power failure unless
required to do so by local building official.
2. Locate fusible links above ceiling for fire-rated doors immediately above ceiling louvers. Coordinate with fire alarm system
installation. Doors activated by smoke detectors and fire alarms shall be tested in the presence of the School District, Architect, and local Fire Official prior to acceptance.
3. Provide adequate size access to door/opening directly below fusible links and motors for maintenance.
4. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied finish. Finish and Color: As selected by
Architect from full range of RAL finishes.
5. Stainless Steel Finish: Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
6. Locking Device Assembly: At center of bottom bar, fabricate with SFIC mortise lock keyed to building master, spring-loaded
dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage both sides through slots in tracks. Key operation from outside only. (Note: Model #C177A Cornell Lock or similar)
7. Electric Door Operators: At all locations of counter doors, provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, with electric motor and factoryprewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. Comply with NFPA 70.
92
8.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, only the following manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the work include:
Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
C.H.I. Overhead Doors
Wayne Dalton
Raynor
G. OPEN-CURTAIN OVERHEAD COILING GRILLE
1. The motorized overhead coiling grilles are typically used to close off an area of the building. Rolling grille is constructed of
mill finished aluminum horizontal rods and vertical chain curtain with extruded aluminum tubular bottom bar. Finish to be
anodized aluminum.
2. Locking Device Assembly: At center of bottom bar, fabricate with SFIC mortise lock keyed to building master, spring-loaded
dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage both sides through slots in tracks. Key operation from outside only. (Note: Model #C177A Cornell Lock or similar)
a. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
b. Other: Must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop)
H. STEEL DOOR SECTIONS
1. Door Assembly: Steel door assembly with rabbeted meeting rails to form weather-tight joints and provide full-width interlocking structural rigidity.
a. Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm).
b. Section Material: 24 gauge, galvanized steel.
c. Center End Stiles: 16 gauge.
d. Acrylic glazing, 1/8 inch (3 mm) double strength glass.
2. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl,
rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required.
3. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- (2.01-mm-) nominal coated thickness at each end
stile and at each intermediate stile. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet (4.88 m) wide unless
otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
4. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit
slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.
5. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb
side, operable from inside only. (Note: Use this mechanism when building access is available through another entry.)
6. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. (Note: Use this mechanism only when there is no other access to the
building other than this overhead door.)
7. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, only the following manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the work include:
Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
C.H.I. Overhead Doors
Wayne Dalton
Raynor
93
DIVISION 08 40 00
ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND CURTAIN WALLS
A. SUMMARY
a. Exterior aluminum-framed storefronts
b. Operable aluminum windows.
c. Exterior manual-swing aluminum doors.
d. Glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies.
e. Translucent fiberglass-sandwich panels for wall assemblies.
B.
GENERAL CRITERIA
1. Structural Loads: Must meet wind load of 40 psf or per local code.
2. Locate and design entrances to maximizes wind protection.
3. Locate and design building entrances and exit locations to limit weather/water exposure.
C. ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS
1. Immediate Door Frame Members do not need to be thermally broken but must be tubular and 3/16” minimum thickness.
Sidelight Framing Members must have: Thermal break system, 6063 -T5 or T6 aluminum frame.
2. Operable Units: Windows to have cam handle locks and 4-bar hinges with 15° limit stops. Operable Units should not have
screens.
3. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum (.0625” minimum thickness) finished to match framing and of sufficient
thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection..
4. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
5. Finish: Selected from manuf. standard paint colors or clear anodic finish
D. ALUMINUM DOORS
1. Heavy-Duty Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.
2. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, with minimum (.1875 inch (3/16”) – 4.7625 mm)
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members.
3. Door stiles to be 5” inches, top rail to be 8” inches, bottom rail to be 10” inches, center rail to be 8” inches. Any other dimensions must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
4. Mechanically fasten corners with clips, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and 1-1/8” long fillet welds inside and out-side
of all four corners. Anodized finish must be removed prior to welding. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM
glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord.
5. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance.
6. Prepare component with internal reinforcement or door hardware.
7. All butt hinges to be mounted on minimum 3/16” thick zinc-plated steel back-up plates secured with stainless steel
screws. (Back up plate mounting screws should be secured with a Loctite thread-locking – blue or similar product)
8. Hinges: Hinges on Aluminum doors to be equal or better than the specifications for those specified in hardware schedule:
a. Exterior doors should have 5” x 4.5” heavy weight, four ball-bearing, stainless steel hinges, w/ non-removable pins
(630).
b. Interior doors should have 5” x 4.5” heavy weight, four ball-bearing, brushed steel hinges (626).
c. Doors over 36” wide must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
d. Doors over 7᪃-6” high must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
e. Doors over 7’-0” high must have 4 hinges.
9. All hardware on the door must be installed with the primary use of sex bolts. Any secondary attachments may be drilled and
tapped.
10. Door frame headers receiving Auto Operator installations must be adequately reinforced to be able to support these heavy
units under heavy usage conditions. A steel or heavy aluminum plate inside the frame is preferred, drilled and tapped for all
the available attachment points.
11. Door closer shoes and removable mullion installations are required to have a solid aluminum block for full support. Plastic
spacers are NOT approved for mounting to aluminum door frames.
12. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
13. Finish: Selected from manuf. standard paint colors or clear anodic finish
94
MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the following in order of preference:
EFCO Corporation; Series Durastile D518 series
Vistawall Performax series (Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™ PerforMax Series 3000)
Kawneer Company, Series Heavy Wall 500 series
Any others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop)
Tubelite Inc.
United States Aluminum.
PREQUALIFIED INSTALLERS (must be listed in bidding documents)
1. Prequalified hardware installers in order of preference:
a. Horizon Glass, CO.
b. EAP Glass, Inc. Denver, CO
Others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
E. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS ASSEMBLY
1. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. Thermally broken.
2. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.
screens.
3. Finish: Selected from manuf. standard paint colors or clear anodic finish.
4. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph, Exposure C.
F.
WARRANTY
1. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain walls that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
G. MANUFACTURERS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the following in order of preference:
EFCO Corporation; Series 5600 Thermally Broken
Vistawall (Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™ CW-250)
Kawneer
Any others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop)
United States Aluminum.
PREQUALIFIED INSTALLERS (must be listed in bidding documents)
a. Horizon Glass, CO.
b. EAP Glass, Inc. Denver, CO
Others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
H. TRANSLUSCENT FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH PANELS
1. Description: Assembly of uniformly colored, translucent, thermoset, fiberglass-reinforced-polymer face sheets bonded to
both sides of a grid core.
2. Structural Loads:
a. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph.
3. Construction: Thermally broken; framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by a material of low thermal conductance
4. Panel Thickness: 2-3/4 inches
5. Grid Core: Mechanically interlocked, extruded-aluminum I-beams, with a minimum flange width of 7/16 inch.
6. Exterior Face Sheet: Thickness: 0.70 inches; Color: Crystal.
7. Interior Face Sheet: Thickness: 0.045 inch; Color: Crystal.
95
8.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of panel
assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: One year from date of
Substantial Completion.
9. Special Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace panels that exhibit defects in materials or workmanship. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
10. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturers others than those listed may be accepted, but only with prior review and approval.
Kalwall Corporation
DIVISION 08 50 00
WINDOWS
A. SUMMARY
1. Steel Windows: Not permitted.
2. Aluminum Windows: Preferred.
3. Stainless Steel Windows: Not permitted.
4. Wood Windows: Preferred.
5. Plastic Windows: Not permitted.
B.
GENERAL
1. Operable sash with insect screen preferred for most exterior applications in assignable spaces. Doors andWindows
2. Natural light preferred throughout the exiting system, especially stairs.
3. For purposes of energy conservation, glazing should be limited to 20% or less of the total exterior wall area.
4. Locate openings to minimize solar heat gain.
5. For glazing over 10'-0" above first floor elevation: Inside glazing preferred.
6. Verify method(s) for cleaning and replacement..
7. Utilize tinted glazing to minimize solar heat gain and eye strain to occupants.
8. Largest single opening for glazing shall be 8’ x 8’.
C. WARRANTY
1. Extended warranty: Underwritten by window manufacturer, 10 years minimum term from the date of project acceptance
covering defects in materials and workmanship.
2. Ten (10) years minimum term from the date of project acceptance covering specified performance standards.
D. ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1. Thermal-break design required, PVC materials in concealed locations only. Internal and external drainage to exterior.
2. Reinforce frame at hardware and door locations.
3. All points of contact between the operable and non-operable components of the door shall be weatherstripped.
screens.
5. Provide not less than 2 operable window for each classroom/teaching space.
E.
WOOD AND PLASTIC WINDOWS
1. All window styles and configurations to be reviewed and approved by Owner during design process.
2. Wherever possible, attempts should be made to match existing windows adjacent to new construction, unless otherwise
stated by Owner.
3. Wood framed window assembly (including glass, sash and frame) U-factor shall be rated, certified and labeled in accordance with NFRC 100.
4. Wood: Ponderosa pine or similar fine-grained lumber.
5. Finger joints permitted only for clad assemblies; prohibited for surfaces to be painted.
6. Use FSC-certified sustainably harvested wood.
7. Cladding: Extruded aluminum with custom-color baked acrylic enamel, Kynar or equivalent, required for all exterior surfaces.
8. Provide not less than 2 operable window for each classroom/teaching space
DIVISION 08 60 00
ROOF WINDOWS AND SKYLIGHTS
A. SUMMARY
1. Section Includes
a. Tubular daylighting device, consisting of roof dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly
96
b.
c.
B.
Plastic (Lexan) Unit Skylights.
Metal Framed Skylights.
APPLICATIONS/RESTRICTIONS
1. For reasons of acoustics, security, and maintenance; vertical glazing, monitors, or clerestories are preferred over skylights.
2. When provided, limit skylights to non-assignable, public, circulation areas equipped with security sensors.
3. Review Maintenance Issues with District personnel regarding appropriate size limits, accessibility for repair/replacement and
overall weather resistance and material life of application.
C. METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
1. Engineered by manufacturer to prevent wind blow-off and live/dead loads per IBC with
2. minimum air filtration per ASTM E283 and no uncontrolled water leakage per ASTM E331
3. testing.
4. Water test skylights upon completion. Thoroughly wet the entire skylight area in accordance
5. with referenced test and check for uncontrolled water leakage.
Vistawall - HP-1175 sloped glazing with integral condensation gutters and 1" double sealed insulating glass with tempered outside glass and laminated glass inside face. Finish of aluminum as approved by the School District.
Kawneer
D. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
1. Tubular Daylighting Devices General : Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-flashing curb, reflective tube, and
ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICBO/ICC AC-16.
2. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS-C & O, 330 DS C & O 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System, Model 750DS
Dome
3. LightTracker Reflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the
dome to capture low angle sunlight.
4. Roof Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube.
5. Interior Finish: high reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface. Specular reflectance for visible spectrum (400
nm to 760 nm) greater than 99.7 percent. Total solar spectrum reflectance (400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 93 percent.
6. Reflective extension tube, Type EXX, Notched for Open Ceiling diffuser attachment, 24 inches (610 mm) long
7. Lens: Type L2, Prismatic lens designed to maximize light output and diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater
than 90 percent at 0.100 inch (2.5 mm) thick. Classified as CC2.
8. Local Dimmer Control: Provided with dimmer switch and cable.
9. Daylight Dimmer: Type D Electro-mechanically actuated daylight valve; for universal input voltages ranging between 90 and
277 V at 50 or 60 Hz; maximum current draw of 50 ma per unit; controlled by low voltage, series Type T02: circuited, 4 conductor, size 22 cable; providing daylight output between 2 and 100 percent. Provided with dimmer switch and cable.
10. Switch: Type SW, Manufacturer-specific low voltage DC DP/DT switch (white) required to operate Daylight Dimmer. Note:
only one switch is required per set of synchronously controlled dimmers.
11. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
Solatube International, Inc.
E.
PLASTIC SKYLIGHTS
1. Skylights shall be double-dome plastic skylights and shall be engineered by the manufacturer to revent wind blow off and to
provide a minimum carrying capacity of 40 lb. live load per square foot of skylight.
2. Glazing shall be one piece continuous cast acrylic resin plastic, with tinted outside dome and clear inside dome. Mounted on
thermal barrier extruded aluminum frame with integral condensate gutter.
3. Water test skylights upon completion. Conduct test using a hose without nozzle and thoroughly wet the entire skylight area.
Skyline Products, Inc.
Naturalite/EPI
Plasticrafts
A.I.A. Industries
97
DIVISION 08 70 00
HARDWARE
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding and folding
doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they
are installed.
2. Hardware specified herein is to cover all necessary material required to fully complete the hardware requirements of specified openings. It is the intention that the hardware specified shall be of sufficient quantities necessary to complete the Work.
3. Hardware installation is to occur on- site, not in a shop offsite; especially for double doors.
a. Hinges
b. Key control System
c. Lock Cylinders and keys
d. Lock and latch sets
e. Flush bolts and surface bolts
f. Exit devices and mullions
g. Push/pull units
h. Closers
i. ADA operators
j. Overhead holders, magnetic holders, mechanical holders
k. Miscellaneous door control devices
l. Door trim units
m. Protection Plates
n. Weatherstripping for exterior doors
o. Sound stripping for interior doors
p. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms)
q. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors
r. Thresholds
B.
RELATED SECTIONS:
Division 1 – General Requirements
Division 6– Finish Carpentry: Installation of Finish Hardware
Division 7 - Joint Sealants.
Division 8 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Division 8 – Flush Wood Doors
Division 8 – Aluminum Doors and Frames
Division 8 – Special Doors
Division 26 - Sections for connections to electrical power system.
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security, Sections for low-voltage wiring work and for access control devices installed at
door openings and provided as part of a security access system.
C. REFERENCED STANDARDS/MINIMUM CRITERIA:
1. Use date of standard or code in effect as of Bid date.
2. State and Local Codes including Authority Having Jurisdiction.
3. ANSI/BHMA A156 – Buildings Hardware Manufacturers Association Builders Hardware Standards
4. ANSI A156.19 – Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors
5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Agency
6. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows
7. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
8. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
9. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
10. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
11. UL10C – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Positive Pressure)
12. ANSI 117.1 – Accessible and usable Buildings and Facilities
13. ADA – American with Disabilities Act
14. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute
15. SDI – Steel Door Institute
D. SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
98
1.
2.
3.
Product Data Including:
a. Manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of door hardware.
b. Preparation instructions and recommendations
c. Dimensions of individual components and profiles
d. Storage and handling instructions and recommendations
e. Installation Methods
f. Maintenance of operating parts and finish
g. Any other information necessary to show compliance with requirements
Schedules:
a. Prepared by or under the supervision of a (DHI Certified) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a Certified Door
Consultant (CDC), detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
b. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable or
incompatible items and proposed substitutions in hardware schedule.
c. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware
Schedule."
d. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
e. Organize the hardware sets in vertical format using the same order and layout as the “Sample” Hardware Sets provided below. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the “Sample“ Hardware Sets will be rejected and
subject to resubmission.
f. Hardware Schedule: Submit separate detailed hardware schedule in electronic format (.pdf)
g. All schedules should indicate actual assigned room number for new or existing facilities.
h. Hardware sets should include the following information:
− Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
− Maximum allowable degree of swing is assumed unless specific a stopping point called for is needed for site
conditions.
− Fire rating.
− Name and manufacturer of each item with catalog data sheets.
− Fastenings and other pertinent information.
− Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and
frame schedule.
− Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
− Mounting locations for hardware. (Note: In instances where multiple doors are side by side with matching hardware, a level control line should be established to allow for a visual alignment of the hardware across all the
doors.)
− Door and frame sizes and materials.
i. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing
Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door
designations. Keying Schedule: Per DHI manual "Keying Procedures, Systems, and Nomenclature".
− Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has
been fulfilled.
− Index keying schedule by final door & room number (if architectural number is different from final door number,
keying schedule must match the final door numbers), keyset, hardware set numbers, cross keying instructions,
special stamping instructions, and any other special instructions.
− Provide one complete digital copy of the bitting list (specific to this current school project only) of key cuts capable
of being imported into Sitemaster Software. This should be emailed directly to the SVVSD Locksmith.
− Deliver keys to SVVSD Lockshop only by secure registered mail or overnight package service.
Coordination: Supplier shall coordinate the following items with the General Contractor and related trades:
a. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacture of any internal reinforcement for door hardware
b. Furnish hardware templates to door fabricators for factory preparation to receive hardware.
c. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of thicknesses, profile, swing, security, and other
indicated requirements as necessary for proper function.
d. Coordinate solid blocking between studs of frame construction to support wall mounted items such as stops, magnetic
and mechanical hold opens.
99
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
E.
Templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.
Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to
power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devises and access control system.
Coordinate Electro-Mechanical Hardware with:
− Architect
− Electrical Engineer
− Hardware supplier/contractor
− Electro-mechanical hardware supplier/contractor
− Wood door supplier
− Hollow metal door supplier
− Hollow metal frame supplier/contractor
− Electrical Contractor
− Security systems Contractor
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the
Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule.
a. Upon request and prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and final ordering of finish hardware, submit one
sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with full description for coordination
with schedule. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units, which are acceptable and remain undamaged through
submittal, review and field comparison procedures, may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by
door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Schedule.
b. Electrified Hardware Drawings: Provide complete wiring diagrams prepared by an authorized factory employee for
each opening requiring electronic hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified.
Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval.
c. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardware submittals. Operational descriptions are to include but are not limited to the following situations:
− Normal secured / unsecured state of door
− Authorized access
− Unauthorized access
− Fire alarm
− Loss of power conditions
− Interfaces with other building control systems
d. Shop Drawings shall detail electrified locking hardware indicating detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling,
monitoring, communication, and control of electrified hardware.
e. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:
− Complete (risers, point-to-point) system block wiring diagrams.
− How each electrical component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress.
Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval.
− Provide elevation drawings of each unique access controlled opening identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted
for approval.
f. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Qualifications: For Supplier, Installer, and Architectural Hardware Consultant. Compliance with this Section shall include letters of certification. Certifications shall be submitted for approval with and be incorporated with hardware schedule submittal. SUBMITTALS WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED WITHOUT THE CERTIFICATIONS.
a. Door Hardware Supplier: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's
vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type,
and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC)
who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
− Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
100
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on
testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.
Architectural Hardware Consultant: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) as an
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware
installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
− Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of specifications will consider the compatibility of products.
−
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Electrified Door Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant who is experienced
in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.
d. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with five (5) years documented experience who has completed door
hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Factory trained and certified by the lock, closer and panic
hardware manufacturers.
− Alternative: Installer can demonstrate suitably equivalent competence and experience as approved by Owner
(SVVSD Lockshop).
− Note: Use of installation contractors or personnel without the above qualifications documented in writing may call
into question the manner and installation quality of all doors and hardware on the project. This may require all
hardware to be removed, checked, and reinstalled properly at no additional cost to the Owner.
Regulatory Requirements: Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications. These requirements include but are not limited to NFPA 70, NFPA 80, and NFPA 101. Furnish finish hardware to
comply with the requirements of the American National Standards for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible and Usable
by Physically Handicapped People ICC/ANSI A117.1) and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 and UL10C. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements.
− Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
− Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, plus resilient and required intumescent seals if not furnished with wood door.
− Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or
other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of
doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
− Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, (with supplementary marking on door label indicating “Fire Door to
be Equipped with “Fire Exit Hardware”), provide label on exit device indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.
Substitutions: Products are specified to ensure a uniform basis of acceptable materials. No other substitutions will be allowed. Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.
− All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 01.
− Selection of substitute products by the architect and/or the AHC must receive final approval in writing by the Owner
(SVVSD Lockshop).
− Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet existing standards.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware from a single manufacturer (one latch and locksets
manufacturer, one hinge manufacturer, one closer manufacturer, etc.) qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. This
will be enforced for mechanical and electrical products.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
1. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule and door opening numbers, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
2. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As hardware supplier from various manufacturers receives material, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.
3. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that
count is correct.
4. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).
101
5.
Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of
hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses
both before and after installation.
G. MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions:
a. Furnish three, (3), copies of maintenance manuals for each different hardware item, including operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions,
and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufactures and installers maintenance personnel. Submit for Owners information at Project closeout as specified in Division 01. Manuals to include
the following items:
− Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
− Catalog pages for each product.
− Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
− Parts list for each product.
− Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed".
− Copy of final keying schedule
− As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each piece of hardware connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts.
One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.
b. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,
maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
c. Present special tools and maintenance instructions to Owner at time of testing and demonstration interval.
d. Manufacturers’ representatives of lock, cylinders, exit devices and door closers shall conduct two 8 hour training sessions for Owner personnel in the servicing and maintenance of hardware items.
H. PREQUALIFIED INSTALLERS (must be listed in bidding documents)
a. Trinity Custom Carpentry, Broomfield, CO.
b. Jaco Door LLC, Windsor, CO 405 Trailwood Dr. 80550
c. Metro Door Specialties, Aurora, CO.
d. Others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
I.
COMMISSIONING:
1. The General Contractor in conjunction with the lock manufacturer’s representative, hardware installer and supplying distributor shall commission hardware. Comply with Division 01 and as follows:
a. Test door hardware operation with HVAC system both at rest and while in full operation.
b. Test electrical and electronic hardware systems for satisfactory operation.
c. Test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release
J.
WARRANTY
1. General Warranty: Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Provide the following special hardware warranty for the following items:
Locksets
7 years.
Door Closers
10 years.
Exit devices
5 years.
K.
PRODUCTS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following:
a. Butts and Hinges:
− Bommer : BB5000 BB5004 BB5006
− Hager :
BB1279 BB1168 BB1199
− Ives:
5BB1 5BB1HW 5BB1HW
− Stanley: FBB179 FBB169 FBB199.
− McKinney: TA2714 T4A3786 T4A3386.
102
b.
2.
3.
Key Control System: Incorporate with
a. Schlage Everest B SFIC
b. Best Access Cormax X-series SFIC
c. Locksets, Latchsets and Deadbolts:
− Schlage Lock: ND-Series, SFIC, SPA Lever Design.
− Best Access Systems: 9K- Series, SFIC, #14 Lever Design
d. Electric Power Transfer:
− Manufacturers: Von Duprin EPT- 10
− Transfer power from door frame to edge of door.
− Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
e. Exit/Panic Devices:
− Von Duprin: 98 Series (interior) XP98 Series (Exterior)
− Use General Brand Rim Cylinders #RC-IC1-626
f. Door Closers:
− LCN: 4041-XP-EDA ST3596 Series.
g. Door Holders – Magnetic:
− Recessed mounting: Rixson – FM994 (total projection 3-3/4” from wall)
− Surface mounting: Rixson – FM991 (total projection 4” from wall)
− No Substitutions
h. Door Holders – Mechanical:
− Wall Mount - Ives: WS40 / WS45
− Door Mount (Overhead) – Glynn Johnson
i. Automatic Flush Bolts and Coordinators: (Note: Use of auto flush bolts not recommended unless all other options are
exhausted).
− Ives: 457 358 FB31P.
j. Surface Bolts:
− Ives: SB 453-12-TB (attached with thru-bolts in all wood doors or light duty hollow metal doors).
k. Door Stop Units:
− Interior Wall Stops / Bumpers - Ives: WS407 CVX
− Exterior Wall Stops / Bumpers - FS18S
− Interior / Exterior Floor Stops FS18S / FS18L.
l. Door Stripping, Seals and Threshold:
− Pemko: 45061CN 345CN 272 S88D.
− National Guard: A626A C627 613 2525B.
Scheduled Hardware:
a. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are
indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation
numbers of the following:
b. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing door hardware minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one door hardware manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in
Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
Materials and Fabrication:
a. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as
otherwise acceptable to Architect.
b. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
c. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard
metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and
with ANSI/BHMA 156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for
those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
d. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw
installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws. Through bolt assemblies (sex screws and bolts) are required on all surface mounted hardware (Exit device, closer, surface bolts, hold
open device, astragal, and lock guard, etc.) attached to wood doors or any non-reinforced hollow metal doors.
103
e.
4.
5.
Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other
work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted
finish. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no
standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt
head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide
sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
Hinges, Butt and Pivots
a. Hinges shall be certified to exceed two million, five hundred thousand, 2,500,000, full load operating cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames provide only template-produced units.
b. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
− All exterior doors shall have stainless steel screws matching the base metal specs below.
− For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
− For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
− For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.
− Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
−
c. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
− Exterior Out-Swing Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins.
− Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
− Tips: Flat button and matching plug, with a 3/32” hole, finished to match leaves.
d. Hinge Base Metal: Provide the following:
− Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel non-removable pin.
− Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin
− Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.
e. Number of Hinges:
− Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height
and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
− Provide 4 hinges per door leaf greater than 36” in width.
f. Hinges Weight and function:
− All hinge open widths shall be minimal, but of sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees.
− Unless otherwise specified, hinge size for doors through 3’-0” shall be standard weight, 0.134 gage, 4.5” x 4.5”.
− For doors over 3’-0” wide shall be 5” x 4.5” four ball- bearing, heavy weight, 0.190 gage.
− Areas with “Heavy Use” doors will also use these heavyweight hinges.
− These areas include but may not be limited to:
Elementary Schools
− Exterior entry/exit doorways to/from main corridors and classrooms.
− Main interior access doors to the cafeteria.
− Main interior access doors to the gymnasium.
− Restroom doors.
Middle Schools
− Restroom doors.
− Main interior access doors to the auditorium.
High Schools
− Restroom doors.
− Main interior access doors to the auditorium.
− Locker rooms
− Weight / Wrestling rooms
Keying Systems
104
a.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. In addition to
Owner (SVVSD Lockshop), Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include
Suppliers Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
− Review of all lock functions.
− Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.
− Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
− Requirements for key control system.
− Address for delivery of keys. Meet with the Architect and Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying
instructions in writing. Incorporate new keying system with Schlage Lock keying system.
b. Furnish temporary interchangeable core construction keying system for each new lock and exit device during construction period. This will allow installer to verify the function of each lockset and exit device PRIOR to the installation of the
permanent cores by Owner.
c. Owner shall remove all existing cores (if applicable; for remodel and rekeying projects) and install all new permanent
keyed cores and return temporary interchangeable construction cores to General Contractor for return to the hardware
supplier.
d. Master keying pin combinations will be generated by manufacturer’s (Schlage Lock / Best Access) keying system, and
coordinated with Owner (SVVSD Locksmith).
e. Permanent Cores: Keying shall be performed by Lock manufacturer. Furnish blank cylinder face, no logo; finish face
to match lockset; interchangeable cores – All permanently keyed cores should be engraved with keyset on the side,
not on the face.
f. Cores shall be factory keyed and combinated. Combinate in sets or subsets, master-keyed or great grandmaster
keyed as directed by Owner (SVVSD Locksmith).
g. Keys and cores shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification.
h. Permanent keys will also be embossed “Do Not Duplicate”.
i. Stamp permanent keys in sequence.
j. Key identification stamping to be approved by Architect and Owner.
k. Key Material: Furnish keys of nickel silver.
l. Do not package permanent keys with locks. Package keys separately from locksets and cores.
m. Deliver all permanent keys, key blanks and other security items direct to Owner (SVVSD Lockshop) from lock manufacturer by secure courier, return receipt requested. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in the following quantities:
− 15 each Temporary construction keys to General Contractor.
− 10 each Temporary construction keys to Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
− 5 each Construction control keys to General Contractor.
− 5 each Construction control keys to Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
− 20 each Master Keys for each master used, to Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
− 2 each Change keys per core to Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
Additional Key blanks to Owner (SVVSD Lockshop):
− 500 Key blanks for High Schools.
− 250 Key blanks for Middle Schools
− 150 Key blanks for Elementary Schools
n. Failure to comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the cores and keys
involved as deemed necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.
o. Key Storage System: Provide wall mounted metal key storage cabinet.
− Use HPC key cabinet Ǧ KEKABǦKK95X (capacity 95 expandable to 265 with KEKABǦDA expansion leaf) for Elem
entary and Middle Schools
− Use HPC key cabinet Ǧ KEKABǦKK265 for High Schools
6.
Locksets and Latchsets
a. Locksets and latchsets shall be non-handed, standard-duty commercial cylindrical type,with 2-3/4 inch backset or
greater, as specified, with ½ inch throw latchbolt.
b. Lever trim shall be designed to increase resistance against vandalism and forced entry by over torquing of lock chassis. Disablement of secured levers shall not permit latchbolt retraction from secure side while allowing emergency
egress.
c. Furnish units with concealed through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs to prevent lever torque from rotating lock chassis and maintain correct alignment. Equip units with cast auxiliary spring cages with studs to prevent rotation attached
directly to the lock chassis
105
d.
e.
7.
to assist in support of levers.
Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect
frame. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
f. All doors shall be lockable – Passage / Privacy sets are prohibited without Owner approval.
g. Deadbolt type locks are prohibited without Owner approval.
h. Electrified Locksets shall be Fail-secure only.
i. Locksets shall accept specified small format interchangeable cores (SFIC).
j. Product Number: Schlage ND70HD or Best 93K-R-14-D.
− Locations: Faculty / Staff Offices (not adjoining corridors) / Multi-user restrooms (at Middle Schools & High
Schools (Elementary Schools may use Push / Pull hardware)
k. Product Number: ND75HD or Best 93K-IND-14-D.
− Locations: Classrooms or other occupied rooms adjoining corridors (Typical Classroom; Double Cylinder).
l. Product Number: ND80HD or Best 93K-D-14-D.
− Locations: Storage, Custodial Closets, Mechanical, Electrical and IT (Hub) Rooms.
m. Product Number: L9496HD-17A-L583-363 x 09-611 Occupancy Indicator / ND 73HD (some schools may not need
Occupancy Indicator) or Best 93K-T-14-D (Note: H function (Hotel type) locks are prohibited).
− Locations: Faculty Restrooms.
n. Product Number: Schlage ND66HD or Best 93K-S-14-D.
− Locations: Communicating doors between classrooms and offices.
o. Product Number: Schlage ND12HD or Best 93K-0NX-14-D.
− Locations: Exterior Classroom exit doors (Exit only)
p. Mounting Height:
− Elementary Schools: Locks shall be centered 36” to 38” from finished floor.
− Middle and High Schools: Locks shall be centered 40” to 42” from finished floor.
q. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include:
− Schlage Lock ND Series, SFIC, SPA Lever Design.
− Best Access 9K Series, SFIC, #14 Lever Design.
Exit Devices and Mullions
a. Aesthetic Features:
− Exit devices shall have smooth interior body to discourage vandalism and graffiti. Furnish through bolted fasteners for all devices. Where required, provide projecting glass stop kits to provide clearance when used with projecting glass stops.
− Exit device trim shall have ADA compliant levers with shape matching the lockset design.
b. Functions:
− Rim type exit devices shall be used on all doorways requiring exit hardware. When paired doors are required,
they shall be served with a keyed removable center mullion and rim type devices.
− Vertical rod devices are prohibited unless approved by Owner.
− Concealed vertical rod devices are strictly prohibited.
− Provide exit devices of single manufacturer with specified functions, which can accept exterior and interior cylinders of specified cylinders.
− Where specified, furnish devices with (cylinder dogging only) feature (Exception: Dogging strictly prohibited on all
exterior doors, interior doors with Electronic Card Access, or Fire Rated openings).
− All exterior doors requiring exit devices shall have Von Duprin 98 Series with XP feature.
− Exit devices on exterior doors shall not have levers. They shall have pulls only with “night latch” function.
− Latch bolts shall have a deadlocking function and a minimum projection of ¾ inches.
− Electrified exit devices on ADA entrances using Auto Equalizer devices shall interface with those devices using
RX (request to exit) and LX (latch monitoring) switches.
c. Product Number: RXLXEL98NL x 990NL or RXLXEL98DT x 990DT (Note: Levers are prohibited on exterior doors.)
− Locations: Exterior Card Access Entrances.
d. Product Number: LD98NL (device) w/ 990NL
− Locations: Exterior exit only doorways.
e. Product Number: LD98L x 996L x 17 lever
− Locations: Classrooms / Faculty or Staff Offices (not adjoining corridors)
f. Product Number: CD98NL (device) w/ 996L-NL-17 lever
− Locations: Library / Media Center and Gymnasiums, etc. (High traffic doorways)
g. Product Number: LD98L-2 x 996L x 17 lever Double cylinder Classroom Security
− Locations: Classrooms or other occupied rooms adjoining corridors
106
h.
8.
Product Number: 98L-NL (device) w/ 996L-NL-17 lever
− Locations: Custodial areas, Mechanical / Electrical rooms requiring exit devices.
i. Mounting Height:
− Elementary Schools: Push bar on Exit devices shall be centered 36” to 38” from finished floor (or as required by
current ADA regulations). If applicable, mount at the vertical midpoint of the center rail.
− Middle and High Schools: Push bar on Exit devices shall be centered 38” to 40” from finished floor (or as required
by current ADA regulations). If applicable, mount at the vertical midpoint of the center rail.
j. Keyed security removable mullions shall accept security cylinders of specified cylinder manufacturer and be removed
by use of the cylinder. Mullions to be furnished with a self-locking mechanism for reinstallation without the use of the
cylinder. Equip each mullion with mullion stabilizers to maintain integrity between door and mullion to prevent vandalism.
k. All removable mullions should be supplied with a storage bracket or device to hold mullion when removed from doorway.
l. After installation of all exit devices, General Contractor to have Manufacturer’s representative inspect installation. Representative shall submit a written report to the Architect with copies to the General Contractor and hardware supplier
upon completion of service. This report shall include any installation errors, noting door.
m. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include:
− Von Duprin: 98 Series.
Closers and Door Control Devices
a. Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically challenged, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. Except as specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of door control units, depending upon size of
door, exposure to
b. weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
c. Closers shall be cast iron or aluminum construction with forged lever arms, independent adjusting valves for closing,
latching and back check. Hydraulic regulation controlled by tamperproof,non-critical screw valves. All closer adjustments shall be shielded by high impact plastic, cover plate after installation.
d. Furnish extra duty arms, EDA, to protect against excessive force. Provide special template arms to allow clearance
and applications of overhead stops and holders.
e. Furnish TBWMS fasteners; drill and tap for machine screws in all fully reinforced hollow metal doors. Use through
bolts in all wood doors, wood fire doors, and non-reinforced hollow metal applications.
f. Refer to door and frame details, furnish accessories such as drop plates, special templates, spacers and supports as
required to correctly install door closers.
g. Important Note: Installer must verify that proper reinforcement exists in door or frame mounting location prior to installation of closer or auto operator. (i.e. unreinforced hollow metal doors, aluminum frames, etc.)
h. Install closers to allow maximum degree of opening, position backcheck to activate well in advance of the stop position
to cushion the opening swing and prevent door and frame damage.
i. Do not us the standard EDA door closer arm to stop door travel. Desired methods of stop function in order of preference are as follows:
Exterior doors:
− Bollards with high density rubber stops. (Ives FS18S or equivalent) (See Division 05 50 00 / G.1-4)
− Wall Bumpers installed in adjacent wall set in epoxy (Ives FS18S)
− SCUSH EDA arm on door closer.
Interior doors:
− Wall bumpers installed on adjacent wall.
− SCUSH EDA arm on door closer.
− Overhead door stop (Glynn-Johnson 90 series)
− High density rubber floor stop. (Ives FS18S, FS18L)
j. Function applications – Closer arm functions are as follows:
Exterior doors:
− No hold open functions on any exterior door that allows access to interior common areas or classrooms. (Exception: Rear Kitchen Entry)
Interior doors:
− No hold open functions on fire rated openings or doors specified to have magnetic hold opens.
− Hold open (HEDA) arms may be used where wall bumpers or other fixed stops are in use on the following applications:
− Classrooms, labs, work rooms, etc.
107
Staff offices
Custodial office, closets, and work areas
Kitchen
Athletic areas
Spring Cush Hold Open (SHCUSH) arms may be used in the above listed applications when wall bumpers are not
possible.
k. Coordinate with door manufacturer that the top rail of the door is sized appropriately for the surface closer.
l. Doors swinging into exit corridors should provide for corridor clear width as required by applicable codes.
m. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
n. Minimum spring tension settings on the closer should be used to comply with the referenced ADA accessibility requirements while ensuring the door will self-latch.
o. Unless otherwise specified, install closers on push side of the door. (Exception: No closers shall be mounted on the
outside surface of exterior doors.)
p. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include:
− LCN: 4041 EDA-ST3596 Series.
ADA Auto Operators and Actuators
a. Electromechanical low-energy powered door operators, opening force not exceeding 14 lb-force (62 N). Shall conform
to ANSI A156.19 ADA law, section 4.13.12' ANSI A117.1
− UL 325 – Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems.
b. Operation: Push button, push plate, switch-activated, manual or field-programmable manual/electric power assisted
Push 'N' Go opening. Comply with ANSI A156.19 and UL325.
− Electro-mechanical, power open, spring closed design.
− Adjustable manual opening force from 3 – 11 lbs.
− Closing force 3 lb-force
c. Programmable control box and motor/gearbox: contained on formed metal mounted board, complete with integral end
caps; precision-machined gears and bearing seats and all-weather lubricant, mounted on vibration isolators.
− Design for surface-applied application.
d. Compact header, non-handed, reversible design can be used in push or pull operations, left or right. Designed for interior or exterior application. Low to moderate traffic. Exterior application must be mounted on interior side to reduce
exposure to weather. Cover must be removable from front of the header for accessibility.
e. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 26 Sections.
f. General or Electrical Contractor to install all wiring to operator on a separate circuit breaker routed into header. Install
low voltage wiring from actuators to operator.
g. All wiring and/or connections made to the operator shall be routed through the hollow metal frame or aluminum in to
the back of the unit. No surface conduit or flex conduit is to be used. If the frames are not accessible, wiremold can be
used.
h. Fail-safe. In event of power failure, make door operate manually with controlled spring close as though equipped with
a #3 manual door closer, closing force, 3 4 or 5 lbs. without damage to operator components. Microprocessor control:
115 VAC. Do not use cam or reed micro switches.
i. Provide adjustment by microprocessor control for: Opening speed, backcheck speed, backcheck position, hold open,
from 0 to 15 seconds, closing speed, latch position
− Built-in interface for electric strikes or electric latch retraction (ELR). (Note: for 12V AC @ 250 m-amps)
− Interfaces with Power safety devices through built-in transformers.
j. Door opening arm: Forged steel, attached at natural pivot point of door; do not use slide block in top of door. Exposed
arms: factory-polished and finished to match operator enclosure.
− Service conditions: -34 degrees C, (-30 degrees F) and 71degrees C. (160 degrees F).
− Finish of exposed headers: powder coated finish on metal base.
k. Activation and safety devices
− Stainless steel or brass construction
− Wall-mounted push button switch, two recommended per opening. Jamb mounted push button not recommended.
− Provide keyed switch (external mounted) in lieu of integrated toggle power supply switch.
l. Push plate: formed metal plate, satin finish; approximately 5" (127 mm) (round only) with depressed marking; two recommended per opening.
− "Push to operate door", wheelchair logo or plain face
− Card reader (by others)
m. Markings: decals, visible from either side, instructing the user as to the operation and function of the door.
−
−
−
−
−
9.
108
n.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:
− LCN: 4642CS.
10.
Protective Plates
a. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units, Kick plates, edge trim, push/pull plates and
similar units; either machine screws of self-tapping screws.
b. Fabricate protection plates, armor, kick or mop, not more than 2 inches less than door width on stop side and not more
than 1 inch less than door width on pull side, and 1 inch less than the door width on double doors, by the height indicated.
− Size plates to provide clearance for grills, louvers and door lites.
− Metal Plates: Stainless steel plates (0.050).
− Mount ½-inches from bottom of door.
c. Provide Armor plates on the doors at the following locations:
− Band classrooms and corridor doors.
− Kitchen area entry and main access doors.
− Custodial closets and work areas
d. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:
− Ives 8400, (0.050) B3E.
− Rockwood K1062, (0.050) B3E.
− Triangle Brass KO064, (0.050) B3E.
11. Door Stops
a. Furnish heavy duty stainless steel base material, concave or convex wall stops, coincide with lock function, wherever
door strikes wall.
b. Floor stops are not recommended. Exterior doors require bollards with high density rubber stops. (See Division 05 50
00 / G.1-4)
c. Where they must be used, do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic or present tripping hazard. Install at
maximum door swing and out of traffic flow.
d. Provide gray resilient rubber bumpers.
e. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:
− Interior: Ives: WS406 FS436 / FS438 FS9
− Exterior: Ives: FS18S / FS18L (mounted in epoxy).
12. Thresholds, Weatherstripping and Seals
a. Provide continuous seal at jambs and heads and at door bottom. Where specified, provide threshold type with silicone
gasket. Smoke, or sound seals shall be rated in accordance with surrounding wall rating respective to sound or fire
rating or as required
b. by code. Unless otherwise indicated, provide metal threshold units of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled.
Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior and interior applications.
c. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard color range; 0.062
inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
d. Fire rated, smoke and draft control doors must be installed with fire-rated smoke and draft control gasketing. Smoke
and draft control gasket shall be "Listed" for compliance with test procedure UBC Standard 7-2 (97), part 1 and 2. Refer to installation instructions for frame preparation and application guidelines, unless otherwise specified.
e. Fire rated openings and positive pressure requirements: door supplier shall supply special seals, gasketing, intumescent seals and astragals required as described by UBC 7-2, 1997.
f. Install door bottom sweeps on the same side of the door as perimeter seals.
g. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:
− Pemko: 45061CN / 18061NB / 272 / S88D.
− National Guard: A626A / C627 / 613 / 2525B.
13. Fire Department Lock Box:
a. Provide Knox Model No. 3200 Knox Vault (recessed or surface mount as required by Owner) or other lock box as required by local fire department, in quantity and location as directed by the fire department and approved by the Architect. Recessed mount shall be furnished with recessed mounting kit (RMK) for new concrete or masonry construction.
L.
HARDWARE FINISHES
109
1. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or
locksets).
2. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of
hardware.
3. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18,
"Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their
products.
4. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized standard
commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
a. Satin Chrome, Clear Coated: US26D/ANSI 626, ANSI 652.
b. Brushed Stainless Steel, No Coating: US32D/ANSI630.
c. Powder Coated Aluminum finish: ANSI 689.
5. Thresholds and Weatherseal: Thresholds, mill aluminum finish. Weatherseal, clear anodized aluminum finish.
M. EXECUTION
1. Examine substrates to which hardware assemblies attach to hollow metal frames, doors and walls, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, blocking and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies
specified in this Section.
2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3. Remodel Projects: All existing doors and hardware shall be salvaged for Owner during demolition. Salvage is at Owner’s
discretion; Contractor shall dispose of items not salvaged.
N. INSTALLATION
1. Pre-installation Meetings: In compliance with the requirements in Division 01, before their respective installations commence, General Contractor/Construction Manager will request conferences / seminars to be conducted on the following
items:
a. Installation of hollow metal frames to be mounted in masonry walls and steel stud / drywall.
b. Installation of hollow metal and wood doors.
c. Installation of finish hardware; specifically that of locksets, closers, and exit devices.
2. Conference / Seminar on the frame installation to be held at job site. Conference / Seminar on the door hardware installation to be held at job site. Those present at the Door Frame installation Seminar should include:
a. SVVSD Lockshop Locksmith
b. SVVSD Door & Hardware Tech
c. Contractor’s door and hardware subcontractors or (in house) installers (basically anyone who will be physically installing the frames, doors, and hardware)
d. Contractor’s Site Superintendent
e. Aluminum door, frame, and hardware installer(s)
f. Hollow metal frame installers (masonry)
g. Hollow metal frame installers (drywall)
h. SVVSD Project Manager
Note: This seminar is to address proper coordination and installation of hardware, per finish hardware schedule for this
specific project, by using installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates, physical product samples and installation videos. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions, as to ensure correct
technique of installation, and coordination with other work.
3. Conference / Seminar on the Door & hardware installation to be held at job site. Those present at the Door & Hardware installation Seminar should include:
a. SVVSD Lockshop Locksmith
b. SVVSD Door & Hardware Tech
c. Contractor’s door and hardware subcontractors or (in house) installers (basically anyone who will be physically installing the frames, doors, and hardware)
d. Door Hardware Mfg’s representative qualified to present a comprehensive tutorial on the specifics of installing their
products.
e. Contractor’s Site Superintendent
f. SVVSD Project Manager
4. Before electrical rough-in, General Contractor / Construction Manager will request a meeting to inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. Those present should include:
a. SVVSD Electronic Security Tech
110
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SVVSD Door & Hardware Tech
Hardware Supplier
Hardware Installer
Electrical Contractor
Security Contractor
Notify participants at least 10 working days before conference.
This meeting will address the following items:
x Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware
x Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
x Supplier shall notify participants at least five (5) working days before meeting.
***Note: Failure to hold the pre-installation conference / seminars may affect the product warranty.***
Prequalified hardware installers in order of preference:
a. Trinity Custom Carpentry, Broomfield, CO.
b. Jaco Door LLC, Windsor, CO 405 Trailwood Dr. 80550
c. Metro Door Specialties, Aurora, CO.
d. Others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Lockshop).
Automatic operator installer shall be factory trained, certified by AAADM, and experienced to perform the work.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturers written instructions and recommendations. Where cutting
and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9
Sections.
Special Notes:
a. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
b. No impact driven tools to be used in the installation of exit devices and locks.
c. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. (Note: In instances where multiple doors are side by side with
matching hardware, a level control line should be established to allow for a visual alignment of the hardware across all
the doors.) Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
d. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
e. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
f. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation
requirements are not otherwise indicated.
g. Contractor shall salvage for Owner all contents from hardware packaging not needed for specified installation.
O. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. The hardware supplier shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order.
2. Do not install door hardware until painting is complete and dry. Loosen all existing hardware prior to painting, mask to ensure hardware remains free of paint. Retighten secure once paint is fully dry.
3. Manufacturer’s representatives for, locksets, cylinders, exit devices and door closers, are to inspect and approve, in writing,
certification that items have been properly installed and are functioning in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended
installation procedures after installation. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature)
in the performance of the hardware.
4. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware installation, prepare written report and state in each report
whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed
and adjusted.
P.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
2. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the
installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in
such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
3. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
111
4. Manufacturer’s representatives for, locksets, cylinders, exit devices and door closers shall instruct Owner's personnel in the
proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.
5. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by
representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware
suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:
6. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with
specified requirements.
7. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.
8. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units.
9. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
10. Manufacturer’s representatives for, locksets, cylinders, exit devices and door closers, are to inspect and approve, in writing,
certification that items have been properly installed and are functioning in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended
installation procedures after installation. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature)
in the performance of the hardware.
Q. ACCEPTANCE
1. Warranty shall not start until Owner Acceptance. Acceptance shall be withheld until the following activities have been successfully completed: Commissioning per paragraph 1.8.
2. Completion of items on Owner’s Punchlist.
3. Delivery and Acceptance of all Operations and maintenance manuals.
4. Successful Final Test and Inspection of Security System.
R. HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers
indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
2. Manufacturer Legend:
− (BES) Best Access Systems
− (BYO) By Others
− (DLR) Hardware Dealer/Supplier
− (GLY) Glynn Johnson
− (IVE) Ives
− (LCN) LCN
− (NGP) National Guard Products
− (SCE) Schlage Electrical Products
− (SCH) Schlage
− (VON) Von Duprin
3. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers
indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
4. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. Notify
the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract
Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening.
112
113
DIVISION 08 80 00
GLAZING
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications:
a. Doors.
b. Glazed entrances.
c. Interior borrowed lites.
d. Storefront framing.
e. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.
f. Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.
g. Monolithic acrylic glazing.
2. All glazing types shall be noted on the exterior elevations for each opening. The intention of this requirement is for
record-keeping for repairs.
B.
C. GLASS PRODUCTS
1. Architect shall size glazing to facilitate replacement (8' x 8' maximum size). Larger sizes to be approved by the School District.
2. Insulating glass is mandatory for exterior applications and tinted or low “E” glass (higher shading coefficient) is preferred
over clear glass or reflective glass.
3. Provide tempered or laminated safety glass in areas as required by the IBC. The School District prefers to use laminated
safety glass.
4. Insulating glass shall be factory double sealed units with ½" minimum air space.
5. Labels: Every individual piece of glass shall bear a label designating type, thickness and quality.
6. Tint Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Review with SVVSD District prior to final selection.
7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
8. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include:
EFCO
Vistawall / Oldcastle, Inc.
Kawneer
Others must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD / Building Systems / Lockshop).
D. RECOMMENDED CLASSROOM GLAZING SCHEDULE
1. Solar control low-E insulating glass units (North exposure):
a. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch overall (25.2 mm) and 1/4 inch per lite (6.0 mm).
b. Interspace Content: Air.
c. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 Green (match GL-2) float glass heat strengthened with low-E coating on No. 2 surface.
d. Indoor Lite: Class 1 clear float glass heat strengthened.
e. Visible Light Transmittance: 62 to 70 percent.
f. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.32 maximum.
g. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum.
h. Shading Coefficient: 0.35 to 0.45.
i. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40 percent maximum.
j. Exterior Reflectance: 9 to 11 percent.
2.
Solar control low-E insulating glass units (East, South and West exposure):
a. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch overall (25.2 mm) and 1/4 inch per lite (6.0 mm).
c. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 Green (match GL-3) float glass surface heat strengthened with low-E coating on No. 2 surface.
d. Indoor Lite: Class 1 clear float glass heat strengthened.
e. Visible Light Transmittance: 32 to 36 percent.
114
g.
h.
i.
j.
Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum.
Shading Coefficient: 0.24 to 0.30.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.22 percent maximum.
Exterior Reflectance: 10 to 12 percent.
3.
Translucent insulating glass units (East, South and West Daylighting/Clerestory):
a. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch overall (25.2 mm) and 1/4 inch exterior lite (6.0 mm) and 3/8
inch interior lite (8 mm).
c. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 Green (match GL-4) float glass surface heat strengthened with low-E coating on No. 2 surface.
d. Indoor Lite: Laminated glass (from exterior to interior) 3/16 inch Class 1 clear float glass heat strengthened with sandblast on No. 3 surface and 0.030 frosted (Arctic Snow or similar) pvb and 3/16 inch clear.
e. Visible Light Transmittance: 26 percent.
g. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum.
h. Shading Coefficient: 0.28 to 0.32.
i. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.22 to 0.26.
j. Exterior Reflectance: 10 to 12 percent.
4.
Spandrel Glazing (Exterior): Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 inch overall and 1/4 inch per lite.
a. Interspace Content: Air.
b. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 float glass surface heat strengthened with low-E coating with painted #4 opaque surface interior.
c. Indoor Lite: Class 1 clear float glass heat strengthened.
5.
Interior Glass: Float: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedule below.
a. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass where safety glass is indicated or where required by applicable laws and
Codes.
b. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) products where coated safety glass at all locations required by Code.
6.
Ceramic-Coated Glass: Allowed only with District approval of application.
7.
Laminated Glass: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to
comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in
16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
a. Interlayer Color: As selected by Architect.
8.
Interior Fire Rated: Specialty glazing allowed only with District approval of application.
E.
MIRRORS
1. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503.
2. Tempered Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
3. Mirror Size: At Fitness and Exercise Rooms provide a max. width of single unit shall be 36”. Provide top and bottom frame
for continuous run of mirrors along wall as directed by SVVSD. Hold mirror units a min. of 24” AFF. Locate outlet below
units.
4. Restroom/Toilets: Provide full framed mirror units in manufactures standard sizes.
5. Mirror Hardware: Aluminum J-Channels (top and bottom) Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a
glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of
each mirror in a single piece. Finish shall be clear bright anodized.
Avalon Glass and Mirror Company.
Gilded Mirrors, Inc.
National Glass Industries.
F.
MONOLITHIC ACRYLIC GLAZING
115
1.
2.
3.
Plastic Glazing: Transparent acrylic sheet; ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell cast), Finish 1 (smooth or polished),
Type UVF (UV filtering).
Color: Colorless.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
Altuglas International, Division of Arkema Inc.; Plexiglas G.
Cyro Industries, a subsidiary of Degussa Corporation; Acrylite GP.
Spartech Corporation; Polycast.
116
117
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
118
119
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
DIVISION 09 00 00
FINISH DESIGN CRITERIA
A. GENERAL
1. Kitchen walls and ceilings must be constructed of materials that will not suffer damage as a result of repeated washing.
2. Kitchen and toilet room floors shall be seamless material, or other approved non-porous material with wainscot.
3. Vitreous type glazes should not be used on exterior walls or walls exposed to moisture, glazed structural tile are recommended.
4. No carpet in corridors or hallways.
5. Science rooms shall be BBT or VCT.
6. Marmoleum / Florbo is not allowed by District
7. At Gymnasiums, walls to door height should be of materials resistant to hard use. Finishes should be non-abrasive, resistant to marking and scarring, and of material that can easily be cleaned.
8. Gym floors in Elementary Schools: Consider carpet sports floor covering as well as third grade maple. used onexterior walls
or walls exposed to moisture, glazed structural tile are recommended.
9. Gym floors in Secondary Schools - synthetic materials or second (or third) grade maple parallel with long dimension of gym.
Allowance is to be made for expansion of the floors. There shall be adequate protection from moisture gain from floor base.
10. Floors around shop machinery shall be non-skid, abrasive, oil resistant type.
11. Ramps and locker room floors shall have non-slip surface.
12. Resilient flooring shall be provided in art and science rooms, and near sinks in classrooms, cafeteria, and applied technology labs and applied technology labs.
13. Install either ceramic tile wainscot to approximately 4’-0”A.F.F., or install stainless steel panels on either on crete, masonry
or cement backer board.
14. At mop sinks: Install either ceramic tile wainscot to approximately 4’-0” AFF
DIVISION 09 20 00
PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes:
a. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
b. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
c. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
d. Shaft-wall enclosures.
e. Interior gypsum board.
f. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
g. Tile backing panels.
2. All penetrations through walls/partitions shall be sleeved.
B.
3. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.1 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings and IEQ 4.2 Low-Emitting: All adhesives, sealants,
paints and coatings used on the inside of the building shall comply with LEED VOC limitations.
C. NON-LOAD-BEARING METAL FRAMING & SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
1. Installation Limitations (Wall and Partitions):
a. At secure areas (i.e. Administration, offices, computer rooms, IMC) extend partitions to underside of structure.
b. For stud wall framing at potentially “ wet” plumbing areas, consider construing framing on concrete curb or otherwise
detailed to permanently prevent moisture from reaching base channel.
c. Attach suspension systems to structural members only. Attachment to steel deck is specifically prohibited.
d. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation
strip between studs and exterior wall.
e. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of
framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
120
f.
2.
3.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support
closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
Steel Studs Criteria:
a. 25 gauge min. for interior applications.
b. 16 gauge min for exterior and 2-leaf door jamb applications.
c. 20 gauge double steel studs at door jamb frames.
Maximum spacing of framing members:
a. Walls and Partitions – 16” o.c.
b. Ceilings and Soffits – 24 inches o.c.; 16 inches o.c. for exterior soffits.
D. METAL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
1. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
2. Installation Limitations (Ceiling System):
a. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of
supporting structural or suspension system.
b. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
c. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
d. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
3. Framing Criteria:
a. Up to 8’ to 9’ Span: 3-5/8 inch, 25 gauge, at 24 inch o.c.
b. Over 8’ to 9’ Span: 3-5/8 inch, 25 gauge, at 16 inch o.c.
c. More than 10’-9” Span: Suspended with metal grillage.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
E.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
1. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies as required.
2. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.
3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels and with moisture- and mold-resistant core
and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick.
4. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754
American Gypsum Company.
G-P Gypsum.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
USG Corporation
F.
LATH AND PLASTER
1. SUMMARY
a. Furring and Lathing.
b. Gypsum Plaster.
c. Veneer Plaster.
d. Portland Cement Plaster.
e. Adobe Finish: Not Permitted.
f. Plaster Fabrications.
2. Galvanized components preferred. Use of plastic materials is discouraged.
3. Control Joints: 26 gauge (minimum) zinc prefabricated profile.
4. Acrylic additives preferred in the mix of each coat
5. Expansion and control joints required to form maximum sized panels of 100 sq. ft. and maximum dimension of 20 feet.
121
G. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
1. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated
and whichever is more stringent.
2. Texture: Light orange peel texture or match existing wall texture.
3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap
where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
4. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
5. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated.
6. Regular Type: Thickness shall be 5/8 inch unless otherwise required.
7. Fire-resistance Type: Thickness as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly
8. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than regular-type gypsum board. Thickness: 1/4
inch
9. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. Thickness: 5/8 inch
10. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation, through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
a. Locations: 48 inches above finished floor.
11. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. Core: 5/8 inch
12. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. Core:
5/8 inch
13. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Core: 5/8 inch
14. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board:
a. Core: 5/8 inch
b. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
c. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
American Gypsum Co.
G-P Gypsum.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
USG Corporation.
DIVISION 09 30 00
TILING
A. SUMMARY
a. Ceramic floor and wall tile.
b. Porcelain wall and floor tile.
c. Stone tile wall accent.
d. Waterproofing and crack-isolation membrane for thin-set tile installations.
2. Provide flooring, base and preformed profiles of each material and each color and pattern. Quantities to be determined.
3. Attachment: Thin set mortar only; mastic prohibited.
B.
3. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring Systems.
C. LOCATION OF USE
1. Walls (full height):
a. Restrooms (wall with plumbing fixtures or directly adjacent to the fixture)
b. Shower rooms.
c. Mop sinks in custodial closets (may be partial height).
2. Floors:
a. Restrooms.
b. Locker and Shower Rooms.
122
D. PRODUCTS
1. Domestic manufacturers strongly preferred.
2. Use of imported materials is discouraged.
3. Recycled Content:
4. Provide tile with minimum 77% post consumer recycled content.
5. Provide paver tile with 100% post consumer recycled glass content.
E.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
1. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
2. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring
that finishes flush with top of tile.
3. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven
polyester fabric.
DIVISION 09 50 00
CEILINGS
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes acoustical panels, exposed suspension systems for ceilings and acoustical diffuser panels.
B.
2. Materials Requirements for Credit IEQ p3: Materials/products shall have an NRC rating of 0.7 or higher for all core learning
spaces.
C. LOCATION OF USE
1. Lay-in grid type ceiling systems prohibited in the following locations:
a. Toilet rooms.
b. Gymnasium.
c. Locker rooms
d. Storage areas
e. Utility areas
f. Exterior applications
2. Minimum Ceiling Heights:
a. Elementary School – 8’-0”
b. Middle School – 8’-0”
c. High School – 8’-0”
D. ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS MATERIAL
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels (Standard), Armstrong World Industries, or USG:
2. Size: 24" x 48" or 24".
3. Material: compressed mineral fiber.
4. Thickness: 5/8-inch minimum.
5. Texture: Non-directional fissure.
6. Finish:
a. Impact-resistant coating required at corridors, high use and non-assignable areas.
b. Mylar or other impervious finish required at food service areas.
7. Edge: Square or Tegular, review with SVVSD
8. Color: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied white.
9. STC Rating: 35 to 39 required in assignable spaces only.
10. Reflectance: 0.75 (minimum).
11. Fire rating: Class A; 1-hour rated materials throughout. Limit rated ceiling construction assemblies to those areas required
by code.
12. Extra materials: Panels only at 1% of installed quantity rounded up to the nearest full carton.
13. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following:
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
123
Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
E.
ACOUSTICAL DIFFUSER PANELS
1. Provide acoustical diffuser panels in areas of concentrated instrumental performance areas, including Music and Choral
classrooms. Consider the use of panels in Auditorium or other performance venues.
2. Type: Pyramidal ceiling diffuser, impact resistant, fiberglass.
3. STC: 23
4. Size: 48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm).
Wenger Corporation
Wall Technology,
CDC Corporation, an Owens Corning Company.
F.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
1. Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished metal caps on flanges.
2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system
3. Finish: Painted white.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
Tectum Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
G. INSTALLATION
1. Ceiling tie wires at 6’-0” o.c. each way. One tie wire supporting grid at each corner of lay-in light fixture
2. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each
ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.
3. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does
not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
DIVISION 09 60 00
FLOORING
A. SUMMARY
a. Wood flooring with 1/4 inch tempered hard board surface for stage applications.
b. Fluid-Applied Athletic Flooring
c. Wood sports-floor assemblies.
d. Resilient base, stair accessories.
e. BioBased floor tile
f. Static-dissipative, vinyl tile floor covering.
g. Rubber sheet floor covering for Weight Rm.
h. Thin-set epoxy-resin terrazzo tile
i. Resinous flooring
j. Level loop pile carpet.
k. Modular carpet tile.
l. Diamond Polished Concrete Flooring
124
B.
5. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring Systems.
C. STAGE FLOORING SYSTEM
1. Sleepers - 2 by 4 inch fir or pine, preservative dip treated with Woodlife preservative.
2. Plywood - C-C grade, plugged and touch sanded, exterior, 23/32 inch thick 4 by 8 feet.
3. Strand Board - 4 by 8 feet by 23/32 inch oriented strand board (OSB) Sheathing “Sturdi Floor”
4. Tempered Hardboard Surface - 3/16 inch thick by 4 by 8 feet hardboard panels tempered and smooth both sides, “Duron”
as manufactured by Masonite Corporation, Chicago, Illinois.
5. Field Finish: Flat black
D. FLUID-APPLIED ATHLETIC FLOORING
1. Primary use of flooring will be for Elementary or Middle School Gymnasiums
2. Polyurethane Flooring Over Rubberized Base Mat System: Total Thickness: Minimum 1/4 in; with minimum.07 in polyurethane.
a. Base Mat: Prefabricated rubber mat of recycled rubber granules in polyurethane binder.
b. Sealer: Manufacturer's standard two-component polyurethane compound designed to seal base mat before application
of resin topcoat.
c. Resin: Two-component, solid, pigmented, self-leveling polyurethane without fillers, zero mercury formulation, with
properties as follows:
d. Tensile strength: Minimum 1000 psi, per ASTM D 412.
e. Hardness: Minimum 70, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240 using Type A durometer.
f. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 100 percent, per ASTM D 412.
3. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
Connor Sports Flooring; "Elastiplus": www.connorfloor.com.
Robbins Sports Surfaces; "Pulastic 9+2": www.robbinsfloor.com.
Action Floor Systems; "Hurculan MF": www.actionfloors.com.
4. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710.
E.
WOOD ATLETIC FLOORING SYSTEM
1. System Type: Anchored resilient.
2. Strip Flooring: Northern hard maple (Acer saccharum), kiln dried, random length, tongue and groove, and end matched.
3. Grade: Second and Better.
4. Thickness: 25/32 inch
5. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches
6. Floor-Finish System: Type: MFMA Group 5, Water-Based Finishes; Compatible components to the flooring manufacturer,
and MFMA approved.
7. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Industrial enamel compatible with finish coats and recommended in writing by manufacturers
of finish coats, and paint for this use.
8. Floor Graphics/Logo: Provide allowance for the school logo or mascot to be painted on the floor in location(s) as chosen by
the school.
9. Resilient Wall Base: Molded, vented, rubber; 4 by 3 by 48 inches; with premolded outside corners.
10. Color: Black.
11. Thresholds: Provide thresholds at all doorways that have a change of floor materials adjacent to the wood floor.
F.
WOOD ATLETIC FLOORING SUBFLOOR SYSTEM
1. Plywood Underlayment: APA rated, C-D Plugged, exterior glue, tongue and groove, 15/32 inch thick.
2. Wood Sleepers: Standard grade; 48 inches long; kiln-dried Eastern hemlock, fir, pine, or spruce.
3. Preservative Treatment: Clear, penetrating, water-repellent wood preservative that protects against mold, mildew, staining,
and decay fungi; complying with MFMA's written recommendations and applied by immersion.
125
4.
5.
6.
7.
Resilient Pads: With air voids for resiliency and installed at manufacturer's standard spacing for product designation indicated above.
Type: Manufacturer’s PVC standard, Thickness: 7/16 inch.
Resilient Underlayment: Flexible, multicellular, closed-cell, expanded polyethylene-foam sheet; nominal 2-lb/cu. ft. density.
Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick.
G. WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING INSTALLATION
1. Protect wood from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood components until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic
tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry.
2. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8-inch (3-mm) deviation in any direction
when checked with a 10-foot straight edge.
H. RESILIENT BASE
1. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset)
2. Style: Cove (base with toe).
3. Height: 4 inches
4. Outside Corners: Preformed.
5. Inside Corners: Job formed.
6. Extra Material: Provide 1 per cent of installed quantity but not less than 12 lineal feet.
Johnsonite
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
I.
RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES
1. Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). Class 1, Raised-rib design.
2. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees.
3. Nosing Height: 2 inches (51 mm).
4. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
Johnsonite
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
J.
BIOBASED COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
1. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid-color tile or Class 2, through-pattern tile.
2. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
3. Size: 12 by 12 inches
4. Extra Materials: Tile in the amount of not less than one percent of each type and color, including one case rubber base cove
and one gallon or each type of adhesive used, shall be turned over to the St. Vrain Valley School District
5. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test,
ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
6. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of
room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; BIOBASED TILE Migrations
AB ColorPlus, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.
Mannington Mills, Inc.
Tarkett, Inc.
Vinylasa Tile, Distributed by American Tile Inc.
126
K.
STATIC-DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS
1. Static-Dissipative, Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: ASTM F 1066 (vinyl composition floor tile, nonasbestos formulated),
Class 2 (through-pattern tile).
2. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
3. Cleaning and Protection: Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings.
4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, , but are not limited to the following:
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Excelon SDT (Basis-of-Design).
AB ElectroStatic, a division of American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.; Electrotile Static-Dissipative (STD).
Flexco; Static Dissipative Solid Vinyl Tile.
L.
RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING
1. Description: Adhered rubber athletic flooring provided as rolled goods for adhered installation. Provide at Weight/Fitness
Room only.
2. Material: Rubber wear layer and rubber shock-absorbent layer, vulcanized together.
3. Installation Method:
4. Traffic-Surface Texture: Sealskin.
5. Roll Size: Not less than 36 inches wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing during installation.
Mondo, Inc.; Advance + Sport Impact
Aacer Flooring, LLC.
Connor Sports Flooring, Inc.
Robbins Sports Surfaces.
M. TERAZZO
1. Portland Cement Terrazzo: Preferred. Prior approval from SVVSD's Design and Construction Services Department required.
2. Precast Terrazzo: Use discouraged.
3. Conductive Terrazzo: Use discouraged.
4. Plastic Matrix Terrazzo: Use discouraged.
N. EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO TILE
1. Terrazzo Tile: Marble or granite chips embedded in flexible thermoset polyester resin matrix, with random distribution of
chips and smooth factory applied urethane coating cured by ultra violet exposure process.
2. Compressive Strength: Between 2900 and 5000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 109/C 109M or ASTM D 695.
3. Coefficient of Friction: Greater than 0.7, average 0.74, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2047.
4. Flame Spread Index: 15, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
5. Thin-Set Divider Strips: L-type angle or T-type, 1/4 inch deep, aluminum.
6. Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match material, thickness, and color of
divider
7. Moisture Testing:Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by terrazzo manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Fritz Industries, Inc.; Fritztile
O. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE
1. Refer to Division 03-30-00 Cast-in-Place Concrete for requirements of diamond polished concrete.
P.
RESINOUS FLOORING
1. Resinous Flooring: Abrasion-, impact- and chemical-resistant, decorative-aggregate-filled, epoxy-resin-based, monolithic
floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and 6” integral cove base.
2. Flakes for Broadcasting: Color to be selected by Architect.
3. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance.
4. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application only after substrates have maximum
moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) of slab in 24 hours.
5. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.
Silikal
127
Q. CARPET
1. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 10 years from
date of Substantial Completion.
2. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
a. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
b. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
4. Tufted Carpet Specification:
a. Fiber System: TDX Nylon.
b. Construction Type: Level loop.
c. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria; not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per AATCC 174.
d. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements the following:
Collins & Aikman Floor Coverings; Applause II
Mannington Mills Inc., Centerfield III 20
Shaw, Hit the Books
5. Carpet Tile Specification:
a. Locations of use: Carpet tile use should be limited and reviewed with SVVSD.
b. Size: 18 by 18 inches (457 by 457 mm).
c. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements the following:
Collins & Aikman Floor Coverings; Applause II
Mannington Mills Inc., Centerfield III 20
Shaw, Hit the Books
6. Application: Provide static free carpet in PC labs.
No carpet allowed on stair/nosing .
No carpet in corridors.
DIVISION 09 70 00
WALL COVERINGS
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes vinyl wall covering
2. Wall covering shall have Class 1 or A flame spread rating of 5 or less and smoke developed/fuel contributed rating of 0
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Vinyl wall covering may be the finish wall surface in classrooms and offices and in corridors of schools, except vinyl l wall
coverings shall not be used on interior surfaces of exterior walls.
4. Walls scheduled to receive vinyl wall covering shall also received vinyl wall covering behind display boards.
B.
EXTRA MATERIAL
1. Furnish Owner on complete roll (30 yds.) of vinyl wall covering for each color and pattern of material selected.
DIVISION 09 80 00
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes shop-fabricated, fabric-wrapped sound-absorbing wall panels.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of soundabsorbing wall units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from
C. SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS
1. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front
face, edges, and back edge border of core.
2. Core-Face Layer: Manufacturer's standard tackable, impact-resistant, high-density board.
128
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core.
Corner Detail in Elevation: Square.
Facing Material: Fabric from manf. standard line
Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC or SAA of 0.50 to 0.90 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795.
Panel Size: The width, height and thickness shall be determined by the acoustical criteria for the project, Min. thickness
shall be .75 inches.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available but are not limited to the following:
Wall Technology, Inc
Armstrong World Industries
Decoustics Limited
Tectum Inc.
DIVISION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
a. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
b. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
c. High-performance coatings.
B.
EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Furnish Owner clean, new, one-quart cans of paints used on the Project, well marked, indicating location of each color and
type material used. One can if less than 1,000 square feet, two cans if over 1,000 square feet covered.
D. APPLICATION
1. Designer is limited to 5 colors for the interior of new buildings; match existing paint for remodel projects. Maximum 10 colors for each project.
2. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a
smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
3. Provide light orange peal roller applied texture to all painted gyp. board walls. No flat finishes will be acceptable.
4. Colors: Depending upon the size of the project, the designer should limit the number of paint colors to assist the District with
ongoing maintainace.
5. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
6. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
7. Oil based coatings prohibited.
8. Paint Schedule:
SURFACE
Exterior:
Primed metal (hollow metal doors and frames)
Primed metal (other locations)
Primed metal, epoxy shop primer
(stairs and handrails/guardrails)
Galvanized
Aluminum
Boiler stacks
Gypsum board
Interior:
Primed steel (hollow metal doors and frames)
Primed metal, epoxy shop primer
(stairs and handrails/guardrails)
SYSTEM
PREPARATION
M-5
EM-1
EM-7
Remove rust, touch up shop coat.
SSPC SP6 for failed or damaged areas and welds.
EM-2
EM-3
EM-4
EG-1
SSPC-SP1, solvent clean.
SSPC-SP1, solvent clean.
Remove rust, SSPC-SP10.
IM-1
IM-7
SSPC SP6 for failed or damaged
129
Galvanized
Exposed overhead stl and mtl. deck
Wood, paint
Wood, stain
CMU
CMU, epoxy
CMU, epoxy at kitchen, dry
Gypsum board – Ceilings
Gypsum board – Walls
Gypsum board – Epoxy
Gypsum board – Epoxy
Insulating pipes
IM-6
OH-1
IW-3
IW-4
IC-5
IC-6
IC-7`
IG-2
IG-3
IG-5
IG-6
IP-1
9. Paint Systems:
System
Mfr
EM-1
K
EM-2
K
EM-3
K
EG-1
K
IM-1
K
IW-3
K
IW-4
K
Type
Waterborne DTM
Waterborne DTM
Waterborne DTM
Acrylic latex
Waterborne DTM
Acrylic latex
Urethane, stain
IC-5
IC-6
IG-2
IG-3
IG-5
IP-1
IA-1
Acrylic latex
1
Water base epoxy 1
Acrylic latex
1
Acrylic latex
1
Water base epoxy 1
Acrylic latex
1
As above for surfaces
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
Prime*
1
1
1
Finish
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Chemical phosphate etch, solvent clean.
Clean, touch-up shop coat.
Fill, sand, seal knots with shellac.
Fill, sand, putty nail holes after Sealing.
Clean, neutralize surfaces.
Clean.
Clean.
Clean.
Clean
Clean
Gloss
Semi
Semi
Semi
Satin
Semi
Semi
Dry Film (Mils)
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.2
4.0
2.8
Notes(H)
Stain
Semi
Semi
Semi
Semi
Semi
Semi
Semi
2.0
2.8
5.0
2.8
2.8
5.0
2.8
2.8
C
J
J,B
A
A
B
N
D
A
Notes:
A = Apply light orange peel texture with roller.
B = Spray apply.
C = Mix stain with paste wood filler for open grained wood.
D = Deeptone accent colors.
F = “Wet Fall” protective coating. Protect floors, walls, and equipment.
I = Listed prime coat for touch-up at welds and damaged areas.
J = Apply block filler by spray and backroll to fill all voids and pin holes.
N = Wherever uninsulated piping or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls or ceilings are finished, paint piping or ductwork as
called for under primed or galvanized metal (except at OH-1).
O = Trowel apply block filler to provide smooth, non-porous surface. Spray or brush application of block filler is not acceptable to
local health department.
E.
MANUFACTURERS
1. Products: Provide one of the products in the paint schedules.
2. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of
their names, which are shown in parentheses:
Sherwin-Williams Company
Kwal Howell Paint Co.
F.
EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
1. Primers/Sealers:
a. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior applications.
Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer A24W00300
Kwal Paint; 5862 Embassy WB 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Primer/Sealer.
130
2.
b.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory-formulated alkyd- or alkali-resistant acrylic latex primer for exterior applications.
Kwal Paint; 5810 Ambassador G-Prime 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Primer
c.
Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior applications.
Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50WZ0001
Kwal Paint; 9210 Accu-Pro Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer.
d.
Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior applications.
Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Solvent Based Acrylic Coating B50WZ0030
Kwal Paint; 5810 Ambassador G-Prime 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Primer.
Finish Coats:
a. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Coating: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic coating for exterior application.
b. Location: All exterior doors.
Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic, Series B66-650
Kwal Accu Guard Waterborne DTM
c.
d.
Exterior Latex Satin for Exterior Metals: Factory-formulated latex satin for exterior applications.
Location: Exterior metals.
Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82-100 Series
Kwal Liquid Vinyl 100% Acrylic Stain
e.
Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior applications.
Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Gloss A84 Series
Kwal Paint; 3200 Ambassador 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Block Resistant Enamel.
f.
Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acryliclatex enamel for exterior applications.
Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex High Gloss Enamel A85 Series
Kwal Paint; 8400 Ambassador 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Gloss Enamel.
G. INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
1. Interior Wall Painting, General: All paint finishes shall be semi-gloss enamel. No flat paint finishes allowed. High humidity
and high use areas (including but not limited to kitchens and restrooms) shall be coated with epoxy based paint.
a. Block Fillers (Interior Latex Block Filler):
Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Block Filler B25W00025
Kwal Paint; Ultratech C302 Inteior-Exterior 100% Acrylic Block Filler.
2. Primers:
a. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior applications.
Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer
Kwal Paint; Ultratech C-251 Exterior Acrylic – Epoxy Concrete and Masonry Sealer.
b. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior applications, light orange peel on all
interior walls.
Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series
Kwal Paint; Ultratech C-152 Interior Latex Primer-Sealer.
c.
Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semi-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acryliclatex-based interior wood primer.
Sherwin-Williams; Premium Wall and Wood/B51W8020 multi-purpose latex primer
Kwal Paint; Ultratech C-152 Interior Latex Primer-Sealer.
d.
Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer.
Sherwin-Williams;Pro-Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Paint; Ultratech C-309 Universal Water-Based Metal Primer.
131
e.
3.
Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer.
Sherwin-Williams; Pro-Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic, Series B66-650 (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Paint; 8200 Accu-Guard Semi-Glass DTm Enamel.
Finish Coat:
a. Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Coating: Factory-formulated semi-gloss acrylic coating for interior application. Location: All
interior hollow metal doors and frames.
Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic, Series B66-650 (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Paint; 8200 Accu-Guard Semi-Gloss DTM Enamel.
b.
c.
Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Paint: Factory-formulated semi-gloss latex paint for interior application.
Location: All interior walls.
Sherwin-Williams; ProGreen Interior Latex Paint (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Paint; Ultratech C-136.
d.
e.
Interior Semi-Gloss Waterbased Epoxy: Factory-formulated pre-catalyzed waterbased epoxy for interior application.
Location: All wet areas.
Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial, K46, Series 150 (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Embassy
f.
Interior Clear Oil-Based Polyurethane: Factory-formulated oil-based polyurethane for interior application.
Waterborne Acrylic Urethane
g.
Location: Architectural wood and Interior wood casework.
Minwax® Water-Based Oil-Modified Polyurethane (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Wood Kraft Waterborne Acrylic Urethane
h.
Interior Waterborne Coating: Factory-formulated VOC compliant, waterborne coating for interior application.
i.
Location: Stage floor, Color: Black.
Sherwin-Williams; Porch & Floor Enamel, A32-100 Series (Basis-of-Design).
Kwal Accupro Exterior
H. INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
1. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items and shop primers shall be compatible with paint systems specified below.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibiting primer, minimum 3.0 mils DFT.
b. Intermediate Coat: Minimum 3.0 mils DFT.
c. Finish Coat: Minimum 3.0 mils DFT.
2.
I.
Galvanized Metal:
EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
1. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items and shop primers shall be compatible with paint systems specified below.
2.
Galvanized Metal:
132
133
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITIES
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
134
135
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 10 10 00
INFORMATION SPECIALITES
A. SUMMARY
a. Markerboards.
b. Tackboards.
c. Bulletin boards.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.
that retains material integrity. Materials Requirements for IEQ 4.1 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings and IEQ 4.2 LowEmitting Adhesives and Sealants.
D. MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with integral frame.
2. Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) plywood with, 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet 0.013-inch- (0.35-mm-)
thick, galvanized-steel sheet backing.
3. Color: White.
4. Size: 4’ high by required length, board up to 12’ in length shall be in one piece.
5. Accessories:
a. Continuous map rail.
b. Continuous tray.
c. Music staff lines on units in Music Rooms.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Greensteel Inc.
New Line Products Inc.
E.
TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. Integral aluminum frame, 1/4-inch unfaced sheet cork factory bonded to 3/8-inch fiberboard or comparable backing.
2. Size: 4’ high by required length
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Greensteel Inc.
New Line Products Inc.
DIVISION 10 15 00
SIGNAGE
A. SUMMARY
a. ADA tactile room panel signs.
b. Cast metal plaques.
c. Panel signs.
d. Cast metal letters.
e. Room evacuation signs.
f. Self-adhered vinyl graphics.
g. Electronic message signage.
136
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
D. ADA TACTILE ROOM PANEL SIGNS
1. Type: Recycled rigid acrylic ABS material substrate.
2. Raised Copy: Machine cut copy to be 1/8 inch thick, non-glare acrylic, recessed a minimum 9f 1/16 inch into substrate such
that copy is raised above surface at least 1/32 inch.
3. Changeable message slots shall be formed by solid color spacers on backplate.
4. Corner Condition: Radius.
5. Braille shall be Grade 2, raised 1/32”.
6. Install signs with tamper resistant adhesive.
7. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible,
such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls.
8. Room Signs with message window shall be 7”h x 5.5”w ( provide two 1” h message slots)
9. Room Signs with message window shall be 7”h x 5.5”w ( provide single 4.5” h message slots)
10. Symbol Signs shall be 7”h x 6”w
11. General Room Signs shall be 3”h x 5.5”w (no message slot)
Signage Inc.
Best Manufacturing Co.
ASI Sign Systems
Platte Valley Signs
Division Ten Signage Corp.
E.
PLAQUES
1. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects, as follows:
2. Plaque Material: Bronze.
3. Plaque Size: 18-inches wide by 24-inches high.
4. Characters: Copy to include date, Project name, 7 school Board Members, Architect, and Contractor, and be photo etched.
5. Border: Plane bevel.
Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.
R. K. Ramos.
Mills Manufacturing Company.
Southwell Company
F.
ROOM EVACUATION SIGNS
1. Provide wall mounted acrylic sign holder, with ¾” black boarder. Size shall be 17”w x 11”h.
2. Graphics: Architect will provide Drawing files of Floor Plan for Contractor’s use in preparing evacuation signage. Coordinate
final copy/layout with Owner.
Siegel Display Products
G. ELECTRIC MESSAGE SIGNAGE
1. Electronic Signage: Location, mounting, display type, display technology, color and software as indicated.
2. Mounting: Attach to monument sign.
3. Graphic Capability: Text, graphics, logos, basic animation, multiple font styles and sizes.
4. Control Software: Venus® 1500
5. Communication Options: Wire Ethernet, Fiber Ethernet, Wireless Ethernet Bridge, WiFi Ethernet.
Daktronics, Type AF-3500
137
Adtronics.
Trans-Lux Corp.
Sunrise Systems, Inc.
DIVISION 10 20 00
INTERIOR SPECIALTIES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes solid phenolic or high-density polyethylene (HDPE) toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and
urinal screens.
2. Toilet compartments shall not be braced to the ceiling, use OH rails and full length continuous wall and floor supports for
stability.
B.
C. SOLID PHENOLIC UNITS
1. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
2. Urinal-Screen Style: Overhead braced.
3. Full-Height (Continuous) Hinge Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
4. Stiles and Doors thickness: 3/4 inch
5. Panels: 1inch
6. Color: SVVSD standard color
7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available but are not limited to the following:
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; SierraSeries®
Accurate Partitions Corporation.
American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
D. SOLID-POLYMER UNITS
1. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1
inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
Accurate Partitions Corporation.
Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
General Partitions Mfg. Corp
E.
CUBICLE CURTAIN
1. Provide in Clinic as privacy curtains for each patient area
2. Extruded-Aluminum Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high (32 mm wide by 19 mm high), with minimum
wall thickness of 0.058 inch (1.47 mm). Curtain Carriers shall have two nylon rollers and nylon axle with aluminum hook,
with nonremovable.
3. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 14-inch- (356-mm-) radius bends.
4. Finish: Satin anodized.
Barjan Manufacturing Ltd.
Coldraco, Inc.
Crowder, K. N. Manufacturing, Inc.
Cubicle Curtain Factory, Inc.
Nelson, A. R. Co.
Pryor Products.
6. Cubicle Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester, inherently and permanently flame resistant,
stain resistant, and antimicrobial.
a. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, with 20-inch (508-mm) mesh top, and minus distance above the finished floor
at bottom. Mesh top hem not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) and not more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide, triple thickness, reinforced with integral web, and double lock stitched.
138
F.
OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
1. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable acoustical panel partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension
system, operators, and accessories.
2. Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired panels.
3. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so
finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp,
twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.
4. STC: Not less than 50.
5. NRC: Not less than 0.60.
6. Mechanically Operated Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure
on track.
7. Mechanically Operated Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting
uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement.
8. Panel Facing: Vinyl-coated fabric wall covering, mildew-resistant, washable, vinyl-coated fabric wall covering; complying
with CFFA-W-101-D for type indicated; Class A.
9. Suspension Tracks: Mill finish aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for type of operation,
size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.
Hufcor, Inc.; Series 632 (Basis-of-Design).
Modernfold, Inc.
Panelfold Inc.
G. CORNER GUARDS
1. Surface-Mounted, Stainless Steel: Type 430 and Type 304, 16 Gauge.
2. Wing Size: 90° , 1-1/2 or 3-1/2" wing, depending upon application.
3. Conform to NSF Standard 51 for direct food contact in food service areas. (Type 304 Stainless Steel)
4. Mounting: Two installation choices, cement-on or screw-on. Provide tamperproof screws through factory-drilled mounting
holes. Provide screw caps to conceal screws.
5. Locations: Required at all gypsum board partitions on exterior corners of corridor, kitchen and public areas.
6. Corner Guards Mounting: 4 inches above finished floor, and 4 feet long.
H. TOILET, BATH and LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
1. Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser: Surface mounted, Two-roll unit, Rigid vinyl plastic front, high impact plastic back.
Product: TORK; Bath Tissue Jumbo Roll Dispenser, Twin, Item #56T1 (no substitutions).
2. Paper Towel Dispenser: Owner furnished, Contractor installed.
3. Liquid-Soap Dispenser: Owner furnished, Contractor installed.
4. Grab Bar: 1-1/4 inch Stainless steel with Flange mount with concealed fasteners. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Concealed Mounting with Snap Flange, Item #B-6806.
5. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, Surface mounted. Self-closing, disposal-opening cover,removable receptacle. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; ConturaSeries® Surfact-Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal, Item #B270.
6. Mirror Unit: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick or stainless-steel channel. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Series Angle-Framed Mirrors, Item #B-290.
7. Shower Curtain Rod & Curtain: 1-inch (25.4-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; ClassicSeries™ Heavy-Duty Shower Curtain Rod, Item #B6107. Vinyl, minimum 0.008
inch (0.2 mm) thick, opaque, matte with integral antibacterial agent. Color: White. Minimum size 42 inch width by 72 inches
(1828 mm) high. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Vinyl Shower Curtain, Item B204-2.
8. Folding Shower Seat: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. Seat shall be phenolic composite of slat-type, Mounting Mechanism shall be Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Reversible Folding Shower Seat, Item #B-5181.
9. Robe Hook: Double-prong unit. Stainless steel, Bright polished. Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; ClassicSeries™ Double Robe Hook, Item #B-672.
10. Mop and Broom Holder: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). Product: Bobrick Washroom
Equipment, Inc.; Shelf with Mop and Broom Holders and Rags, Item #B-224.
139
I.
WARM-AIR DRYERS
1. Mounting: Surface mounted.
2. Operation: Touch-button activated with timed power cut-off switch. Hot air, high volume, low amps.
3. Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Nozzle: Fixed; non-rotating.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
World Dryer Corporation.
Warm-Air Dryer
DIVISION 10 40 00
SAFETY SPECIALTIES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes fire protection cabinets and portable fire extinguishers.
B.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls, minimum 20 gauge, commercial quality, cold rolled
steel, corners mitered and welded, with white baked enamel finish. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
2. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with onepiece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth
to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.
3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following manufacturers:
Larsen's Manufacturing Company; .Model 2409-6r (Basis-of-Design).
J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Potter Roemer LLC.
C. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1. Fire Extinguishers: Provide type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.
a. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10 lb. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
b. Wet-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 1.6-gal. (6-L) nominal capacity, with potassium acetate-based chemical in
stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
Amerex Corporation.
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Potter Roemer LLC.
DIVISION 10 50 00
STORAGE SPECIALITES
A. SUMMARY
a. Standard metal lockers.
b. Athletic metal lockers.
c. Locker benches.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal
lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
a. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Warranty Period for All-Welded Metal Lockers: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
140
C. EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and finish
installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Locks.
b. Identification plates.
c. Hooks.
2. Touch-Up Paint: Provide 8 fluid ounces for each 100 lockers or fraction, of each color installed; up to 1 quart total for
standard colors and up to 2 quarts total for custom colors.
D. LEED PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
that retains material integrity. Materials Requirements for Credit MR 5: Regional Materials.
2. Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within 500 miles of the Project site whenever possible.
Regional
E.
STANDARD METAL LOCKERS
1. Student corridor and employee lockers: Construct doors and frames of pickled, cold-rolled and patent leveled sheet steel.
Construct other parts from good grade annealed specially treated and patent leveled steel.
2. Doors: Construct solid panel doors of 14 gauge cold-rolled sheet steel adequately steel. Construct other parts from good
grade annealed specially treated and patent leveled steel.
3. Door Frames: Construct door frames of not less than 14 gauge steel formed into face channel shapes. Frame channel formation shall be securely welded together. Sides of frames shall form a continuous door strike.
4. Locking Device: Provide positive automatic type locking device of the pre-locking type whereby locker may be locked while
door is open, then closed without unlocking and without damaging locking mechanism. There shall be three (3) latching
points on single tier lockers and two (2) latching points on multi-tier lockers. Provide rubber silencers installed on each
frame hook. Provide built-in combination locks and recessed handles on student corridor lockers. Employee lockers shall be
pad lockable.
5. Hinges: Five (5) knuckle hinges shall be at least two (2) inches high of the full loop, tight pinset type, securely welded to
frame and riveted to door with two rivets per hinge. Locker doors 42" high and less shall have two hinges. Doors over 42"
high shall have three hinges.
6. Body: Construct body of locker of not less than 24 gauge steel with necessary formation to make rigid locker and to ensure
tight joints between bolts.
7. Tops, Bottoms, Shelves, and Tier Dividers: Constructed of 24 gauge sheet steel. Provide flat and sloping tops and necessary fillers for lockers as indicated or needed.
8. Fillers and Tops: Provide 24 gauge sheet steel blank front and top filler pieces of size required and necessary wherever
groups of lockers adjoin in corners yet do not meet or wherever lockers abut walls.
9. Hooks: Provide hooks as noted. Hooks shall be zinc-plated forged steel with ball ends. Attach hooks with two bolts.
10. Number Plates: Provide each locker with polished aluminum plates, aluminum background and etched blank numerals not
less than 3/8" high. Attach plates with split rivets. Number lockers per Owner’s directions.
11. End and Back Panels: Where a group of lockers has an exposed end or back, provide prefinished 16 gauge end finishing
panel securely attached to end or back of locker.
12. Finish: Thoroughly clean and phosphatize all steel parts. Finish with heavy coat of high quality enamel. Enamel shall be
baked at 300 degrees for minimum of 20 minutes. Where bolts heads are visible on outside of locker, finish to match balance of locker. Bolts and nuts shall be rust-proofed before finishing.
13. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude
beyond face of door; pry and vandal resistant.
14. Built-in Combination Locks: Key-controlled, three-number dialing combination locks; capable of at least five combination
changes made automatically with a control key. Locks shall be Master Lock, no others are acceptable.
15. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet
16. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following:
DeBourgh Mfg.
Lyon Workspace Products, LLC
Penco Products, Inc.; Guardian Lockers.
Republic Storage Systems Company; Quiet Lockers.
F.
ATHLETIC METAL LOCKERS
1. General: Pre-assembled all welded construction. Sheet steel locker material shall be coldrolled and patent leveled. Sheet
steel shall be free from buckle, scale, and other imperfections. Steel angle framing members shall be continuous 1" x 1" x
141
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1/8" pickled angle iron steel. Expanded metal shall be 14 gauge 3/4" flattened expanded metal with bond sheared edges to
prevent snags or cuts.
Sides and Vertical Partitions: Construct sides and partitions of expanded metal welded to angle frame.
Shelves: Provide 14 gauge cold-rolled sheet steel shelf, flanged at sides, back and hemmed to front. Shelf to be welded to
sides and back and shall be 12" from top of locker.
Doors: Construct doors of expanded metal welded to angle frame. Provide solid coldrolled13 gauge sheet steel handle panel with 14 gauge back panel welded to frame at center span and latching device of door.
Hinges: Doors over 42" high shall have three (3) hinges per door. Doors under 42" high shall have two (2) hinges per door.
Hinges shall be heavy-duty five knuckle, full loop, tight pinset type. Hinges shall be minimum of two (2) inches high. Hinges
shall be welded to
frame and riveted to door with two (2) rivets per hinge or welded to door, standard of manufacturer.
Tops, Backs, and Tier Dividers: Constructed of solid 16 gauge sheet steel. Provide sloping tops and necessary fillers for
lockers as indicated or needed. Backs may be 18 gauge sheet steel.
Bottoms: Provide ventilated 16 gauge sheet bottom panels.
Latching: Provide three (3) point positive latching mechanism with provision for padlock at single tier units. Provide levertype handle to activate latching rods.
Number Plates: Each locker shall have a polished aluminum number plate with black numerals not less than 3/8" high. Attach plates with rivets. Number lockers per Owner’s directions.
Hooks: Provide hooks as noted. Hooks shall be zinc-plated forged steel will ball ends.
Fillers and Tops: Provide 16 gauge sheet steel blank front and top filler pieces of size required and necessary wherever
groups of lockers adjoin in corners yet do not meet.
End and Back Panels: When a group of lockers has an exposed end or back, provide solid 16 gauge end finishing panel attached to end or back of locker.
Finish: Thoroughly clean and phosphatize all steel parts. Finish with a heavy coat of high quality enamel. Enamel shall be
baked at 300 degrees for a minimum of 20 minutes.
Locker Arrangements:
TYPE A: 12 by 12 by 24 inch, triple tier.
TYPE B: 21 by 18 by 60 inch, single tier.
TYPE C: 15 by 18 by 30 inch, double tier.
TYPE D: 15 by 18 by 60 inch, single tier.
TYPE E: 15 by 15 by 72 inch, single tier
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
All-Welded, Athletic Metal Lockers:
DeBourgh Mfg. Co.; All American Team Lockers
Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; All-Welded Expanded Metal Lockers.
Penco Products, Inc.; All-Welded Lockers.
Republic Storage Systems Company; All-Welded Ventilated Lockers.
G. LOCKER BENCHES
1. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches.
2. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
3. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick except provide minimum 20-inch wide tops if accessible benches
are indicated. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of clear lacquer on top
and sides.
4. Fixed Pedestals: 1-1/2-inch diameter steel tubing; with powder coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
DeBourgh Mfg. Co.; Heavy Duty Pedestal Style Bench
DIVISION 10 70 00
EXTERIOR SPECIALITES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes exterior aluminum sun control shades.
2. Section includes ground-mounted flagpoles made from aluminum.
B.
SUN SHADE SYSTEM
1. Provide fixed sunshades and accessories of design material, sizes, depth, arrangement and thickness as required to meet
daylighting. Include supports, anchorage and accessories required for complete assembly.
142
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type: Aluminum sun shades components shall be 6063-T5 aluminum; consisting of fascia, blades and outriggers for
mounting on exterior aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems and glazed aluminum curtain wall systems.
Outriggers shall be two-piece, 4 inch deep with sliding interlock extrusion, minimum 0.125 inch thick to provide for expansion and contraction. Outriggers to be secured to the building structure by manufacturer’s recommended heat-treated
wedge lock pocket casting. Provide straight or tapered outriggers or other means for support of sun shade panel fabricated
from same material as panel. System shall be designed to resist applicable dead, live, wind, and seismic loads.
Blades shall be 6 inch airfoil blade style factory assembled to outriggers using stainless steel, type F, thread cutting screws.
Blades to be spaced to provide a sun cut-off angle of 75 degrees from horizontal.
Aluminum Finish: 3 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF
resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering awnings that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C/S Sun Controls.
The Airolite Company, LLC; Sun Controls.
Ametco Manufacturing Corporation.
ProClad, Inc.
C. FLAGPOLES
1. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with
ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063. Bottom Diameter: 6 inches. Top Diameter: 3-1/2 inches.
2. Exposed Height: 25 feet – Elementary school
30 feet - Middle and High School
3. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole.
4. Finial Ball: flush-seam ball, sized to match flagpole-butt diameter.
5. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless-steel
cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access
door secured with cylinder lock. Provide tamper-resistant system. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
6. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two chromium-plated bronze swivel snap hooks per halyard to accommodate two flags.
7. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags.
American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company.
Concord Industries, Inc.
Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Morgan-Francis; Division of Original Tractor Cab Co., Inc.
Pole-Tech Company Inc.
DIVISION 10 80 00
OTHER SPECIALTIES
A. SUMMARY
a. Knox boxes.
b. Acid/corrosive safety storage cabinets.
c. Wall safes.
B.
KNOX BOX MANUFACTURERS
1. Provide knox box at locations required by local jurisdictions and fire department.
Knox Company; Knox-Box® Rapid Entry System
C. ACID/CORROSIVE SAFETY STORAGE MANUFACTURERS
1. Provide acid storage cabinents for each Science Prep Area. Size cabinent to accommodate storage requirements.
Eagle Manufacturing; Acid/Corrosive Safety Storage Cabinets CRA3010
143
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
144
145
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 11 10 00
GENERAL EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
Pedestrian Control Devices
Wall safes.
B.
WALL SAFE MANUFACTURERS
1. Provide wall safe in Administration area
Gardell; Economical Wall Safes, Model WS-1317-T-K
Safesetc.com.
Sentry Group.
C. PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES
1. Removable posts, floor sockets and barrier tape heads at food service area of kitchen.
2. Review design at food service lines with school district prior to final placement of floor sockets.
3. Removable Posts: Lawrence 320-1S, satin chrome plated steel posts.
4. Floor Sockets: Lawrence 421-1S-S sockets with cap, satin chrome finish.
5. Barrier Tape Heads: Lawrence 695-1S/43 “TensaBarrier” head with tape, satin chrome head with color tape. Provide 695RCVR-1S satin chrome receiver heads at ends of barriers.
Lawrence Metal Products, Inc.
DIVISION 11 30 00
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
a. Cooking appliances.
b. Kitchen exhaust ventilation.
c. Refrigeration appliances.
d. Cleaning appliances.
General Electric Company (GE)
KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.
Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.
Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).
B.
RANGES
1. Electric Range (Slide-In): Slide-in range with one oven(s). General Electric Company (GE); GE® 30” Slide-In Electric
Range with Self-Cleaning Oven, Model #JSP42DNWW.
2. Electric Range: Freestanding range with one oven(s). General Electric Company (GE); GE® 30” Free-Standing Electric
Range, Model #JBP15DMWW.
C. MICROWAVE OVENS
1. Microwave Oven: General Electric Company (GE); GE® 1.1 cu.ft. Countertop Microwave Oven, Model #JES1160DPWW
D. KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION
1. Overhead Exhaust Hood: Wall-mounted, General Electric Company (GE); GE® Non-Vented Standard Range Hood, Model
#JN327HWW. Nonvented, recirculating type.
E.
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS
1. Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding, Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer at bottom and complying with AHAM HRF-1.
General Electric Company (GE); GE® ENERGY STAR® 21.0 cu.ft. Top-Freezer Refrigerator, Model #GTH21KCXWW.
146
F.
DISHWASHERS
1. Dishwasher: Built-in undercounter, General Electric Company (GE); GE Spacemaker® Under-the-Sink Dishwasher, Model
#GSM2200NWW. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
G. CLOTHES WASHERS AND DRYERS
1. Washer: Freestanding, top-loading unit. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore); White Kenmore 4.0 cu. ft. Capacity Top-Load
Washer, Model #02629822000. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
2. Dryer: Freestanding, frontloading unit. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore); White Kenmore 500 7.0 cu. ft. Capacity Electric Dryer,
Model #02669522000. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
3. Clothes Washer/Dryer Combination: Freestanding washer/dryer unit with dual-drum design and electric dryer; washer is top
loading. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore); White Kenmore 27 in. Super Capacity Laundry Center with Electric Dryer, Model
#02697912000. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
DIVISION 11 40 00
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. Architect shall employ a food service consultant who shall work with representative of the School District to design
food service facilities and determine appropriate equipment to either be fabricated or purchased through the Co ntractor.
2. Food service consultant shall attempt to reduce energy costs, where possible, by specifying gas fired equipment as
opposed to electric equipment.
3. All doorways accessing Food Services areas should be the proper width to accommodate deliveries and movement
of equipment, min. door width shall be 42”.
4. Architect shall review shop drawings for fabricated and freestanding equipment with School District prior to release
for fabrication.
5. Fabricate exposed metalwork of stainless steel; and fabricate the following components from the gauge of metal indicated, and other components from not less than 20 gauge metal:
Table and counter tops:
14 gauge
Sinks and drainboards:
14 gauge
Shelves:
16 gauge
Front drawer and door panels:
18 gauge (double-pan type)
Single pan doors and drawer fronts:
16 gauge
Enclosed base cabinets:
18 gauge
Enclosed wall cabinets:
18 gauge
Exhaust hoods and ventilators:
18 gauge
Pan-type insets and trays:
16 gauge
Removable covers and panels:
18 gauge
Skirts and enclosure panels:
18 gauge
Closure and trim strips over 4" (102 mm) wide:
18 gauge
Hardware reinforcement:
12 gauge
Gusset plates:
10 gauge
6. Metal Top Construction: Metal tops to be one-piece welded construction, including field joints. Secure to a full perimeter galvanized steel channel frame cross-braced not farther than 30" (762 mm) on center. Fasten top with stud
bolts or tack welds. If hat sections are used in lieu of channels, close ends.
B.
EQUIPMENT:
1. All equipment shall be hardwired avoid conflicts with required circuitry.
2. The following equipment list identifies requirement for High School preparation kitchen.
a.
COMPOSTABLE WASTE DECOMPOSER - Manufacturer: Somat, model: ET-100W
b.
WALK-IN FREEZER - Walk-in freezer to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. All Walk In panels shall be provided with an overall thickness of 4".
Heavy Duty Floor Panels. Floor panels shall have foamed in place 0.100" high traffic reinforced aluminum
treadplate. Floor panels shall be supplied by cooler panel manufacturer.
Walk-in to be installed in building floor recess.
Provide 78" high entrance door(s) and frame.
Manufacturer: Thermo-Kool, model: Walk-In Freezer W/Floor
147
c.
FREEZER EVAPORATOR COIL -Manufacturer: Thermo-Kool, model: FREEZER COIL
d.
WALK-IN COOLER - Walk-in cooler to be prefabricated of modular design and construction. All Walk In panels
shall be provided with an overall thickness of 4".
Heavy Duty Floor Panels. Floor panels shall have foamed in place 0.100" high t raffic reinforced aluminum
treadplate. Floor panels shall be supplied by cooler panel manufacturer.
Walk-in to be installed in building floor recess. Installing Contractor to verify levelness of recess and provide
sand and shims as necessary to provide a completely level walk-in floor.
Provide 78" high entrance door(s) and frame.
Manufacturer: Thermo-Kool, model: Walk-in Cooler W/Floor
e.
COOLER EVAPORATOR COIL - Manufacturer: Thermo Cool, model: COOLER COIL
f.
COOLER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM – One (1) pre assembled, remote, R404A, cooler compartment refrigeration system. System to consist of condensing unit (high side assembly) and low profile evaporator coil (low
side assembly), evaporator mounting kit, thermostatic expansion valve, pump down cycle kit, soleno id valve,
temperature control, sight glass, drier, vibration eliminator, pressure control, crankcase heater, extreme low
ambient controls, weatherproof housing, and any accessories necessary for a completely installed and fun ctional system for a cooler box temperature of +35 to + 40 degrees.
Condensing units shall be roof mounted external to the building.
Provide with Semi Hermetic Air Cooled compressor.
Manufacturer: Thermo-Kool, model: MOSO20M63
g.
FREEZER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM - One (1) pre assembled, remote, R404A, freezer compartment refrigeration system. System to consist of condensing unit (high side assembly) and low profile evaporator coil (low
side assembly), evaporator mounting kit, automatic electric defrost system, time clock, thermostatic expansion valve, pump down cycle kit, solenoid valve, temperature control, sight glass, drier, vibration eliminator,
pressure control, crankcase heater, extreme low ambient controls, weatherproof housing, and any accessories
necessary for a completely installed and functional system for a freezer box temperature of 10 to 5 degrees F.
Condensing units shall be roof mounted external to the building.
Provide with Semi Hermetic Air Cooled compressor.
Manufacturer: Thermo-Kool. model: MOSO30L63
h.
FOOD PROCESSOR, ELECTRIC – D Series Combination Food Processor, 5-1/2 quart stainless steel bowl with
handle, continuous feed kit with kidney shaped & cylindrical shaped hoppers, "S" blade, 28058 1/8 (3mm) gra ting disc, 28064 1/8" (3mm) slicing disc, two speed, 850 & 1725 RPM.
Manufacturer: Robot Coupe,
Model: R4N
i.
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM - Ansul R 102 Ansulex Liquid Fire Suppressant. Surface appliance nozzles,
hood and duct protection nozzles in Exhaust Hood.
Manual pull station and micro switches with two sets of normally open and two sets of normally closed contact points.
All exposed pipe and fittings to be chrome plated or stainless steel.
All components and labor necessary for completely installed system in accordance with manufacturer s listings
and instructions, U.L. Standard 300, UL Standard 1254, NFPA 17A, NFPA-96, and all applicable local codes,
standards, and regulations.
Provide with automatic mechanical gas shut off valves (not electric solenoid valves) for equipment below e xhaust hood. Coordinate size(s) and installation with Plumbing Division.
Manufacturer: Ansul, model: ANSUL R-102
j.
EXHAUST HOOD - Filter Type Exhaust Hood, Construction to consist of 18 Gauge type 304 stainless steel, i ncluding any exposed back. U.L. Classified, removable, stainless steel no n adjustable grease filters.
Incandescent light fixtures and bulbs, U.L. listed for use in commercial cooking hoods, NSF approved. Provide
an adequate number and type of light fixtures to provide a minimum light level of 50 foot candles at 36" AFF,
below the hood.
Manufacturer: Accurex, model: XXDW-11.67-S
148
k.
RANGE, GAS, HEAVY DUTY, 34" - Heavy Duty Range, 34", Gas, (4) 30,000 BTU open burners w/cast iron top
grates, storage base w/cabinet doors, stainless steel front, top front ledge & sides, 6" stainle ss steel legs, 1
1/4" front gas manifold, 120,000 BTU.
Manufacturer: Vulcan Hart, model: GH45S
l.
STEAMER, CONVECTION, GAS - GEMINI 6 SST Convection Steamer, floor model, gas, two compartment, (6)
12" x 20"x2-1/2" pan capacity, atmospheric steamer, self contained water filter, automatic water fill, individually
controlled by power switch, 60 min. timer, stainless steel interior & ext'r, 50,000 BTU, ENERGY STAR®.
Manufacturer: Cleveland, model 24CGA6.2SES
m. TILTING SKILLET/BRAISING PAN, GAS - Tilting Skillet, gas, 40-gallon capacity, open leg frame base, standard with manual tilt mechanism, stainless steel pan and frame, pilot ignition, 126,000 BTU.
Manufacturer: Market Forge Industries, model: 40P-STGL
n.
CONVECTION OVEN, GAS - Convection Oven, Gas, stacked, capacity (10) 12"x20"x2.5" pans or (5) 18"x26"
pans, double paned glass door, 2 speed reversible fan, 6-1/2" temperature probe, 11-position rack glides, 5
wire shelves, retractable hose reel, hardware & 4" casters.
Manufacturer: Blodgett Premium, model: DFG-100XCEL DOUBL
o.
FOOD MIXER - Legacy Planetary Mixer, 3/4 hp, 30-qt. capacity, three fixed speeds, gear-driven transmission,
15 min. timer, #12 taper attachment hub, manual bowl lift, bowl guard.
Manufacturer: Hobart, model: HL300+BUILDUP
p.
BAKERY PREP TABLE -Fabricated Stainless Steel Work Table with Sink(s) 2'-10" High, bullnose edge profile.
Provide stainless steel adjustable bullet feet. Provide shelving above and drawer and shelf below table top
q.
ICE MAKER W/BIN - S-Series Ice Maker, cube-style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, up to 325-lb approximately/24 hours, stainless steel finish, dice size cubes. Ice Bin, w/top-hinged front-opening door, approximately 290 lb ice storage capacity, for top-mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior.
Arctic Pure® Primary Water Filter Assembly, includes head, shroud, hardware, mounting assembly, and one fi lter cartridge, 14,000 gallon capacity, 0-600 lbs./ice per day.
Manufacturer: Manitowoc, model: SD-0302A
r.
CABINET, HEATER/PROOFER, PASS THRU - C5™ 9 Series Controlled Humidity Heated Holding and Proofing
Cabinet, mobile, full height, pass thru, (2) glass doors, lip load slides, capacity (18) 18" x 26" pans, 3" O.C.,
aluminum, 5" casters, polymer bumper & drip trough combination, 120v/60/1, 1440 watts
Manufacturer: Metro, model: C599L-NFC-LPFCA or Cresco.
s.
REFRIGERATOR, ROLL-IN - Specification Line Series® Refrigerator, Roll-in, two-section, 74.72 cu.ft., selfcontained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior & aluminum interior, digital thermometer, g lass hinged full height
door, top mounted compressor, 1/2 hp.
Manufacturer: Delfield, model: SARRI2-G
t.
CABINET, MOBILE REFRIGERATED - Air-Screen Trayline Refrigerated Cabinet, mobile, insulated with bottom-mounted refrigerator system, (30) 14"x 18" & (15) 18"x 26" pans, slides fixed, 3" centers, full height tempered glass doors std., horizontal air flow, stainless steel construction, 6" swivel casters
Manufacturer: Carter-Hoffmann, model: PHB495
u.
SELF-SERVICE REFRIGERATED MERCHANDISER - Oasis® Self-Service Refrigerated Merchandiser, 663/8"L, high profile, open front, (4) non-lighted shelves, top light, self-contained refrigeration system, black interior & exterior, full end panels w/mirror, NSF7. 6 foot straight blade power cord, standard.
Manufacturer: Structural Concepts, model:B62
v.
HEATED CABINET, MOBILE - hotLOGIC Holding Cabinet-Logic8 Series, full height, forced air heating system,
electronic controls, fixed angle slides, (36) 18" x 36" pans, insulated stainless steel construction, 5" casters
Manufacturer: Carter-Hoffmann, model: HBC36S1XE
149
w. SERVING COUNTER, HOT FOOD, ELECTRIC – Elite Hot Food Serving Counter, electric, 46"L x 36"H, 3-wells
w/1000w element w/thermostat each, mobile modular design w/interlocking mech., 14 gauge stainless steel
top, 20 gauge tainless steel front & end panels, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, 5" casters
Common drains & manifold for Elite Systems, for three opening - 46"W.
Protector Guard w/Fluorescent Lights (Buffet Style) for Elite System, for three opening - 46"W.
End Guard (pair)- (Buffet Style) for Elite System.
Heat Lamps, bullet type, buffet only, for 46" unit - 3 opening, for Elite System.
Manufacturer: Piper Products/Servolift Eastern, model: 3-HF
x.
SERVING COUNTER, COLD PAN - Elite Cold Food Serving Counter, 46"L x 36"H, 3-pan size, 5" dp, mechanically cooled, mobile modular design w/interlocking mech., 14 gauge stainless steel top, stainless steel front,
end panels, louvered panel, undershelf & sliding doors, 5" casters,
Trayslide for Elite System, 12" solid ribbed, heavy gauge stainless steel, for three opening - 46"W.
Protector Guard w/Fluorescent Lights (Buffet Style) for Elite System, for three opening - 46"W.
End Guard (pair)- (Buffet Style) for Elite System.
Heat Lamps, bullet type, buffet only, for 46" unit - 3 opening, for Elite System.
Manufacturer: Piper Products/Servolift Eastern, model: 3-CM
y.
TRAY AND SILVERWARE DISPENSER Mobile Tray & Silverware Dispenser, double stack, enclosed,
stainless steel body, 10 plastic cylinders, holds approximately (300) 14-3/8" x 18" trays & 400 silverware, stainless steel construction, 4" swivel casters, NSF. Polyurethane 5" casters, set of 4, with ball bearing seals.
Manufacturer: Piper Products/Servolift Eastern, model: AT-ST2-1418-OSW8
z.
DISPENSER, REFRIGERATED PACKAGED MILK – (2) Packaged Milk Dispenser, refrigerated, cabinet style,
self-contained refrigeration system, two self-elevating milk carton platforms, capacity (12) 13”L x 13”D x 11 1/8”
H mild crates, stainless steel self-service doors, non-peel white vinyl exterior, white aluminum liner with stainless steel floor, 4" swivel casters. Condensate evaporator.
Manufacturer: Piper Products/Servolift Eastern, model: R22-M(MOBILE)
aa. FOOD WASTE COLLECTOR - Scrap Collector, scrapping, pre-flushing & collecting system (widely accepted in
areas where disposers are restricted), w/salvage basin and silverware trap, 3/4 HP corrosion-resistant pump,
stainless steel construction, start/stop pushbutton control panel, w/safety line disconnect.
Manufacturer: Salvajor, model: S914.
bb. SOILED DISH TABLE – Fabricate, Stainless Steel, DishTable 2'-10" High,
Provide Scrap Trough, length and width as shown on plan, similar to detail FSD4 -6, with 2" removable basket.
Scrap trough shall have Fisher 2906 or T&S B-2292 water trough inlets, mixing valve, shut off valve and vacuum breaker. Provide modification for Salvajor unit. Provide cut out in table top to exactly match Salvajor equi pment.
cc. DISHWASHER, DOOR TYPE - Dishwasher, door type, high temperature, w/built-in 70° rise gas booster (externally mounted), corner, 55 racks/hour cap., door safety switch, auto-fill, stainless steel front & side panels,
stainless steel construction, single source gas, 120v/60/1, 12.0 amps (gas booster heater controls)
Manufacturer: Champion, model: D-H1C-G(70)
dd. CONDENSATE HOOD - Furnish and set in place Accurex GD2-3.5-S
ee. CLEAN DISH TABLE – Fabricate Stainless Steel DishTable 2'-10" High. Provide shelving above and drawer
and shelf below table top.
ff.
WALL SHELF W/POT HOOKS - Fabricate Stainless Steel Single tier wall mounted shelf with pot hooks size
and configuration as shown on plan.
gg. CONDIMENT COUNTER – Fabricate Stainless Steel, W/Millwork Face and Solid Top. Work Counter 2'-10"
High.
hh. STORAGE SHELVING - Furnish and set in place MetroMax (Q) Open Grid Mat Shelving, 86" High With Five
Tiers.
150
Manufacturer: Fabricated, model: SU-DRY STORAGE
Each section shall be free-standing with four legs.
ii.
REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN - Furnish and set in place wide Refrigerator, reach-in, 57" wide two-section, selfcontained refrigeration, stainless steel exterior & aluminum interior, standard depth cabinet, wide full -height
glass doors, with exterior dial-type thermometer, 5" casters, 1/2 hp.
Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator, model: 2RE-SA-GD
jj.
REFRIGERATED/HEATED CABINET, DUAL TEMP - Furnish and set in place Spec-Line Refrigerated/Heated
Dual Temp Cabinet, Reach-In, Single Section, designed for remote refrigeration, aluminum interior, stainless
steel exterior, 32" deep cabinet, wide half-height doors, INTELA-TRAUL™ microprocessor controls. #2 Tray
slide for (1) 18"x26" pan - per pair.
Manufacturer: Traulsen, model: ADH132W-HHS
Casters: 4-5/8" high (set of 4)
kk. SERVICE REFRIGERATED BAKERY MERCHANDISER - Furnish and set in place Encore® Service Refrigerated Bakery Merchandiser, 50"L, self-contained Breeze™ refrigeration system w/evaporator pan, curved lift-up
front glass, (3) lighted glass shelves, sheet metal deck, sliding glass rear doors, black interior, black trim, (2)
full end panels w/mirror. Manufacturer: Structural Concepts, model No. HV48RZ.
Provide 43" minimum entry door clearance required (w/out shipping skid)
ll.
UTILITY RACK, MOBILE – Furnish and set in place (2) Panco Rack, Mobile Utility, full height, open sides, with
slides for 18” x 26” trays, slides on 3” centers, bolted square tubular aluminum construction, front loading, na rrow opening, KD
mm. P.O.S. COUNTER - Fabricate Stainless Steel Work Counter 2'-10" high.
Coordinate cut-outs for all equipment mounted in counter top.Cabinet base with hinged doors. Provide (1) at
elementary schools, (3) at secondary schools.
nn. COLD FOOD PAN, DROP-IN - Cold Food Drop-In Unit, iced cold pan, 3-pan size with drain, insulated pan,
stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized steel outer liner, 19 -7/8" x 39-1/4" x 4-5/8" cold pan. Model: WIC-3
oo. FOOD SHIELD - Kevry Deco Engineered Vertical Operator-Serve Food Shield, 22" H, vertical, 1/4" tempered
glass front and top. Model: DECO 100-N
DIVISION 11 50 00
EDUCATION AND SCIENTIFIC EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes
a. Book depository
b. Projection screens
c. Flammable storage cabinet
d. Vented acid storage cabinet
e. Goggle sanitizer cases
f. Electric kiln
B.
BOOK DEPOSITORY
1. Provide Book drop in media center of high schools.
2. Provide stainless steel book return, 24 x 24 opening, with integral chute.
3. Verify that wall to receive book drop is not required to be fire rated or if fire rating is required provide rated enclosure with
access door behind book drop.
4. Book Drop: Mosler Model 615 SD or approved substitute. Fully assembled book depository with clear satin anodized aluminum front frame and hopper door with pull handle. Housing shall be constructed of primed steel welded at seams. Provide
standard stainless steel chute and “slow down”. Add keylock for controlled access. Provide three (3) keys. Frame shall be
marked “Book Depository” in engraved black filled letters.
American Book Returns
Kingsley Library Equipment.
151
Vernon Library Supplies.
C. PROJECTION SCREEN
1. Acceptable manufacturer and type (for High School stage and/or commons): Da-Lite Senior Electrol automatic projection
screen or equal product of other acceptable manufacturer. Provide key operated recessed three position control switch in
box with cover plate. Screens shall be flame retardant, mildew resistant, glass beaded with black border. Size: 18' x 18' with
3'-6" black extension.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer and type for elementary schools: Da-Lite Cosmopolitan or equal of other acceptable manufacturer.
Provide key operated recessed three position control switch. Screen shall be flame retardant, mildew resistant, glass beaded with black border. Picture surface shall be directed towards gym. Size: 9' x 9'
Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc.
Draper Shade and Screen Co., Inc.
Knox
Stewart Filmscreen Corporation
Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
D. FLAMMABLE STORAGE CABINETS
1. Regulatory Requirements: Cabinets must be in compliance with OSHA and NFPA and IFC requirements for storage of
flammable liquids.
2. Acceptable Model: Lab Safety Model 9A-893-2, single door, self closing.
Flinn Scientific
Lab Safety Supply Co.
Republic Steel
C. VENTED ACID STORAGE CABINET
1. Acceptable Model: Lab Safety Model 9A-2151-2, including self closing door feature orapproved substitute of other acceptable manufacturer.
Flinn Scientific
Lab Safety Supply Co.
Republic Steel
D. GOGGLE SANITIZER CASES
1. Goggle sanitizer cases with UV lamp: As manufactured by Ker-Kau Manufacturing Company.
E.
FUME HOOD VENTILATION
1. Restricted Bypass Fume Hoods: Provide restricted bypass fume hoods. Partial compensating bypass above sash opens
after sash is closed to less than 20 percent open. Design partial bypass to maintain sufficient exhaust air volume through
hood to adequately dilute hazardous fumes regardless of sash position.
2. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Equip fume hoods with an electronic control unit with a sensing device that monitors face velocity, and a motorized damper on the exhaust connection that maintains a constant face velocity by controlling air volume
in response to control unit. Equip units with manual override switch that opens motorized damper to provide maximum exhaust capacity regardless of sash position.
3. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless-steel cable system to hold sash in place regardless of
position.
4. Resin Work Tops: Provide front overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm)
from edge.
5. Work Top Material: Solid epoxy composition. 200 Series Epoxy Work Surface; Air Master Systems Corporation. Raised
(marine) edge, 1-1/4 inches thick at raised edge, with beveled or rounded edge and corners.
Air Master Systems Corporation; The Eliminator 200 Series, Double-Faced 100 Series, Model EH-211-60
Air Master Systems Corporation.
Fisher Hamilton L.L.C.
Mott Manufacturing Ltd.
CERAMIC KILN - ELECTRIC:
1. Manufacturer and Type: Skutt Model 1018, as distributed by Mile high Ceramics
152
2.
3.
4.
Operation System: Electric (architect to verify voltage requirements)
Firing Capacity: 7cu. Ft.
Accessories:
a. Limit timer
b. 4-1/2" blank ring
c. 6 half shelves
d. Stak-up post assortment
e. Skutt environment exhaust system
CERAMIC KILN – GAS (HIGH SCHOOL ONLY, APPROVED BY DISTRICT)
1. Manufacturer and Type: Model CWD-16F as manufactured by Cooperworks Company
2. Operation System: Two (2) each high efficiency forced air burners. 170,000 BTU/burner.
3. Accessories:
a. Electronic ignition
b. CW-181810 SS collection hood
DIVISION 11 60 00
THEATRE EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
a. Stage Drapery
b. Stage Dead-hung Rigging System.
c. Motorized Hoist Systems.
d. Performance and House Lighting and Dimming System.
e. Orchestra Pit Cover
B.
STAGE DRAPERY
1. Warranty for Rigging Equipment: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of rigging equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: One
year from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Furnish and install the following:
a. Grand Valance: The grand valance shall be 43 feet wide by 5 feet high with velour, 100% fullness and shall be fully
lined.
b. Grand Drape: The grand drape shall consist of 2 sections, each 26 feet wide by 20 feet high with velour, 100% fullness
and shall be fully lined.
c. Border 1: The border shall be 41 feet wide by 6 feet high, with velour, 50% fullness and shall be unlined. Fabric color
shall be black.
d. Borders 2-4: The borders shall be 38 feet wide by 6 feet high, with velour, 50% fullness and shall be unlined. Fabric
color shall be black.
e. Three Leg Sets: The leg sets shall consist of 2 sections, each 6 feet wide by 22 feet high, with velour, 50% fullness and
shall be unlined.
f. Midstage Traveler: The midstage traveler shall consist of 2 sections, each 26 feet wide by 20 feet high with velour,
50% fullness and shall be unlined. Fabric color shall be black.
g. Upstage Traveler: The upstage traveler shall consist of 2 sections, each 26 feet wide by 20 feet high with velour, 50%
fullness and shall be fully lined. Fabric color shall be black.
h. Scrim: The scrim shall be a seamless flat panel 40 feet wide by 20 feet high. Fabric shall be inherently flame retardant,
sharks tooth scrim, sewn flat.
i. Cyclorama: Cyclorama shall be a seamless flat panel 40 feet wide by 20 feet high. Fabric shall be flame retardant,
muslin, sewn flat.
3. Products: The products listed below meet the requirements and intent:
Dazian LLC; Angelo.
JB Martin Company; Dante.
J. L. de Ball America, Inc.; Diablo.
KM Fabrics, Inc.; Prestige.
Rose Brand; Encore.
153
C. DEAD-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEM
1. Pipe and Truss Batten: Fabricate battens from steel pipe with a minimum number of joints. Single pipe battens shall be provided for all line sets, except that dual-pipe battens shall be provided for the stage electrics.
2. The batten material shall be 1-1/2-inch I.D., schedule 40 black iron pipe.
3. Pipe batten lengths shall be as follows:
a. Grand Valance:
52 feet long
b. Grand Drape:
52 feet long
c. Projection Screen 22 feet long
d. Border 1:
52 feet long
e. Leg Set 1:
52 feet long
f. Stage Electric 1: (1) 41 feet long, (1) 36 feet long
g. Border 2:
52 feet long
h. Leg Set 2:
52 feet long
i. Spare 1:
(1) 41 feet long, (1) 32 feet long
j. Stage Electric 2: 41 feet long
k. Border 3:
52 feet long
l. Midstage Traveler: 52 feet long
m. Scrim:
52 feet long
n. Stage Electric 3: (1) 41 feet long, (1) 26 feet long
o. Leg Set 3:
52 feet long
p. Border 4:
52 feet long
q. Upstage Traveler: 52 feet long
r. Spare 2:
41 feet long
s. Cyclorama:
52 feet long
4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following:
H & H Specialties, Inc.
J.R. Clancy
SECOA
Automatic Devices Company
Tru-Roll, Inc.
D. MOTORIZED BATTEN HOISTING SYSTEM
1. Provide 4 PowerLift “T” series hoists each with SureTarget controller.
2. Provide battens, fittings, and related equipment as required for a functional system.
3. Hoists shall be the PowerLift as manufactured by J. R. Clancy or approved equal.
4. Travel: 65 feet
5. Gear motor and Primary Brake - The motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer. For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without
the use of couplings. Brakes with a lower retarding torque shall not be permitted.
6. Drum: The drum shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable
7. Sheaves: All load bearing sheaves, both internal and external, shall have a minimum 26:1
8. Loft Blocks: shall have 12-gauge steel (minimum) side plates that shall fully enclose the sheave. Base angles shall be a
minimum 1 ½" x 1 ½" x 3/16" angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
9. Limit Switches: Hoists shall have positively actuated limit switches for normal end of travel indication. These switches shall
open the control circuit in the drive or starter to stop any further movement in the direction of travel.
10. Battens - Battens shall have the ability to accept standard lighting fixture clamps, scenery chains, and pipe clamps, shall be
1 1/2" nominal diameter, schedule 40 steel pipe
11. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Automatic Devices Company;
Autodraper Model No. 1454
H & H Specialties Inc.
Tru-Roll, Inc.
E.
THEATRICAL AND HOUSE LIGHTING DIMMER SYSTEMS
1. Architectural Lighting Control System:
a. The system shall be capable of controlling individual dimmers via patchable zones.
b. The system shall support LCD, slider and pushbutton stations.
c. The system shall provide “snapshot” recording of lighting control console output data top reset on stations.
154
1.
2.
F.
d. The system shall have capability for uploading and downloading system software configurations.
Dimming and Distribution Equipment shall include the following major components:
a. Operator's Console.
b. House Light Master Stations.
c. House Light Entry Stations.
d. Console and Network Node Receptacle Stations and Accessories.
e. Performance Lighting Dimmer Racks and Dimmer Modules.
f. Distribution Equipment.
Equipment Manufacturers:
Electronic Theatre Controls (ETC)
Strand Lighting is considered an acceptable alternate to the ETC equipment listed above.
Rigging Innovators, ETC and Strand Lighting are considered acceptable alternates to the SSRC equipment listed
above.
ORCHESTRA PIT COVER
1. Removable orchestra pit cover at High Schools.
2. Manufacture and installation of the orchestra pit cover and storage truck shall be such quality as guided by professional
staging practices. The pit cover shall be capable of supporting, without failure, a uniform load of 125 pounds per square
foot. The pit cover shall consist of lift-out sections.
3. Storage trucks for pit cover sections shall be provided. Overall width of storage trucks shall not exceed 32 inches to allow
easy passage through a 3'-0" doorway. Each truck shall have four (4) ball bearing hub casters with minimum 5" diameter,
hard rubber wheels
4. with load rating of 500 lbs. Each. Two (2) casters shall be fixed and two (2) casters shall be of the swivel type.
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
SECOA
Stage Engineering International, Ltd.
Wenger Corporation
Norcostco
DIVISION 11 65 00
ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes the following gymnasium equipment:
a. Basketball equipment.
b. Volleyball equipment.
c. Badminton equipment.
d. Exercise equipment.
e. Safety pads.
f. Batting cages.
2. Field Measurements: Verify position and elevation of floor inserts and layout for gymnasium equipment.
3. Coordinate installation of floor inserts with structural floors and finish flooring installation and with court layout and game
lines and markers on finish flooring.
4. Coordinate layout and installation of overhead-supported gymnasium equipment and suspension system components with
other construction including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of gymnasium equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Five years from
C. BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS
1. Acceptable backstops (high schools and middle schools):
a. Forward Fold - Rear Braced Main Court Backstops in main gym and auxiliary gym: Porter No. 90950-000 “Center
Strut”, ceiling suspended, or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. Provide Porter Model No. 00224-300 rectangular
glass bank with Porter Model No. 00224- 900 Pro-Strut adapter; No. 00227-000 bottom padding; and No. 00245-500
Power-Flex goal with net.
155
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Forward Fold - Rear Braced Practice Court Backstops: Porter No. 90950-W00 “Center Strut”, ceiling suspended, or
equal of other acceptable manufacturer. Provide Porter Model No. 00228-300 rectangular Duralam bank; No. 00229000 bottom padding; and No. 00245-500 Power-Flex goal with net.
Acceptable backstops (elementary schools):
a. Folding Backstop: Porter Model No. 90617-000 motorized Forward Fold or equal of other acceptable manufacturer; adjustable height goal, Model No. 00228-300 rectangular wood bank, No. 229-000 bottom padding and No. 00225-000
goal with net.
b. Fixed Backstop: Porter Model No. 90918-000 or equal of other acceptable manufacturer; stationary ceiling suspended
rear braced with goal height adjustable from 8' to 10'; Model No. 00228-300 rectangular wood bank, No. 00229-000
bottom padding, No. 00225-000 goal with net.
c. Practice Backstops: Porter Model No. 312 Standard Stationary Wall Mount or equal of other acceptable manufacturer.
Rectangular wood bank No. 00228-300 and No. 00225-000 goal with net. Flush mount to wall.
Accessories - all schools: The following shall be provided for each backstop. Provide and install remote electric winches incorporating emergency provisions for manual operation in case of power failure. Winch design shall incorporate integral up
and down limit switches. Safety disconnects shall be provided by backstop manufacturer. Winch motors shall be sized as
required, 115V, single phase.
Provide Porter Model No. 10798-000 Safety Strap and Hoist Cable Retractor to prevent accidental dropping of backstop in
case of winch failure and to retract the hoist cable from area of play.
Provide recessed type, three-position key selection
Available Manufacturers:
Porter Athletic Equipment Company
Douglas Industries, Inc.
Draper Inc.
Jaypro Sports, LLC.
Performance Sports Systems.
D. GYMNASIUM DIVIDER CURTAIN
1. Roll-fold divider curtain in main gymnasium (high schools and middle schools):
2. Support System: Gym divider supplier shall provide all required and necessary support system for divider to be secured to
roof structure.
3. Manufacturer and Type: Porter No. 90675-100 Roll-Fold Divider Curtain or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. Entire
curtain fabric to be anti-bacterial treated, fungi-resistant, and flame retardant. Curtain shall have wire polyester open mesh
with PVC coating upper section and solid 8'-0" high vinyl polyester reinforced fabric lower section. Provide continuous bottom batten.
4. Provide and install remote, single phase electric winch and integral limit switches to automatically control upper and lower
limits of travel. Safety disconnect shall be provided by gym divider installer. Winch motor shall be sized as required. Provide
recessed three position key switch and cover plate. Key switch shall have “spring return” to center.
5. Control: Porter Athletic Equipment Company; 3/4 H.P. Electric Operator for Divider Curtain
6. Acceptable manufacturers - gym divider curtain:
Porter Equipment Company
National Gym Equipment
Aalco
Architectural Design Products
E.
MAT MOVERS
1. Motorized wrestling mat mover and storage system at gymnasium
2. Provide necessary framing and support system to attach to roof and wall structure.
3. Porter 91101-200 (91101-100 at middle school) overhead supported mat mover or equal. Mat mover system shall consist of
fully welded steel carriage structure with rails and fully assembled drive and lifting mechanism, standard of manufacturer.
System shall include suspension trolleys, travel beam, load bar with sling, control panel, electric motors for hoist and tractor,
drive tractor,
4. key switches with covers, cables and pulleys, and other standard components of manufacturer required for fully operational
system.
5. Controls: Two (2) key switches at control station, located as directed by the Architect.
6. Load Bar and Sling: Designed to support two (2) 42’ x 42’ mat for high schools, and (1) 42’ x 42’ mat for middle schools.
7. Manufacturer shall provide two (2) year written warranty for material and installation.
8. Acceptable manufacturers - mat mover system:
National Gym Equipment (NGE)
156
Porter Athletic Equipment Company
Mat Press, Inc.
F.
ELECTRONIC SCOREBOARDS
1. Type: Interior, multi-purpose basketball/volleyball/wrestling electronic scoreboard with two integral horns, changeable captions, LED displays for time, scores, period, number of player fouling with personal fouls, team fouls, bonus and double bonus indicators, and next possession arrows.
2. Size: 8’-0” (L) by 6’0” (H) by 8 inches (D).
3. Location: 2 at Main Gymnasium and 1 at Auxiliary Gymnasium.
4. Wired: With cable to extend from back wall to front of bleacher stands.
5. Control Console: Provide one (1) control console in Main Gymnasium capable of controlling both scoreboard panels in Main
Gym from console on Scorer’s table. Provide one duplicate control console with cord and carrying case to operate second
scoreboard in Main Gymnasium (verify second scoreboard in middle schools) or both scoreboards in Auxiliary Gymnasium.
Provide sufficient control cable to reach from scorer’s tables in Main and Auxiliary Gymnasium bleachers to junction boxes
on walls. Verify if controls can be wireless.
Nevco; Model No. 2700
Fair-Play Scoreboards
Naden
G. FLOOR INSERTS
1. Floor Insert: Chrome-finished steel floor plate; and steel pipe sleeve, concealed by floor plate, with capped bottom end,
sized with ID to fit post standards, not less than 9 inches (230 mm) long to securely anchor pipe sleeve below finished floor
in concrete footing; with anchors designed for securing floor insert to floor substrate indicated; one per post standard.
2. Available Manufacturers: Porter Athletic Equipment Company; Model No. 00872-100 or 0087-200 for 3-1/2 inch diameter
posts with 8 inch diameter cover
H. SAFETY PADS
1. Wall Safety Pads: Padded wall wainscot panels designed to be attached in a continuous row; each panel section consisting
of fill laminated to backer board with visible surfaces fully covered by seamless fabric covering, free of sag and wrinkles and
firmly attached to back of backer board.
2. Size: Each panel section, 24 inches (600 mm) wide by not less than 72 inches (1800 mm) long.
3. Corner Wall Safety Pads: Wall corner pad consisting of not less than 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) thick, multiple-impact-resistant,
closed-cell polyethylene-foam filler, covered on both sides and all edges by fabric covering with backer board and manufacturer's standard anchorage to wall
4. Available Manufacturers:
Draper Inc.; EcoVision Gym Wall Pads
American Athletic, Inc.
Jaypro Sports, LLC.
Performance Sports Systems.
Porter Athletic Equipment Company.
I.
BATTING CAGES
1. Size: 10’-0” high by 50’-0” long.
2. Supporting Frame: 1-7/8-inch O.D. heavy-wall electro-plated tubing with cross spreaders located at 14’-0” centers for hoist
cable attachments.
3. Hoist Cables: Six 1/8-inch diameter, vandal-proof galvanized cables, 2,100-pound breaking strength each cable.
4. Bottom End of Each Cable: Terminate in sling arrangement for proper support of frame assembly.
5. Line Shaft: Driven by heavy-duty, 3/4-hp, single-output shaft, gear motor furnished with automatic overload protection.
6. Flush Wall-Mounted Dual-Key Switch: Up and down, with stainless steel cover, to prevent improper operation of system
7. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to the following: Porter Athletic
Equipment Company; Ceiling-Suspended Batting Cage, Item #90920-000
157
DIVISION 11 70 00
THERAPY EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes the following therapy equipment:
a. Stationary sports whirlpool.
b. Icemaker/storage bin.
B.
STATIONARY SPORTS WHIRLPOOL
1. Provide stainless steel whirlpool with the capacity of 110 gallon.
2. Complete with optional thermostatic mixing valve/vacuum breaker and tailpiece. Provide piping from tailpiece to floor drain
provided by Mechanical.
a. Source 1 Medical; S-110-2 Whirlpool
b. Morley Athletic Supply Company Inc.
c. MSEC Medical
d. Supplies & Equipment Company.
C. ICE MACHINE/STORAGE BIN
1. Provide Ice Machine with a production capacity of 540 lbs per 24 hour period and storage capacity of 430 lbs. Ice Machine
located in Training Room.
Manitowoc; S-Series Ice Cube Machine on B-570 Bin, Model SY-0504A-B570
Ice-O-Matic.
Kold-Draft.
Scotsman.
158
159
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
160
161
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 12 20 00
WINDOW BLINDS
A. SUMMARY
a. horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats.
b. manual roller shades.
B.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS
1. Mounting: Inside mounting, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated.
2. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and
radiused corners. Width: 1”
Hunter Douglas.
Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company.
Fashions Division, Inc.
C. ROLLER SHADES
1. Light-Filtering Shades: 3 percent openness, with darker interior color and lighter exterior color.
a. Location: All exterior windows in classrooms and office areas.
b. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated:
Draper Inc.; SheerWeave Series 2703, Phifer Brand (Basis-of-Design).
MechoShade Systems, Inc.;EuroTwill 6000.
Draper Inc.; “T” Screen 9601/9603 Series by Mermet
2.
Room Darkening (Black-Out) Shades: Science Classrooms
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated:
Draper Inc.; SheerWeave Series SW7000 or SW7100 (Basis-of-Design).
MechoShade Systems, Inc.; Equinox™ 0100 Series.
Draper Inc.; SunBloc Series SB9000.
DIVISION 12 30 00
CASEWORK
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design.
a) Plastic-laminate science casework.
b) Metal cabinets.
c) Science countertops and sinks.
2. All draw and door cores for cabinetry locks shall be Grade 1.
B.
C. CABINET FABRICATION (GENERAL)
1. Provide Plastic-Faced Cabinet Construction: Tops, Front and Ends of Cabinets, and Tall Cabinets shall be 3/4-inch MDF,
thermoset decorative panels on exposed surfaces.
2. Shelves shall be 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panels.
3. Drawer Bodies: Steel drawer pans formed from 0.0359-inch- (0.9-mm-) thick metal, metallic phosphate treated, and finished with manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat with a
minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat and 2 mils (0.05 mm) for system.
4. Provide filler strips as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate
from same material and with same finish as cabinets.
5. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, Butt hinges are prohibited. Use heavy duty concealed hinges, minimum 140 degree swing.
Fully adjustable door alignment. Clip removal. Self-closing with bumpers. Provide 2 hinges for doors less than 48 inches
(1220 mm) high and 3 hinges for doors more than 48 inches (1220 mm) high.
162
6.
Pulls: Plastic pulls are prohibited. Use heavy duty 4” polished or satin chrome wire pulls for doors and drawers of all
cabinetry.
7. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Disc tumbler or cam locks prohibited. Use CompX / National M2-3718-351 / 26d finish
pin tumbler deadbolt type locks with ¾” throw. Add “Advantage Plus” feature. NO SUBSTITUTES!
8. Provide locks on all doors and drawers. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and six master keys.
9. Keying Schedule: Provide a casework Lock Schedule similar to attached sheet found at end of this division.
10. Plastic-Laminate Wall Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Grade HGL or HGP, shop bonded to both sides of MDF. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded. Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
a. Edge Treatment: Finish both edges with thermoset decorative panels.
b. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Provide heavy duty shelf supports at all locations unless directed otherwise.
Commercial Casework.
LSI Corporation of America
St. Charles.
TMI Systems Design Corporation.
Westmark Products, Inc.
D. PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS (SCIENCE LABS)
1. Construction: Provide plastic-laminate-faced or wood casework in science labs and prep areas.
2. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as adjacent exposed cabinet surface.
TMI Systems Design Corporation
Case Systems Inc.
Fisher Hamilton L.L.C.
Science Design & Supply.
LSI Corporation of America; a Sagus International company.
Sheldon Science Systems.
E.
FUME HOOD CABINET
1. Provide fume hood cabinet base, matching adjacent cabinets in design and finishes.
2. Fume hood cabinets should be designed to accommodate chemical storage.
Air Master Systems Corporation
Hood Base, HB-3630.
Acid Storage Cabinet, ASC-30.
BMC Manufacturing.
Lab Crafters, Inc.
Lab Fabricators.
F.
COUNTERTOP AND SINK MATERIALS (SCIENCE LABS)
1. Provide chemical resistive epoxy-resin material according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5. Color: Black
2. Sink shall be min. depth of 8-10”, size of sink shall be no less than 22 x 18. Architect to coordinate sink configuration and
size with overall layout intentions of the lab design.
3. Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy
adhesive and concealed metal splines.
4. Provide with polypropylene strainers and tailpieces.
5. Provide integral sinks in epoxy countertops, bonded to countertops with invisible joint line.
6. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.
Durcon Company (The).
Epoxyn Products.
Laboratory Tops, Inc.
163
164
DIVISION 12 40 00
FURNISHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes
a. High density rolling storage units.
b. Welded frame steel standard size book stack shelving.
c. Changing table for Special Ed program
d. Washer and Dryer for Special Ed program
B.
ROLLING STORAGE UNITS
1. Type: High density storage system with single faced stationary and double faced mobile units
2. Components: Provide complete system with low profile track and deck and high profile carriage (1000 lb. capacity per lin.
ft.).
3. Plywood Flooring: Provide 3/4 inch plywood flooring panels (fire treated) between tracks.
4. Shelves: Each unit to be provided with 6 adjustable shelves.
5. End Panels: Provide closed upright as end panel for each section.
Space Saver Concepts
Lundia.
Tab Company.
C. MODULAR SHELVING COMPONENTS
1. General: Provide cantilever bracket type metal library bookstacks with top shelf no higher than 66 inches above finished
floor and 5 shelf configuration, except where specifically indicated otherwise.
2. Adjustable at 1 inch intervals vertically.
3. Veneer Species: White Maple.
4. Hardwood edge banding.
5. The following shelving suppliers/manufacturers are approved for bidding:
Library Interiors West, Inc., Lakewood, CO (303.987.2501) – Estey/Tennsco.
First Continental Library Equipment Corp., Denver, CO (303.778.1660) – Montel.
Shelving shall be furnished by one manufacturer and shall be uniform in detail for all units.
D. CHANGING TABLE (SPECIAL ED)
1. General: Provide cantilever wall mounted type, similar to Smirthwaite Hi/Low Riser Changing Bench. Provide proper ADA
clearances and power requirements as required.
E.
WASHER/DRYER (SPECIAL ED)
1. General: Provided by Owner, installed by Contractor. Coordinate power and venting requirements.
DIVISION 12 60 00
MULTIPLE SEATING
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes
a. Fixed audience seating
b. Wall-attached telescoping bleachers.
B.
C. FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
1. Fixed Audience Seating: Molded-plastic chairs with upholstered panel inserts.
2. Chair Width: Vary chair widths to accommodate sightlines and row lengths, with minimum chair width of 18 inches (457
mm) from center to center of armrests.
3. Back Height: Standard-style backs.
4. Self-Rising Seat Mechanism: Spring-actuated.
5. Armrests: Plastic with rounded edges, concealed mounting.
6. Aisle Lighting Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard round fixtures.
7. Row-Letter and Chair-Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard.
165
8.
9.
Accessible Seating:NProvide removable chairs where wheelchair spaces are indicated.
Provide chairs without arm on aisle side in locations indicated, but not less than 5 percent of aisle seats. Identify these
seats with a sign or marker.
Irwin Seating Company
American Seating Company
Hussey Seating Company.
D. TELESCOPING BLEACHERS
1. General: Operable systems of multiple-tiered seating on interconnected folding platforms that close, without being dismantled, into a nested stack for storing. Stand units permit opening and closing of adjacent rows, allow individual and collective
rows to be locked open for use, and close with vertical faces of upper skirts on the same vertical plane.
2. Wall-Attached Telescoping Stands: Forward-folding system, in which the bleachers open in the forward direction by initially
moving the front row away from the stack to the fully extended position, and the rear of bleacher understructure is permanently attached to wall construction. Access behind telescoping bleachers is required for maintenance, without obstruction,
when bleachers are in retracted position.
3. Any retractable seating used for non-athletic use should be provided with skirting on both sides, where exposed to view.
4. Access behind telescoping bleachers is required for maintenance, without obstruction, when bleachers are in retracted position.
5. Operation: Automatic, friction-type, integral power unit.
6. Provide access panel in bleacher deck to access traction motor.
7. Bench Material: Molded polyethylene plastic with contour surfaces for benches, and steel sheet with vinyl-clad finish for
skirts. Two Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. District will consider the use of wood bleacher,
however the application should be reviewed prior to specifying.
8. Safety Rails: Structural steel, finished with manufacturer's standard powder coat system.Removable and folding mid-aisle
handrails located at centerline of each vertical aisle with seating on both sides.
9. End rails (guards) that are telescoping and self-storing.
10. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use only the following type:
Irwin Telescopic Seating Company; Model 4500
Any other bleacher system must be approved in writing by Owner (SVVSD Building Systems)
166
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
167
168
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 13 10 00
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A. EXTERIOR BLEACHERS (Non-elevated)
1. Design Requirements:
a. Varsity Baseball Field Seating Capacity – Provide two sections of 5-row bleachers with double floor planks, 21’ long.
Riser board starting on row 2. 42” railing on sides and rear. 150 total seating capacity.
b. Jr. Varsity Baseball Field Seating Capacity – Provide two sections of 3-row bleachers with double floor planks, 21’
long. Riser board starting on row 2. 42” railing on sides and rear. 84 total seating capacity.
c. Varsity Softball Field Seating Capacity – Provide two sections of 5-row bleachers with double floor planks, 21’ long.
d. Jr. Varsity Softball Field Seating Capacity – Provide two sections of 3-row bleachers with double floor planks, 21’ long.
e. Tennis Courts Seating Capacity - Provide a section of 5-row bleachers with double floor planks, 15’ long. Riser board
starting on row 2. 42” railing on sides and rear for each pair of courts. 100 total seating capacity.
f. Middle School Field Requirements – Provide two sections of 5-row bleachers with double floor planks, 15’ long. Riser
board starting on row 2. 42” railing on sides and rear. 100 total seating capacity.
g. Elementary Field Requirements – no requirements
2. Description:
a. Type: All aluminum tube and channel understructure bleacher seating with snap-in footboards and bolt-through seatboards, all aluminum channel with 9-gauge galvanized chain link fence; fully-closed bleacher aisles and decking system.
b. Provide mid-aisle handrails between bleacher sections as required.
c. Guard Rail System: At rear and side to meet IBC requirements.
d. Riser per Row: 8", Depth per Row: 24".
e. Seatboards: 2" x 10" nominal aluminum, no backrest.
f. Footboards: 2" x 10" nominal aluminum.
g. Acceptable manufacturers:
Dant Corporation, non-elevated, ZA-155 Standard Series
Outdoor Aluminum
Sturdisteel
Bleachers International
B.
EXTERIOR BLEACHERS (Elevated)
1. Design Requirements:
a. Football/Track Field Seating Capacity – 800 seats (home), 480 seats (visitor) at 18" per seat.
b. For “home” bleachers provide 60 lin feet of bleachers at 20 rows with double floor planks, 21’ long. Riser board starting
on row 2. 42” railing on sides and rear. 800 total seating capacity.
c. For “visitor” bleachers provide 45 lin feet of bleachers at 16 rows with double floor planks, 21’ long. Riser board starting
on row 2. 42” railing on sides and rear. 480 total seating capacity.
d. Bleachers shall include aisles, ramps, stair and wheelchair area as required for code compliance.
e. Provide 8‘ x 18’ press box, integrated in bleacher sections on ”home” side of football field.
2. Description:
a. Type: All aluminum tube and channel understructure bleacher seating with snap-in footboards and bolt-through seatboards, all aluminum channel with 9-gauge galvanized chain link fence; fully-closed bleacher aisles and decking system.
b. Provide mid-aisle handrails between bleacher sections as required.
c. Aisles: as required, based on capacity of sections.
d. Guard Rail System: At rear and side to meet IBC requirements.
e. Riser per Row: 8", Depth per Row: 24".
f. Seatboards: 2" x 10" nominal aluminum, no backrest.
g. Footboards: 2" x 10" nominal aluminum.
h. Acceptable manufacturers:
Dant Corporation, non-elevated, ZA-155 Standard Series
Outdoor Aluminum
Sturdisteel
Bleachers International
169
170
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
171
172
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 14 20 00
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
a. electric traction elevators.
b. vertical wheelchair lifts.
B.
WARRANTY
1. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace
defective elevator work within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide
standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered elevator systems and as required
for complete system.
2. Elevator Type: Gearless traction, single sided, 3000 lb load rating
3. Car Enclosures: Clear Inside Dimensions 6’-6” by 5’-0”. Cab Height: 8 feet.
4. Handrails: Round tube brushed aluminum of 1/2 inch thick by 2 inches wide.
5. Flooring shall be VCT
6. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
7. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units with keyswitch operation.
8. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective work
within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
9. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance
10. Available Manufacturers: Listed in order of preference:
ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
Schindler Elevator Corp.
KONE Inc.; EcoSpace™ Gearless Traction
D. VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
1. Provide wheel chair lift for stage access in Auditoriums or any other level that is not accessible via code compliant ramp.
2. Platform Size: 36 by 60 inches.
3. Capacity: 750lbs.
4. Control System: Provide key-operated control complying with ASME A18.1.
5. Gates: Rectangular steel-tube frames with flush steel-sheet panels.
6. Platform: Non-skid surface.
7. Platform Sides: Rectangular steel-tube frames with flush steel-sheet panels.
ThyssenKrupp Access
Access Industries, Inc.
Concord Elevator Inc.
Giant Lift Equipment Mfg. Co. Inc.
Lift-Avator, Inc.
173
174
St Vrain Valley School District RE-1J
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
173
174
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
DIVISION 21 10 00
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY
a. Sprinkler Piping and Specialties
b. Piping
c. Valving
d. Specialties
B.
GENERAL SUMMARY
1. The entire building shall be sprinklered. Sprinkler system shall consist of the following types: Wet and dry pre-action. A zone
which serves the exterior of the building shall be dry preaction type. All other zones such as kitchen area, office area, crawl
space and classrooms shall be wet type.
C. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
1. Fire protection system is a "wet-pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing water
and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire.
2. Fire protection system for Stage areas are "Class III, Standpipe and Hose" system which is an arrangement of piping,
valves, hose connections and allied equipment.
3. Elevator Shafts and Machine Rooms: Sprinklers shall be installed in elevator machinery rooms, at the top of elevator
shafts, and at the bottom of elevator shafts.
4. Sprinkler coverage shall be designed for Ordinary Hazard Group One. Sprinkler heads shall be high temperature classification (286 degrees F.).
5. Deviations from approved "working plans" for sprinkler piping, require written approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
Written approval shall be on file with the Engineer prior to deviating from the approved "working plans."
6. There shall be no fire sprinkler piping in electrical rooms (other than piping serving sprinklers directly in that room) or installed over any electrical panels.
7. Install pressure gauges on city and system sides of fire entry valve assembly.
8. Install hangers straight and true and piping parallel to building lines.
D. HYDRAULIC DESIGN:
1. The design for the Fire Protection system shall be designed by an assigned specialty consultant by the District to the design
team. Fees for the fire protections consultant shall be paid for under the Architect/Owner agreement.
E.
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
1. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with
installation requirements. All equipment used on this project shall be new and UL listed unless noted or specified otherwise.
2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following:
a. Gate Valves:
Nibco
Kennedy Valve, Div. of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc.
Mueller
Stockham
Grinnell
Milwaukee
b. Swing Check Valves:
Central
Mueller
Kennedy Valve, Div. of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc.
Star Sprinkler Corp.
Viking
Victaulic
Globe
Potter Roemer
c. Butterfly and Ball Valves:
Grinnell
175
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
F.
Mueller
Victaulic
Milwaukee
Kennedy
Grooved Mechanical Couplings:
Gruvlok
Victaulic Company of America
Central Sprink, Inc.
Double Check Valve Assembly:
Watts
Fire Protection Specialty Valves
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
Star Sprinkler Corporation
Viking Corporation
Central
Globe
Grinnell/Gem
Fire Department Connection:
Croker
Potter-Roemer
Elkhart
Grinnell/Gem
Sprinkler Heads:
Central Sprinkler Corp.
Viking Corp.
Globe
Flexible Sprinkler Head Assemblies:
FlexHead Industries
Viking Corp.
Globe
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS (INSIDE BUILDING):
1. American Tube Company "Dyna-Thread-40" and "Dyna-Flow" and Allied Tube and Conduit
2. Corporation "Super Flo" are acceptable to Schedule 40 pipe. The Corrosion Resistance Ratio of the pipe shall be 1.00 or
greater
3. Schedule 5 pipe shall not be allowed.
4. Schedule 10 pipe shall only be allowed for pipe sizes 2-1/2inches and larger.
5. Provide galvanized, schedule 40, piping system for preaction system and drain risers.
G. FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HEAD ASSEMBLIES:
1. FlexHead braded sprinkler heads allowable.
2. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 200-psig maximum working-pressure rating.
3. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, 304 stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainlesssteel wire braid. Include steel nipples welded to hose; 1 inch NPT for attachment to the sprinkler system branch piping. Minimum bend radius: 12 inches.
4. Flexible Hose Attachment: Removable hub type with set screw.
H. FITTINGS (INSIDE BUILDING):
1. Cast-Iron Threaded fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI
B1.20.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to
ANSI B1.20.1. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2inches and smaller.
3. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
176
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fittings: All mechanical fitting and couplings shall be grooved for the entire fire protection system shall be of the same manufacturer as submitted in shop drawing equipment review.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt spot faced.
Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
Plain end, hooker type, or push-on fittings or couplings shall not be allowed.
Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be allowed.
I.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES:
1. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: Body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non-shock,
threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel.
2. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non-shock.
Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke, rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming
to ASTM A 126 Class B.
3. Ball Valves: 1-1/2inches and smaller shall be threaded, forged brass construction, with teflon seats and blow out proof
stem. Ball shall be full port with chrome plated ball.
4. Ball Valves: 2inches to 3inches shall be listed to 300 p.s.i. with optional internal tamper switch. Body shall be ductile iron
with corrosion resistant coating. Ball shall be 316 stainless steel, standard port design.
5. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
J.
ALARM DEVICE AND FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES:
1. Water Flow Indicators: Vane type water flow detector, rated to 250 psig; designed for horizontal or vertical installation.
2. Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full open position.
3. Pressure Switch: Indicating low pressure trouble in sprinkler system.
4. Pressure switch: Indicating flow in sprinkler system.
K.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS:
1. Sprinkler Heads: Fusible link or frangible bulb type, quick-response; style as indicated or required by the applicationUpright,
Pendent and Sidewall Styles: Factory brass, rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces. Heads shall be stainless
steel where installed exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
2. Concealed Style (Corridors only): Rough brass, adjustable, with painted white cover plate in finished spaces. (GEM Models
FR946 and F946 Clean Line Sprinklers are not acceptable.)
3. Recessed Style: recessed sprinklers are not acceptable.
L.
FIRE VALVE CABINETS:
1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim
style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
2. Provide standard equipment "Croker" Series 2750, or "Potter Roemer" Series 1880 valve and extinguisher cabinets.
M. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS:
1. Polished chrome cast brass, wall type, with wall escutcheon and having 5” storz inlet connection and NPT outlet, as specified in NFPA 1963. Inlet shall have a clapper valve, and cap and chain. Unit shall have wall escutcheon of cast brass, finish to match connections, with words "Standpipe - Fire Dept. Connection" or "Auto Spkr. - Fire Dept. Connection" or "Auto
Spkr. and Standpipe - Fire Department Connection" in raised letters.
177
178
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
179
180
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
DIVISION 22 10 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
A. SUMMARY
a. Facility Water Distribution
b. Plumbing Pumps
2. This guideline specification is for the Consulting Engineers and outlines minimum requirements for the District. The Consulting Engineer should apply these guidelines consistent with the budget constraints. The Consulting Engineer must select
among the mechanical systems, size and specific equipment and materials within the budget and design limits. The guidelines are based upon considerable experience with the purpose of providing the best value for the available money.
3. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.
4. Products installed may not be furnished under this Section include water meters which will be provided by the utility company, to the site, ready for installation. Coordinate this work with utility provider.
B.
DESIGN GUIDLINE
1. The Architect and plumbing system designer is required to review with the District locations of all cleanouts, outside hydrants and isolation valves. If A/E does not review work with District personnel, they are subject to potential cost of required
modifications.
C. PRODUCTS
1. Shock Arrestors:
a. Shock Arresters - Bellows Type: Stainless steel casing and bellows, rated for 250 psi, 200 degrees F, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.
b. Shock Arrester - Piston Type: 60 psi precharge, sealed from system water with free sliding piston and EPDM O-rings.
Suitable for up to 150 psi and 180 degrees F thread connections.
2. Hose Bibbs:
a. Finished Rooms with Floor Drains: Polished chrome plated bronze body, with renewable composition disc, tee handle,
3/4 inch NPT inlet, 3/4 inch hose outlet. Basis of design: Chicago Faucet No. 293
b. Unfinished and Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze body, renewable composition disc, wheel handle, vacuum breaker,
3/4 inch NPT inlet, 3/4 inch hose outlet with vacuum breaker. Basis of design: Chicago Faucet No. 952-293-6
c. Finished Rooms: Polished chrome with flush mounting lockable wall box. ¾” NPT inlet, ¾” hose outlet. Basis of design: Woodford No. B65.
3. Wall Hydrants: Flush with wall, non-freeze, box type, wall hydrant; all brass with nickel bronze box cover and frame, "T"
handle loose key, key lock cover, integral vacuum breaker, self draining body and shank, ¾ inch male hose thread outlet, ¾
inch male or female I.P.S. thread inlet, renewable seat; shank length to extend thru primary exterior wall surface sufficient
distance to prevent freezing. Basis of design: Woodford Model B65
4. Backflow Preventers:
a. Vacuum Breaker, Atmospheric: Atmospheric type, all brass, angle pattern with disc float that closes the atmospheric
vent for temperatures up to 210 degrees F.; full size orifice for maximum flow; female thread inlet and outlet; rough
brass exterior finish; unit to be approved by National Sanitary Foundation. Basis of design: Watts No. 288
b. Vacuum Breaker Pressure Type: Spill resistant design, suitable for indoor or outdoor installation, with vent seal diaphragm designed to seal air vent prior to opening the check valve. Suitable for use with downstream valves. Provided
with ball valve shut-offs and test cocks. Basis of design: Watts Series 008QT
c. Double Check Assembly: Sizes 3/4inch through 2inches include two spring-loaded, Y-pattern bronze check valves,
two bronze ball valves and four testcocks for field testing. All valves are threaded type and the unit is shipped completely assembled. Sizes 2-1/2inches through 10inches include two spring loaded Y-pattern check valves with epoxy
coated ductile iron bodies and bronze trim, two cast iron non-rising stem gate valves and four testcocks for field testing.
Compact style, inlet flow vertical up, outlet flow vertical down or up as shown on drawings. All valves are flanged type
and the unit is shipped completely assembled; unit to be approved by National Sanitary Foundation, U.S.C. Foundation
for Cross Connection Control, A.S.S.E. State and or Local authorities. Basis of design: Watts Series 709NRS
d. Reduced pressure type: All bronze (3/4inch-2inch)/ductile iron (2-1/2inch – 10inches) body with two independently operating, spring loaded check valves and one differential relief valve with automatic intermediate atmospheric vent.
Pressure in intermediate zone to activate relief valve when there is a 2 psig. differential between the zone and the upstream side of the first check valve. The relief valve shall remain open until a positive pressure differential is reestablished. Assembly to be furnished with fullport, positive shut off non-rising stem, isolation valves, in-line strainer,
union connections, funnel, and all test cocks. Compact style, inlet flow vertical up, outlet flow vertical down or up. As181
sembly to have approval of National Sanitary Foundation, U.S.C. Foundation for Cross Connection Control, A.S.S.E.
State and or Local Authorities. Basis of design: Watts Series 909NRS
5.
Pressure Reducing Valves (Direct Acting):
a. Low and Medium Capacity (15 to 120 GPM): All bronze pressure reducing valves, sensitive spring and diaphragm for
accurate pressure control; manual adjustment for outlet pressure integral strainer, female thread connections. See detail on mechanical plans for size, capacity and piping arrangement. Basis of design: Watts No. 223
b. High Capacity (50 to 1800 GPM): Epoxy coated cast iron body pressure reducing/sustaining valve, stainless steel
seats, sensitive spring and large Buna-N diaphragm area for accurate pressure control; pilot valve with manual adjustment for outlet water pressure; female thread connections for sizes up to 2-1/2inches and flanged connections for
sizes 3inches and larger. Provide in-line inlet water strainer; inlet and outlet valves and threaded or flanged connections for easy valve removal. See detail on mechanical plans for size, capacity and piping arrangement. Basis of design: Watts 115-2A
6. Water Tempering Valves: Pressure Equalizing with Thermometer: Concealed type, 3-port, all bronze, pressure balancing
mixing valve with integral angle check stops, maximum temperature limit stop, stainless steel balancing piston, chrome plated finished wall plate with hot and cold water marking; ¾ inch inlet and outlet pipe sizes and volume control. Unit to hold
temperature steady and constant with pressure fluctuations up to 85 percent. Unit shall have integral or separate flush with
wall, 3-color dial thermometer with scale from 70 degrees F to 130 degrees F and chrome plated trim ring for separate
thermometer. Basis of design: Powers P414.
7. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Exposed type, all bronze thermostatically controlled mixing valve with stainless steel piston, fail
safe automatic shut-down if either hot or cold water pressure fails; union connection, polished chrome finish. Basis of design: Powers Series 430.
8. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves (PTRV): Fully automatic, all bronze pressure/temperature relief valve with test lever
and extension thermostatic element; temperature relief setting at 210 degrees F and pressure setting at 150 psig; valve to
meet ASME Standards and comply with the latest AGA ratings. Relief opening to be piped to an indirect connection at
nearest floor drain.
9. Water Meter: Provide water meters with registration in gallons.
a. Water Meter - 2 Inches and Smaller: Disc type conforming to AWWA C700.
b. Water Meter - 3 Inches and Larger: Compound type, conforming to AWWA C702.
c. Remote Registration System: Utility company standards.
10. Domestic hot water expansion tanks: Fabricated steel designed and constructed in accordance with ASME Section VIII, Division I. Heavy duty removable Butyl bladder. Working pressure of 125 psig/Maximum operating temperature of 240 degrees F. Tank liner of FDA approved materials.
a. Hose Bibbs and Faucets:
Chicago Faucet Co.
Nibco Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.
Crane
Woodford Mfgr Co.
b. Wall Hydrants:
Zurn
Woodford Mfg. Co.
Josam
R. Smith Mfg. Co.
Wade
c. Backflow Preventers:
Watts Regulator Co.
d. Water Meters:
Coordinate with the water district.
e. Relief Valves:
A.W. Cash Valve Mfg. Corp.
Watts Regulator Co.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Wilkins
f. Shock Arresters - Bellows Type:
Josam
J.R. Smith Mfg. Co.
182
g.
h.
i.
Zurn
Precision Plumbing Products
Shock Arresters - Piston Type:
Sioux Chief
Watts Regulator Co.
Water Tempering Valves
Lawler
Leonard
Powers
Symmons
Pressure Reducing Valves:
Watts Regulator Co.
Mueller
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Domestic Hot Water Expansion Tanks:
Amtrol
Armstrong
Bell & Gossett
Conbraco
Taco
Watts Regulator Co.
D. GENERAL INSTALLATION
1. Run piping as direct as possible to required connections, and slope to drain valves at low points for complete system draindown. Locate drain valves at accessible points within the system. Coordinate routing with Construction and O&M personnel
of the District.
2. Provide ball valves for branch lines off main, sub-main takeoffs and main take-offs.
3. Provide building shut-off and separate hose end drain valves with vacuum breaker at main service entry.
E.
SANITARY AND STORM SEWER SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. Run soil and waste piping at a grade of not less than 2.08%.
2. Run storm piping at a grade of not less than 1.04%.
3. Do not install vents within 2' of roof edge, parapet or wall line of an "on-the-roof" structure.
4. Do not install vents within 40' of outside air intakes.
F.
PRESSURE REDUCING INSTALLATION:
1. Install backflow preventers on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur and on boiler make-up
lines, hose bibbs and flush valves.
2. Install pressure reducing valves to limit maximum static pressure at plumbing fixtures to 65 psig.
3. Install water hammer arresters in domestic water piping system on each set of flush valves and where hydrostatic shock
pressures could occur.
4. Install long radius ells on domestic hot water recirculating piping.
G. SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION:
1. Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to
building.
2. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation as detailed on
mechanical drawings.
3. Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building; complete with strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve.
4. Install water meter in accordance with utility company's installation instructions and requirements.
5. Size meter and arrange piping and specialties to comply with utility company's requirements.
H. INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
1. General Duty Valve Applications: The drawings should indicate valve types to be used, where specific valve types are not
indicated the following requirements apply:
2. Shut-off duty: Use ball and butterfly valves.
3. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
183
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more
plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2inch and smaller, use ball
valves; for sectional valves 2- 1/2inch and larger, use butterfly valves.
Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item and on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and
elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2inch and smaller, use ball valves; for shutoff valves 2- 1/2inch and larger, use
butterfly valves.
Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to completely drain equipment for service or
repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping system. For drain valves 2inch and smaller, use ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2inch and larger,
use butterfly valves.
Check Valves: Install non-slam spring loaded check valves on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
Hose Bibbs & Wall Hydrants: Install where indicated with vacuum breaker.
I.
PLUMBING PUMPS
1. General: Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to
shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same
manufacturer.
2. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
3. Interlock wiring between pumps; and between pumps and field-installed control devices.
4. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
5. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division-26 sections:
6. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and pump control panels.
7. In-line Circulation Pumps: Provide in-line recirculation pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled.
a. Type: Single stage, wet rotor type, designed for 145 psi working pressure, 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) continuous
water temperature, and specifically designed for quiet operation.
b. Pump volute: bronze.
c. Impeller, impeller seal ring, rotor can, bearing plate, motor shaft and rotor cladding shall be constructed of stainless
steel.
d. Impeller shall be secured directly to the motor shaft be means of a stainless steel tapered split cone and locking nut.
e. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Grundfos Pumps
Corp.
8. Submersible Sump Pumps: Provide submersible sump pumps as indicated, of size and capacity as scheduled.
a. Pump: Cast-iron shell, bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft, factory-sealed grease lubricated ball bearings, ceramic
mechanical seal, and perforated steel strainer.
b. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start, with built-in overload protection, electrical characteristics as scheduled.
Provide 10 feet of 3-conductor PVC cord and molded grounding plug.
c. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Goulds Pumps, Inc.
Weil Pump Co.
Zoeller Co.
9. Elevator Sump Pump: Provide Stancor Oil Minder System for elevator sump as manufactured by Stancor, Inc.
a. Stancor Oil Minder control system with built in audible and visual alarms. System will lock out pump on detection of oil
or high amperage condition. Provide silencing button for audible alarm. Panel shall have alarm contact for remote
monitoring. Provide required cables and accessories for complete installation.
b. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Stancor, Inc.
J.
FACITLITY DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
1. General: Section specifies building sanitary drainage, storm drainage and vent piping systems, including drains and drainage specialties.
2. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a maximum
1/4inch clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping. Basis of design: Jay R. Smith
Fig. 7012
3. Trap Primers (For equipment room floor drains, restrooms and as otherwise noted): Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2inch connections matching piping system. Connections: Inlet 1/2inch male NPT; outlet 1/2inch female NPT. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap
primer for proper flow.
184
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
K.
Valves shall be easily adjusted to high or low pressure and shall be automatically activated whenever any faucet is opened
in the building, causing a pressure drop. Basis of design: "Prime-Rite" Trap Primer Valve as manufactured by Precision
Plumbing Products, Inc
Floor Cleanout: Round, cast iron body with recessed bronze closure plug; scoriated polished bronze frame and cover plate.
Wall Cleanout: Cleanout tee with raised head brass plug tapped for 1/4-20 thread; flat style chrome plated wall cover plate
with holes for 1/4inch bolt; 1/4-20 threaded bolt with chrome plated flat head.
Surface Cleanout: Cast iron body ferrule with raised head brass plug. Medium duty cast iron manhole cover and ring 12inch
diameter to be set in concrete pad, Neenah No. R-1791-A.
Line Cleanout: Cast iron tapped cleanout ferrule with raised head brass plug.
Floor Drains:
a. Toilet Rooms, Showers and Finished Areas - Round cast iron body with flashing collar and cast iron ring, 6 inch round
nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with secured square hole grate, bottom waste outlet. Provide a deep seal trap
for each floor drain installed in Locker Rooms and Shower Rooms. Basis of design: Jay R. Smith Fig. 2005-A
b. Boiler and Mechanical Rooms - Square cast iron, light duty, shallow body drain with flashing collar and cast iron ring,
8inches round tractor type non-tilt slotted grate and sediment bucket, bottom waste outlet. Basis of design: Jay R.
Smith Fig. 2220
Floor Sinks:
a. Indirect Waste Drain - Square, cast iron, porcelain enameled interior, sump body drain 6inch deep x 8inch square with
flashing collar and cast iron ring, 8inch square nickel bronze removable half top grate, dome button strainer, bottom
waste outlet. Basis of design: Jay R. Smith 3100-12
b. Floor Sink - Square cast iron, porcelain enameled interior, sump body drain, 16inch square x 12inch deep with 16inch
square nickel bronze removable half top grate, bottom waste outlet. Basis of design: Jay R. Smith 3200-12
Roof and Overflow Drains:
a. Type 1 Drain - Cast iron bodies with sump, removable cast iron vandal-proof dome strainer, combined flashing clamp
and gravel stop for roof drain and combined flashing clamp and gravel stop with 3-1/2” high internal water dam standpipe for overflow drain. Deck plate with securing holes provided to receive both drains. Basis of design: Jay R. Smith
Fig. 1800–U-CID
b. Type 2 Drain - Scupper drain with cast iron bodies with flashing clamp and secured cast iron grate with vandal-proof
screws. Basis of design: Jay R. Smith Fig. 1510
Vent Caps: Provide cast-iron, vandal-proof, hooded vent caps for all vent terminations. Vent cap shall be held in place with
recessed allen head set screws. Install on all vents.
Non-Metallic Trench Drains: Polyester resin and quartz aggregate or glass-filled polyester fiberglass, precast, interlocking
design, with bottom radius and 0.6 percent slope. Provide catch basin with sediment bucket constructed of same material as
trench drain and connected to trench drain; ductile iron solid cover (catch basin applicable to 3D Art only).
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following:
Josam Mfg. Co.
Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co.
Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Div.
Wade
ACO Drain Inc.
Quazite Corp.
INTERCEPTORS
1. Grease Interceptors: Provide grease interceptors, of size and capacity as indicated. Construction shall be precast concrete,
two compartment, designed for H2O traffic loading. Water proofed by manufacturer for continuous interior submergence.
2. Variations: Provide the following construction feature variations:
a. Cast iron manhole rings.
b. Gas tight manhole cover and frame.
3. Solids Interceptors: Provide solids interceptors of size and capacity as indicated. Construction shall be cast-iron body, aluminum cover, aluminum sediment basket, and removable bronze screws.
a. Interceptors:
Josam Mfg Co.
Rockford Sanitary Systems Corp.
J.R. Smith Mfg Co.
Wade Div; Tyler Pipe.
Zurn Industries; Hydromechanics Div.
185
b.
L.
Grease Interceptors:
Copeland Enterprises, Inc.
Colorado Precast Concrete, Inc.
CHEMICAL WASTE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
1. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with
installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials
which match pipe materials used in laboratory drainage piping systems. Extent of chemical-waste drainage systems work
shall be indicated on drawings.
2. Codes and Standards:
a. PDI Compliance: Fabricate and install chemical-waste drainage systems in accordance with PDI "Code Guide 302".
b. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install chemical-waste drainage systems in accordance with IAPMO "Uniform Plumbing Code".
3. Acid Waste Neutralizing Sumps: Acid Waste Neutralizing Sumps: Provide acid waste neutralizing sumps, of size and capacity as indicated, constructed of acid resisting material, complete with inlet, outlet, and vent connections of indicated size.
a. Provide submerged type inlet, complete with down pipe or baffle, and 2" minimum cleanout at top of vertical drop.
b. Permanently mark fill line on inside of sump, 1" below outlet invert.
c. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
GSR Fuseal
Enfield Industrial Corporation
4. Acid Waste Piping and Fittings:
a. Polypropylene Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Flame retardant polypropylene DWV piping and fittings, which meet ASTM D635
flame test and ASTM D-1785 dimensional requirements, with electric fusion/resistance joints. Piping shall be Schedule
40.
b. Manufacturer shall provide vertical expansion joints with Viton O-Rings for vertical risers, where required to compensate for expansion and riser movement.
c. Traps and Tailpieces: Provide traps and tailpieces for each fixture inlet connection to chemical-waste drainage system, constructed of same material and weight as piping system. Trap assemblies shall be mechanical joint. Mechanical joints for fused polypropylene piping systems may not be used for any other purpose.
d. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
GSR Fuseal
Enfield Industrial Corporation
5. High Silicon Cast Iron Pipe & Pipe Fittings Systems:
a. For pipe sizes 4 inches and smaller: Service weight, 14-1/2percent high silicon content cast-iron, hubless fittings,
stainless steel 2-bolt couplings with one-piece sintered non-porous teflon inner sleeve liner.
b. For pipe sizes 6inches and larger: Service weight, 14-1/2percent high silicon content cast-iron, ball and spigot fittings,
lead and special acid-resistant rope packing, caulked joints.
6. Install acid waste and vent piping systems as indicated:
All sizes, below grade (burieid) inside building
Duriron or Poly-propylene
All sizes, below grade (buried) outside building
Duriron
For sizes 4” and smaller, above grade, inside bldg.
Duriron or Poly-propylene
For sizes 6” and larger, above grade, inside bldg.
Duriron
DIVISION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
a. Water Heaters
B.
WARRANTY
1. Warranty on Coil, Heat Exchanger, and Burner: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, coils, heat exchangers, and burners with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation. Warranty Period:
2 years from Date of Substantial Completion.
186
C. PRODUCTS
1. Commercial Gas Fired Water Heater: Provide commercial gas-fired water heaters of sizes and capacities as indicated on
schedule. Provide certification of design by AGA under Volume III tests for commercial water heaters for delivery of 180
degrees F water. Provide water heater components which are UL-listed and labeled.
a. Heater: Construct for working pressure of 150 PSI; boiler type hand hole cleanout; magnesium anode rod; 3/4inch
tapping for relief valve; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water.
b. Jacket: Insulate tank with vermin-proof glass fiber insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish over
bonderized undercoating.
c. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Commercial Gas-Fired:
Aerco
Electric:
Rheem Water Heater Div; City Investing Co.
Ruud Water Heater Div; City Investing Co.
Smith Corp (A.O.); Consumer Products Div.
State Industries, Inc.
2. Electric Water Heaters: Construct for working pressure of 150 PSI; magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal surfaces
exposed to water.
a. Heating Elements: Low watt density with zinc plated copper sheath; double element, non-simultaneous operation.
b. Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate tank with vermin-proof glass fiber
insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish.
DIVISION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. SUMMARY
a. Plumbing Fixtures
B.
ADA ACCESSIBILITY:
1. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with respect to plumbing fixtures for the
physically handicapped. Arrange flush valve/flush tank handles with proper orientation to meet ADA requirements.
C. MOUNTING HEIGHTS SCHEDULE:
1. Fixture mounting height and rough-in dimensions shall be as indicated in the Design Guidelines section of the SVVSD
Technical Guidelines.
D. WATER CONSERVATION:
A. All plumbing fixtures shall be of water conservative design. Provide as a minimum devices to restrict water flow as follows:
Lavatory
0.5 gpm max
Sink
2.5 gpm max
Mop Sink
1.6 gpm hot and 1.6 gpm cold
Water Closets (siphon jet)
1.28 gallons per flush or less
Urinals (siphon jet)
0.125 gallon per flush
Showers Heads
1.25 gpm
E.
1.
FIXTURES:
Water Closets
a. Material: vitreous china, and stainless steel satin #4 finish, gauge and rim type as specified.
b. China fixture color: white.
c. Action: siphon jet 1.28 g.p.f. maximum, gravity, vacuum or pressure assist as appropriate.
d. Rim: elongated unless specified otherwise.
e. Floor to rim height from floor: *14 ½" for standard installations, *16 ½" for ADA installations or as designated on architectural drawings.
f. Operating handle for manual flush valve to be located and operable on the wide side of the ADA toilet compartment.
Standard shall have flush valve supplied from the right side, handle or button on the left side.
g. Fully glazed trapways, partial glazing is not acceptable.
187
2.
3.
4.
F.
Urinals: shall be wall mounted, white vitreous china.
a. Gallons per flush: to match specified urinal flush rating and appropriate flush valve.
b. Carrier mounted with cast iron nipple and galvanized steel pipe using floor mounted hanger and bearing plate type carrier.
c. Provide battery operated electric I.R. operation where specified. (with manual override button).
Lavatories: shall be white vitreous china, or type 302/304 stainless steel as specified.
a. Mounting: wall hung from floor-mounted top and bottom bearing plate or, concealed arm carrier; (wall mounted wood or
metal blocking or hangers, will not be permitted).
b. Counter mounting, self-rimming, or composite counter top with integral bowl will be permitted when specified.
C. All lavatory faucets shall be provided with ceramic disc seats.
Sinks: shall be Material: Stainless Steel, Type 302/304-18-8, 18 gauge, #4 satin finish.
a. Contractor shall verify all sinks fit provided casework and counter dimensions, and provide only the largest dimensional
sink units that fit the available space.
b. Sinks not located in casework shall be wall mounted and carrier mounted.
c. All sink strainers shall be “Spin-N-Grin” type models unless specifically specified otherwise.
d. All sink faucets shall have ceramic disc seats, with manual or automatic controls; types include hand, foot, knee and infra-red or heat sensing type operations.
e. Stainless Steel sinks to be sound deadened with “Sound Guard”® undercoating.
f. Mop sinks shall be 4” tall.
g. Provide backflow for chemical dispensers at mop sinks by General Contractor. Chem. dispensing unit shall be provided by Owner.
PRODUCTS
1. Acceptable Products by Manufacturer - All fixtures and faucets and related trim shall be the product of one manufacturer only, including spare parts for all manufacturers providing product on this project.
Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers: Hose End Nidel #37HD1 Only.
Fixture Carriers: Josam – J.R.Smith – Wade – Zurn.
Drinking Fountains: Cordley – Elkay – Halsey Taylor.
Emergency Showers and Eye Washes: Bradley – Chicago Faucet – Encon – Guardian – Haws – Speakman. With Approved Thermostatic Mixing Valve complying with ANSI Z-358.1, latest edition.
Lead Free Faucets (I.R. electric, or battery), American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Zurn
Lead Free Faucets: (Manual & Specialty), Standard and Single Lever with ceramic discs, American Standard, Chicago
Faucet, Zurn.
Flexible Supplies 302-18-8 flexible stainless steel tube with braided S.S jackets, McGuire “convertible” only.
Flush Valves: Sloan, Toto, Zurn, Sloan
Garbage Disposers: Insinkerator – Waste King, with vibration isolators and sound atinuation.
Laboratory Faucets and Cocks with ceramic discs: Cambridge – Water Saver – T&S Brass – Royal Brass, Chicago
Faucet, with serrated ends and vacuum breaker spouts and integral or added check valves for both faucet and gas
cocks inlets.
Plumbing Fixture & Trim: T & S Brass, Chicago Faucet, Zurn.
Plumbing Fixtures: Vitreous China: American Standard – Crane – Kohler – Zurn.
Plumbing Fixtures: Molded Stone - Florestone – Crane/Fiat – Zurn – Stern- Williams.
Sinks, Stainless Steel: Satin #4 finish, 18-8 type 302, - 304, - 316: Elkay – Just – Bradley. (Advance Tabco when specifically specified only.).
Shower: Individual or accessory Pressure Balanced Water Mixing Valves and equalizing valves less integral thermometers, Eljer, Kohler, PPP, Symmons, Powers, Lawler, Mifab, Grohe, Sloan. Symmons only where integral thermometers are specified.
Shower: Individual Standard and A.D.A. Individual Thermostatic and Pressure Balanced Water Mixing Valves, with or
without integral thermometers – Symmons – Powers - Leonard.
Supply Stops: Quarter Turn, Ball type with “convertible” Wheel Handle-Loose Key combination, ¼ turn. McGuire or
Watts.
Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves for Volume Flow: Symmons products as specified – (Limited to a maximum operating temperature differential to 10qF or less, and minimum rate of controlled flow to .5 (1/2) G.P.M. @ 10 PSI pressure
drop.
Trap Wrap: A.D.A Seamless: McGuire only.
Washer Wall Boxes: Guy Gray, IPS Corp., Symmons
Circulating Pumps: Grundfos, Taco
188
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATIING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
189
190
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
DIVISION 23 00 00
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
A. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Before any work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that required piping grades can be
maintained and that ductwork can be run as intended without interferences between systems, structural elements or work of
other trades.
2. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give
particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.
3. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide
the maximum headroom possible.
4. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as
practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
5. Make allowance for expansion and contraction for all building components and piping systems that are subject to such.
6. The ceiling space shall not be “layered”. It is the contractor’s responsibility to offset and system as required to allow
installation within the identified ceiling cavity. The contractor shall include labor and material in the base bid to
accommodate such offsets.
7. Coordination Drawings: Coordination drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor for his utilization and are his
responsibility to assure systems will be installed in a manner to allow all systems to function properly.
8. The Contractor shall identify any "long lead time" items which may impact the overall project schedule. If these submittal
requirements affect the schedule, the Contractor shall identify the impacts and confer with the Engineer within two weeks of
entering into the contract.
9. Schedule of Values: Provide preliminary schedule of values with product data submittal, within three (3) weeks from award
of contract to successful bidder. Provide according to the following descriptions:
a. Site Utilities
b. Plumbing
c. Fire Protection
d. HVAC
e. Equipment
f. Sheet Metal
g. Piping
h. Insulation
i. Test and Balancing
j. Specialty Systems
k. Temperature Controls
l. Demolition
m. Miscellaneous
10. This contract will not be considered completed nor will final payment be made until all specified material, including testing
and balancing report and final schedule of values with all mechanical change order costs included and identified, is received
in this operating and maintenance report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect/Engineer.
11. Project Closeout: The Contractor shall be responsible for the following Mechanical Checklist either by performing and/or
coordinating such items prior to applying for certification of substantial completion. Refer to individual specification sections
for additional requirements.
B.
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
1. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are scheduled on
the Electrical Drawings. In case of conflict, Electrical Drawings shall take precedence. Do not purchase motors or electrical
equipment until power characteristics available at building site location have been confirmed by Contractor.
2. All variable frequency drives shall be protected from dirt, debris, and moisture at all times. Variable frequency drives shall
be wrapped air and water tight with dust-tight and moisture proof material until factory start-up of variable frequency drives
is initiated.
a. Exception: Drives may be opened only during wiring terminations by temperature control contractor and/or electrical
contractors.
C. MOTORS:
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads with a time limit acceptable to the motor
manufacturer. Motors shall be capable of starting the driven equipment while operating at 90 percent rated terminal voltage.
191
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degrees C environment with maximum 80 degrees C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation). Provide Class F insulation for variable frequency drive motors.
Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors, and 1.35 for single phase motors, and 1.0 for inverter duty motors.
Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B", except "C" where required for
high starting torque. Design "E" shall not be used.
Ball bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance.
Bearings shall be rated for minimum L-10 life of 40,000 hours.
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.
Enclosure Type: Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation;
Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
Overload protection: Built-in thermal overload protection for all single phase motors and, where indicated, internal sensing
device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
Noise rating: "Quiet".
Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar
information.
Phases and Current Characteristics: Unless indicated otherwise, provide squirrel-cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4
hp and larger, and provide capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 hp and smaller, except 1/6 hp and smaller may, at
equipment manufacturer's option, be split-phase type. Tri-voltage motors are not acceptable. Do not purchase motors until
power characteristics available at building site have been confirmed by contractor.
All equipment specified to operate with variable frequency drives shall be provided with inverter-duty motors specifically designed for variable speed operation with high efficiency at part load conditions and constructed with Class F inverter grade
insulation. Inverter duty motors shall meet requirements of NEMA MG-1 part 31.4 O.4.2.
All motors which will be operated by a variable frequency drive shall be warranted against any damage or defects as a result of being used with a variable frequency drive.
Magnetic Starters: Unless otherwise indicated, provide NEMA style, sized and rated magnetic starters including contacts
and coils for motors 3/4 hp and larger and for smaller motors where interlock or automatic operation is indicated or required:
All 3-phase motors 2 hp and larger shall be protected against loss of phase (single phasing protection) wired into the starter.
Reset shall be manual.
Motor connections: Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated.
V-Belt Drives: Capacity of V-Belt Drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower
rating.
Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use with motors larger
than 15 HP. All fixed pitch sheaves, including single groove fan sheaves, shall be of the bushed type. Fixed bore sheaves
will not be acceptable for adjustable pitch sheaves.
Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers for each
type of product:
A. O. Smith
Baldor
U.S. Motors
D. VARIBALE FREQUENCY DRIVES:
1. Enclosure: Mount VFD and all components within a NEMA 1 metal enclosure. Provide floor stand where building walls are
not suitable for mounting drive.
2. Provide filtered, fan powered ventilation for drive cooling. Fan shall be sized for “dirty filter” condition, at project altitude.
3. Drive and by-pass enclosure doors shall have provisions for locking with a padlock or integral lock, keyed to the building
standards.
4. Switches and pilot lights shall be labeled with engraved plastic laminate tags riveted or similarly permanently fastened.
5. Disconnects: Provide a door fused disconnect with Type “J” fuses, with a through-the-door handle, pad lockable in the OFF
position. The door interlock shall be defeatable with a tool to allow service access without de-energizing the system. The
disconnect shall remove power from all components within both compartments.
6. Provide a three pole motor overload relay connected to shut down the motor.
7. 120V control power transformer with fused secondary and primary. Primary power shall be derived ahead of the VFD input
contactor.
8. Input Power: The drive shall be capable of accepting facility power as specified on the drawings. Variations of up to plus or
minus 10 percent of line voltage and plus or minus 2HZ of line frequency shall be permitted without the drive shutting down
on a fault.
192
9. Power line interruptions of up to 0.5 seconds shall be permitted without the drive shutting down on a fault.
10. Manufacturer shall guarantee that harmonic voltage and current distortion, on the line side (input terminals) of the VFD does
not exceed 5 percent total voltage Harmonic distortion, and 15 percent total current Harmonic distortion.
11. Manufacturer shall review electrical drawings to determine optimum characteristics of the reactor/filter system.
12. Output Power: The variable frequency AC drive shall convert 3 phase, 60 HZ input power to an adjustable AC frequency
and voltage for controlling the speed of any standard NEMA B Design, AC squirrel cage motors driving variable torque
loads. The drive shall be rated for continuous duty at the NEC standard full load current of it’s associated motor.
13. The VFD shall be arranged to provide automatic restart after a trip condition resulting from over-voltage or under-voltage.
14. For safety, the drive shall shut down and require manual reset and restart if the automatic reset/restart function is not successful within a maximum of five attempts.
15. VFD shall include a “Bus Charged” warning indicator, and shall be provided with automatic circuitry to discharge the bus
within 120 seconds after main power is disconnected.
16. Warranty: All variable frequency drives shall be warranted for 24 months after the building has been accepted by the Owner.
This warranty shall include all parts, labor, materials, shipping cost, travel, lodging and meals with no cost to the Owner.
17. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers for each
type of product:
Variable Frequency Drives:
Yaskawa Electric America (model E7)
Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.
E.
PIPING SPECIALTIES:
1. Hydronic System Safety Relief Valves: Diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check
valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure to suit system and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve shall be designed, manufactured, tested and labeled in accordance with the
requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and BTU capacity. Set valve to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.
Acceptable manuf. of Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves:
Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Taco, Inc
Watts Regulator Co.
2. Pressure Reducing Valves: Diaphragm operated, bronze or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, stainless
steel inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and stainless steel valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field
adjustment. Acceptable manuf. of Pressure Reducing Valves:
Amtrol, Inc.
Taco, Inc.
Watts Regulator Co
3. Coin Operated Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 212 degrees F operating temperature; manually coin operated and having discharge outlet connection and 1/8 inch NPT male connection.
4. Automatic Air Vent: 100 psi working pressure, 240 degrees working temperature, stamped brass body and non-metallic
float, with threaded outlet connector for "safe waste" discharge pipe. Acceptable manuf. of Air Vents:
Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Amtrol 703
Spirotherm, Inc.
5. Air Eliminator and Dirt Separator: Furnish and install as shown on the drawings combination coalescing type air eliminator
and dirt separators. Pipe size is not a factor and all units shall be selected per the manufacturer’s recommendations. All
combination units shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig working pressure with entering velocities not to exceed 4 feet
per second at specified GPM. Units specifically designed for high velocity systems may have an entering velocity of up to
10 feet per second. Units shall include an internal bundle filling the entire vessel to suppress turbulence and provide high
efficiency. The bundle shall consist of a copper core tube with continuous wound copper medium permanently affixed to the
internal element. Each eliminator shall have a separate venting chamber to prevent system contaminants from harming the
float and venting valve operation. At the top of the venting chamber shall be an integral full port float actuated brass venting
mechanism. Units shall include a valved side tap to flush floating dirt or liquids and for quick bleeding of large amounts of
air during system fill or refill. Air separators shall be capable of removing 100% of the free air, 100% of the entrained air and
up to 99.6% of the dissolved air in the system fluid. Dirt separation shall be at least 80% of all particles 30 micron and larger within 100 passes. Acceptable manuf. of Spirovent by Spirotherm, Inc.
193
6.
Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks: Construct of welded carbon steel for 125 psig working pressure, 240 degrees F maximum
operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means of a flexible heavy duty bladder securely sealed into tank. Expansion tank shall have replaceable Bladder. Bladder shall be suitable
for glycol service and system water treatment chemicals. Provide taps for pressure gauge and air charging fitting, and drain
fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Tank, with taps and supports, shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
Acceptable manuf. of Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell and Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Taco, Inc.
7. Pump Suction Diffusers: Cast-iron body, with threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2
inch and larger; 175 psig working pressure, 300 degrees F maximum operating temperature. Inlet vanes with length 1-1/2
times pump suction diameter or greater. Cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings with total free area equal to or
greater than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff
head. Acceptable manuf. of Pump Suction Diffusers:
Bell & Gossett, ITT
Taco
Aurora Pumps
8. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating parts; threaded connections for 2
inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or
minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for
flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and rate flow in GPM. Acceptable manuf. of Automatic Flow Control Valves: Griswold
9. Low Pressure Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials.
Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screen. Two inches and smaller steam and liquid strainers shall have 20 mesh screens. Provide 3/64 inch perforations for 2-1/2 inch and 3 inch steam and liquid strainers. Provide 1/8 inch mesh perforations for 4 inches and larger liquid strainers. Provide 1/16 inch mesh perforations for 4
inches and larger steam strainers. Acceptable manuf. of Low Pressure Strainers:
Bell & Gossett, ITT
Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
Watts Regulator Co.
10. Dielectric Waterway:: Zinc electroplated nipple with non metallic lining for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate
ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. Union style not acceptable. Acceptable manuf. of Dielectric Waterways
Perfection Corp.
Flow Design Inc.
Perfection Corp.
Rockford-Eclipse Div.
11. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously
fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements
to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. Acceptable manuf. of Mechanical Sleeve Seal:
Thunderline Corp.
Metra Flex.
F.
METERS AND GAUGES
1. PHOTO VOLTAIC DIGITAL THERMOMETERS: High image ABS, with photovoltaic power cell and digital readout. Selectable between -40-300 degrees F/ -40-150 degrees F, displayed to 0.1 degrees. Display update: 10 seconds. to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Versa Gauge
Weiss Instruments
2. DIAL TYPE INSERTION THERMOMETERS: Provide dial type insertion thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges
indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.Bi-metal, stainless steel case and stem, 1 inch diameter dial, dust and leak proof, 1/8 inch diameter stem with nominal length of 5 inch.Range shall be 0 degrees - 220 degrees F.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Trerice (H.O.) Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
194
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi
and 200 degrees F. Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2inch NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core
type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8 inch O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer.
Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Peterson Equipment Co.
Universal Lancaster
Sisco
PRESSURE GAUGES: Provide general use, 1 percent accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phospher bronze bourdon type, bottom connection. Case shall be drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2inch diameter. Range: Water: 0 - 100 psi. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Ametek/U.S. Gauge.
Trerice (H.O.) Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
PRESSURE GAUGE COCKS: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping systems.
Snubber: ¼ inch brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select
disc material for fluid served and pressure rating. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Peterson Equipment Co.
Universal Lancaster
Sisco
VENTURI TUBE FLOW MEASURING ELEMENTS: Primary flow measuring elements shall consist of venturi tubes. Arrange piping in accordance with manufacturer's published literature. In horizontal pipes, place connections slightly above
horizontal centerline of pipe. Provide venturi tubes of solid brass or bronze. Tubes larger than 2 inches shall have flanges
or butt weld connections and may be cast iron or steel. Steel tubes may be fabricated or cast with cadmium or zinc-plating.
Line throats of cast iron tubes with bronze and plate cast iron portion with cadmium. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Gerand
Barco/Aeroquip Corp.
Presso
Flow Design Inc.
CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVES: Provide calibrated balance valves equipped with readout valves to facilitate connecting
of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readout port with a quick connect valve designed to minimize
system fluid loss during monitoring process. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Armstrong+
Flowset - Flow Design, Inc.
Presso.
Tour and Anderson, Inc.
Gerand "Balvalve Indicator"
G. VALVES
1. General Valve Features:Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. (Control valves
shall be sized for required flow.)
2. Lever Handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves. Provide a wrench for every plug valve.
3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger that are installed 96 inches or higher above finished floor elevation.
Provide chains to an elevation of 6'-0" above finished floor elevation.
4. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to allow full operation of the valve
without interference by the insulation.
5. BALL VALVES:
a. Ball Valves – 1inch and Smaller: 150 WSP, 600 WOG, rated for 150 PSI at 350 degrees F, two piece end entry body
style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B584, full port chrome plated brass ball, 15 percent glass reinforced PTFE
seats, PTFE packing, adjustable packing nut blow-out proof stem, vinyl covered steel handle. Provide solder ends or
threaded ends to match piping system. Basis of design: Apollo 77-100/200
b. Ball Valves 1-1/4 inch through 2 inches and for all silver soldered or brazed lines: ANSI B16.34, 150 WSP, 600 WOG,
rated for 150 PSI at 350 degrees F. Three piece body style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B584, full port, chrome
plated brass ball and stem of ASTM A276 type 316, 15 percent glass reinforced RTFE seats, RTFE packing and blow
out proof stem, vinyl coated steel handle. Provide solder ends or threaded ends to match piping material system.
195
c.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ball Valves Manufacturers:
Conbraco (Apollo 82-100/200)
Jomar
BUTTERFLY VALVES:
a. Hydronic Service Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2 inches to 12 inches: MSS SP-67, cast iron body conforming to ASTM A126
class B, aluminum bronze ASTM B148 disc, single piece 416 stainless steel stem, EPDM seat, upper and lower bronze
bearing, non-metallic bushing and stem seal, ANSI class 125 flange, rated for 200 psi pressure differential, 200 psi
drop-tight shut off dead end service, with downstream flange removed. Provide extended neck for 2 inches thick insulation. All valves shall be factory tested to 110 percent of pressure rating. All butterfly valves shall be full lugged body,
drilled and tapped.
b. Butterfly Valve Manufacturers:
Keystone/Tyco - Keystone Fig.222
Centerline
Nibco
CHECK VALVES:
a. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125/150 WSP 200/300, cast bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B 62, ASTM B61 for 200/300 bronze, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, with a bronze/teflon
disc, stainless steel pin and having threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may
be used where pressure requires or Class 125 are not available.
b. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 to 3 Inch: MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM approved for fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast
iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. For sewage ejector and sump pump discharge swing check valves
2-1/2 inches and larger, provide outside lever with weight or spring to assist disc to close rapidly.
c. Non-Slam Check Valves - 2 Inch and smaller: Bronze body, 200 psi @ 250 degrees F., threaded ends, resilient seats,
center guided spring loaded disk.
d. Non-Slam Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Class 125/ 250 cast iron or stainless steel body, replaceable lapped
bronze seat and balanced twin bronze flappers or bronze center guided disc and stainless steel trim. Valve shall be
designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. Twin flappers or center guided disc shall be
loaded with a stainless steel spring to assure even non-slam checking action. Seals shall be EPDM.
e. Swing Check Valve Manufacturers:
Conbraco
Grinnell Corp.
Nibco
Watts (screwed)
f. Non-Slam Check Valves:
Centerline
Keystone
Metraflex
Nibco
Milwaukee
SOLENOID VALVES:
a. Solenoid valves shall consist of a solenoid (electro-magnet) with its core and a valve body containing one or more orifices. The solenoid shall be mounted directly on the valve body. Response time from fully open or closed to fully
closed or open shall be slow acting. Solenoid valves shall be 2 way type valves. Solenoid valves shall be normally
open or normally closed operation as required for proper operation of the system for protection against freeze, fire and
safety.
b. Solenoid Valve Manufacturers:
Asco
Magnatrol Valve Corp.
MOTORIZED VALVE ACTUATORS:
a. Valve actuator shall consist of a 120 volt, single phase, permanent split capacitor, reversible type electric motor which
drives a compound epicyclic gear. A manual override handwheel shall be integral to the unit. The electric actuator
shall have visual mechanical position indication, readable from a distance of 25 feet, showing output shaft and valve
position. Unit shall be capable of mounting directly to butterfly valve without brackets and adapters.
b. The actuator shall have an integral terminal strip, for wiring to power supplies. Cable entry shall be by means of two
(2) 1 inch NPT threaded connections. Cable entries shall have UL recommended gland stops within the NPT hole to
prevent glands from being screwed in too far and damaging cable. The environmental temperature range of the actuator shall be -20 degrees F. to +140 degrees F.
196
c.
The electric actuator shall have a pressure die-cast, hard anodized aluminum base and cover. The compound gear
shall be made of die-cast, hard anodized aluminum or steel. An alloy steel worm gear shall be provided for manual
override and torque limiting. Bearings for gears shall be of the ball and needle type; bronze bearings shall be used on
the shafting parts.
d. Valve Manufacturers:
Belimo
Siemens
10. SERVICE VALVE TYPE INSTALLATIONS:
a. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
b. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
c. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves.
d. Globe valves shall be installed with the stem in the upright position. In overhead horizontal piping, ball valves shall be
installed with the handle in the side or bottom of the piping. Butterfly valves shall be installed with the stem within 45
degrees of the horizontal position. The handle of quarter turn valves shall open in the direction of flow. Quarter turn
valves with hand wheels or chain wheels shall be located so that the position indicator is visible from the floor without
the use of a ladder or climbing on equipment or piping.
e. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
f.
SERVICE
VALVE TYPE
Plumbing Water Services; 3" or smaller
Plumbing Water Services; 2-1/2" and larger
Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass; all sizes
Plumbing Balancing Service; 2" and smaller
Plumbing Balancing Service; 2-1/2" and larger
HVAC Hydronic Piping; 3" and smaller
HVAC Hydronic Piping; 2-1/2" and larger
HVAC Hydronic Pressure Reducing Valve Bypass; all sizes
HVAC Hydronic Balancing valve; 2" and smaller
HVAC Hydronic Balancing Valve; 2-1/2" and larger
HVAC & Plumbing Check Valves; 2" and smaller
HVAC & Plumbing Pump Discharge Check Valve;
Sump Pump
Ball Valve
Butterfly Valves
Globe Valve
Calibrated Balancing Valve See Section 15135
Eccentric Plug Valve
Ball Valve
Butterfly Valve
Globe Valve
Calibrated Balancing Valve
Eccentric Plug Valve.
Swing Check
Non-Slam Spring Loaded
Swing Check, (Provide outside weighted lever or
spring for 2-1/2" and larger)
1.
2.
Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
Wafer Check Valves: Install between 2 flanges in horizontal or vertical upward flow position.
H. ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES:
1. Pipe Freeze Protection Heating Cables: Provide self-regulating heat-tracing electric heating cable and components which
are suitable for freeze protection of metal or plastic piping. Select heater consisting of 2-16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires
parallel embedded in a radiation cross-linked conductive polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be cut to length in the field, and to
be used directly on plastic pipe. Cover heater with a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. Provide
heater with a self-regulating factor of greater than 90 percent to conserve energy and to prevent overheating.
2. Roof and Gutter De-icing Heating Systems: Provide self-regulating electric heating cable and components which are suitable for use on roofs and in gutters for snow and ice melting. Select heater consisting of 2-16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires
embedded in parallel in a radiation cross-linked conductive polymer core that varies its heat output to respond to temperature along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be used safely in contact with
wood, PVC, EDPM, neoprene and asphalt building materials, and to be cut to length in the field. Cover heater with a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket and protect with a tinned-copper braid and a polyolefin outer jacket.
Provide self-regulating heater with a power output of 10 watts per foot where it contacts ice and snow and 5 watts per foot in
air.
3. Electric Heating System Controls: Provide electric radiant heating cable thermostats, with temperature range from 35 to 95
deg. F (2 to 32 deg. C), operating voltage of 125, 60 Hz, and with manually operated OFF-position switch, as recommended
by cable manufacturer.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric heating cables of one of the following (for each
type of cable):
197
Easy-Heat WireKraft Div; Bristol Corporation.
Thermon
Raychem Corporation.
Smith-Gates Corporation.
Chromalox Div; Emerson Electric Company
I.
VIBRATION CONTROL
1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted or in the specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators to
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall
be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections.
2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control
Mason Industries, Inc.
J.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION:
a. Identify air supply, return, exhaust ductwork and duct access doors with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and
arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).
b. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.
c. Plastic Duct Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, duct markers. For hazardous exhausts, use
colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
2. PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION:
a. Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show
normal direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, plenums, etc.) and exterior non-concealed locations.
b. Near each valve and control device.
c. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there
could be question of flow pattern.
d. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.
e. At access doors and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
f. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
g. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25 feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 15' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
h. Plastice Pipe Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI A13.1. Furnish 1 inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to
be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 degrees F. (52 degrees C.) or greater. Cut
length to extend 2inches beyond each end of plastic pipe marker. Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit
of plastic.
3.
4.
UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION:
a. During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping systems, install continuous underground- type plastic
line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 inches to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple small lines
are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16 inches, install single line marker.
b. Underground-type Plasitc Line Markers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright- colored, continuous-printed plastic
tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6inches wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most
accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between
2-layers of plastic tape.
VALVE IDENTIFICATION:
a. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping
system.
198
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.
K.
Building services main shut-off valves.
Each individual system main shut-off valves.
Each individual system riser shut-off valves.
Each individual system floor shut-off valves.
Each individual system major branch shut-off valves.
Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4inch
high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2inch high, and with 5/32inch hole for fastener. Provide 1-1/2inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.
MANUFACTURERS:
a. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Allen Systems, Inc.
Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
Brimar Industries, Inc.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
PVC Specialties
TESTING AND BALANCING:
1. Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems and the mechanical equipment associated with these systems:
a. Air Side Systems and Equipment:
Supply/Return Air Systems
General Exhaust/Supply Fans
Air Handling Units
General Exhaust Systems
Cabinet/Unit Heaters
Kitchen Systems
Science Classroom Systems
b. Hydronic Systems and Equipment:
Heating water systems
Hydronic coils
Baseboard
Hydronic Pumps
Heating Water Boilers
Terminal Units
Air Handling Units
c. Plumbing:
General Piping
Sump Pumps
Water heaters
d. Gas Fired Systems and Equipment:
e. Electrical Components:
Manual and magnetic starters
Variable frequency drives
Control Systems and Equipment
f. Life Safety Systems and Equipment:
Fire/smoke dampers and detection systems
2. BELTS, SHEEVES, IMPELLERS:
a. Impellers shall be trimmed or replaced by the mechanical contractor and shall be correctly re-sized and coordinated by
the Test and Balancing Contractor per the hydronic systems and equipment portion of this section.
b. The Test & Balance Contractor shall determine the fan belt and sheeve replacement necessary for final balance condition for specified air quantity when the VFD is operating in the by-pass mode for final field conditions, without placing
the motor over its nameplate amp rating.
3. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES:
a. Testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order and the following project conditions have been determined suitable for start of work.
b. Preliminary Testing & Balancing Contractor requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work
through a review of the project plans and specifications.
199
c.
4.
5.
6.
Before any air balance work is done, the system shall be checked for duct leakage (obtain pressure test results), assure filters are installed, verify filters are changed if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, equipment vibration,
and check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control dampers and outlets shall be wide open at this
time.
GENERAL SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES:
a. Balance all air and water flows at terminals within +10% to -5% of design flow quantities.
b. Pressure relationships indicated on drawings shall take priority over air quantities.
c. Measure, adjust and report equipment running motor amps and power factor, KW, rated motor amperage, listed motor
power factor, voltage, and all nameplate data. Perform these measurements for all equipment operational modes.
d. Check and adjust equipment belt tensioning.
e. Verify that all equipment safety and operating controls are in place, tested, adjusted and set prior to balancing.
f. Verify that manufacturer start-up has occurred per specification prior to balancing.
AIR SIDE SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES:
a. Filters shall be restricted to increase pressure drop to 50% of span between initial pressure drop and final recommended pressure drop for setting final airflows for fans. Check fan motor amps with clean filters and simulated loaded filters,
and report for each piece of equipment. Equipment shall be supplied with clean filters upon completion of balance.
Balance and report air quantities.
b. Supply/Return Air Systems: Balance and report supply and return diffuser/grille quantities. Air diffusion patterns shall
be set as noted on drawings and to minimize objectionable drafts and noise. Report design air device inlet or outlet
size, actual inlet or outlet size, design and actual velocity through the orifice, for each terminal in the system. Balance
and report the above measurements in all system operational/modes.
c. General Exhaust/Supply Fans: Adjust CFM to system requirements. For belt drive include sheave and belt exchange
to deliver airflow within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for filter loading (as applicable) and shall
establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators. For direct drive with speed taps: Set fan speed
on tap which most closely approaches design CFM by adjusting the speed control After adjustment, check fans ability
to re-start after powering down. Increase setting if required for proper starting.
d. In addition to the direct measuring of airflow quantities, measure and record outside air, return air and mixed air temperatures, determine thermal/mass energy balance and provide calculations to verify measured airflow quantities. Adjusting and setting the outside air quantity as a percentage of damper position will not be acceptable.
e. General Exhaust Systems: Balance and report exhaust grille quantities. Report objectionable noise. Provide full pitot
traverses at each individual exhaust riser and at each exhaust fan. Balance and report. Report design air device inlet
or outlet size, actual inlet or outlet size, design and actual velocity through the orifice, for each terminal in the system.
f. Cabinet/Unit Heaters: Balance and report entering and leaving air temperature. Report airflow. Balance all coils per
hydronic equipment portions of this section.
g. Science Room Hood Exhaust System Performance Evaluation: The Balancing Contractor shall demonstrate that the
exhaust system and pressure relationships are performing properly under the conditions listed below. Verify that the
exhaust fans on the roof are operating properly. The discharge dampers should be performing as specified and the
fans should be operating smoothly without surging or vibrating excessively.
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:
a. Hydronic Systems With Meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using the flow meters. On completion of
the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the report: Flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and
pressure drop, valve settings on meters with a readable scale, flow rate in both full coil flow and full bypass modes.
Contractor shall verify the meters are installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and shall notify the Mechanical Contractor of any deficiencies before utilizing meter.
b. Sample heating water and report on freeze and burst temperatures of the glycol water solution. Report glycol percentage.
c. Hydronic Coils: Balance, measure and report inlet and outlet air temperatures for heating design air quantities. Balance, measure and report coil water flow, inlet and outlet water pressure and temperature.
d. Fintube Baseboard /Terminal Units: Balance, measure and report GPM, inlet temperature and outlet temperature/pressure at full heating.
e. Hydronic Pumps: Adjust and balance pumps to provide design system flow rate, and design flow to most remote system location. Trim or replace impellers as necessary to achieve this. Do not induce false head to achieve balance results, without the prior approval of the Engineer. Report impeller size, flow rate, inlet and outlet water pressure and
pump shut-off head. Provide pump curve and operating point in final report. Include compensations for temperature
and percentage glycol.
200
f.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
L.
Heating Water Boilers: Verify that the boiler has been properly cleaned, flushed and the burner is operating properly
prior to balancing. Check and report on proper operation of boiler feed pumps. Balance, measure and report boiler water flow rate, inlet and outlet temperature and pressure.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:
a. General:
on drawings. Adjust pressure-reducing stations, report downstream system static pressure. Verify proper location and
operation of ASME pressure and temperature relief valves. Measure and report residual pressure at full flow at most
remote plumbing fixture; requiring highest operating pressure (usually flush valve water closets).
b. Sump Pumps: Verify proper discharge of sump pump systems. Verify that units are meeting system demands. Report.
c. Water Heaters: Measure, set and report inlet and outlet temperatures. Balance and report per gas portions of this Section.
GAS FIRED SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:
a. General: Record gas pressures downstream of each pressure-reducing valve. Verify that pressures match those on
construction documents and report. Measure and report flue temperature at all stages of heating.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:
a. Manual and Magnetic Starters: Check all new and existing thermal overloads. Identify improperly protected equipment
in report. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper motor protection.
b. Motor Control Center Magnetic Starters: Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical Contractor of discrepancies.
c. Variable frequency drives: Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative.
CONTROL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:
a. General: Operate all temperature control systems with the temperature control contractor’s representative for proper
sequence of operation. Be responsible for calibration of flow measurement devices used as input to the temperature
control system. All air system flow measurement stations including VAV terminals shall be calibrated against a Pitot
tube traverse or air diffuser capture hood. Balancing Contractor shall assure accuracy of all flow measurement devices
or shall report their failure to be accurate.
b. Work with the Controls Contractor to set minimum outside air damper positions.
c. Work with the Controls Contractor to optimize VAV duct static pressure, VFD pump hydronic system pressure differential and building pressure.
LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:
a. Fire/Smoke Dampers and Detection Systems: Verify that each fire/smoke damper closes when the associated duct or
space detector is tripped. Verify that air handlers shut down and outside air dampers close as dictated by the control
sequence.
b. Verify that air supply units shut down when smoke is detected by the associated duct detector. Verify that outside air
dampers and system fire/smoke dampers close as dictated by the control sequence.
c. Report any detectors or dampers that are malfunctioning. Report any discrepancies from the control sequence.
SOUND AND VIBRATION:
a. Sound Inspection and Testing: Prior to sound testing, all equipment that can potentially impact sound testing shall be
put into operation. Examples include fan coil units, air handling units, and equipment in adjacent mechanical spaces.
VFD systems shall be placed at 80% of full speed.
b. Prior to sound testing the mechanical test and balance of all systems shall be completed.
c. Perform sound testing on the following rooms within the project area: Auditorium
d. Vibration Inspection and Testing: Prior to vibration testing, all equipment shall be put into operation. On variable speed
equipment, testing shall occur at low, medium and high speeds.
GUARANTEE OF WORK:
a. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the tests and balance for a period of 90 days from
date of final acceptance of the test and balance report. During this period, the Testing & Balancing Contractor shall
make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may become apparent in the system balance.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
1. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:
a. Cold Piping: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:
1. Potable cold water piping.
2. Interior above-ground horizontal storm water piping including elbow up & down.
3. Roof drain bowls and roof drain leader to horizontal piping.
4. Overflow roof drain bowls and first 10 feet of overflow piping.
5. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
201
6.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fiberglass; 1/2 inch thickness for pipe sizes up to and including 1 inch, 3/4 inch thick for pipe sizes from 1-1/4
inch to and including 1-1/2 inch; 1 inch thick for pipe sizes over 2 inches.
7. Fiberglass; 1 inch thickness Above Ground Inside Building.
b. Hot Piping: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:
1. Potable hot water and tempered recirculating piping.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
3. Fiberglass; 1 inch thick.
4. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thickness; below ground runouts to Individual fixtures - for pipe sizes up to 2 inches.
HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:
a. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping unions, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Insulation may be
omitted inside of cabinet unit heaters, convectors and fan coils for hot piping. Hot and cold piping routed inside air
handler units shall be insulated. Omit insulation on strainers in heating water strainers operating below 200 degrees F.
b. Heating System Piping (to 200 degrees F):
c. Hot water supply and return piping - Fiberglass: 1 inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2 inches in size, 2
inch thick for pipe from 2 inches to over 8 inches.
DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION:
a. Lined ductwork not allowed on project except as noted on drawings. Provide exterior ductwrap as specified below.
b. Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork:
1. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet.
2. Rigid oval or round supply air ductwork.
3. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS:
a. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. "K" factor shall be maximum 0.24 at 75
degrees F. mean temperature, jacket with tensile strength of 35 lbs/in, mullen burst 70 psi, beach puncture 50 oz. in/in,
permeability .02 perm factory applied vapor barrier jacket and adhesive self-sealing lap joint.
b. Flexible Closed Cell Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I. "K" factor shall be maximum 0.27 at 75 degrees F. mean
temperature, with a water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm inches or less. Insulation shall be pre-installed on piping, or
un-slit to be slipped over piping as a single piece.
c. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with
temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option.
d. Fitting Covers: UV resistant PVC, pre-molded fitting covers, flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. PVC tape for cold
systems, serrated tacks or PVC tape for hot systems.
DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS:
a. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1, 450 degrees F temperature limit, density of 3 pcf. "K"
value shall be maximum 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, facing of 7 mil, foil reinforced with glass mesh and
laminated to 40 lb kraft.
b. Round Surface Semi-Rigid Fiberglass Blanket Insulation: ATSM C 612, Class 1, 450 degrees F temperature limit, 2.5
PCF density “K” value of .25 max at 75 degrees F mean temp, foil-skrim-kraft facing. Orientation of fibers shall be perpendicular to facing to facilitate application on round surfaces.
c. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Wrap Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, 3/4 lbs per cu. ft. density. "K" value shall be maximum 0.25 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, 250 degreed F temperature limit, vapor transmission rating shall not
exceed 0.02 perms, facing of .7 mil foil reinforced with glass mesh and laminated to 40 lb kraft.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS:
a. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 2. "K" factor shall be maximum 0.28 at 200 degrees F.
mean temperature, 3.0 lb. density, 850 degrees F temperature limit.
b. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, "K" factor shall be maximum 0.45 at 250 degrees F.
mean temperature. 850 degrees F temperature limit.
c. Flexible closed cell elastomeric insulation: ASTM C534, Type I, "K" valve shall be a maximum of 0.27 at 75 degrees F
mean temp, 220 degrees F temperature limit, water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm inches or less.
MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:
Mechanical Insulation:
Johns Manville Corp.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Knauf Fiber Glass
Manson
Jacketing & Covering Products:
202
Childers
Ceel-Co
Zeston
Alpha Associates, Inc.
Sound Lagging/Insulation:
Soundseal
Vibro-Acoustics
Schuller
Owens-Corning
Certainteed
M. MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1. Responsibilities: The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided in this section. The responsibilities of the mechanical contractor, TAB, and controls contractor are in Division 23 and those of the electrical contractor in Division 26. It is noted that the services for the project Manager, Design Team, the TAB contractor, and Commissioning Agent are not provided for in this contract. That is, the Contractor is not responsible for providing their services.
The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors of Division 23 are as
follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
a. Construction and Acceptance Phases
1. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the Cx process.
2. Contractors shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of commissioned equipment.
3. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the CA for development
of start-up and functional testing procedures.
4. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned
equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for
writing detailed testing procedures.
5. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures and the prefunctional
checklists from the CA for all commissioned equipment. Submit to CA for review and approval prior to startup.
6. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related portions of the prefunctional
checklists for all commissioned equipment. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CA.
7. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.
8. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA for specified equipment.
9. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CA, PM and
A/E and retest the equipment.
10. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
11. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.
12. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.
b. Warranty Period
1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CA, according to the commissioning plan.
2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
2. Systems to be Commissioned: The following checked systems will be commissioned in this project.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Equipment and System
Chillers / Condensing Units
Pumps
Cooling tower
Boilers
Piping systems
Ductwork
Variable frequency drives
Air handlers
X
X
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work
Chemical treatment systems
HVAC control system
Fire and smoke dampers
Generator
Equipment sound control
Equipment vibration control
Egress pressurization
203
X
X
X
X
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Packaged units (AC and HP)
Terminal units (air)
Unit heaters
Heat exchangers
Lab room pressures
Specialty fans
X
X
X
Domestic Hot water heaters and pump
Automated Lighting
Irrigation systems
Kitchen Equipment
Fume hoods
Meetings: Within 60 to 90 days of commencement of construction, the CA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning
scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the
CA. Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CA to revise the Commissioning Plan.
Reporting: The CA will provide regular reports to the PM with increasing frequency as construction and commissioning progresses. The CA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos, progress reports, etc. A final Commissioning Report is compiled which summarizes the procedures, findings, conclusions, and recommendations of the commissioning process.
Submittals: The CA will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of submittal documentation the
CA requires to facilitate the commissioning work. The Commissioning Agent will review submittals related to the commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process, to the functional
performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the
development of functional testing procedures. The CA may request additional design and operations narrative from the A/E
and Controls Contractor.
Start-up Checklist and Initial Checkout:
a. General - Pre-functional Checklists are developed and completed for all major equipment and systems being commissioned. The checklist captures equipment nameplate and characteristics data, confirming the as-built status of the
equipment or system. These checklists also ensure that the systems are complete and operational, so that the functional performance testing can be scheduled.
b. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan - The CA shall assist the commissioning team members responsible for startup of
any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The primary role of the CA in this process is to
ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed.
c. Sensor Calibration - Calibration of all sensors shall be included as part of the pre-functional checklists performed by
the Contractors.
d. Execution of Pre-functional Checklists and Startup 1. Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with the PM, GC and CA.
2. The CA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple
units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved by the PM).
3. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, reheat coils), the CA shall observe a sampling of the
pre-functional and start-up procedures. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan.
4. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CA with a signed and dated copy of the completed
start-up and pre-functional checklists.
5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the pre-functional checklist was
actually performed shall initial or check that item off.
e. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup.
1. The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and pre-functional procedures that were not
completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and
any outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CA within two days of test completion.
2. The CA reviews the report and recommends approval to the PM. The CA shall work with the Subs and vendors to
correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CA will involve the PM and others as necessary.
Functional Performance Testing:
a. Objectives and Scope - The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. In general, each system should be operated
through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load) where there
is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses
to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall
also be tested.
b. Development of Test Procedures - Before test procedures are written, the CA shall obtain all requested documentation
and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code,
control sequences and parameters. The CA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document
204
8.
proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Prior to execution, the CA shall provide a copy of the test
procedures to the Sub(s) who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CA
may submit the tests to the A/E team for review. The CA shall review owner-contracted or factory testing which the CA
is not responsible to oversee and shall determine what further testing may be required to comply with the Specifications. Redundancy of testing shall be minimized. The test procedure forms developed by the CA shall include the following information:
1. System and equipment or component name(s).
2. Equipment location and ID number.
3. Date.
4. Project name.
5. Participating parties.
6. Reference to the specification section describing the test requirements.
7. A copy of the specific sequence of operations.
8. Instructions for setting up the test.
9. Special cautions, alarm limits, etc.
10. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the test.
11. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with a Yes / No check box.
12. A section for comments.
13. Signatures and date block for the CA.
c. Test Methods - Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the
control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone dataloggers. The CA will determine which method is most appropriate.
d. Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce
the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions.
At completion of the test, the Sub shall return all affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary
modifications, to their pre-test condition.
e. Sampling - Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or non-critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. The sampling strategy will be developed by the CA and approved by the PM. If, after three attempts at
testing the specified sample percentage, failures are still present, then all remaining units are tested at the contractors’
expense.
f. Coordination and Scheduling - The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their completion schedule
for the pre-functional checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. The CA will schedule functional tests
through the PM, GC and affected Subs. The CA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests.
g. Problem Solving - The CA will recommend solutions to problems found, however the burden of responsibility to solve,
correct and retest problems is with the GC, Subs and A/E team.
DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
a. Documentation - The CA shall witness and document the results of all functional performance tests using forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the PM for review and approval.
b. Non-Conformance - The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All deficiencies
or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported to the PM on a standard form.
1. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form.
2. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the CA will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to do so at the
request of the PM.
3. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified:
a. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the responsibility to correct it:
1. The CA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and intentions the testing continues.
The Sub corrects the deficiency and notifies the CA that the equipment is ready to be retested.
2. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated.
b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency or who is responsible:
1. The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form and a copy given to the PM and
GC.
2. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the
205
Discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E team. Final acceptance authority is with the Project Manager.
3. The CA documents the resolution process.
c. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency
and notifies the CA that the equipment is ready to be retested. The CA reschedules the test and the
test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
c. Cost of Retesting - The cost for the Sub to retest a pre-functional or functional test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the
GC.
d. Approval - The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the functional
test is made later after review by the CA. The CA recommends acceptance of each test to the PM. The PM gives final
approval on each test, providing a signed copy to the CA and the Contractor.
9. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
a. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals - The CA is responsible to compile, organize and index all commissioning data by equipment into labeled, indexed and tabbed, three-ring binders and deliver it to the PM. Three copies of the
manuals will be provided. The manuals shall include the Commissioning Plan, Final Commissioning Report, System
Type, Design Intent narrative, Startup and Pre-functional checklists, Functional performance tests, trending and analysis, approvals and corrections, training plan, records, and approvals.
10. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
a. The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and for ensuring that training is completed.
b. The CA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.
c. Each Sub and vendor responsible for training will submit a written training plan to the CA for review and approval prior
to training. The plan will cover the following elements:
Equipment (included in training)
Intended audience
Location of training
Objectives
Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.)
Duration of training on each subject
Instructor for each subject
Methods (classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations, written handouts, etc.)
Instructor and qualifications
11. DEFERRED TESTING
a. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy
condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the PM.
These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Services of necessary
parties will be negotiated.
b. Seasonal Testing. During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to the
system’s design) shall be completed as part of this contract. The CA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the CA witnessing. Any final
adjustments to the O&M manuals and as-builds due to the testing will be made.
N. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION: The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be capable of integrating multiple building function
including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and historical data collection and
archiving. The BAS shall consist of the following:
Standalone DDC panels
Fully Configurable Controllers
Laptop Computer
High Speed Communication Network (LAN)
2. The current BAS/DDC front end consists of Tridium Niagara R2.301.522V2, all DDC Controllers must be able to fully integrate into this architecture. Effective July 1, 2009 all new construction will integrate into Niagara AX. All retrofits, additions
and remodels where Niagara R2 is used, will continue to use that platform. Controls contractor is responsible for all integration to the BAS, to include graphics, trending and scheduling. Controls contractor will contact the SVVSD HVAC department to verify current equipment and software requirements prior to any implementation.
206
Tridium Niagara Licensing: The MSIP “Multi-system Integration Platform” Interface Device provided, shall be an AX JACE
that is open to the integrated to the SVVSD AX WEB Supervisor, and will also include the Embedded Workbench feature
that allows SVVSD to access the programming and interface for the AC JACE directly through a browser. Controls contractor will provide 2 copies of Workbench to SVVSD. Controls contractor is required to purchase additional licenses needed for
JACE integration.
In addition, all DDC field controllers must be fully programmable, by either Niagara software or controller’s native software.
Controls contractor will provide 2 copies of native controller software to SVVSD.
a. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator devices. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to
access any data from any other device on the network and share information amongst them, and must be able to integrate into Niagara..
b. BMS contractor must have the ability to program both Tridium, and accepted controls with in-house personnel. Subcontracting of any controls programming is unacceptable.
c. Device alarming shall be handled by Tridium. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own
specified control. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.
d. Tridium will have priority control of ALL units or devices. To include set points, overrides, resets, Optimum start stop
and Night set back. Back up set points, OSS and NSB / programming will reside in the bldg level controllers for back
up purposes. If a point can be monitored or controlled, it will be brought out in Tridium, and placed on GFX depending on point function. ”SVVSD discretion
e. All logic for resets, global set points, shall be programmed in Tridium and passed to the building level controls via the
network. Contact HVAC department for programming clarification.
f. BAS shall allow third party software to operate on personal computer workstation without any degradation to the controls operating normally.
g. A desktop/laptop computer shall be provided to the Owner upon completion of the project. The computer shall include
all necessary hardware and software to allow remote access of the complete BAS on or off the site. The computer
shall be configured to monitor, access, and make adjustments to the system and operate the same as the computer
workstation described above.
Laptop (min. requirements):
100gig hard drive
4g ram
Hard drive speed =7200rpm
1 serial port, PCI Network Card
Intel Pro/Wireless network card
17” wide format screen
3 USB ports
Operating System – confirm with HVAC dept.
PCMI slot
Latest Intel processor – confirm with HVAC dept.
CD/CDRW/DVDRW drive
Desktop (min. requirements):
180gig hard drive
4g ram; 64 bit OS
Dedicated video card 1G ram
Internal Network card
3 USB ports
Operating System – confirm with HVAC dept.
PCI Audio
Latest Intel processor – confirm with HVAC dept.
CD/CDRW/DVDRW drive
19” WSXGA monitor
3.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND CONTRACTORS: Subject to compliance with requirements, install one of the following systems:
207
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Long Building Technologies
D.R. Associates, LLC
QUALITY ASSURANCE: The BAS system shall be designed and installed, commissioned and serviced by factory trained
personnel. BMS contractor shall have an in-place support facility within 100 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts
inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. The BMS contractor shall provide full-time, on site, experienced
project manager for this work, responsible for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and commissioning of the
BMS. The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the installation and maintenance of BMS / Tridium systems and shall have a
minimum of ten (10) years of demonstrated technical expertise and experience in the installation and maintenance of products to be installed on this project. In addition, the BMS contractor will have no less then 3 Tridium factory trained personnel,
experienced in both Tridium AX and R2. The BMS contractor shall maintain a service organization consisting of factory
trained service personnel and provide a list of 5 projects, similar in size and scope to the project completed within the last
five years
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The Control Contractor will be responsible for all installation, programming, commissioning,
testing and performance verification. The Controls Contractor will be responsible for providing a fully integrated Building Automation System (BAS), incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control, and subsystems with open communications capabilities as herein specified.
a. Provide open communications system. The system shall be an open architecture with the capabilities to support a
multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, system shall be capable of utilizing standard protocols as follows as well as be able to integrate third-party systems via existing vendor protocols.
b. System shall be capable of high speed Ethernet communication using TCP/IP protocol.
c. System shall be capable of BACnet communication according to ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004.
d. System shall be capable of using the LonTalk protocol.
e. The system shall be capable of supporting both standard and vendor specific protocols to integrate a wide variety of
third-party devices and legacy systems.
f. The system shall be capable of supporting wireless field level networks and sensor communications using a mesh topology and IEEE 802.15.4 network.
g. The intent is to use the existing Tridium workstation to communicate with control systems provided by other vendors or
to allow information about the system provided in this contract to be sent to another workstation. This allows the user
to have a single seat from which to perform daily operation.
h. The system shall include one or more JACE interface points.
i. All graphics, PX images, overrides, and text boxes must approved by the HVAC department before implemented.
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION: All custom software, programs, code, databases, graphic files and drawings (whether
hard copy or CADD based files) prepared for this system shall be the exclusive property of the Owner and shall not be reproduced or distributed without prior written permission from the Owner.
WARRANTY: The Warranty period shall begin on the date of substantial completion as authorized by the Architect/Engineer
and Owner in writing. Substantial Completion shall not occur before the Contractor has performed the tests required.
TRAINING: The Contractor shall provide 40 hours of training for the building operators.
LIGHTING INTEGRATION: The BAS shall be connected to the lighting control system digital relay panels by Lonworks as
the preferred communication protocol. All lighting control consisting of programming, logic, scheduling, daylight harvesting,
and local user overrides will reside and will be programmed through the Jace. The intent is that all lighting control programming shall reside within the Jace and be programmed by the BAS vendor, and the lighting control panels shall not have
any programming within them.
DIVISION 23 00 90
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
1. SUMMARY: This section includes general requirements that apply to Sequences of Operation for controlled equipment.
The following sequences pursue the design intent of the owner which is to produce systems that are as energy efficient as
possible without sacrificing indoor environmental quality or thermal comfort. The Mechanical Engineer and installing contractor can modify the Sequence of Operation to further satisfy the design intent. All setpoints are adjustable. All resets will
be adjustable in Tridium. All changes to the Sequences shall be recorded in as-built documentation. All initial occupancy
schedules shall be 7am to 3 pm, Monday through Friday.
2.
GENERAL HOT WATER SYSTEM (all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. System Enable: The BAS control system shall enable the hot water heating under the following condition:
1. The outside air temperature (OAT) drops below 50F. Disable with the OAT rises above 60F.
208
b.
Hot Water Return Reset (non-condensing boilers): The hot water valve shall modulate to maintain the Hot Water Return Temperature (HWRT) at the hot water return setpoint (sp-hwrt).
SP-hwrt is defined by the following reset schedule when any air handling unit is enables: If the air handling units are
disabled, sp-hwrt shall be 140 degrees F.
OAT
10 degrees F
58 degrees F
sp-hwrt
165 degrees F
140 degrees F
(If three-way valve control strategy is not used, hot water supply temperature may be reset by sending a hot water
supply temperature signal to the boiler control panel. IN this case, the HWS setpoint shall be equal to the values
above plus 15 degrees F).
c.
Hot Water Return Reset (condensing boilers): The hot water valve shall modulate to maintain the Hot Water Return
Temperature (HWRT) at the hot water return setpoints (sp-hwrt). Sp-hwrt is defined by the following reset schedule
(assuming a loop design HWS temp of 140 degrees F)
OAT
10 degrees F
58 degrees F
d.
e.
f.
g.
(If three-way valve control strategy is not used, hot water supply temperature may be reset by sending a hot water
supply temperature signal to the boiler control panel. IN this case, the HWS setpoint shall be equal to the values
above plus 15 degrees F).
Boiler Start/Stop (single boiler): Boiler shall be enabled when the system enable is on, pump status is on (primary
loop, secondary loop and circulation pumps as available) and the HWRT is 10 degrees F below the sp-hwrt. If the
HWRT is 5 degrees F above the sp-hwrt for more than 10 minutes the boiler shall be disabled.
Boiler Lead/Lag (multiple equally-sized boilers): The two hot water boilers shall be staged through the DDC. The lead
boiler shall be enabled when the system enable is on, pump status is on (primary loop, secondary loop and circulation
pumps as available) and the HWRT is 10 degrees F below the sp-hwrt. The lag boiler shall be enabled when the
HSRT falls more than 10 degrees F below the sp-hwrt for more than one hour “Adjustable”. The lead/lag selector shall
rotate the boilers every other Wednesday at 12:00 pm. Upon failure of the lead boiler, the lag boiler shall be enabled
and alarm shall be generated at the DDC.
Boiler Lead/Lag (multiple different sized boilers): The two hot water boilers shall be staged through the DDC. The lead
boiler shall be enabled upon system enable and pump status. Boiler B-1 is sized for X% heating capacity, Boiler B-2 is
sized at 100-X% capacity (B-1 is the larger of the two). When the outside air temperature is between 58 degrees F
and 40 degrees F Boiler B-2 will operate and Boiler B-1 will be disabled. When the temperature falls below 40 degrees
F, Boiler B-1 will be enabled, and Boiler B-2 will be enabled if HWRT falls more than 10 degrees F below the sp-hwrt
for more than one hour.
Boiler Staging (multiple equally-sized boilers; most efficient at low firing rate, high turn-down ratio): The two heating
water boilers shall be staged through the DDC. The lead boiler shall be enabled and its associated isolation valve shall
open (with end switch indication) when the system enable is on and the distribution pump status in on. The Lead/Lag
selector shall rotate the boilers every other Tuesday at 8:00 am. Upon failure of the lead boiler, the lag boiler shall be
enabled and alarm shall be generated. Boilers shall be staged on in response to building heating demand as follows:
Stage
1
2
3
4
h.
i.
sp-hwrt
125 degrees F
90 degrees F
Boiler Operation
Both boilers off
Lead boiler 0 to 25% fire / Lag boiler off
Lead boiler 25% fire / Lag boiler 0 to 25% fire
Both boilers modulate 25% to 100% fire
Pump Lead/Lag (if multiple pumps): The lead pump shall be enabled upon system enable. The lead/lag pump selector shall rotate the pumps every other Wednesday at 11:00 am. Upon failure of the lead pump, the stand-by pump
shall start automatically and an alarm shall be generated to the DDC. The pumps shall remain enabled for a period of
10 minutes after the heating system is disabled.
Variable Speed Pumping (If VFD’s are available): The hot water pump VFD speed (HWP VFD SPEED) shall modulate
the hot water differential pressure (via a differential pressure transducer located by the design engineer) to maintain
209
j.
k.
3.
the hot water differential pressure setpoint (sp-hw loop p.s.i.) set by the balance contractor When the VFD output for
the hot water pump (hw vfd pid) reaches above 95% for more than 10 minutes, the lag hot water pump request (lag
hwp-req) will activate. Upon lag pump activation both pumps shall be commanded to 50%. The lead and lag pump activation will then modulate to maintain the hot water differential pressure setpoint together. The lag pump will stay enabled until the hw vfd pid drops below 40%.
Combustion air dampers (if available): Combustion air damper shall open upon an enable command for the associated
appliance, and must prove open via a mercury end switch, upon sensing the combustion damper is open, DDC will
then enable the appliance to fire. Hard wired damper interlock to boiler enable will be unacceptable.
Alarms:
1. EPO shutdown (if available): If any EPO switches are activated the enable control signal to the heating boilers and
the domestic water boiler shall be disabled and an alarm generated. The heating hot water pumps may remain in
service.
2. Additional alarms (as available): Any of the following alarm/failure points shall generate an alarm in the DDC.
a. Glycol pumping station low level alarm (15 minute delay)
b. Hot water pump alarm (Command ON and status OFF, Command OFF and Status ON (15 minute delay)).
c. General boiler alarm: The general boiler alarm shall be a factory provided dry contact alarm that shall provide a summary alarm of any boiler failure condition (low water cut off, high limit temperature, flame failure,
high gas pressure alarm or low gas pressure alarm).
d. Hot water supply/return temperature (10 degrees F less than or greater than setpoint (15 minute delay, inhibit
when heat is disabled).
GENERAL CHILLED WATER SYSTEM (All setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. System enable: The DDC control system shall enable the chilled water system whenever the outside air temperature
is above 65 degrees F.. Chilled water system shall be disable when the outside air temperature is below 63 degrees F
or when building is unoccupied.
b. Chiller Lead/Lag (if available, equally-sized chillers): The chillers shall be staged through the DDC control system.
The lead chiller shall be enabled with system enable and proof of secondary pump status. The lag chiller shall be enabled if the lead chiller has been enabled for at least one hour and the chilled water return temperature rises above 58
degrees F (lag chwrt max) for a period of more than 1 minutes (lag chiller delay) or in the event of a lead chiller failure.
If both chillers are operating, the lag chiller shall disable when the load of both chillers drops below 50%. The leadstandby chiller selector shall rotate the chillers every Tuesday at 8:00 am.
c. Pump Lead/Lag (if available): The pumping system shall be enabled with system enable. The lead/lag pump selector
shall select a lead pump and a lag pump, rotating the pumps every Wednesday at 12:00 pm. Upon failure of a lead
pump, the stand-by pump shall start automatically and an alarm shall be generated.
d. Chiller Operation: The chiller will be enabled upon system enable and proof of all pump status, via current sensing relay. Chiller shall operate under its own factory controls to maintain 45 degrees F leaving chilled water temperature set
point. If a reset point is available, the chiller will use the following reset.
OAT
85 degrees F
65 degrees F
e.
f.
g.
h.
Sp
45 degrees F
55 degrees F
Condenser water control (if available): The three-way diverting tower bypass valve (if available) shall be closed to the
tower when the system is disabled. Upon system enable the valve shall modulate to maintain a sump condenser water
setpoint at 72 degrees F to 76 degrees F. The cooling tower VFD (if available) shall be enabled upon condenser pump
status and allowed to maintain sump condenser water setpoint of 72 degrees F to 76 degrees F.
Variable Pressure Pumping (if available): The chilled water pump VFD speed (CHWP VFD SPEED) shall modulate the
chilled water differential pressure (via a differential pressure transducer located by the design engineer) to maintain the
differential pressure setpoint (sp-chw loop p.s.i.). When the VFD output of the chilled water pump (chw vfd pid) reaches 95% for more than 10 minutes, the lag chilled water pump request (lag chwp-req) will activate. Upon lag pump activation both pumps shall be commanded to 50%. The lead and lag pump will then modulate to maintain the chilled water differential pressure setpoint together. The lag pump will stay enabled until the chw vfd pid drops below 40%.
Load Shedding: Once the building demand approaches 75% (adj) of the demand limit setpoint (initially set by the controls contractor during checkout) the chiller shall enable its internal demand limiting sequence that shall prevent the
building demand from exceeding the setpoint.
Alarms (as available):
210
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Chilled water pump alarm (Command ON and status OFF, Command OFF and status ON (15 minute delay)).
Chilled water supply temperature (10 degrees F less than or greater than setpoint (15 minute delay, inhibit when
cooling is disabled)).
Condenser watr supply temperature (10 degrees F less than or greater than setpoint (15 minute delay, inhibit
when cooling is disabled))
Chiller general alarm (15 minute delay)
Compressor failure (Command ON and status OFF, Command OFF and status ON (15 minute delay))
Sump low level alarm (15 minute delay)
Runtime alarm for pumps and chillers (unit ON for more than 24 hours).
4.
GENERAL SWITCH-OVER SEQUENCE FOR TWO-PIPE HEATING/COOLING SYSTEMS
Note: the heating plant HWR setpoint reste shall be 80 degrees F at 58 degrees F OAT for a 2-pipe system.
a. Cooling-to-heating changeover sequence: The heating operation enable command shall be equipped with a time delay
when switching from cooling operation to heating operation. Hydronic system distribution pump shall continue to operate during the cooling-to-heating changeover period. When the OAT falls below 62 degrees F, the chiller shall be disabled and the hydronic distribution pumps shall continue to operate for 30 minutes (this allows residual refrigerant in
the evaporator bundle to boil off) and the heating/cooling changeover valve shall remain in the cooling position. After
30 minute pump run time has elapsed, the pumps shall be disabled if the OAT is > 59 degrees F, and the changeover
valve shall stroke to its normal position. When the OAT falls below 59 degrees F, the lead boiler isolation valve shall
open, the lead pump shall be enabled and the heating/cooling changeover valve shall stroke to the heating position.
b. Heating-to-cooling changeover sequence: The cooling operation enable command shall be equipped with a time delay
when switching from heating operation to cooling operation. The cooling operation shall not be enabled until the hydronic system water temperature reaches 80 degrees F (the system will already be at 80 degrees F based on revised
reset schedule). Hydronic system distribution pump shall continue to operate during the heating-to-cooling changeover
period. When the OAT rises above 62 degrees F, the boiler shall be disabled, the hydronic distribution pumps shall
continue to operate for 30 minutes, the changeover valve shall stroke from heating to cooling and the boiler isolation
valves shall stroke closed. A time delay shall be programmed into the closing of the boiler isolation valves, if necessary, to allow the change over valve to open before boiler isolation valve close to prevent distribution pumps from operation against totally closed valves. After 30 minute pump run time has elapsed, the pumps shall be disabled if the
OAT is <65 degrees F.
5.
GENERAL CONSTANT VOLUME UNIT (single-zone, no VFD, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. Optimum Start: An optimum start sequence shall be used to start the unit early enough (2 hour maximum) to achieve
an average zone temperature of 70 degrees F (optimum warm up) or 75 degrees F (optimum cool down) at the beginning of the occupied scheduled start-time. In optimum warm up the outside air dampers shall remain closed. In optimum cool down the outside air dampers shall be allowed to modulate and all mechanical cooling shall not be allowed
to run. Optimum cool shall only be used if the outside air temperature is greater than 50 degrees F and less than the
average zone temperature – 4 degrees F.
b. Occupied Cycle (7am to 5 pm):
1. During occupied hours, or activation of the 4 hour override timer, the unit runs continuously.
a. Provide extra occupied schedule points for the following zones to allow for District scheduling.
1. Administration, Music, Gym, Cafeteria, Classrooms (per wing).
b. Override timers will be zone controlled per the following zones:
1. Administration, Music, Gym, Cafeteria, Classroom (per wing)
2. Activation of the override timer will not activate cooling.
c. Space Temperature Control: The space temperature setpoint shall reset according to the following schedule. TBD.
OAT
65 degrees F
85 degrees F
d.
e.
sp-space
70 degrees F
75 degrees F
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint (Econ/HW/CHWonly): The discharge air temperature control shall modulate between 53-87 degrees F based on a PID working to maintain the space temperature at the space temperature setpoint.
The hot water valve shall modulate to maintain the DATsp – 2 degrees F. The CHW valve shall modulate to maintain
the DATsp + 2 degrees F. If the economizer is enabled, the mixed air damper shall control to maintain discharge air
temperature setpoint.
DX Control: DX shall be allowed to operate when the outside air temperature rises above 60 degrees F (economizer
enabled and OA damper is 100% open, or when economizer is disabled), and locked out when the outside air tem211
f.
g.
h.
perature drops below 58 degrees F. The first DX stage shall enable when the space temperature is equal to the space
temperature setpoint + 2 degrees F and disable when the space temperature reaches setpoint. The second DX stage
(if applicable) shall enable when the space temperature is equal to the space temperature setpoint +3 degrees F, or if
the first stage of DX is on and the space temperature does not reach setpoint after 15 minutes. The second DX stage
shall disable when the first stage is disabled.
Economizer Control: The economizer mode shall be enabled if the building is occupied and the outside aire temperature is 2 degrees F less than the return air temperature. The economizer will stay enabled until the outside air temperature is equal to the return air temperature. When the economizer is enabled the MAD will modulate to maintain the
discharge air temperature setpoint (sp-dat). If CHW is available, the mixed air damper shall modulate to maintain the
sp-dat – 2 degrees F.
Mixed Air Damper Control: The mixed air damper shall be off (full return air) unless the supply fan is running, optimum
warm is off, night setback is off and the mixed air temperature is not in alarm. Mixed air damper enable shall be subject to a 5 minute delay on make relay. When the unit is enabled and not in economizes or CO2 control mode, the
mixed air damper position shall be reset with fan speed to maintain the scheduled quantity of OA air at all fan speeds.
CO2 Control (Gym and Cafeteria Units): A return air, duct mounted, CO2 sensor shall monitor CO2 content of the return air. The outside air damper shall modulate to maintain the minimum outdoor airflow setpoint, which is a value between the lower minimum and upper minimum quantities, based on the following linear reset schedule. The lower and
upper minimum quantities area shown in the mechanical schedule. The mixed air damper control signal will be the
greater of either the CO2 requirements or the temperature requirements. CO2 control shall be overridden in a mixed
air low limit alarm condition.
Space CO2
100 ppm above ambient
i.
j.
k.
l.
Outdoor Airflow Setpoint
Lower minimum OA setpoint
Upper minimum OA setpoint
Unoccupied Cycle: During the unoccupied cycle, when night setback is not active, the supply fan is off, the mixed air
dampers area set to full return air and the hot and chilled water valves are closed. If the hot water coil is in the unit,
when the OA temperature is below 40 degrees F, the hot water valve (if present) shall be allowed to modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature setpoint of 50 degrees F.
Night Setback Mode: If any space temperature served by the unit drops below 60 degrees F, the unit shall energize
and operate as described in the Occupied cycle EXCEPT the dampers shall remain open to full return. Night setback
mode shall run until all space temperature are above 63 degrees F. heating in this mode shall be maintained per the
occupied sequence.
Safeties: The unit is disabled upon activation of the smoke detector or low temperature detection thermostat (hardwire
interlocks). Upon a fan failure alarm, low limit alarm or mixed air alarm, the dampers shall go to full return. Upon a low
limit alarm, the hot water valve shall open.
Alarms: Any of the following conditions shall generate an alarm within the DDC and at the district central monitoring
facility. Any safety alarm must trigger a supply fan alarm to the DDC.
1. Supply Fan Failure (Command ON and status OFF, Command OFF and status ON (15 minute delay))
2. Low temperature detection thermostat trip.
3. Mixed air temperature below 40 degrees F (stays in alarm until above 43 degrees F (15 minute delay))
4. Discharge air temperature greater than 120 degrees F or less than 40 degrees F (15 minute delay) inhibit when
unit is off.
5. Return air temperature greater than 90 degrees F or less than 55 degrees F (15 minute delay) inhibit when unit is
off.
6. Space temperature greater than 85 degrees F or less than 55 degrees F (15 minute delay) inhibit when unit is off.
7. Any safety alarm must trigger a supply fan alarm to the DDC.
6.
GENERAL SINGLE ZONE UNIT VFD ADD-ON (all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. VFD: During occupied heating mode, the VFD speed shall equal to the heating design airflow for that unit (as set by
the TAB contractor). Upon a call for cooling when the space temperature rises above setpoint, the VFD speed shall
modulate between heating design airflow rate and the cooling design airflow rate based on a PID reset to maintain the
space temperature at the space temperature setpoint. When the space is satisfied, the supply fan speed shall reset to
60% (adj). The mixed air damper shall reset to maintain the specified outside air CFM at any supply fan speed.
7.
GENERAL CONSTANT VOLUME UNIT (multiple zones, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. Optimum Start: An optimum start sequence shall be used to start the unit early enough (2 hours maximum) to achieve
an average zone temperature of 70 degrees F (optimum warm up) or 75 degrees F (optimum cool down) at the begin212
b.
c.
d.
e.
ning of the occupied scheduled start-time. In optimum warm up the outside air dampers shall remain closed. In optimum cool down the outside air dampers shall be allowed to modulate and all mechanical cooling shall not be allowed
to run. Optimum cool shall only me used I the outside air temperature is greater than 50 degrees G and less than the
Occupied Cycle (7 am to 5 pm):
1. During Occupied Hours, or activations of the 4 hour override time, the unit runs continuously.
2. Building will be occupied based on one master occupancy schedule
3. Provide extra occupied schedule points for the following zones to allow for district scheduling:
a. Administration, Music, Gyms, Cafeteria, Classrooms (per wing).
Override push buttons will be zone controlled per the following zones. Run time shall be controlled by DDC once push
button is activated. Twist timers are not allowed:
1. Administration, Music, Gyms, Cafeteria, Classrooms (per wing)
2. Activation of the override timer will not activate cooling
Discharge Air Temperature Control: The discharge air temperature control will modulate the MA damper in economizer mode to maintain a discharge air temperature between 53 degrees F – 72 degrees F based on a PID working to
maintain the average zone HW reheat valve position at 30%. The hot water valve shall modulate to maintain the DAT
– 2 degrees F. The CHW valve shall modulate to maintain the DAT +2 degrees F.
Space Temperature Control: Set point for space temperature will be reset based on outside air temperature
OAT
65 degrees F
85 degrees F
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
sp-space
70 degrees F
75 degrees F
DX control (if applicable): DX shall be allowed to operate when the outside air temperature rises above 60 degrees F
(economizer enabled and OA damper is 100% open, or when economizer is disabled), and lock out when the outside
air temperature drops below 58 degrees F. The first DX stage shall enable when the average space temperature is
equal to the space temperature is equal to the space temperature setpoint +2 degrees F, and disable when the space
temperature reaches the setpoint. The second DX stage (if applicable) shall enable when the space temperature is
equal to the space temperature setpoint + 3 degrees F, or if the first stage of DX is on and the space temperature does
not reach the setpoint after 10 minutes. The second DX stage shall disable when the first stage is disabled.
Modulating DX Control (if applicable): A digital scroll is modulating compressor capable of 10-100% capacity. When
using digital compressor to maintain DAT the following criteria is applicable:
Stage 1 – Modulate digital compressor #1
Stage 2 – Turn ON digital ON /OFF compressor #2
Stage 3 – Turn ON digital ON/OFF compressor #3
Stage 4 – Turn ON digital ON/OFF compressor #4
(The main idea behind this sequence, is compressor with the most wear starting and stopping. Once a modulating
compressor is turn on it stays on and modulates until DX is disabled. The other ON/OFF compressors can start and
stop for larger steps in capacity).
Economizer Control: The economizer mode shall be enabled if the building is occupied and the outside air temperature is 2 degrees F less than the return air temperature. The economizer will stay enabled until the outside air temperature is equal to the return air temperature. When the economizer is enabled the MAD will modulate to maintain the
discharge air temperature setpoint.
warm is off, night setback is off and the mixed air temperature is not in alarm. Mixed air damper enable shall be subject to a 5 minute delay on make relay. When the unit is enabled and not in economizer or CO2 control mode, the
CO2 Control: A return air, duct mounted, CO2 sensor shall monitor the CO2 content of the return air. The outside air
damper shall modulate to maintain the minimum outdoor airflow setpoint, which is a value between the lower minimum
and upper minimum quantities based on the following linear reset schedule. The lower and upper minimum quantities
are shown in the mechanical schedule. The mixed air damper control signal will be the greater of either the CO2 requirements or the temperature requirements. CO2 control shall be overridden in a mixed air low limit alarm condition.
Space CO2
Outdoor Airflow Setpoint
Lower minimum OA setpoint
Upper minimum OA setpoint
213
k.
dampers are set to full return air and the hot and chilled water valves are closed. If the hot water coil is in the unit,
l.
Night Setback Mode: If any space temperature served by the unit drops below 60 degrees F, the unit shall energize
mode shall run until all space temperatures are above 63 degrees F. heating in this mode shall be maintained per the
occupied sequence.
m. Safeties: The unit is disabled upon activation of the smoke detector or low temperature detection thermostat (hardware interlocks). Upon a fan failure alarm, low limit alarm or mixed air alarm, the dampers shall go to full return. Upon
a low limit alarm, the hot water valve shall open.
n. Alarms: Any of the following conditions shall generate an alarm within the DDC and at the district central monitoring
facility:
1. Supply fan failure (Command ON and status OFF, Command OFF and status ON (15 minute delay))
2. Low temperature detection thermostat trip
unit is off.
off.
8.
GENERAL VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNIT (FPVAV & VAV, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. Optimum Start: AN optimum start sequence shall be used to start the unit early enough (2 hour maximum) to achieve
an average zone temperature of 70 degrees F (optimum warm up) or 75 degrees F (optimum cool down) at the beginning of the occupied scheduled start-time. In optimum warm up the outside air dampers shall remain closed. In optimum cool down the outside air dampers shall be allowed to modulate and all mechanical cooling shall not be allowed
b. Occupied Cycle (7 am to 5 pm): During occupied hours, or activation of the 4 hour override push button, the unit runs
continuously, DDC adjustable. The supply fan VFD shall modulate to maintain the duct static setpoint. The duct static
setpoint shall be dependent on airflow, and shall reset between 0.8 – 1.5” wc as airflow modulates from 50% to 100%,
as shown by the terminal box controllers.
1. Provide extra occupied schedule points for the following zones to allow for district scheduling:
a. Administration, Music, Classrooms (per wing)
b. Override timers will be zone controlled per the following zones:
1. Administration, Music, Classrooms (per wing)
2. Activation of the override timer will not activate cooling.
c. Discharge Air Temperature Control: The discharge air temperature control will enable the gas fired heat (or modulate
the HW valve if available) (and modulate the CHW valve if available) to maintain a discharge air temperature between
55 degrees F – 70 degrees F based on a PID working to maintain the average zone hot water reheat valve position at
30%. The hot water valve shall modulate to maintain DAT – 2 degrees F. The CHW valve shall modulate to maintain
DAT + 2 degrees F.
d. DX Control (if applicable): DX shall be allowed to operate when the outside air temperature rises above 60 degrees F,
and locked out when the outside temperature drops below 58 degrees F. The first DX stage shall enable when the
highest space temperature is equal to the space temperature setpoint + 2 degrees F and disable when the highest
space temperature reaches setpoint. The second DX stage (if applicable) shall enable when the highest space temperature is equal to the space temperature setpoint +3 degrees F, or if the first stage of DX is on and the space temperature does not reach setpoint after 10 minutes. The second DX stage shall disable when the first stage is disabled.
e. Space Temperature Control: Setpoint for space temperature will be reset based on outside air temperature. TBD.
OAT
65 degrees F
85 degrees F
sp-space
70 degrees F
75 degrees F
214
f.
g.
h.
Economizer Control: The economizer mode shall be enabled if the building is occupied and the outside air temperature is 2 degrees F less than the return air temperature. The economizer will stay enabled until the outside air temperature is equal to the return air temperature. When the economizer is enabled the MAD will modulate to maintain the
discharge air temperature setpoint.
warm is off, night setback is off and the mixed air temperature is not in alarm. Mixed air damper enable shall be subject to a 5 minute delay on make relay. When the unit is enabled and not in economizer or CO2 control mode, the
Building Static Control: Any exhaust dampers and/or relief dampers shall modulate to maintain the building static
pressure at the building static pressure setp0int of 0.05” wc (adj).
i.
Mixed air plenum pressurization control: If the return fan is modulating (inlet vane or VFD) building static pressure is
monitored and return plenum pressure is monitored, a mixed air plenum pressurization control scheme will be implemented. The return fan shall be controlled from a pressure transducer locate in the return plenum and a return plenum
pressure setpoint of 0.15” wc. The exhaust air dampers will modulate to maintain building static pressure setpoint.
j. Unoccupied Cycle: During the unoccupied cycle, when night setback is not active, the supply fan is off, the mixed air
k. Night Setback Mode: : If any space temperature served by the unit drops below 60 degrees F, the unit shall energize
mode shall run until all space temperatures are above 63 degrees F. Heating in this mode shall be maintained per the
occupied sequence. If the unit serves Fan Powered Boxes the Night Setback Mode will be accomplished through the
FPVAV sequence.
l. Safeties: The unit is disabled upon activation of the smoke detector or low temperature detection thermostate (hardware interlocks). Upon a fan failure alarm, low limit alarm or mixed air alarm, the dampers shall go to full return. Upon
m. Alarms: Any of the following conditions shall generate an alarm within the DDC and at the district central monitoring
facility:
unit is off.
off.
7. High static pressure switch (5 minute delay)
9.
HEAT RECOVERY ADD-ON FOR AIR HANDLING UNITS (all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
Same as other sequences except add the following:
a. Heat Recovery: The heat recovery wheel assembly shall be enabled during occupied hours only, whenever the OAT is
less than 45 degrees F (adj) or above 78 degrees F (adj) (3 deg dead-band on each). When the heat wheel is enabled, the outside air and exhaust air heat recovery by-pass dampers shall close, and when the heat wheel is disabled,
the outside air and exhaust air heat recovery by-pass dampers shall be open. When the heat wheel is enabled, the
outside air and return air dampers shall modulate together to maintain the mixed air temperature set point (mixed air
temperature set point = DAT set point minus 2 degrees F). During the transition to occupied mode and startup of the
heat recovery wheel, the supply fan will be started and the OA/RA dampers set to full RA and the bypass dampers
shall be closed, then the heat wheel shall be started, next the exhaust fan shall be enabled, and after a 3 minute delay,
the OA damper shall open and be allowed to control.
1. Unoccupied operation: Heat recovery deactivated, return air damper is fully open, outside air and exhaust air
dampers are fully closed. Exhaust and supply fans are off.
2. Morning Warm-up: Heat recovery is deactivated, return air damper is fully open, outside air damper is fully
closed, bypass dampers are fully closed. Supply fan is on operating to duct static pressure set point, exhaust fan
is off, and exhaust damper is closed.
215
3. Morning Cool-down: The exhaust fan is activated and shall operate at full speed, the heat recovery wheel is deactivated, the outside air damper is fully open, the return air damper is closed and the outside air and exhaust air
by-pass dampers are open to provide maximum ventilation air pre-cooling.
4. Frost-control operation: Frost control operation shall be initiated upon sensing an exhaust air temperature (return
air leaving the heat recovery wheel) of 34 degrees F or less. The exhaust fan is activated, the heat recovery
wheel is activated, the outside air by-pass damper modulates open to maintain an exhaust air temperature (leaving the heat recovery wheel) of 35 degrees F, and the exhaust air by-pass damper is fully closed.
10. FAN POWERED BOX (FPVAV, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. Occupied Cycle (based on fan status of associate air handler): When in the cooling mode, the primary air damper shall
modulate between its maximum and minimum setting to maintain the occupied cooling setpoint. When in the heating
mode the primary air damper shall close to the cooling minimum position and below the heating occupied setpoint, the
induced air fan shall be energized. Upon a further drop in space temperature, the reheat coil alve shall modulate to
maintain the heating occupied setpoint. Upon a rise in space temperature, the reverse shall occur.
1. Setpoint for space temperature will be reset based on outside air temperature
OAT
65 degrees F
85 degrees F
b.
c.
sp-space
70 degrees F
75 degrees F
* Space temperature will be maintained by corresponding reheat coil
Unoccupied Mode (based on fan status of associated air handler): If the air handler is not running (no fan status) the
damper and HW reheat valve shall both close, fan shall be commanded off.
Night Setback: Air handler stays off. If the space temperature served by the box falls below 60 degrees F the fan shall
start, the damper shall close and the valve shall modulate to maintain the night setback setpoint. Night setback mode
shall run until the space temperature is above 63 degrees F.
11. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX (VAV, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. Occupied Cycle: The VAV box terminal damper shall modulate in sequence with the terminal box heating valve to
maintain space temperature setpoint of 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F cooling. As the space temperature rises
above cooling setpoint, the VAV damper shall modulate open and vary the supply air to the space from cooling minimum to maximum to maintain setpoint. As the space temperature fall below the heating setpoint, the VAV box damper
shall modulate back to it minimum air position and the heating valve shall open to maintain heating temperature setpoint. During MWU and NSB, and sensing a DAT above 80 degrees F, “through the DDC” the VAV damper will modulate to maximum cooling setpoint until sp is reached.
1. Setpoint for space temperature will be reset based on outside air temperature
OAT
65 degrees F
85 degrees F
b.
sp-space
70 degrees F
75 degrees F
Unoccupied Mode: Unoccupied mode for the box is determined from the fan status of the associated air hanlder. If
the air handler is not running the damper and HW reheat valve shall both be closed.
12. ENABLE AND MONITOR (Package Controlled Unit, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
a. Optimum Start: An optimum start sequence shall be used to start the unit early enough to achieve an average zone
temperature of 70 degrees F (heating) or 75 degrees F (cooling) at the beginning of the occupied scheduled start-time.
Optimum start schedules shall be a slave schedule from the master building occupied schedule. If the building occupied mode is off the optimum start must also be off.
b. Occupied Cycle (7am to 5 pm):
1. During Occupied hours or activation of the 4 hour override push button, the unit runs continuously, DDC adjustable. Factory unity control shall operate heating and cooling to maintain room setpoint.
2. DDC shall monitor temperatures, fan and safety status.
3. DDC shall enable associated exhaust fans when unit is enabled.
c. Unoccupied Cycle: During the unoccupied cycle, when night setback is not active, the supply fan is off and the mixed
air dampers are set to full return air.
216
d.
Night Setback Mode: If any of the zone temperatures served by the unit drops below 60 degrees F, the unit shall energize and operate as described in the Occupied cycle EXCEPT the outside air dampers shall remain closed. Night
setback mode shall run until all space temperatures are above 63 degrees F.
13. GENERAL MULTI-ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROL (with DX cooling, all setpoints and time periods are adjustable)
an average zone temperature to 68 degrees F (optimum warm up) or 75 degrees F (optimum cool down) at the beginning of the occupied scheduled start-time. In optimum warm up the outside air dampers shall remain closed. In optimum cool down the outside air dampers shall be allowed to modulate and all mechanical cooling shall not be allowed
b. Occupied Cycle (7 am to 5 pm):
1. During occupied hours, or activation of the 4 hour override timer, the unit runs continuously
2. The DDC system shall reset the HD temperature setpoint from the average zone damper position (0% = full heating) as follows:
Avg. Zone Damper
Position
30%
85%
Hot Deck Setpoint
100 degrees F
75 degrees F
3. The DDC system shall reset the CD temperature setpoint based on the average zone damper position (100% =
full cooling) as follows:
Avg. Zone Damper
Position
80%
10%
Cold Deck
Setpoint
55 degrees F
65 degrees F
4. The economizer shall be enabled when the RAT is 2 degrees F less than the OAT, and disabled when the RAT
equals the OAT. When enabled, the MA damper shall modulate to maintain the CD temperature setpoint. When
the economizer is disabled the OA damper shall return to minimum position.
5. The DX cooling shall be enabled if the OAT is greater than 60 degrees F. When enabled the DX shall be staged
as follows:
DX
STAGE
DX1
DX2
c.
d.
e.
f.
Enable stage when
Avg. Zone Damper
is greater than:
55%
80%
Disable stage when
Avg. Zone Damper
is less than:
40%
55%
6. Below 58 degrees F OAT the DDC system shall lock out the mechanical cooling system.
when the OA temperature is below 40 degree F, the hot water valve (if present) shall be allowed to modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature setpoint of 50 degrees F.
setback mode shall run until all space temperatures are above 63 degrees F. Heating in this mode shall be maintained per the occupied sequence.
Safeties: The unit is disabled upon activation of the smoke detector or low temperature detection thermostat (hardware interlocks). Upon a fan failure alarm, low limit alarm or mixed air alarm, the dampers shall go to full return. Upon
Alarms: Any of the following conditions shall generate an alarm within the DDC and at the district central monitoring facility:
217
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Return fan failure (Command ON and status OFF, Command OFF and Status ON (15 minute delay))
Low temperature detection thermostat trip
Mixed air temperature below 40 degrees F (stays in alarm until above 43 degrees F (15 minute delay))
Return air temperature high than 90 degrees F or less than 55 degrees F (15 minute delay)
Zone temperature greater than 85 degrees F or less than 55 degrees F during occupied hours (15 minute delay)
Zone temperature less than 55 degrees F during unoccupied hours (15 minute delay)
Any safety alarm must trigger a supply fan alarm to the DDC.
14. GENERAL DIRECT EVAPORATOR AND INDIRECT EVAPORATOR (Constant volume, all setpoints and time periods are
adjustable)
an average zone temperature to 68 degrees F (optimum warm up) or 75 degrees F (optimum cool down) at the beginning of the occupied scheduled start-time. In optimum warm up the outside air dampers shall remain closed. In optimum cool down the outside air dampers shall be allowed to modulate and all mechanical cooling shall not be allowed
b. Occupied Cycle (7:30 am to 3:30 pm):
1. During occupied hours, or activation of the 4 hour override time, the unit runs continuously.
2. Discharge Air Control: The discharge air temperature control shall be limited to a minimum of 55 degrees F and a
maximum of 65 degrees F. The discharge air control will enable the HW valve, modulate the economizer and enable the evaporator stages as necessary to maintain a discharge air temperature based on the outside air temperature as indicated in the reset schedule
OSA Temp
65 degrees F
35 degrees F
DA Temp
55 degrees F
65 degrees F
3. Control strategy below 35 degrees F outside air temperature: The economizer mode shall be disabled, the mixed
air dampers shall modulate to maintain minimum CO2 requirements and the hot water valve shall modulate to
maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.
4. Control strategy between 35 degrees F and 55 degrees F outside air temperature: The economizer mode shall be
enabled and shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The hot water valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint – 2 degrees F.
5. Control Strategy above 55 degrees F outside air temperature: When the outside air temperature is greater than
53 degrees F the sumps shall be filled by opening the fill valves, closing the drain valves and allowing the factory
provided float activated fill valve to operate (sump shall be drawing below 45 degrees F). Above 55 degrees F the
economizer mode shall be disabled and the evaporator stages shall be allowed to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint in the following stages:
Stage One: The indirect vaporizer fan shall be enabled and the indirect pump shall be enabled. The vaporizer fan shall modulate to maintain setpoint.
Stage Two: The indirect vaporizer fan shall be enabled and at full speed the indirect pump shall be enabled and the 4” evaporator shall be enabled. The vaporizer fan shall modulate to maintain the
setpoint.
Stage Three: The indirect vaporizer fan shall be enabled and at full speed, the indirect pump shall be enabled and the 8” evaporator shall be enabled.
Stage Four: The indirect vaporizer fan shall be enabled and at full speed, the indirect pump shall be enabled, the 4” evaporator shall be enabled and the 8” evaporator shall be enabled.
c.
d.
e.
Relief Damper: The relief damper shall modulate to maintain the building static pressure setpoint of 0.05” wc (adj).
when the OA temperature is below 40 degree F, the hot water valve (if present) shall be allowed to modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature setpoint of 50 degrees F.
setback mode shall run until all space temperatures are above 63 degrees F. Heating in this mode shall be maintained per the occupied sequence.
218
f.
g.
h.
i.
Media Dry Out and Media Flush: The media dry out sequence will run the supply fan 30 minutes after the evaporator
pump is stopped. The media dry out sequence will occur at the end of each occupied cycle in which the evaporator
section was utilized.
Sump water refresh: The sump water shall be released and refilled once a week.
Safeties: The unit is disabled upon activation of the smoke detector or low temperature detection thermostat (hardware interlocks). Upon a fan failure alarm, low limit alarm or mixed air alarm, the dampers shall go to full return. Upon
Alarms: Any of the following conditions shall generate an alarm within the DDC and at the district central monitoring facility:
4. Discharge Air temperature greater than 120 degrees F or less than 40 degrees F (15 minute delay)
5. Return air temperature higher than 90 degrees F or less than 55 degrees F (15 minute delay)
6. Zone temperature greater than 85 degrees F or less than 45 degrees F during occupied hours (15 minute delay)
15. CABINET UNIT HEATERS: The cabinet unit heater valve shall open and the fan shall cycle on to maintain space temperature setpoint of 65 degrees F. The control valve will be a thermostatic radiator type valve with a remote bulb actuator located on the supply side of the coil. The remote bulb sensor shall be placed in the return air of the unit. The fan shall be interlocked with a pipe-mounted aquastat so that fan operation shall be subject to the availability of 100 degree F water on the
return side of the coil.
16. KITCHEN EXHAUST FAN INTERLOCK CONTROL: Fan shall be energized from a local key switch with pilot light. The fan
will be interlocked with MAU unit. When the fan is running the unit will be forced into the occupied sequence. If the fan is
left on after midnight the unit will be shut down regardless of fan operation. If the Ansul monitoring system alarm contact
closes, the MAU shall be disabled and the exhaust hood shall be enabled via a 120V interlock wired by the Electrical Contractor.
17. EVAPORATOR CONTROL (all setpoints and time periods are adjustable): When evaporative cooling is utilized in an air
handling system the evaporator will be enable after the economizer has reached 100% and additional cooling is needed. If
the outside air temperature is greater than the return air temperature (economizer not enabled) the economizer section will
be commanded open before the evaporator is enabled. DDC shall control the fill/drain valve. Fill the system if OAT is greater than 50 degrees F and drain and fill system once a week for fresh water.
18. KILN SEQUENCE (all setpoints and time periods are adjustable): The kiln exhaust fan (and associated inlet damper, if
available) shall run if the space temperature is above 85 degrees F. If the room temperature exceeds 115 degrees F the
kiln shall be disabled via the kiln’s factory provided dry contactor. If the exhaust fan fails an alarm shall be generated and
the kiln disabled.
19. BASE BOARD RADIANT HEATERS: The base board valve shall open to maintain space temperature setpoint of 65 degrees F (adjustable at control valve). The control valve will be a thermostatic radiator type valve with a remote bulb actuator
located near the return of the coil.
20. CRAWL SPACE HUMIDITY CONTROL: The crawl space shall be ventilated by an exhaust fan interlocked with a 120V
humidistat and an intake damper. This interlock shall be wired by the electrical contractor.
21. MITER ROOM CONTROL: Packaged Room Air Conditioning Equipment controls shall be enabled through the integral
packaged unit controls for unit fan operation and room cooling. Provide a separate room temperature sensor for monitoring
only through the BAS.
22. EXHAUST FANS: Restroom exhaust fan(s) shall be interlocked with the air handler serving the respective space. The exhaust fans shall run continuously during occupied hours with manual ON/OFF control through the BAS. An exhaust fan
shall start after the associated control damper (if available) has opened.
23. DISHWASHER EXHAUST FAN: Fan shall be interlocked with dishwasher equipment to operate during dishwasher operation. Fan shall remain on for a period of 30 minutes after dishwasher shuts off. Provide BAS status point for the fan.
219
DIVISION 23 10 00
FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS
A. NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1. Install gas cock upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged connection downstream from the gas
cock to permit removal of controls.
2. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to the inlet of the gas appliance as
practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length.
3. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag attached with a metal
chain indicating the piping systems supplied.
4. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if the valve is free; so they
can be tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate; and examined for leakage when in the closed position.
Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors.
B. NATURAL GAS PIPING SPECIALTIES:
1. Gas Meters: Diaphragm-type, positive displacement gas meters with aluminum cases, temperature compensated, with internal corrosion-resistant components; threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for gas
working pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated. Provide pulse monitor for interface to DDC system.
2. Flexible Connectors: Corrugated type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel braid and heavy flexible armor
shield.
3. Quick Couplers: One way quick coupler with gas rating in cubic feet per hour equal to equivalent gas appliance rating.
4. Valve cabinets: For gas safety valves, No. 4 stainless steel finish, fully recessed, Series S construction, style K stainless
steel door with key lock, 4 keys per cabinet, all cabinets keyed alike.
C. VALVES:
1. Solenoid Valves: Aluminum body, 120 volts AC, 60 Hz, Class B continuous duty molded coil; NEMA 4 coil enclosure; electrically opened/electrically closed; dual coils; normally closed; UL and FM approved and labeled.
2. Gas Line Pressure Regulators: Single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure regulators; with atmospheric
vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet and
outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated.
3. Gas Safety Valves: Gas safety valve latched open when energized, free handle design, manual reset, and a visual position
indicator.
4. Shutoff Valve: Bronze or aluminum body solenoid valve with Buna “N” seat, 120 VAC, 60 Hz, Class F continuous duty
molded coil. The valve shall be normally closed, UL listed for 0 to 5 psi natural gas safety shutoff, automatic reset. Threaded end for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, and flanged end for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Design Basis: ASCO Model
8215, size as indicated on the drawings.
5. Valve Control Station:Provide an 8” x 8” x 4” (200 mm x 200 mm x 100 mm) deep NEMA 1, UL listed gas valve control panel
with brushed stainless steel cover for flush mounting. The control station shall provide a red pushbutton switch for emergency valve shutoff, a key operated spring-return switch for manual reset, a latching type 120 VAC control relay and a red
“on” pilot light.
6. Valve Ceiling Enclosure: Provide a 2’ x 2’ x1’ (600 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm) deep solenoid valve enclosure box with a perforated face and a hinged cover suitable for installation in a T-bar grid ceiling (see plans for detail and locations).
7. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Jenkins Bros.
Lunkenheimer Co.
Nibco, Inc.
Powell Co.
Stockham.
DIVISION 23 20 00
HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS
A. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, pressure and temperature ratings, capacities, joint type, grade, size and
weight (wall thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards.
2. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and pressure rating indicated for each
service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where
not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable.
220
B.
STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance welded.
2. Steel Water Pipe: AWWA C200 for pipe 6 inches and larger.
3. Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe: AWWA C203 for enamel and tape, hot applied.
4. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, including bolting (Class 125 and 250).
5. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.4 (Class 125 and 250).
6. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 125 and 300).
7. Malleable-Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, 250 or 300; selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication
and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal- to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 150, 250 and 300).
8. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI/ASME B16.14.
9. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.5, ASTM A234 (Fire Protection) including bolting and gasketing of the following
material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated.
10. End Connections: Buttwelding.
11. Facings: Raised-face.
12. Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service: AWWA C207 (water service piping only).
13. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated
to match schedule of connected pipe (up to 4 inch pipe size).
14. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match
connected pipe.
15. Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12.
16. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with
installation requirements.
17. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where
length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2 inches, and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2 inches, and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples).
C. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS:
1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated.
2. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.
3. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18.
4. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
5. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23 (drainage and vent with DWV or tube).
6. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
7. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26.
8. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24 (Class 150 and 300).
9. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
D. CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
1. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401 and CISPI Standards 301 and 310. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the
collective trademark of the cast iron soil pipe institute or receive prior approval of the engineer.
2. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the cast
iron soil pipe institute or receive prior approval of the engineer.
3. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C564, CISPI Standard 310 and stainless
steel clamp holding band.
4. Heavy Duty Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket coupling with ASTM C564. 304 stainless steel shield,
minimum 0.15 inches thick, minimum 3 inches wide with 4 sealing bands up to 4 inch pipe, minimum 9 inches wide with 6
sealing bands up to 10 inch pipe.
5. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; complying with ASTM A 74.
6. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564.
E.
SUB-SURFACE DRAINAGE TILE AND PIPE, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES:
1. Clay Drain Tile: ASTM C 4, Standard Class, unless otherwise indicated; lengths as indicated.
2. Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D 2729; perforated except where standard sections of pipe are indicated.
3. Perforated Clay Pipe: ASTM C 700; Standard Strength, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fittings and Accessories for Drainage Tile and Pipe: Unless otherwise indicated, provide fittings matching and of same material as pipe units; comply with same standards, where applicable, except fittings need not be perforated where pipe is required to be perforated.
221
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
F.
Tile Joint Accessories: Where open-joint drainage tile is indicated, provide joint accessory units as follows:
Heavy-mesh burlap joint covers, with copper wire ties.
Coal-tar saturated felt covers, with copper wire ties.
Copper screen covers, 18-14 mesh, with copper wire ties.
Corrosion-resistant metal spacer-band covers.
PIPING INSTALLATION:
1. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.
2. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to
be exposed to view.
3. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to
permit insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling
panels to allow for panel removal.
4. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
5. Install drains in pressure pipe systems at all low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, ¾ inch
ball valve, and short ¾ inch threaded end nipple and cap with chain.
6. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
G. PIPING APPLICATION:
1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water - Inside Building:
a. Above Grade Inside Building: 2 inches and Smaller: Type L, hard drawn copper tube with wrought copper or bronze
fittings, 95-5 tin-antimony / silver tin alloy soldered joints. 2-1/2” and Larger: Brazed copper tube and fittings in accordance with ASME B31.
b. Below Grade Inside and Outside Building: 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Type K, soft copper or Type K annealed copper
tube with wrought copper fittings, silver tin alloy solder joints. Larger than 2-1/2 inches: Ductile iron, tar coated outside,
cement mortar lined inside. Full lengths of pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible. Fittings for ductile iron
pipe shall be 350 psi pressure, tar coated outside and cement lined inside. Rubber gasket joints.
2. Sanitary Drainage and Vents - Inside Building:
a. Above Grade: Service weight cast iron, no-hub type with neoprene gaskets; service weight cast iron, hub and spigot
type with neoprene gaskets; or DWV copper with wrought copper of cast brass fittings.
b. Below Grade: Sizes 2 inch to 20 inch, service weight cast iron, hub and spigot type only with neoprene compression
gaskets; or sizes 12 inches and larger ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints.
3. Roof Drainage - Inside Building:
a. Above Grade: Service weight cast iron, hub and spigot type or no-hub Husky Series 4000 (or equivalent); or galvanized steel with galvanized cast iron drainage fittings and threaded joints
b. Below Grade: Sizes 2 inch to 20 inch, service weight cast iron, hub and spigot type or sizes 12 inches and larger ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints.
4. Accessible Gas Piping:
a. Exposed Location: 2 Inches and Smaller: Schedule 40, black steel pipe, beveled ends, with 150 lb. malleable iron fittings and threaded joints. Over 2 Inches: Schedule 40 black steel with butt weld fittings and welded joints.
b. Inaccessible Location: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, beveled ends, with socket weld fittings same thickness as pipe;
welded joints.
c. Below Grade: Schedule 40 seamless black steel with 150 lb. forged steel fittings and welded joints. Provide machine
applied, coated and wrapped pipe in accordance with local code and utility company requirements. Provide cathodic
protection as called for on the drawings.
5. Heating Water Piping:
a. 2 Inches and Smaller: Schedule 40, black steel with 125 lb. cast iron or 150 lb. malleable iron threaded fittings (OR)
Type L copper, hard drawn copper wrought copper or bronze fittings, silver - tin alloy solder joints.
b. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Schedule 40, seamless or ERW (std. weight 12 inches and over) black steel with flanged or
welded joints.
c. Fittings: Standard weight / Extra strong, seamless steel, butt weld type.
d. Flanges: 150 lb. 300 lb. forged steel slip-on or welding neck type.
e. Bolting: Regular square head machine bolts with heavy hexagonal nuts.
f. Gaskets: Thickness, material and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design temperature and pressures.
g. Equipment Drains and Overflows: Type "M" or "DWV" copper.
6. Sub-Surface Drain Pipe: ASTM D3034 SDR-35 Polyvinylchloride (PVC) perforated sewer pipe (OR) BS corrugated, perforated polyethylene under drain pipe.
222
7.
Sump Pump Discharge: Schedule 40, galvanized steel with 125 lb. cast iron or 150 lb. malleable iron galvanized threaded
fittings. Type L, seamless, hard drawn copper tube with ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper or bronze solder-joint pressure
fittings.
H. HVAC PUMPS:
1. Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type,
size, and capacity of each pump shall be listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer.
2. Pump motor shall be sized so as not to be overloaded at any point along impeller curve for specified performance. All pump
couplers shall be suitable for both constant speed and variable speed operation.
3. In-line Circulator Pumps: Single stage, wet rotor type, designed for 145 psi working pressure, 140 degrees F (60 degrees C)
continuous water temperature, and specifically designed for quiet operation.
a. Pump volute: cast iron.
b. Impeller, impeller seal ring, rotor can, bearing plate, motor shaft and rotor cladding shall be constructed of stainless
steel. Impeller shall be secured directly to the motor shaft be means of a stainless steel tapered split cone and locking
nut.
c. The motor shaft shall have tungsten carbide bearing journals and shall be supported by two aluminum oxide ceramic
bearings. The motor shaft shall have a stainless steel mounted carbon thrust ring.
d. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Grundfos
4. Frame-mounted End Suction Pumps: Horizontal mount, single stage, vertical split case, flexible coupling, base mounted,
designed for 175 psi working pressure. Cast iron, 125 psi ANSI flanges, tappings for gauge and drain connections.
a. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve.
b. Bearings: Regreaseable sleeve bearings.
c. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat.
d. Impeller: Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and secured with locking
screw. Assembly components shall be 304 stainless steel.
e. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, equipped with coupling guard.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Bell & Gossett, ITT
Taco
Aurora Pumps
Wilo
Richard Kunz
WATER TREATMENT
1. Provide a closed system chemical feed and control system sized and equipped to treat the raw makeup water available at
the project site.
2. By-Pass Feeder with Cloth Bag Filter: Provide a 5 Gallon Chemical Pot Feeder with an integral Bag Filter and five replacement bag filters. The pot feeder shall be installed in a by-pass loop around the circulating pump of each closed system, as
shown on the drawings, for the purpose of introducing special chemicals and cleaning of the system water. A 3-1/2inch
quick opening cap with "0" ring seat shall be provided on the top of the pot feeder to add chemical and for changing the filter
bag. The Feeder shall have two 3/4inch NPT female pipe connections. Feeder shall be capable of operating at 300 psig and
at a temperature up to 200 degrees F. The by-Pass feeder shall be mounted no higher from the floor than 48 inches.
3. Glycol Feeder: Provide Glycol Feed System consisting of a 50 gallon polyethylene tank with a removable polyethylene tank
cover. A 1/2inch suction and underdrain system, with hose bib, for draining the tank, and a pump shut off valve. The tank
shall be supported by four steel legs with foot pads and the pump mounted under, for positive suction, as an integral part of
the tank.
4. The glycol Feeder discharge shall consist of a 3/4inch check valve, 3/4inch threaded female "T", for connecting the Glycol
Feeder to the system piping, and a Watts pressure relief valve set at a 20% lower setting than the boiler relief valve, which
will dump any closed system over pressure, back into the Glycol Mixing Tank.
5. The control cabinet shall be a NEMA 1 enclosure with Lexan viewing window mounted in the cabinet door. The following
components shall be mounted on the inside panel: Low liquid level alarm light, low liquid level alarm silencer switch, pump
test switch and, pump operating, indicating light. A 0 - 60 psi system pressure gauge. An adjustable drum low level sensor
shall prevent the positive displacement pump from operating when the tank liquid level is low and shall also audibly sound
an alarm when tank level is low. In addition, two extra normally open dry contacts shall be provided for remote low tank level warming alarm. A 3 - 35 psi adjustable pressure switch shall control the system pressure.
6. Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
223
Rocky Mountain Aqua Tech
Summitt Labs
Calcium Control
DIVISION 23 30 00
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
A. METAL DUCTWORK
1. Extent of metal ductwork shall be indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section.
DUCT SERVICE
TYPE/CONSTRUCTION
Supply air between fan and terminal boxes (medium and high).
Rectangular supply air from discharge of terminal box/fan to air
devices (low pressure).
Return air ductwork.
Galvanized steel, spiral, round or rectangular.
Galvanized sheet metal /spiral round and oval or rectangular
(wrapped or lined as noted on drawings.)
Galvanized steel (lined where noted on drawings); factory or shop
fabricated.).
Galvanized sheet metal (lined as noted on drawings); factory or
shop fabricated.).
Internally lined galvanized sheet metal as described above for low
pressure supply; factory or shop fabricated.
Galvanized sheet metal (internally lined).
PVC coated ductwork; factory or shop fabricated.
General building exhaust.
Transfer ducts.
Sound elbows for R.A. grilles
Fume hood exhaust risers, mains and branch ducts including fume
hoods.
Dishwasher exhaust.
Kitchen grease exhaust.
Shower, locker room exhaust.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
316 stainless steel all welded construction
Concealed From View: Min 16 GA, carbon steel, all welded construction.
Exposed To View: Type 304 stainless steel, min. 18 GA all welded
construction, with welds ground smooth for a #4 finish.
Aluminum with silicone sealant.
Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage
during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
By providing end caps on all open sections, bagging small fittings, surface wrapping and shrink wrapping.
Storage: Store ductwork inside elevated from floor on pallets. At no time shall the inside surfaces be exposed, or stored
with open ends and protect from weather.
Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever
possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest
route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to
walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance
to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces,
conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not
encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and
enclosures.
Slope shower, locker room, and high moisture ductwork down to air device.
Penetrations: Where ducts pass through fire rated walls and do not contain fire or smoke dampers, protect with fire stop
material installed in accordance with its listing. Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same
gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct only. Where ducts penetrate non-fire
rated, mechanical, electrical or acoustically sensitive walls, provide 1/2" to 3/4" annular space between duct and wall, pack
annular space with mineral wood insulation, and caulk both sides with non-hardening acoustical sealant.
Ductwork Materials:
a. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A
527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Provide flat seam construction where standing seams are a hazard to the Owner's operation personnel.
b. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA); Unless otherwise
noted, provide 1" thick, 1-1/2 lb density, fiberglass duct liner meeting ASTM C1071 Type I, NFPA 90A and 90B and
224
c.
d.
e.
B.
TIMA (AHC-101) with minimum NRC (noise reduction coefficient) of 0.70 as tested per STM C 423 using an "A" mounting with minimum "K" factor of 0.25.
Flexible Ducts: Flexible air ducts shall be listed under UL-181 standards as Class I Air Duct Material and shall comply
with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Flexible air ducts shall have a flame spread rating 25 or less and a smokedeveloped rating not higher than 50. Minimum operating pressure rating shall be 6" W.C. through a temperature range
of -20o to 150oF; minimum working velocity rating shall be 4000 f.p.m. Contractor shall assume responsibility for supplying material approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
1. All insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed of a metalized ripstop reinforced laminate inner core, 1" thick, 3/4
lb. density fiberglass insulation with "C" factor of 0.23 or less and an outer jacket made exclusively of fire retardant reinforced aluminized material.
2. Non-insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed from dead soft aluminum sheet, spiral corrugated, or aluminum
construction over a steel spring helix.
Duct Take Off Fittings to Individual Air Inlets & Outlets: Provide conical spin-in fittings at flexible or round sheet metal
duct takeoffs. Where specifically shown on drawings, where the duct dimension does not allow for a conical spin-in, or
at Contractor's option, provide 45° inlet rectangular to round duct take off fittings, with factory applied gasket. Fittings
shall include butterfly type manual volume damper with regulator, and dual locking device. Dual locking device shall
consist of two shaft mounted wing nuts, one on each side of the damper. Wing nuts shall tighten on shafts to lock butterfly in place. Shafts shall be solid metal; rolled metal shafts are not acceptable.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Duct Liner:
CertainTeed Corp.
Manville Products Corp. (Schuller)
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
Flexible Ducts:
Flexmaster
Thermaflex
Duct Take Off Fittings
Hercules Industries
Flexmaster
Thermaflex
Ominair
Round Ductwork (low, medium, and high pressure):
Semco Mfg., Inc.
United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.
Sheet Metal Products Co.
Hercules Industries
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS:
1. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 2000 FPM and under 2" W.C. S.P. Differential):
a. For 12" in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to ducts. The frame and blades shall be
constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel with plated steel shaft mounted with synthetic bearings. Linkage shall be in-jamb
fixed type located outside the airstream made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates, with stainless steel pivots.
Damper panels shall not exceed 48" wide. Provide jack shafting when duct size required is greater than 48" wide.
Provide notched shaft end indicating damper position, locking quadrant to fix damper position and handle. Provide
stand off bracket for insulated ducts. For flat oval and round ductwork, provide type C housing.
b. For ducts less than 12" in height, frame shall be 18 ga. blade galvanized steel, steel axle with synthetic bearings locking quadrant handle and notched shaft end indicating damper position. Provide stand off bracket for insulated ducts.
2. Low Pressure Round Dampers (less than 1800 FPM and under 1" W.C. S.P. differential):
a. For low pressure spin-in fitting dampers serving individual returns/diffusers.
b. Dampers 4" diameter through 18" diameter shall be 20 ga. galvanized steel frame and blade, utilize multi-blade square
dampers with transitions for ducts over 18" diameter.
c. Axle shaft shall be plated steel with retainers mounted on synthetic bearings with notched end shaft indicating damper
position, locking quadrant and handle. Provide stand off brackets for insulated ducts.
3. Medium/High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 4000 FPM and under 6" W.C. (48" wide or less) S.P. or 8" W.C.
S.P. (36" wide or less)):
a. Dampers shall be opposed blade for volume control and parallel blade for isolation/shut-off service.
225
b.
4.
5.
Frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel with welded corners or 1/8" thick 6063-T5 alloy aluminum frame. Blades shall
be double skin galvanized steel with single-lock seam, or .081" thick 6060-T5 extruded aluminum, airfoil shape. Blade
edge seals shall be vinyl, silicone, or other approved synthetic and metallic compression seals at the jambs. Axles
shall be hexagonal or square plated steel mounted on bronze oilite or synthetic (ACETAL) bearings. Linkage shall be
in-jamb type located outside the airstream. Maximum damper size shall be 48" wide and 60" high. For isolation or
shut-off duty, damper leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/Ft2 at 4" W.C. S.P. differential. Provide extended shaft with
notched end indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle. Provide stand off brackets for insulated ducts.
Medium/High Pressure Round Dampers (less than 3000 FPM and under 4" W.C. S.P. differential):
a. Damper frame construction shall be as follows:
ROUND
Under 6" dia.
12 Gauge
6" to 18" dia
14 Gauge
Greenheck
Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
Nailor
Penn Ventilator Co.
Pottoroff
Ruskin
C. FIRE DAMPERS:
1. Fire Dampers: Provide dynamic rated type B or C fire dampers except as noted on drawings. Construct sleeve of galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish, gauge as required by the listing. All fire dampers shall be UL labeled.
Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165 deg. F unless otherwise indicated. See architectural drawings for the separations
and listings. Provide horizontal mounted fire damper with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional
features:
a. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain Type.
b. Blade Material: Galvanized steel.
c. Provide integral sleeve type G fire dampers for sidewall air devices terminating at fire rated walls. Ruskin DIBD20-G or
equivalent.
Greenheck
Nailor
Phillips Industries, Inc. Conaire Division
Ruskin
Pottoroff
D. SMOKE DAMPERS:
1. Rectangular Motor-Driven Smoke Dampers: Frame constructed of 16-ga. steel, type 304 stainless steel side seals, silicone
edge seals, bronze oilite or stainless steel sleeve bearings, airfoil shaped galvanized steel formed interlocking blades, with
factory mounted actuator motor, motor mounting bracket. Out of air stream plated steel linkage.
2. Round Motor-Driven Smoke Dampers 18" and Under: Frame constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel, 2 layers of galvanized steel butterfly blade equivalent to 14 gauge, silicone rubber seal sandwiched between blade layers. Stainless steel
sleeve bearings pressed into frame.
a. Electric Damper Actuators shall have microprocessor based motor controller providing:
1. Electronic cut off at full open so that no noise can be generated while holding open. Holding noise level shall be
inaudible.
2. Shall be incapable of burning out if stalled before full rotation is reached.
3. Housing shall be steel and gears shall be permanently lubricated.
4. The actuators shall be direct coupled and employ a steel toothed clamp for connecting to damper shafts. Aluminum clamps or set-screw attachment are not acceptable.
5. Actuator shall carry a manufacturer’s 5-year warranty and be manufactured under ISO 9001 quality control
6. Damper actuator shall fail open/close upon loss of power.
Greenheck
Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.
Nailor
226
Penn Ventilator Co.
Pottoroff
Ruskin
E.
COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS:
1. Rectangular Fire/Smoke Dampers: 16 gauge galvanized steel frame, type 304 stainless steel side seals, combination silicone/galvanized steel edge seals, bronze oilite or stainless steel sleeve bearings, airfoil shaped galvanized steel parallel
acting blades, square or horizontal plated steel axles, out of airstream in-jamb linkage with stainless steel pivots, factory
sleeve, caulked and attached to damper in accordance with UL fire damper requirements.
2. Round Fire/Smoke Dampers 18" Diameter and Smaller: 20 gauge galvanized steel frame/integral sleeve, 2 layer galvanized
steel butterfly blade equivalent to 14 gauge, silicone rubber seal sandwiched between blade layers, stainless steel sleeve
bearings pressed into frame, retaining plates in accordance with the UL listing.
F.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS:
1. Access Doors for Low Pressure Rectangular Duct: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide double
wall insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Exposed insulation adhered to door is not acceptable. Provide flush frames for
uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. All access doors shall have gasket and will be air tight.
Provide one side hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for
larger doors. Where a hinged door can not be fully opened a removable door may be used.
2. Access Doors for Medium and High Pressure Rectangular Duct: Insulated double wall round door and frame arranged for
"Spin-In" installation, with continuous gasket in frame for door. Leakage of less than .5 cfm at 6" W.G.
Kess
Greenheck
Flexmaster
Cesco-Advanced Air
Duro Dyne Corp.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
G. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
1. Provide flexible duct connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and
equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Shelf life shall be verified to not exceed six (6)
months. Any sign of cracking on interior or exterior shall be cause for replacement immediately.
2. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and equipment subject to
forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame with flexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided.
3. Use the following product types for each application accordingly:
a. Indoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric, double-coated with DuPont's NEOPRENE, noncombustible fabric, fire retardant coating with good resistance to abrasion and flexing. Fabric shall be 30 oz per square
yard, capable of operating at -10oF to 200oF, waterproof, air tight, 6 inches wide, complies with NFPA 90 and UL
Standard #214. Design Basis: "Ventglas" Model as manufactured by VentFabric, Inc.
b. Indoor Corrosive Air System: Heavy glass fabric coated with DuPont's teflon fluorocarbon resins, capable of operating
between temperatures of - 20oF and 500oF. Fabric shall be 14 oz per square yard, watertight, air tight, chemically resistant to most chemicals including but not limited to sulfuric acid, acetic acid, chlorine, dimethyl ether, xylene, hexane,
ozone, nitric acid, butyl acetate, ammonia gas and liquid, acetone, mercury, cyclohexane, methanol, 6 inches wide.
Design Basis: "Ventel" model as manufactured by VentFabrics, Inc.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
General Rubber Corp. (Process & Exhaust Only)
H. AIR HANDLING FANS
1. Extent of air handling equipment work required shall be indicated on drawings and schedule.
2. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
3. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
227
4.
5.
6.
7.
Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use with motors larger
than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide energy efficient motor.
Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" AFBMA L10 of 100,000 medium duty calculated
in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.
Warranty: Provide 2 year warranty on all fans.
Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.
I.
UTILITY SET FANS:
1. Belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
and accessories.
2. Housings: Fabricated from heavy-gauge steel with side sheets fastened to scroll sheets by means of welding or deep lock
seam.
3. Housings Discharge: Adjustable to 8 standard positions. Slip-joint duct connection.
4. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to
the shaft.
5. Blade Type: Backward-curved, die-formed.
6. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity-actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
7. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
8. Inlet Screens: Removable, heavy wire mesh.
9. Drain Connections: 3/4-inch, threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest point of housing.
10. Weather Hoods: Weather-resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive compartment.
Acme Engineering And Mfg. Corp.
Buffalo
Loren Cook Co.
New York Blower Co.
Twin City Fan and Blower Co.
Greenheck
J.
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATIORS:
1. Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, centrifugal consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
2. Housing: Heavy-gauge, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, hinged, aluminum base
with venturi inlet cone.
3. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains.
4. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
5. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:
6. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory-wired through an
internal aluminum conduit.
8. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2-inch mesh, 16-gauge, aluminum or brass wire.
9. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb base.
Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp.
Carnes Company, Inc.
Loren Cook Co.
Greenheck
Twin City
K.
HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS:
1. Hatch-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard single-leaf, hatch-type heat and smoke vents with integral insulated curbs and frame, with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, integral condensation gutter, and cap flashing.
Fabricate with insulated double-wall lid, continuous weathertight perimeter lid gaskets, and equip with automatic self-lifting
228
2.
L.
mechanisms, UL-listed fusible links rated at 165 deg F and corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including
hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and outside operation of lids.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company.
Nystrom, Inc.
ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation.
Wasco Products, Inc.
PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS:
1. Furnish and install roof curbs as scheduled for duct openings through the roof and for exhaust fan support. The curbs shall
be galvanized steel self-flashing type. If the curbs are to have sound attenuation qualities, they shall be not less than those
catalogued for the equipment specified.
Custon Curb, Inc.
Pate Co.
S & L Manufacturing Co.
ThyCurb Div.; Thybar Corp.
M. AIR TERMINAL UNITS
1. Types of air terminals include Central Air Terminals - Shutoff Single Duct/Reheat
2. Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or
exceed those indicated on schedule.
3. Air terminal units shall be low pressure drop, single duct throttling type pressure independent and suitable for use in medium
pressure variable volume air distribution systems.
4. Internal damper blade shall be extruded aluminum or 18 gauge steel with keyed fit shaft and nylon bushing. Damper shall
seal against gasketed stops maximum 2% leakage at 3.0" S.P. All mechanical parts shall be galvanized or non-ferrous. Alternate damper design as produced by the Trane Company as acceptable.
5. Hot water heating coils shall be designed for 200 psig maximum working pressure and 200oF maximum operating temperature. Coil shall be serpentine-type, constructed of 1/2" O.D. copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins; galvanized steel casing.
6. Provide label on each air terminal unit, indicating plan designation, unit size, cfm range and settings and calibration curve.
7. Provide a pressure independent pneumatic cross or ring-shaped flow sensor with velocity pressure pickup points for measuring inlet airflow. The sensor shall maintain control accuracy with the same size inlet duct in any configuration. Single
point hot wire anemometer or straight line pneumatic sensors are not acceptable. Provide gauge ports in flow sensor tubing.
8. Air terminals shall be selected so required dB sound levels are not exceeded at 1.5” w.g. inlet pressure. Both unit casing
radiated sound levels and discharge sound levels shall be considered in terminal unit selection.
9. Control devices shall be factory set and calibrated for operation with direct acting/reverse acting room thermostat.
10. Temperature Control contractor to furnish DDC controls including all actuators and controllers. Terminal unit controls shall
be factory mounted and wired.
Krueger
Envirotech
Metal-Aire
Nailor
Price
Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
Trane (The) Co.
N. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
1. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
a. Ceiling air diffusers.
b. Wall registers and grilles.
c. Louvers.
2. CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS: Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
229
3.
4.
5.
6.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw
and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
Price (displacement diffusers)
Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.
Carnes Co.; Div. of Wehr Corp.
Krueger; Div. of Philips Industries, Inc.
Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
Metal-Aire
Nailor
LOUVERS: Performance: Provide louvers that have a minimum of 60% free area, and a maximum pressure drop through
the free area of not more than 0.075" for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data. On inside face of exterior louvers. Provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.
Air Balance
Arrow United Industries, Inc.
Pottoroff
Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
Ruskin
O. NON-METAL DUCTWORK
1. Types of non-metal ductwork required for this project include Fabric Air Dispersion products.
2. Warranty: Manufacturer must provide a 5 Year Product Warranty for products supplied for the fabric portion of this system
as well as a Design and Performance Warranty.
3. Fabric Air Dispersion System:
a. DuraTex Fabric: Air diffusers shall be constructed of a coated woven fire retardant fabric complying with the following
physical characteristics:
b. Fabric Construction: 100% Polyester
c. Coating: Non-air permeable coating
d. Weight: 5.5 oz./yd2 per ASTM D3776
e. Fire Retardancy: Classified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with the flame spread/smoke developed requirements of NFPA 90-A and UL 2518.
4. Systems Fabrication Requirements:
a. Inlet connection to metal duct via fabric draw band with anchor patches as supplied by manufacturer. Anchor patches
to be secured to metal duct via. zip screw fastener – supplied by contractor.
b. System to include Adjustable Flow Devices to balance turbulence, airflow and distribution as needed. Flow restriction
device shall include ability to adjust the airflow resistance from 0.06 – 0.60 in w.g. static pressure.
c. Use fabric diffusers only for positive pressure air distribution components of the mechanical ventilation system.
d. Clean air handling unit and ductwork prior to the DuctSox system unit-by-unit as it is installed. Clean external surfaces
of foreign substance which may cause corrosive deterioration of facing.
e. If DuctSox systems become soiled during installation, they should be removed and cleaned following the manufacturers standard terms of laundry.
5. Manufacturer: DuctSox® Corporation
DIVISION 23 50 00
CENTERAL HEATING EQUIPMENT
A. BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of venting
system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures caused by expansion and contraction. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. SPECIAL GAS VENTS: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with
positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.
a. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least 1/2-inch airspace.
b. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel.
c. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel.
d. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Heat-Fab, Inc.
230
3.
B.
Metal-Fab, Inc.
Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.
cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall.
GREASE DUCTS: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1978 and rated for 500 deg F continuously, or 2000
deg F for 30 minutes; with positive or negative duct pressure and complying with NFPA 211.
a. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 2-inch annular space filled with high-temperature,
ceramic-fiber insulation.
b. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel where concealed. Stainless steel where exposed.
d. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.
Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co.
Van-Packer Company, Inc.
BOILERS
1. Each boiler shall be; UL Listed, CSD-1 approved, ASME coded and stamped, and incorporate a gas train designed in accordance with FM & IRI. Each boiler shall have an input of 3,000mbh with a gross output of 2,610 to 2,880mbh (dependent
upon return water temperature) when fired with natural gas. The boiler manufacturer must publish known part load value efficiencies; the thermal efficiency must increase as the firing rate decreases. Electrical service to each unit shall be as indicated on electrical plans. The boiler control panel shall be proprietary in design and incorporate the functions of temperature
control, combustion safeguard control, message annunciation, and fault diagnostic display, on individual field replaceable
circuit boards mounted within a single housing. Each boiler shall have a footprint of no more than 28” W, 64” L, and 79” H
with a UL Listing for zero side wall clearance. The boiler installed weight shall not exceed 2170 lbs. dry. The boiler shall
have an ASME approved relief valve setting.
2. Construction: Boiler modules shall be natural gas fired, condensing fire tube design with a modulating forced draft power
burner and positive pressure vent discharge.
3. Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner: The boiler burner shall be capable of a 15 to 1 turndown ratio of the firing rate without
loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burner shall produce <30ppm of NOx corrected to 3% excess
oxygen. The burner shall be metal fiber mesh covering a stainless steel body, with spark ignition and flame rectification. All
burner material exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no moving parts
within the burner itself. A modulating air/fuel valve shall meter the air and natural gas input. The modulating motor must be
linked to both the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The linkage shall not require any field adjustment. A variable frequency drive (VFD) controlled cast aluminum pre-mix blower with a nylon impeller shall be utilized to
ensure the optimum mixing of air & fuel between the air/fuel valve and the burner.
4. Pressure Vessel/Heat Exchanger: The boiler shall be capable of handling return water temperatures down to 40 F without
any failure due to thermal shock or fireside condensation. The heat exchangers shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 160 psig. The pressure vessels shall have a maximum water volume of 49 gallons. The boiler water
pressure drop shall not exceed 5.5 psig at 258 gpm. The boiler water connections shall be 4” flanged 150 lb. ANSI rated.
The pressure vessels are constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25” thick wall and 0.50 in. thick upper head. Inspection
openings in the pressure vessels shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel code. The boiler shall be
designed so that the thermal efficiency increases as the boiler firing rate decreases. The heat exchangers shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel fire tubes and tube sheets with a one-pass combustion gas flow design. The fire tubes shall
be 5/8” OD with no less than 0.065” wall thickness.
5. Exhaust Manifold: The exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant stainless steel with an 8“diameter flue connection.
The exhaust manifold shall have a gravity drain for the elimination of the condensation with collecting reservoir.
6. Boiler Controls: The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: “C-More” Control Panel, Power Box,
and Input/Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be Underwriters Laboratories Recognized.
a. The “C-More” control panel shall consist of 6 individual circuit boards utilizing state-of-the-art surface-mount technology, in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall be defined as follows: display board incorporating LED display to
read temperature, and a vacuum fluorescent display module for all message annunciation; CPU board which houses
all control functions; electric low water cutoff board with test and manual reset functions; power supply board; ignition
/stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control; and connector board. Each board shall be individually field replaceable. The combustion safeguard/flame monitoring system shall utilize spark ignition and a rectification type flame
sensor. The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote communications. The controls
shall annunciate boiler & sensor status and include extensive self-diagnostic capabilities that incorporate a minimum of
8 separate status messages and 34 separate fault messages.
b. The “C-More” control panel shall incorporate three self-governing features designed to enhance operation in modes
where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance faults due to over-temperature, improper external
231
signal or loss of external signal. These features are called: Setpoint High Limit, Setpoint Low Limit, and Failsafe Mode.
Setpoint High Limit allows for a selectable maximum boiler outlet temperature and acts as temperature limiting governor.
c. It is a PID function that automatically limits firing rate to maintain outlet temperature within a 0 to10 degree selectable
band from the desired maximum boiler outlet temperature. Setpoint Low Limit allows for a selectable minimum operating temperature. Failsafe Mode allows the boiler to switch its mode to operate from an internal setpoint if its external
control signal is lost, rather than shut off. This is a selectable mode; hence the control can be set to shut off the unit
upon loss of external signal if so desired.
d. The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for enhanced external system interface:
system start temperature feature; pump delay timer; auxiliary start delay timer; auxiliary temperature sensor; mA output
feature which allows for simple monitoring of either temperature setpoint, outlet temperature, or fire rate; remote interlock circuit; delayed interlock circuit; and fault relay for simple remote fault alarm.
e. Each boiler shall utilize an electric single seated combination safety shutoff valve/regulator with proof of closure switch
in its gas train and incorporate dual over-temperature protection with manual reset in accordance with ASME Section
IV and CSD-1.
f. Temperature Control Modes: The Benchmark boiler(s) shall operate in the control modes listed.
− Internal Setpoint
− Indoor/Outdoor Reset
− 4ma to 20ma Temperature Setpoint
− Network Temperature Setpoint
− 4ma to 20ma Direct Drive
− Network Direct Drive
− Boiler Management System II (BMS II)
− Boiler Management System (BMS) with Combination Control System (CCP)
The first six control modes refer to independent boiler settings, while the last two control modes refer to banks of boilers operated as a system by AERCO supplied BMS II or BMS and CCP in a combination system. The AERCO BMS II
shall be programmed to operate the entire bank of boilers in either of the first four control modes.
7. Controls Interoperability: The “C-More” control panel and the AERCO BMS II shall utilize the MODBUS open protocol to interface with third party Building Automation Systems (BAS). Controls interface with BACnet, Lonworks, and N2 shall utilize
an AERCO Communications Gateway to act as a MODBUS interface/translator between the BAS and either the RS-485
port of the “C-More” boiler control panel or the RS-232 port of the AERCO BMS II. The AERCO Communications Gateway
shall be comprised of a microprocessor based control utilizing the MODBUS protocol to communicate with the Boilers via
the RS-485. Non-volatile backup of all point mappings and programs shall be internally provided as standard. Connection
between Gateway and individual boilers or to the AERCO BMS II shall be “daisy chain” with shielded, twisted-pair, low voltage wiring for ease of installation.
8. Warranty: The pressure vessel/heat exchanger of the boiler shall carry a prorated 10-year warranty against failure due to
condensate corrosion, thermal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship. The six individual circuit boards of the “C-More”
control panel assembly shall carry a 2 year warranty against failure due to defective materials or workmanship. A Warranty
Certificate must be issued to the owner from the manufacturer and a copy of warranty must be submitted for engineer’s approval.
9. Manufacturer for Condensing Boilers: shall be Aerco, Viessmann, Hamilton –EVO, no other allowed
10. Services: After testing and inspection is complete, provide the services of an authorized factory service representative to
perform start-up and operation demonstration service.
a. Start-up: Perform services in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
b. Provide Combustion Test Record for each Boiler.
DIVISION 23 70 00
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. AIR HANDLING UNITS (OUTDOOR):
1. Unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans,
hot water coil, return fans, energy recovery wheels and unit controls.
2. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and
run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit.
3. The unit shall be able to withstand up to 1.5 times design static pressure, or 8-inch wc whichever is less, with no more than
0.005 inch deflection per inch of panel span.
4. The unit base design shall allow unit to rest on top of roof curb when field installed. Entire length and width under base shall
be sealed for weather tight seal. Provide full perimeter gasket to isolate unit from curb.
232
5.
Casing: All panels shall be double wall construction. Interior and exterior panels shall be constructed of galvanized steel
and a thermal break with no metal path from inside to outside of cabinet. Panel insulation system shall provide a minimum
R value of 12. Insulation shall conform to NFPA 90 requirements.
Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels and to access internal parts. If panels
are not removable, then manufacturer shall provide access sections with doors between all internal components to ensure
access and cleanability of the air handler.
Access doors shall be constructed with a double-wall of solid G90 galvanized steel interior panel with quarter turn handles
and full length stainless steel piano hinges. Gasketing around the full perimeter of the access door shall be used to prevent
air and water leakage. Provide sealed tempered glass view windows in doors accessing moving parts. Provide marine
lights in all sections. Preferred marine light shall be UL light wet location fluorescent light. Light shall be complete with bulb,
ballast, and junction box.
6. Fans Sections
a. Provide supply fan sections with backward curved single width, single inlet centrifugal plug fans designed and suitable
for class of service indicated on unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated width lubricating
oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit
comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet
design specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping.
b. Mount fans on isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans and motors
with rubber isolators. Install flexible canvas ducts between fan and casings to ensure complete isolation. Flexible canvas ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A.
c. Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged doors on drive side for inspection and maintenance of internal
components.
d. Fan sections with plug fans shall have door switches for fan shut-off. Design access door guards for removal from outside of unit. On plug fan sections with vertical down discharge a safety grate shall cover entire down discharge opening to prevent service personnel from falling into supply air ductwork.
e. For fan sections controlled by variable frequency drives, balance at speeds between 25% and 100% of design RPM.
7. Motors and Drives: Design engineer shall demonstrate efforts to provide direct drive fans. If belt drive fans are used, the fan
speed should be 1700rpm or less with emphasis on lower fan speeds for bearing life.
a. Factory install all motors on slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension.
b. Fan motors shall be heavy duty, premium efficiency TEFC, operable at 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3-phase.
c. Variable Frequency Drives shall be factory installed and wired. Refer to Section 230513 for listing of acceptable manufacturers of Variable Frequency Drives.
8. Condenser fans: Propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.
9. Coils: Designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube. Coils
shall have interlaced circuitry. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical
expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a galvanized steel
casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end connections accessible for service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the roof or through the piping enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated.
a. Water Heating Coils: Pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. Coils shall have metering orifices and a supply
header to ensure distribution of hot water to each tube. Coils shall be proof (300 psig) and leak (200 psig) tested with
air pressure under water. Continuous tube type, and proof (300 psig) and leak (200 psig) tested with air pressure under water. Provide cleanable tube coils with straight tubes. Provide vent and drain taps for all coil headers.
b. Refrigerant Cooling Coils: Have an equalizing type vertical distributor to ensure each coil circuit receives the same
amount of refrigerant. Coils shall be proof (450 psig) and leak (300 psig) tested with air pressure under water, then
cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen.
10. Compressors: Scroll type, serviceable, semi-hermetic, or hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, and crankcase heaters which de-energize during compressor operation. Units shall also have: Unit shall include a variable capacity
scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of the rated capacity.
11. Energy Recovery: Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall
be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for
service and removal from the cabinet.
a. The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated cassette frame complete with seals,
drive motor and drive belt. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in a parallel plate
geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency rations. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and selfsupporting matrix. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate
geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively cap233
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
tured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and selfsupporting matrix.
b. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub,
spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments
in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings
shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and
the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks.
c. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. Drive belts
of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.
d. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire
safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in
the cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal performance shall be certified by the
manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI
Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the ARI Certified
Product.
e. Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty.
Controls: DX system controls shall be provided by the manufacturer. Factory Installed Controller for the remaining controls
shall be supplied by Temperature Controls Contractor.
Drain Pan Construction: Provide insulated drain pans constructed of 304 stainless. Drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes;
cross break interior pans and pitch toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage. Units with cooling
coils shall have drain pans under complete cooling coil section. All drain pan connections will be to the side of the unit to
enable proper trapping. Units without 2-way sloped drain pans shall coat drain pans with anti-mircrobial treatment.
Filters: Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings. Filter sections shall
have filter guides and full height, double-wall, hinged doors for filter removal and shall be configured for 2” pre-filters and 2”
final filters. Filter sections shall flange to other unit components. Provide filter blockoffs as required to prevent air bypass
around filters.
Dampers: Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade type as below:
a. Outdoor and/or return air mixing dampers and face and bypass (F & BP) dampers shall be combination parallel/opposed blade, approximately 57% OB, arranged to direct air streams towards each other. Design Basis: Ruskin
CD-403 or CD-46.
b. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type.
c. Two-position shutoff dampers may be parallel or opposed blade type with blade and side seals.
d. Damper blades shall not exceed 8 inches in width or 48 inches in length. Blades are to be suitable for medium velocity
performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.
e. Damper shaft bearings shall be oil impregnated bronze or stainless steel.
f. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with replaceable butyl rubber or neoprene seals.
Side seals shall be spring loaded stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 10 cfm
per square foot at 4 inches w.c. differential pressure. Pressure drop shall not exceed 0.04 inch w.c. at a wide-open
face velocity of 1,500 fpm. The dampers shall have airfoil type blades.
g. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48” x 60”. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per section.
h. Dampers shall have exposed linkages. Dampers with exposed gear linkages are not acceptable.
Access Sections: Access for inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fan section shall be provided. The unit
shall be installed for proper access. Procedures for proper access, inspection and cleaning of the unit shall be included in
the maintenance manual. Access sections shall have double wall, hinged doors on one side of sections.
a. To facilitate inspection of internal components, provide sealed glass view windows on access doors accessing moving
parts.
b. Provide marine lights inside access sections. Construct marine lights of sealed glass fixtures with wire guards to deep
electrical sockets dry and protect fixtures from damage.
c. Electrical: Units shall have a 115 VAC convenience outlet, separately fused, for unit service. Unit power connection
shall be either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter. Provide UL listed disconnect switch.
Air Measuring Stations: Provide solid state electronic air measurement system (EAMS) as specified on schedule and drawings. Contractor is responsible for mounting EAMS in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. EAMS station shall be capable of functioning accurately between -20 degrees F and +158 degrees F and have the ability to transmit a
2-10 VDC linear signal representative of velocity. The measurement system shall be factory calibrated with a total accuracy
of +/- 5% of actual flow down to 15% of the nominal flow. Total EAMS accuracy shall include and depend upon: temperature, compensation, humidity, repeatability, turbulence and placement. Acceptable manufacturer is Ebtron or approved
equal.
234
18. Roof Curb: Provide a roof curb designed to support the unit on the roof. The curb shall compensate for any structural roof
slope and shall accommodate any sloped insulation. The curb shall be a minimum of 12” above the finished roof at any
point.
19. Warranty: All parts warranty for one year from date of start-up shall be provided at no additional cost.
20. Manufacturer (AHU): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air handling units of one of the following:
Aaon
Energy Labs
Engineered Air
Dechamps
Trane (upon District review of proposed unit)
B.
INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS:
1. Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Support: Install roof-mounted air handling units on roof curb. Anchor unit to curb with removable fasteners.
3. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.
C. EXTRA STOCK:
1. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air handling unit. Install new filters at completion of air handling system
work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.
2. Provide one spare set of belts for each belt-driven air handling unit, obtain receipt from Owner that belts have been received.
D. TRAINING:
1. Schedule a minimum of 4 hours of training with Owner. The manufacturers representative, and the Division 23 contractor
shall be present. The training shall be coordinated by the Division 23 contractor and the Owner in conjunction with the other
mechanical equipment on the project.
2. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on start-up and shut-down procedures, troubleshooting procedures, and servicing
and preventative maintenance schedules and procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the contents of the Operating and Maintenance Data specified in Division 1 and Section 23.
3. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/ Engineer with at least 7 days prior notice.
DIVISION 23 80 00
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. TERMINAL UNITS
1. Locate baseboard radiation on outside walls as indicated, run cover continuous wall-to-wall unless otherwise indicated. Install end caps where units butt against walls. Install access panels centered in front of each shutoff valve, balancing cock,
or temperature control valve.
2. BASEBOARD RADIATION (finned tube): Provide hot water baseboard radiation of lengths, wall to wall enclosure.
a. Architectural radiator: Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths and in locations as indicated and of capacities,
style and having accessories as scheduled. The wall hung heating panel radiation shall be of one-piece all welded
steel construction, consisting of flattened water tubes welded to headers at each end. The radiator shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09” minimum) all welded perforated top grille (for curved radiators the grille is omitted). RF
models to have steel corrugated fins welded to the rear side of the water tubes to increase the convective output of the
unit.
b. The panel radiation shall be capable of being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking or
strapping. Appropriate wall mounting brackets or optional floor post mounting shall be provided with the radiation.
c. Finishes: The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder coat finish. The radiation is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002”-0.003”).
d. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Baseboard Radiation:
Slant/Fin Corp.
Vulcan
Sterling Radiator; Div. of Reed National Corp.
Runtal (Architectural Radiation)
Rittling (Architectural Radiation)
235
3.
4.
5.
6.
UNIT HEATERS: Provide Horizontal Unit Heaters constructed of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with
standard color baked enamel finish casing. Provide motor- mounted panel, minimum of 18-ga steel. Fabricate casing to
enclose coil, louvers, and fan blades. Provide louvers for 4-way air diffusion. Fans shall be aluminum, and factory-balance.
Provide fan inlet orifice, smooth, and drawn into casing back panel. Coils shall be constructed of plate-type aluminum fins,
mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Design coil for use in steam/hot water applications. Provide totally enclosed motors,
with built-in overload protection, having electrical characteristics as scheduled.
Airtherm Mfg. Co.
Vulcan
McQuay Inc.
Modine Mfg. Co.
Trane
CABINET UNIT HEATERS: Provide hot water cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings,
motor, and insulation.
a. Cabinet: 16-ga removable front panel, 18-ga top and side panels. Insulate front panel over entire coil section. Provide
access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer.
Custom color as selected by Architect in baked enamel finish.
b. Water Coils: Construct of 5/8" seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins. Design for
300 psi and leak test at 300 psi under water. Provide same end connections for supply and return.
c. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglassreinforced thermo-plastic material. Construct fan scrolls of galvanized steel.
d. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal over-load protection, and motor cords for plug-in to junction
box in unit.
e. Filters: Provide 1" thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.
f. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Airtherm Mfg. Co.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
McQuay Inc.
Trane
Vulcan
FAN-COIL UNITS: Provide fan-coil units included are basic unit chassis, coils, fanboard, drain pan assembly, fans, housing, motor, filter, and insulation.
a. Chassis: Construct chassis of galvanized steel with flanged edges.
b. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.
c. Cabinet: Construct of 18-ga steel removable panels, 16-ga front. Provide insulation over entire coil section. Clean
cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with standard factory color selected baked enamel finish.
d. Heating Coils: Construct of 1/2" seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins. Design
for 250 psi working pressure.
e. Drain Pans: Construct of galvanized steel. Insulate with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Provide drain connection.
f. Fans: Provide centrifugal forward curved double width wheels of reinforced fiberglass, in galvanized steel fan scrolls.
g. Motors: Provide motors with integral thermal overload protection. Run test motors at factory in assembled unit prior to
shipping. Provide quickly detachable motor cords.
h. Filters: Provide 1" thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.
i. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Airtherm Mfg. Co.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
McQuay Inc.
Trane
York; Div. of York International
International Fan Coil
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS: Provide Vertical Unit Heaters constructed of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished
with standard color baked enamel finish casing. Design casing to enclose fan, motor, and coil, design fan orifice formed into
discharge panel.
a. Fans: Construct of aluminum and factory-balance. Design so motor and fan assembly is removable through fan outlet
panel.
236
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.
Elements: Unit shall include electric resistance element with manual-reset thermal overload protection, unit mounted
thermostat.
Motors: Provide totally enclosed motors, with built-in overload protection, having electrical characteristics as scheduled.
Surface enclosure: surface mounting plate designed for rough-in on frame ceiling construction. Louvered surface enclosure shall be contoured aluminum extrusion and 20 gauge sheet metal combination with rounded corners; baked
enamel finish.
Q Mark
Singer
Trane
Brasch
Indeeco
Berko
Markel
Modine
Raywall
ELECTRIC CONVECTORS: Provide electric convectors having cabinet constructed of 12-ga steel front and top panels, 12ga side panels, and 14-ga back panels. Phosphatize and finish with standard color, baked enamel finish on enclosure. Secure fronts in place with spanner head tamper resistant screws as provided by heater manufacturer. Heating element shall
have full length auto-reset thermal overload disconnect switch, line voltage safety disconnect switch, internal, unit mounted
thermostat.
Q Mark
Singer
Trane
Berko
Markel
Raywall
237
238
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
239
240
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
DIVISION 25 00 00
A.
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (OVERVIEW)
BASIC REQUIREMENTS
1. SYSTEMS INTEGRATION: The BAS shall be connected to the lighting control system digital relay panels by Lonworks or
Bacnet communication (contractors shall determine which protocol is most advantageous). The BAS shall contain all of the
lighting control programming for scheduling, daylight harvesting, and local user overrides. The BAS vendor shall create all
of the lighting control graphics and the program and the graphics shall reside within the BAS control system. The intent is
that all lighting control programming shall reside within the BAS and be programmed by the BAS vendor, and the lighting
control panels shall not have any programming within them.
2.
INTEGRATION OF LIGHTING CONTROLS: The lighting controls shall be a design based around centralized lighting control
panels. Panels can be separate lighting contactor panels or controllable breakers.
a.
Basis of Design: shall be Douglas Lighting Controls, no substitutions unless specifically approved by the SVVSD.
b.
Control Panels: shall be Lonworks or Bacnet compatible and the lighting vendor shall coordinate the appropriate protocol with the controls vendor.
c.
Design Criteria: The lighting controls design shall be for line voltage switching throughout the general spaces, with select low-voltage override switches for custodial and facilities staff use only.
1. Lighting circuiting shall be designed so that perimeter light fixtures or lamps in daylit spaces can be controlled
based on 2 to 4 building level roof mounted photocells (Licor LI-210 with 4-20ma converter), and lamps will be disabled when adequate daylighting is available.
2. Low voltage override switches shall only be used for occupant 1 hour override for a given area, and for facility staff
to override parking lot lights, building lights, photocell control and for building area all ON for lamp testing purposes.
Low voltage override switches are to be provided by the BAS vendor and are to be Bacnet or Lonworks switches
and wired into the lighting and BAS network. Switch status shall be monitored by the BAS system and override
signals sent to the lighting control contactors via the BAS.
241
242
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
243
244
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 26 01 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
A. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Before any work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; Coordination drawings for the work with
other building systems are a requirement.
2. Ductwork and piping shall not be installed above electrical panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and transformers.
3. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give
particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.
4. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment in a manner to
allow maximum headroom possible.
5. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be
connected.
6. All material used on this project shall be UL listed and labeled and be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as
suitable for the use intended.
7. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting and removal with minimum of interference with other installations.
B.
DESIGN CRITERIA:
1. All light fixtures shall be located in a manner for accessibility to maintenance staff without means of rental equipment. Architect is required to review all locations for fixtures with District personal prior to completing bidding documents.
2. Auditorium fixtures must be accessible by catwalk or from floor with approval by District.
3. Install equipment and materials to provide required code clearances and access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate
the final location with piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades to insure proper access for all trades. Coordinate locations of concealed equipment, disconnects, and boxes with access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of
parts, fuses, lamps, etc. that require replacement or servicing. Disconnect will be between 4’-6’ above the roof.
4. Extend all conduits so that junction and pull boxes are in accessible locations.
5. Provide access panel or doors where equipment or boxes are concealed behind finished surfaces.
C. DISTRICT SPECIFIC DESIGN CRITERIA
1. Provide an additional 30A spare circuit (3-5 wire) in all HUB rooms.
2. Provide surge protection for all 20A outlets for all HUB room receptacles.
3. Backboard lift motor switches shall be 3 position momentary toggles in lockable box; no keyed switches allowed.
4. Provide pull string (Tru-tape) in all empty conduits.
5. All rigid underground conduit including ells will be taped or PVC coated.
6. Provide 30” min. depth below finish grade for all underground conduits.
D. PORTABLE / MODULAR CLASSROOM REQUIREMENTS
1. Electrical feed to future potable locations shall be engineered such that if all voltage drops to problematic need shall be
served by a 480V switch gear to feed transformer at portables. Conduits will be stubbed up to the switch gears as to safely
pull fee wires without shutting down poser to the switch gear.
2. Provide 3’ separation between electrical and low voltage conduit stubs.
3. Provide 6’x10”x10” gutter for Electrical
4. Provide 6’x10”x10” gutter for Communications
5. Provide 3” conduit for fire alarm, fiber and data.
6. Provide 3” ridged 90 degree sweeps only; no PVC 90’s.
7. Provide expansion joint on all PVC risers.
8. All racks to be welded or bolted on ridged conduit and uni-strut frame.
E.
REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES:
1. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection
for each service.
F.
PERMITS AND FEES:
1. Contractor shall pay all fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities.
2. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the work.
245
G. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS:
1. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare 11”x17” or 24”x36” drawings to an accurate
scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and
maintaining equipment including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
a. Electric equipment room layouts
b. Mechanical equipment room layouts
2. Prepare coordination drawings for specific equipment installations, including, but not limited to the following:
a. Generators and automatic transfer switches
b. Pad mounted and/or dry type transformers
c. Switchboards and panelboards
d. Equipment connections
e. Control panels
f. Circuit and motor disconnects
g. Feeder conduits
3. Wiring Diagrams: Provide wiring diagrams indicating field installed electrical power and control wiring and cabling layouts,
overcurrent protective devices, equipment, and equipment connections.
H. EQUIPMENT HOUSEKEEPING PADS:
1. Provide 4" concrete housekeeping pad for all floor mounted equipment including, but not limited to: switchboards, floor
mounted distribution panelboards, floor mounted branch panelboards, and floor mounted dry type transformers.
I.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES:
1. Light, Heat, Power, Etc. - Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall be as identified in
Division 01.
2. If AC power systems or their backup systems serving telecommunications, computer equipment, or their associated HVAC
equipment and controls are taken out of service, for any reason, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary
systems during the period when the AC power systems or their backup systems are out of service. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing temporary power to all loads being interrupted.
J.
WARRANTIES:
1. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders,
tabulated and indexed for easy reference.
2. Provide complete warranty information for each item. Information to include product or equipment description, date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures
for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
DIVISION 26 05 00
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. SUMMARY:
1. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control, and related systems rated 600 volts
and less.
B.
WIRES AND CABLES:
1. Provide solid conductors for power, control, and lighting circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for 8
AWG and larger. Provide copper for all wires and cables.
2. Provide XHHW type conductors in all exterior underground applications.
3. Metal Clad Cable - Type MC: Sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG, copper conductors with 600 volt thermoplastic insulation rated 90 degrees C, steel OR aluminum interlocked metal type covering.
4. Conductors feeding exterior walkway and parking lot lights shall be stranded.
C. CONNECTORS:
1. Provide UL-type factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for
applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperatures equal to or greater than those of the wires upon
which used.
246
2.
3.
Provide long barrel 2-hole compression lugs for all power feeder, neutral, and grounding connections. (Including phase,
neutral and
Provide connectors that are designed to accept stranded conductors where stranded conductors are used.
D. PRODUCTS
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following (for each type of wire, cable, and connector):
a. Wire and Cable:
1. American Insulated Wire
2. Anaconda-Ericsson Inc; Wire and Cable Div.
3. Belden Div; Cooper Industries.
4. Brand-Rex Div; Pyle National Co.
5. General Cable Corporation.
6. Hitemp Wires, Inc.
7. Phelps Dodge Cable and Wire Co.
8. Rome Cable Corp.
9. Southwire Company
10. Okonite
11. Superior Essex:
b. Connectors:
1. O-Z/Gedney Co.
2. AMP, Inc.
3. Burndy Corporation.
4. Ideal Industries, Inc.
5. 3M Company
6. Thomas and Betts Corp.
E.
INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES:
1. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and
NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
2. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or
raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.
3. Keep conductor splices to minimum. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. No splices are allowed in feeder, control or
fire alarm wiring. Connect unspliced wire to numbered terminal strips at each end.
4. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being
spliced.
5. Support cables above accessible ceilings, do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring clips and hanger rods independent from
the ceiling suspension system to support cables from structure.
6. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10 AWG cabled to individual circuits. Make terminations
so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.
7. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and larger. For 10 AWG
and smaller, use insulated screw on type spring wire connectors with plastic caps, push on type are not acceptable.
8. Use copper compression connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 1/0 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors
and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of the conductor.
9. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
10. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours,
where possible.
11. Make all ground, neutral and line connections to receptacle and wiring device terminals as recommended by manufacturer.
Provide ground jumper from outlet box to individual ground terminal of devices.
12. Branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds 100 feet for 120 volt circuits or 175 feet for 277 volt circuit
shall be #10 or larger, as required to comply with the National Electrical Code.
13. Where conduit is not required for low voltage cable, plenum rated cable shall be provided in ceiling, floor or other air plenum
spaces.
14. Tap-cons shall be.25” or larger; no plastic anchors shall be allowed.
247
DIVISION 26 05 10
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY:
1. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for
protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented
in other sections of these Specifications.
B.
GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS:
1. Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in
excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.
2. Conductor Materials: Copper.
C. WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS:
1. Conform to NEC, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.
a. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated.
b. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable.
D. MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS:
1. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.
2. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 gage bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
3. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated.
E.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS:
1. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.
2. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.
3. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.
F.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES:
1. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to
core.
a. Size: 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
G. MANUFACTURERS:
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Burndy Corporation
b. Cadweld Div.; Erico Products Inc.
c. Ideal Industries
d. OZ Gedney Div.
e. Thermoweld
f. Thomas and Betts Corp.
g. A.B. Chance Co.
H. APPLICATION:
1. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the following in addition to those locations where required by Code:
a. Feeders and branch circuits: Provide individual grounding and neutral conductors for each isolated ground receptacle.
When individual or groups of isolated ground receptacles are on dedicated circuits, individual ground and neutral conductors for each circuit is acceptable.
a. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
b. Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices
operating at 120-V and above including air cleaners and heaters. Bond the conductor to each such unit.
c. Water Heater, Heat Tracing, and Anti-Frost Heater Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor to
each electric water heater, heat tracing, and surface anti-frost heating cable. Bond this conductor to heater units, piping, and connected equipment and components.
d. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded copper
248
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, and communication systems, provide a #6 AWG minimum green
insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or central equipment location.
Electrical Room Ground Bus: Size, location, and arrangement as indicated. Space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6
inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated.
Ground Rods: Locate a minimum of two-rod lengths from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Connect bare-cable
ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections
without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final
grade except as otherwise indicated.
Metallic Water Service Pipe: Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water service pipes by means of ground
clamps. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fitting. Do
not install a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings. Provide grounded bushing at conduit ends and bond the ground
conductor conduit to the ground bars at each end.
UFER Ground: Fabricate grounding electrode conductor by installing lengthwise in form for foundation or footings. Install so
conductor is within 2 inches of the bottom of the concrete. Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding
grid, grounding electrode, or ground bar.
Underground distribution System Grounding: For Pad Mounted Gear, install a ¾ inch by 10 feet. driven ground rod inside
the cable access blockout of the pad and set the rod depth such that 4 inches will extend above the finished pad. Where
necessary, install ground rod before the equipment is placed. Protect ground rods passing through concrete with a double
wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below the concrete.
DIVISION 26 05 20
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY:
1. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.
B.
MANUFACTURERS:
a. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit
2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Unistrut Diversified Products
b. Conduit Sealing Bushings:
1. O-Z/Gedney
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Killark Electric Mfg. Co.
5. Madison Equipment Co.
6. Raco, Inc.
7. Spring City Electrical Mgf. Co.
8. Thomas & Betts Corp.
C. COATINGS:
1. Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be
hot-dip galvanized.
D. FIRE SEALS:
1. Firestopping material shall be asbestos free, 100 percent intumescent, have code approval under BOCA, ICBO, SSBC,
NFPA 101, NFPA 70, and be capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame and gases in compliance with the following requirements. Flame Spread: 25 or less, ASTM E84. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire seals of
the following:
a. 3M Company
b. Tremco
249
2.
Fire Resistance and Hose Stream Tests: Firestopping materials shall be rated "F" and "T" in accordance with ASTM E 814
or UL 1479. Rating periods shall conform to the following:
a. (F) 3 (T) 3 Time-rated floor or wall assemblies.
b. (F) 3 (T) 3 Openings between floor slabs and curtain wall.
DIVISION 26 05 20
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY:
1. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Provide complete conduit systems for all conductors unless
otherwise specified. Copper wire shall be with conduit only, no UF or Direct-burial ALV allowed.
2. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following:
a. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
b. Flexible metal conduit.
c. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
d. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
e. Non-metallic Conduit and Ducts.
f. Rigid metal conduit (RGC).
g. Wireways.
B.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING:
1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGC):
a. Conduit: Rigid steel, zinc-coated inside and outside, threaded ends.
b. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.
c. All underground conduit will be taped or PVC-coated to prevent corrosion.
d. Manufacturers:
1. Allied
2. Wheatland
3. Triangle
4. Western Tube & Conduit
2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):
a. Conduit: Rigid intermediate grade galvanized inside and outside, threaded ends.
b. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.
c. Manufacturers:
1. Allied
2. Triangle
3.
PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:
a. Conduit: Rigid steel zinc-coated with external coating of PVC.
b. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel with external PVC coating, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.
c. Manufacturers:
1. Rob Roy
2. Perma Cote
3. OCAL
4.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
a. Conduit: Galvanized steel tubing.
b. Fittings: Steel compression fittings for rain-tight and concrete-tight applications. Steel set-screw for all other connections. Set-screw quick fit type for 2-1/2 inches and larger may be used. Bushings shall be threaded and have nylon insulated throat or nylon bushing.
c. Manufacturers:
1. Allied
2. Republic
3. Triangle
4. LTV
5.
Rigid Aluminum Conduit:
250
a.
Not allowed unless otherwise noted.
6.
Flexible Metal Conduit:
a. Continuous spiral wound, interlocked, zinc-coated steel, approved for grounding.
b. Use of flexible metal conduit shall be held to a maximum of 6’-0” lengths. Other uses shall be specifically approved by
the Owner.
c. Fittings: Cadmium plated, malleable iron. Straight connector shall be one-piece body, female end with clamp and deep
slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and threaded male end provided with a locknut. Angle connectors shall be
two piece body with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing
conduit, and threaded male end provided with a locknut. All fittings shall be terminated with threaded bushings having
nylon insulated throats.
d. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon
2. MPF
3. Can-Tex
4. PW
7.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
a. Conduit: Continuous spiral wound, interlocked zinc-coated steel with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket, approved for
grounding.
b. Fittings: Die-cast with nylon insulated throat or nylon bushings.
c. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon
2. MPF
3. Can-Tex
4. PW
C. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:
1. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC):
a. Conduit: Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 90°C for direct burial or concrete encasement.
b. Fittings: Mate and match conduit type and material. Cement as recommended by manufacturer.
D. CONDUIT BODIES:
1. Types, shapes and sizes, as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.
2. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use malleable iron conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways and
in hazardous locations.
3. Nonmetallic Conduit: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies.
4. Manufacturers:
a. O/Z Gedney
b. Killark
c. Regal
d. Appleton
e. Crouse Hinds
E.
WIREWAYS:
1. Provide electrical wireways of types, grades, sizes, and number of channels for each type of service as indicated. Provide
complete assembly of raceway including, but not limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps,
2. and other components and accessories as required for complete system.
3. Lay-In Wireways: Construct lay-in wireways with hinged covers in accordance with UL 870 with components UL listed. Construct units to be capable of sealing cover in closed position with sealing wire. Provide wireways with knockouts.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Square D. Co.
b. Circle AW Products
c. Erickson Electric Equipment Co.
d. Hoffman Engineering Co.
e. Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
251
F.
CONDUIT SIZES:
1. Conduit sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. If the conduit size is not given on the drawings, the conduit shall be sized
in accordance with NEC based on the number of conductors enclosed plus a parity sized equipment ground conductor and
be subject to the following minimum sizes:
a. Rigid, Intermediate, and EMT Conduit: 3/4 inch for all runs except lighting switch legs, 277 volt lighting branch circuits,
temperature control and fire alarm which may be 1/2inch.
b. Flexible and Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: 1/2inch for all runs.
c. MC Cable: 3/8 inch to undercounter luminaires, 1/2inch for all other runs.
d. Underground or Concrete Encased Nonmetallic Conduit: 3/4inch for all runs.
2. Conduits used for home runs shall contain only the conductors for the circuits indicated on the drawings. Combining multiple
home runs into a single conduit will not be permitted.
DIVISION 26 05 40
CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY:
1. This section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this Section include:
a. Outlet and device boxes.
b. Pull and junction boxes.
c. Floor boxes and service fittings.
d. Cabinets.
e. Hinged door enclosures.
B.
CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS:
1. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations.
2. Sheet Steel: Flat-rolled, code-gage, galvanized steel.
3. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items.
4. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.
5. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures, and Covers; Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise specified.
6. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel. Emergency system cabinets and boxes shall be red.
7. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs,
bushings and box connecters.
8. No plastic underground rated electrical J-boxes, provide concrete only.
C. METAL OUTLET, DEVICE, AND SMALL WIRING BOXES:
1. Malleable or Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and accessories suitable
for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs.
2. Steel Floor Boxes: Sheet steel, concrete tight, fully adjustable, with stamped knockouts, adjusting rings, and brass floor
plates. Where indicated, provide multi-section boxes with concealed individual section covers under a common flush floor
plate. Provide for power, data, and communication outlets as indicated on the drawings.
3. Service Fittings for Floor Outlet Boxes: Surface mounted horizontal, cast aluminum type 3-inches high, suitable for finished
spaces and finished in satin aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. Provide duplex receptacle or 1-inch bushed opening
for telephone or other communications service as indicated. Equip fitting for attaching flat to floor box cover.
4. Manufacturers - Floor Boxes:
a. American Electric.
b. Butler Mfg. Co.
c. Cooper Industries, Inc.
d. Raco, Inc.
e. Thomas & Betts Corp.
D. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
1. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural
steel racing.
E.
CABINETS:
1. Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes."
252
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construction: Sheet steel, NEMA 1 class except as otherwise indicated. Cabinet shall consist of a box and a front consisting
of a one piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the
frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24 inches apart, to hold
fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24 inches apart and not
over 6 inches from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4 inch larger than the box all
around. For surface mounted cabinets make front same height and width as box.
Double doors for cabinets wider than 24 inches. Telephone cabinets wider than 48 inches may have sliding or removable
doors.
Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed alike. Locks may be
omitted on signal, power, and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanical-electrical rooms. Locks shall be
of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking.
Manufacturers - Cabinets:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
c. Electric Panelboard, Inc.
d. Parker Electrical Mfg. Co.
e. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.
f. Square D Co.
g. Circle AW
DIVISION 26 05 50
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY:
1. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.
B.
GENERAL:
1. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, adapted to equipment connection installation. Tandem circuit
breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common trip.
2. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor. Contacts shall be NEMA rated, 75oC.
3. Overload relays shall be ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of the specific motor to which connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle and power factor correction supplied with the motor.
C. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS:
1. Manual starters shall be flush-mounting type except where conduits are run exposed or as otherwise noted. Manual starters
shall be complete with properly sized overload protection and neon pilot light. Manual starters shall be Square D Class 2510
or Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 with stainless steel plates.
2. Motor starter shall have a spare set of auxiliary N.O. and N.C. contacts supplied with starter.
3. Heater units in all manual motor starters shall be sized for approximately 115 percent of full load motor current. Check and
coordinate all thermal protective devices with the equipment they protect.
D. CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
1. Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features, ratings, and enclosures as indicated. All
equipment with maximum fuse size listed in nameplate shall have fusible disconnect switch provided. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure. For outdoor switches and switches indicated as weatherproof, provide NEMA 3R enclosures with raintight hubs.
For motor and motor starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.
2. Fusible Switches: Heavy duty switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings indicated. Where current limiting fuses are
indicated, provide switches with non-interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses. All disconnect
switches shall be fusible unless otherwise noted. Provide UL type "HD" 100 percent duty rated switches.
3. Provide UL type "HD" 100 percent duty rated switches.
4. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide circuit and motor disconnects by one of the following:
a. Square D Company
b. Cutler-Hammer Inc.
c. General Electric Co.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. ITE
253
E.
AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES:
1. Pushbutton Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type. HANDOFF- AUTOMATIC (H-O-A) switches shall
be provided on all magnetic starters. Provide magnetic two-speed starters with a HIGH-LOW selector with H-O-A switch
wired to allow manual speed selection in HAND position and remote speed selection in AUTO.
a. Stop and Lockout Pushbutton Station: Momentary-break pushbutton station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so a
padlock can be used to lock the pushbutton in the depressed position with the control circuit open.
b. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays as required to coordinate with Division 23 Controls Section.
c. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours. Provide on all magnetic starters for motors.
d. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Frequency Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2 inch minimum size with 90 degree or 120 degree
scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off position.
e. Current Sensors: Rated to suit application.
f. Phase-Failure Relay: Provide relay for each motor 2 HP and larger. Relay shall have solid-state sensing circuit with
isolated contacts for hard-wired connection to socket. Provide matching pin type relay and hold down clamps. Relay
shall be arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of
supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay, and adjustable undervoltage setting.
F.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULES:
1. Mechanical Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, it is suggested that all equipment motors and control shall be furnished,
set in place, and wired in accordance with the schedule contained herein. The exact furnishing and installation of the
equipment is left to the Contractors involved. Contractor should note that the intent of this schedule is to have the Contractor
responsible for coordinating all wiring as outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the Division 23 or Division 26
drawings and specifications.
1.
Mechanical Equipment Motors
2.
Special Equipment (i.e., elevators, etc.)
Motors
Magnetic Motor Starters
Disconnect Switches
Thermal OL Switches
Manual Operating Switches
ITEM
3.
FURNISHED BY
SET BY
CONTROL WIRING
M
M
--
G
G
E
G
E*
E
----
M
E*
M
Motor Starters, combination motor starter/
disconnect and Variable Frequency Drives
Automatically controlled, with or without HOA
switches.
Manually controlled.
Starters integral with motor control centers
including control relays and transformers.
Combination Starter/Disconnects
M
E
E*
E
---
M
E*
M
4.
Pushbutton stations, pilot lights
M
E*
M
5.
Disconnect switches, thermal overload switches,
manual operating switches.
E
E*
M
6.
Multi-speed switches
M
E*
M
7.
Control relays, transformers.
M
M
M
8.
Load voltage control items such as line voltage
thermostats not connected to control panel systems.
M
M
E
Non-load voltage control items.
M
M
M
M
M
M
9.
10. Electric thermostats, remote bulb thermostats,
motor valves, float controls, etc., which are an
integral part of mechanical equipment or directly
attached to ducts, pipes, etc.
254
11. Motor valves, damper motor, solenoid valves, EP
and PE switches, VAV box controls, actuators, etc.
M
M
M**
12. Control circuit outlets
E
E
--
13. Fire protection controls (Including flow switches)
M
M
M**
14. Duct smoke detectors, including relays for fan
shutdown.
E
M
M**
15. Temperature Control Panel
M
M
M
16. Interlocks
M
M
M
DIVISION 26 05 60
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY:
1. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical
identification components including but not limited to the following:
a. Buried electrical line warnings.
b. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors.
c. Operational instruction signs.
d. Warning and caution signs.
e. Equipment labels and signs.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Ideal Industries, Inc.
2. LEM Products, Inc.
3. Markal Corp.
4. Panduit Corp.
5. W.H.Brady, Co.
6. 3M Company
B.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS:
1. Identify System Raceways with Painted Couplings: Provide painted couplings for all concealed raceways. Install painted
couplings at all conduit connecting couplings including end couplings at stub outs. Apply the following colors:
a. Normal Power: Black
b. Life Safety Power: Yellow
c. Standby System Raceways: OSHA Orange
d. Fire Alarm: OSHA Red
e. BMS/Temperature Control: Dark Blue
f. Ground: Safety Green
g. Data and Telephone System: Light Blue
h. Security: White
i. Paging and Sound: Grey
2. Adhesive Marking Labels for Exposed Raceway: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage
and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Power d.c., HVAC, Communications, Control, Fire).
3. Label Size for Raceways and Busway: Kroy or Brother labels 1 inch high by 12 inches long (minimum) with 5/8 inch minimum height letters.
a. 600 Volt and Below Normal: White letters on black background indicating source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage.
b. 600 Volt and Below Emergency: Indicate source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage for each branch
as follows.
1. Life safety: Black letters on yellow
2. Standby: Black letters on OSHA Orange
4. Fire Alarm: White letters on red background indicating "FIRE ALARM".
5. Temperature Control: White or black letters on blue background indicating "TEMP. CONTROL."
6. Ground: White or black letters on green background indicating "GROUND" and equipment and designation.
255
7.
8.
9.
Building Alarms: Orange letters on white background indicating "BUILDING ALARMS."
Network Fiber: Black letters on white background indicating "NETWORK FIBER."
Where conduits enter or exit a panelboard, pull or junction box, switchboard, or other distribution equipment, conduit labels
shall include circuit number in addition to feeder identification and voltage.
DIVISION 26 08 00
ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
A. RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided in this section. The responsibilities of the
mechanical contractor, in Division 23 and those of the electrical contractor in Division 26. It is noted that the services for the
Project Manager, Design Team, and Commissioning Agent are not provided for in this contract. That is, the Contractor is
not responsible for providing their services. Their responsibilities are listed here to clarify the commissioning process
2. Electrical Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
a. Construction and Acceptance Phases:
1. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Cx
process.
2. Contractors shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the CA of commissioned equipment.
3. Provide additional requested documentation to the CA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures.
4. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned
equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for
writing detailed testing procedures.
5. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures and the Prefunctional
checklists from the CA. Submit manufacturer’s detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and procedures to CA for review.
6. During start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical-related portions of the Prefunctional checklists provided by the CA for all commissioned equipment. Perform and clearly document all completed
start-up and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CA.
7. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing.
8. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA for specified equipment in Section 01 91 13.
9. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CA, PM, and
A/E and retest the equipment.
10. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
11. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.
12. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.
b. Warranty Period
1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witness by the CA, according to the specifications.
2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
B.
START-UP, PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT
1. Pre-functional Checklists are developed and completed for all major equipment and systems being commissioned. The
checklist captures equipment nameplate and characteristics data, confirming the as-built status of the equipment or system.
These checklists also ensure that the systems are complete and operational, so that the functional performance testing can
be scheduled.
C. FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
1. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation
(seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load) where there is a specified system response.
Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as
power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc., shall also be tested.
256
D. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
1. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their completion schedule for the prefunctional checklists and
startup of all equipment and systems. The CA will schedule functional tests through the PM, GC and affected Subs. The
CA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the
tests.
E.
PROBLEM SOLVING
1. The CA will recommend solutions to problems found, however, the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the GC, Subs and A/E team.
F.
COST OF RETESTING
1. The cost for the Sub to retest a pre-functional or functional test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If
they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
2. The time for the CA and PM to direct any retesting required because a specific pre-functional checklist or start-up test item,
reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be backcharged to
the GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible for executing the faulty pre-functional test.
3. Approval. - The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the functional test
is made later after review by the CA. The CA recommends acceptance of each test to the PM. The PM gives final approval
on each test, providing a signed copy to the CA and the Contractor.
G. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1. CA Review and Approval - Prior to substantial completion, the CA shall review the O&M manuals, documentation and redline as-builts for systems that were commissioned to verify compliance with the Specifications. The CA will communicate
deficiencies in the manuals to the PM. This work does not supersede the A/E team’s review of the O&M manuals according
to the A/E contract.
2. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals - The CA is responsible to compile, organize and index all commissioning data by
equipment into labels, indexed and tabbed, three-ring binders and deliver it to the PM. Three copies of the manuals will be
provided. The manuals shall include the Commissioning Plan, Final Commissioning Report, System Type, Design Intent
Narrative, Start-up and Prefunctional checklists, Functional performance tests, trending and analysis, approvals and corrections, training plan, records, and approvals.
H. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
1. The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and for ensuring that training is completed. The CA
shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. Each Sub and vendor responsible for training will submit a written training plan to the CA for review and
approval prior to training. The plan will cover the following elements:
a. Equipment (included in training).
b. Intended audience.
c. Location of training.
d. Objectives.
e. Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.).
f. Duration of training on each subject.
g. Instructor for each subject.
h. Methods (classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations, written handouts, etc.).
i. Instructor and qualifications.
DIVISION 26 09 20
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. SUMMARY:
1. The lighting controls shall be a design based around centralized lighting control panels. Panels can be separate lighting
contactor panels or controllable breakers. Extent of lighting control equipment work shall be indicated by drawings and
schedules, and is hereby defined to include and strictly coordinated with the requirements setforth in Division 25 00 00 – “Integrated Automation” of this Technical Specification.
2. Types of lighting control equipment specified in this section include the following:
a. Programmable lighting control equipment.
b. Occupancy Sensors.
c. Time controlled switches.
d. Photoelectric Relays.
257
3.
B.
Agreement to Maintain: Prior to time of final acceptance, the Installer shall submit 4 copies of an agreement for continued
service and maintenance of lighting control equipment, for Owner's possible acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for furnishing parts and providing continued testing and servicing, including replacement of materials and equipment, for one year
period with option for renewal of Agreement by Owner.
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT:
1. Provide factory-fabricated lighting control equipment and ancillary components of sizes, types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; consisting of programmable controllers, telephone interface data equipment, transceivers, relays, switches, and control wiring, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials and components; and construct in accordance with published product information for duty indicated, and as required for a complete installation.
2. Provide standard light switch locks, where required.
3. Provide modular component system, with central controller and transceiver capable of activating 16 mechanically latching
positive ON-OFF single-pole relays with 115/277-volts ratings. Transmit information by multiplexing over single pairs of
wires, including control data from controller to transceiver; control wires to be NEC Class 2 type. Provide expandable system with up to 8,000 relays which is controller programmable on-site and capable of being updated to reflect changes without wiring changes. Provide an alarm with indicator for operator when transceiver fails to operate as programmed. Store user program information on tape which will automatically reload controller after power outages experienced which are of
longer duration than battery backup time; no loss of memory should be experienced in the event of power failure of less
than 6 hours. Construct with self-diagnostic routine to indicate malfunctions. Provide system with the following control functions:
a. Automatic Control: System capable of activating building areas into user dictated pattern of ON-OFF array of relays,
according to either weekly schedule divided into one-minute increments, or two one-day schedules.
b. Manual Controls: System capable of activating single groups of relays ON-OFF with either a maintained or momentary
switch; or groups of relays to one of 10 user determined patterns by pushbutton phase, or controller keyboard. Provide
prioritization of manual controls.
c. Manual Lockout: System capable of selecting, activating and locking-in any lighting pattern from central controller, and
locking-out manual and automatic commands.
d. All programming, overrides, and scene logic shall reside in the Jace. No amount of rela…log shall reside in any controller other than the Jace. LonWorks is the only protocol acceptable for lighting control. All manufacturers devices
must be able to integrate into Tridium Niagra.
4. Lighting Controls Programming: Refer to electrical plans for lighting control schedules and zone programming. TC contractor to interface and wire to lighting control panels via Bacnet or Lonworks (TC contractor to coordinate with div 26). TC contractor to generate floor plan and site plan graphic pages of lighting control status with front end override capabilities. TC
contractor to perform all programming for lighting control schedules, photocell related control, low voltage overrides, interface to security system and interface to fire alarm system status. Lighting control programming shall reside within a HVAC
DDC control panel (ie: Jace controller) and Bacnet or Lonworks virtual signals shall be sent to the lighting control panel to
turn on/ off lights as required by div 26 sequences and schedules.
5. Provide control unit with output circuits individually programmable controls in response to programmed time signals or analog or digital signals from external sources (HVAC DDC control panel). The system output circuits to be external pilot duty
relay circuits or external power circuits rated for 20 amperes at 277 V as indicated. Provide locked cover. System includes
the following features:
a. Connection to the Building Automation System (BAS) head-end equipment.
b. Lighting control equipment shall be BacNet or LonWorks compatible. Coordinate with HVAC Controls Contractor.
c. System scheduling and programming shall be adjustable through the BAS.
6. Photo Relays: Furnished, installed and connected to the building automation system by the HVAC Controls Contractor. Photocells will automatically switch lamps/luminaires “on/off” in designated daylight harvesting zones via the lighting control
panels.
7. Sensors/Detectors: Provide sensors/detectors for controlling building lighting circuits through switch inputs; and as recommended by the lighting control systems manufacturer for occupancy sensing and light-level balancing of the following types
for services indicated:
a. Ultra-sonic sensors.
b. Passive infrared detectors.
c. Photo sensors.
8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lighting control equipment of one of the following (for each
type and rating of equipment):
a. Douglas Lighting Controls
b. General Electric Co.
258
C. LIGHTING CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (DESIGN INTENT):
1. It is the intent that the Building Automation System (BAS) control the interior and exterior building lighting. Interior and exterior lighting shall be circuited via lighting control panels. Lighting control panels will be located as indicated on plans. Lighting branch circuits will be swept “on/off” at specified times via the BAS. Final lighting control schedule shall be verified with
the owner.
2. Auditorium lighting is controlled through a stand-alone theatrical lighting dimming system, refer to Electrical Drawings and
“TE-series” drawings for additional information.
3. School district facilities personnel shall have the ability to adjust the specified time schedule for “after-hours” functions, to
provide full lighting in necessary areas.
4. Photocells shall be furnished and installed by the HVAC Controls Contractor and connected to the BAS. Daylight harvesting
shall be accomplished based on photocell set-points for each space type. These exact individual set-points will be determined through the building commissioning process. The photocells will be located on the roof.
5. Digital, low voltage override switches shall be located as indicated on the Electrical Drawings for “after-hours” override of
the lighting control schedule in designated zones. Low-voltage override switches shall be connected, via digital input, to the
BAS.
6. Upon “after-hours” activation of security card access readers, emergency egress lighting circuits shall be energized
throughout the building via the BAS. Emergency egress lighting circuits shall be “off” during unoccupied hours.
7. Upon activation of the fire alarm system, emergency egress lighting branch circuits shall be energized via the BAS. Emergency egress lighting circuits shall be “off” during unoccupied hours. Auditorium lighting control shall be overridden with designated emergency egress lighting branch circuits brought up to full output.
8. Upon transfer to emergency power, emergency egress lighting branch circuits shall be energized via the BAS. Emergency
egress lighting circuits shall be “off” during unoccupied hours.
9. Classroom lighting shall be controlled through the relay based lighting control system.
a. The outboard lamps located in the luminaires along the exterior side of the classroom shall be switched “on/off” based
on natural ambient daylight levels. This control occurs via signal from the building automation system and associated
photocell.
b. Manual low-voltage switches located in each classroom allow the instructor to adjust light levels based on the desired
task.
c. Photocell control shall not be manually overridden.
d. Light level set-points shall be determined during the commissioning process.
10. Manual low-voltage switches located in each classroom allow the instructor to adjust light levels based on the desired task.
a. Photocell control shall not be manually overridden.
b. Light level set-points shall be determined during the commissioning process.
c. Light level set-points may be different for the luminaires located on the interior side of the classroom versus those located on the exterior side of the classroom.
11. Gymnasium lighting shall be controlled through the relay based lighting control system.
a. The gymnasiums are equipped with 4-lamp fluorescent high-bay luminaires. Two lamps in each luminaires shall be
controlled “on/off” based on natural ambient daylight levels. This control occurs via signal from the building automation
system and associated photocell. The two remaining lamps shall have manual “on/off” control.
12. Commons/Cafeteria lighting shall be controlled through the relay based lighting control system, refer to electrical drawings
for additional information.
a. The commons/cafeteria lighting located in zones closest to the exterior of the space shall be “on/off” based on natural
ambient daylight levels. This control occurs via signal from the building automation system and associated photocell.
13. Parking lot lighting shall be controlled through the relay based lighting control system via the BAS photocell and/or time
clock
14. Exterior building mounted lighting shall be controlled through the relay based lighting control system via the BAS photocell
and/or time clock.
DIVISION 26 22 00
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
A. SUMMARY:
A. This section includes general purpose and specialty dry type transformers and voltage regulators with windings rated 600 V
or less.
B.
TRANSFORMERS:
1. Factory assembled and tested, air cooled units of types specified, having characteristics and ratings as indicated. Units shall
be designed for 60-Hz service.
2. Cores: Grain oriented, nonaging silicon steel.
259
3.
4.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
C. GENERAL PURPOSE, DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS:
1. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 20 "Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications." Transformers shall have the following features and ratings:
a. Insulation Class: 185 deg C class for transformers 15 kVA or smaller; 220 deg C class for transformers larger than 15
kVA.
b. Insulation Temperature Rise: 115 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C.
c. Windings:
1. 2-winding type, three phase transformers shall use one coil per phase in primary and secondary. Conductors shall
be individually insulated, as small in size as possible, and transposed when necessary to minimize eddy current
losses. The primary winding shall be of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to its rated value even with circulating 3rd harmonic current.
2. Provide aluminum windings.
3. Windings shall be delta-wye with 30o lagging phase shift to match ANSI standard, unless noted otherwise.
2. Sound Level: Minimum of 3 dB less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels for transformer type and size indicated when
factory tested in accordance with that standard.
3. Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full capacity taps in high-voltage winding as follows:
a. 3 kVA through and including 15 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated high voltage.
b. Greater than 15 kVA through and including 500 kVA: Six 2-1/2 percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high-voltage.
4. Core Flux Density: Maintained below saturation point to prevent core saturation caused by harmonics even with a 10% primary overvoltage.
D. CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS:
1. Ratings: As indicated and for continuous duty. Where ratings are not indicated, provide capacity in excess of load.
a. Type: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type.
b. Enclosure: Indoor, except as indicated.
E.
MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Square D Co.
2. General Electric Co.
3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer
4. Hevi-Duty Electric.
5. ITE Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
DIVISION 26 24 00
SWITCHBOARDS
A. SUMMARY:
1. This Section includes low-voltage power service and distribution switchboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600
V or less.
2. Allow at least (2) 200A, 3-phase spaces in switch gear to accommodate future portables classrooms. If distance is such
that voltage drop is not a problem for 120/208v, provide (2) 200A, 3-phase spaces in the low voltage switch gear. The
switch gear is to be engineered to accommodated as many portable classrooms as space will allow.
B.
EXTRA MATERIALS:
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish spares of each type and rating of fuse for fusible devices amounting to one set of 3 fuses for each 9
fuses installed but not less than 3 fuses of each type. Include spares for:
a. Fuses for fused circuit breakers.
b. Fuses for fusible switches.
c. Fuses for fused power circuit devices.
d. Control power fuses.
e. Potential transformer fuses.
2. Spare Indicating Lamps: Furnish 6 of each type and color installed.
C. SWITCHBOARDS, GENERAL:
1. Front-connected, front-accessible, with fixed, individually mounted main device, panel-mounted branches, and sections rear
aligned. Dead front, metal enclosed, self supporting and conforming to NEMA PB2.
260
D. MANUFACTURERS:
a. Square D Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.
e. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
2. Metering Equipment:
a. Square D Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
c. General Electric
d. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.
e. Westinghouse
f. Sangamo
g. TESCO
E.
FABRICATION AND FEATURES:
1. Enclosure: Steel. NEMA 1.
2. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section meeting utility company requirements. Where separate
vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard.
a. Provide integral meter base in accordance with utility standards.
3. Bus Transition and Incoming Line Pull Sections: Where required, match and align with basic switchboard. Line terminations
shall be accessible from the front of the switchboard.
4. Hinged Front Panels: Provide to allow access to breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
5. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: Provide where indicated or where required by installation conditions, and include the following features:
a. Adequate ventilation to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.
6. Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire except as otherwise indicated. Features as follows:
a. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity with feeder circuit-breaker line connections. Horizontal cross busses throughout shall be non-tapered – 100 percent rated. Size bus in accordance with
NEMA PB2.
b. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated copper.
c. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Bus, and Equipment Ground Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of the switchboard
main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from either end by means of bolt holes or other approved
method and connecting links. Provide for any outgoing or incoming bus or cabling as required for each breaker space
(i.e. all spares, spaces, and utilized).
d. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses except as indicated and equipped with approved pressure connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral cables.
e. Provide long barrel 2-bolt copper compression lugs for all incoming and outgoing
f. feeders including neutral and ground connections.
7. Ground Bus: 1/4 inch by 2 inch minimum size, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, and equipped with pressure
connector terminations for feeder- and branch-circuit ground conductors.
8. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents. Busses shall be bolted with access
for future torque maintenance.
9. Provide four (4) spare two-hole lugs for #2 AWG through #4/0 AWG conductors on load side of main circuit breakers.
10. Future Devices: Where provision for future overcurrent protective devices or space is indicated, equip compartments with
mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, designed for the OCPD types and ampere
ratings indicated for future installation of devices.
F.
OTHER CIRCUIT CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
1. Control Power: Where electrically operated/ shunt tripped circuit breakers/or other control power functions are required, provide 120 volt control circuits supplied through secondary disconnect devices from a control power transformer. Include the
following features:
a. Control Power Transformers: Dry type. Separate compartments for units larger than 3 KVA and their fuses.
b. Provide two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking relays. Connect the
primary of each control power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. Connect the 120
volt secondaries through a relay or relays as a control bus.
261
c.
d.
e.
Control Power Fuses: Include primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection.
Provide control power disconnecting means on line side of transformer.
Provide control fuse status indication on front and contacts for remote alarm.
G. IDENTIFICATION:
1. General: Refer to Division 26 Section on Electrical Identification. Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring with factoryapplied labels and signs.
2. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic or metal nameplate for each compartment, mounted with corrosionresistant screws. UL nameplates shall be provided for all switchboards. Information shall include, but not be limited to, manufacturer, model number, serial number, plant or manufacturing location, ampere rating, voltage rating, wire and phase identification and bus short circuit bracing rating.
DIVISION 26 24 15
PANELBOARDS
A. SUMMARY:
1. Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less.
B.
PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common
trip.
2. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door with card and clear plastic cover. Directory shall match panelboard
configuration, i.e. top to bottom, left to right. Provide permanent panelboard labels for each circuit number.
3. Bus Material: Provide tin plated hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.
4. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to box.
5. Provide copper lugs for incoming feeders and grounds.
6. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD
ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.
7. Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as indicated.
a. Provide 150 percent sized neutral bus and ground bus and double termination lugs for all 120/208 volt panelboards.
b. Provide two bolt compression lugs for incoming feeders on main lug only (MLO)panelboards, and ground connections.
c. Subfeed: OCPD or lug provision as indicated.
d. Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.
C. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS:
1. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
2. Double-Width Panels: Where more than 42 poles are indicated, provide two panelboards of equal dimensions and with individual fronts on each panelboard.
3. Panelboards shall be door-in-door trim type and have doors flush with trim, have copper buses.
D. DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:
1. Branch-Circuit Breakers: Where OCPDs are indicated to be circuit breakers, use bolt-on breakers except circuit breakers
225-ampere frame size and greater may be plug-in type where individual positive locking device requires mechanical release for removal.
E.
MANUFACTURERS:
a. Square D Co.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
e. ITE
262
DIVISION 26 27 20
WIRING DEVICES
A. SUMMARY:
1. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units
of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. Types of electrical wiring devices
in this section include the following:
a. Receptacles.
b. Ground-fault circuit interrupters.
c. Switches.
d. Wallplates.
e. Dimmers.
f. Plugs and connectors.
g. Concrete floor boxes
h. Poke-through assemblies.
B.
WIRING DEVICES:
1. Receptacles:
a. All duplex, single, and special receptacles shall be extra heavy duty type with nylon fronts and backs conforming to
Federal Spec #WS-B96K, listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, and have a metal mounting strap with self-grounding
and have a hexhead green grounding screw and be side and back wired. Each device shall bear the UL/FS Label.
b. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Specification grade type 5-20R, with nylon face. All receptacles
connected to emergency circuits shall have a red face. Color selection shall be verified with Architect/Engineer prior to
ordering.
c. Specific-use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 straight blade or WD 5 twist-lock; as indicated on drawings, black
face.
d. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Duplex receptacle with metal strap for self-grounding and green hex-head source with
dedicated isolated ground and neutral, Hubbel prefix IG. Receptacle shall have an orange triangle located on the face.
e. Ground-Fault Interrupter Receptacles: Provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupters, with integral heavy-duty
NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide
unit capable of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1 per UL
Standard 943.
f. Clock Outlet: Single NEMA 5-15P side wired plug, mounted in a recessed faceplate with metal hook which permits
clock to be flush mounted on wall.
g. Pendant Cord/Connector Devices: Matching, locking type, plug and plug receptacle body connector, NEMA l5-20P and
L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.
2.
3.
Switches:
a. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits: extra heavy duty type with nylon fronts and backs conforming to Federal Spec
#WS-B96K, listed by Underwriter's Laboratories with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC, unless noted otherwise. Mounting straps shall be metal and be equipped with a green hex-head ground screw. Each switch shall
bear the UL/FS Label.
b. Handle: Color shall be verified with Architect/Engineer for normal power circuits, red for emergency power circuits.
c. Pilot Light Type: Lighted handle lit when switch is "on."
d. Locator Type: Continuously lighted handle.
e. Manufacturer: Corbin, others acceptable based upon district prior approval.
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Provide single-pole, full-wave semi-conductor modular type AC dimmers for fluorescent lamps;
wattage and voltage as indicated, and with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise, RF and TV interference to minimum.
Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low dimming; and with anodized heat sinks.
Provide 5-inch wire connecting leads. Dimmers shall be Lutron Nova "T" Star.
C. WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
1. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as
indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing
plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Identify all wall plates used for receptacles with branch circuit number per requirements of section on Electrical Identification. Provide blank wall plates for all cable, data, telephone
and junction and outlet boxes. Where cables are routed through the wallplate, provide grommets in wallplate openings to
protect cables. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:
a. Material and Finish: Steel plate, galvanized for use in unfinished areas, mechanical, and electrical rooms.
b. Material and Finish: Painted metal plates, in all other areas. Color to be verified with Architect/Engineer/Owner.
263
2.
3.
Concrete Floor Box: Provide modular floor service outlets and fittings of types and ratings indicated. Construct of die cast
aluminum, satin finish. Use design compatible with floor type and outlet wiring methods indicated. Provide 20-amperes, 125volts, back-to-back duplex receptacles, NEMA configuration 5-20R. Provide with 1" NPT, 1" long, locking nipple for installation.
Poke-Through Assembly Devices: Factory-fabricated poke-through assembly devices with modular service outlets, multichanneled thru-floor raceway/fire stop assembly and below-floor junction box assembly. Construct service fitting of die cast,
satin finished aluminum with 20- ampere 120-volts, gray duplex NEMA 5-20R receptacle and modular communication/ data
service outlet with separation barrier between power and low-tension section. Provide integral assembly UL listed as a total
unit, with fire rating consistent with that of floor penetrated.
D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one of the following:
a. Devices:
1. Hubbell Inc.
2. Leviton Mfg Co.
3. Pass and Seymour Inc.
4. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Co.
b. Concrete Floor Boxes:
5. Wiremold
6. Hubbell
7. Steel City
c. Poke-Through and Floor Service Outlets:
8. Wiremold
9. Hubbell, Inc.
DIVISION 26 28 10
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. SUMMARY:
1. This Section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPD’s) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly
used with them.
B.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDS), GENERAL:
1. Where OCPD's are to be installed in existing panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers, they shall be of the
same manufacture and type as those existing in the equipment. If this is not possible, provide devices which are compatible
with the existing equipment and when installed will not void the U.L. label or reduce the short circuit rating of the equipment.
2. Provide 100 percent rated equipment and feeder breakers unless otherwise noted.
3. Provide standard rated branch circuit breakers unless otherwise noted.
4. All overcurrent devices shall be individually rated for the available fault current unless otherwise noted. Series ratings of
equipment will only be allowed where specifically called out.
C. CARTRIDGE FUSES:
1. All fuses used for main, feeder, or branch-circuit protection shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed, current-limiting fuses
with 200,000 ampere interrupting rating and shall be so labeled. Fuses used for supplementary protection (other than
branch circuit protection) shall be as specified above or shall be U.L. approved or component recognized for such purposes.
All fuses provided shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Should equipment provided require a different U.L. Class or
size of fuse, the engineer shall be furnished sufficient data to ascertain that system function will not be adversely affected.
2. In order to simplify fuse replacement, reduce spare fuse inventory and insure adequate thermal protection, all fuses 600
amperes and below shall be true dual-element time-delay fuses with separate spring-loaded thermal overload elements in
all ampere ratings. All ampere ratings shall be designed to open at 400 degrees F or less when subjected to a nonload oven
test.
3. Class L Fuses: UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting Type."
4. Class RK1 and RK5 Dual Element Time-Delay Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."
5. Class J Low-Peak dual Element Fuse: UL 198C
D. NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES:
1. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch.
264
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operation: By means of external handle.
Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position.
Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment
where located.
Contacts shall be NEMA rated 75 degrees C.
Provide auxiliary contacts for disconnects supplied from variable frequency drives.
E.
FUSIBLE SWITCHES:
1. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch. Withstand Capability: In excess of
the let-through current permitted by its fuse when subject to faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
2. Operation: By means of external handle.
3. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position.
4. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise
5. indicated or required to suit environment where located.
6. Contacts shall be NEMA rated 75 degrees C.
7. Provide auxiliary contacts for disconnects supplied from variable frequency drives.
F.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
1. Construction: Provide bolt-in type, except breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger which may be plug-in type if held in
place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.
2. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip
protection for each pole. Trip unit to be interchangeable within frame sizes for breakers 200 amperes or larger. Breakers
250 amperes and above shall have adjustable trip selection for trip units. All 120/208 volt rated breakers shall be rated and
labeled "High Magnetic".
3. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low-trip-setting current values. Provide adjustable instantaneous
trip devices for each circuit breaker supplying individual motor loads and where indicated.
G. COMBINATION CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS:
1. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a class A, type 1device.
H. CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH SOLID-STATE TRIP DEVICES:
1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20 degrees C and plus 55 degrees
C.
2. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide for indicated units.
I.
SPARE FUSE CABINET:
1. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 18-gauge minimum steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door with key-coded cam lock
and pull. Size to be adequate for orderly storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum. Cabinet
finish to be gray baked enamel. Stencil legend "SPARE PARTS" in 1-1/2 inches (40-mm) letters on door.
J.
MANUFACTURERS:
1. Cartridge Fuses:
a. Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc.
b. Littelfuse Inc.
2. Fusible Switches:
a. Square D Co.
b. Allen-Bradley Co.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
3. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Square D Co.
4. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters:
a. Square D Co.
265
DIVISION 26 30 10
ENGINE GENERATOR
A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: The generator system shall be factory assembled, liquid cooled unit mounted radiator, natural gas
engine-driven generator to provide source of stand-by power. Diesel systems are not allowed. Noise level shall be a maximum of
75 db at 23 feet.(7m.).
B.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
1. The equipment specified is intended for application in an environment as described below:
a. Altitude: 5500 feet above sea level.
b. Maximum Temperature: 120 degrees F
c. Minimum Temperature: -20 degrees F
d. Location: Outdoor
C. ENGINE:
1. Type: natural gas, liquid cooled with unit mounted radiator and engine driven water pump, multi-cylinder inline or v-type, internal combustion engine. Natural gas engine shall comply with the requirements of SAE 1349, ISO 8528 (Part 2), EGSA
101P and IEEE Standard 446 as they apply to standby application.
2. Fuel System: Natural gas
3. Governor: Isochronous type to maintain governed speed at rated frequency regardless of the kW load and shall meet the
following requirements:
a. Stability: 0.25 percent maximum frequency variation at any constant load from no load to full load.
b. Regulation; 0.25 percent maximum frequency deviation at steady state. Provide a separate overspeed device, independent of the governor, to prevent runaway in the event of any failure which may render the governor inoperable.
4. Engine Accessories: Provide the following engine accessories.
a. Pressure regulators
b. Lube oil filter.
c. Intake air filter.
d. Lube oil cooler.
e. Strainers
f. Control valves
g. Gear-driven water pump.
5. The engine shall be designed to develop rated speed and torque capable of developing full load within 8 seconds from the
time the engine starts. Engine cranking period shall not exceed 30 seconds.
6. The lubrication system shall incorporate a threaded, spin-on or canister type, full flow, duplex filtration system with a spring
loaded, pressure calibrated, bypass valve to allow lubrication to continue in the event of unusually high filter restriction. The
bypass valve must be an integral part of the engine filters or filter housings. Locate filters for easy servicing. A local alarm
shall be generated if bypass occurs.
7. Provide a valved oil drain extended past the engine frame with braided stainless steel hose and reusable fittings.
8. The engine shall be equipped with protective devices to meet control requirements specified elsewhere in this specification.
The control devices shall be tied into the engine generator control. All protective devices shall be wired into a master engine
terminal box with terminal strips for remote connections and connections to annunciators or controls as required.
9. All equipment shall operate with minimum vibration throughout the operating range as assembled units. The equipment
supplier shall assume all additional shop, shipping and transportation expense, and/or cost at the job site necessary to reduce excessive vibration attributable to unbalance of the equipment.
10. Provide braided stainless steel, flexible fuel lines
D. GENERATOR CHARACTERISTICS:
1. The generator shall be of the single-bearing type, dripproof construction, externally regulated, directly connected to the engine flywheel through a semi-flexible coupling.
2. The generator shall be complete with inboard brushless exciter. The generator rotor shall be dynamically balanced to withstand overspeeds up to 125 percent rated speed.
3. The generator shall be capable of continuously delivering its rated output at any power factor from 1.0 to 0.8 lagging at ±5
percent of rated voltage and at 60Hz, in the environmental conditions as specified.
266
4.
5.
6.
7.
The generator voltage regulator shall be solid state, with external voltage adjust rheostat. Provide a setscrew stability adjustment. Voltage regulation shall be +1.0 percent. Steady state voltage stability shall remain within a 0.5 percent band of
rated voltage.
The engine alternator shall be capable of accepting a one-step application of 100% of nameplate kW load at 0.8 power factor and recover to steady state conditions without disruption of power to the load.
The generator shall be capable of providing 300 percent of rated current for ten seconds during a short circuit condition.
The alternator shall be capable of operation with reverse kVAR of 0.15 per unit.
E.
STARTING EQUIPMENT:
1. The engine shall be equipped with a 24 volt electric starting system of sufficient capacity to crank the engine at a speed
which will allow starting of the engine. Starting system shall be capable of starting the engine either manually or automatically.
2. Batteries: The batteries shall be dedicated to the engine. Provide battery blanket for 120 volt a.c. supply. Provide a battery
rack and necessary cables and clamps.
3. A suitable battery charging alternator shall be provided with sufficient capacity to recharge the batteries back to normal
starting requirements within 90 minutes.
4. Battery Charger: Provide a battery charger specifically designed for engine starting batteries which shall maintain the starting batteries at full charge. The charger shall be capable of restoring the batteries to a fully-charged state within eight hours
after a complete duty cycle discharge.
5. The charging system shall permit charging from either a normal or emergency 120 volt AC power source.
6. The charger shall be a three stage, temperature stabilized type with automatic and manual charge control.
F.
MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide natural gas generator sets of one of the following:
1. Generac
2. Cummins/Onan Engine Co.
3. Caterpillar Tractor Co.
4. Kohler Corp.
G. MOUNTING:
1. Provide a suitable full length sub-base for mounting the engine generator unit on a concrete foundation. Provide assembly
with spring type vibration isolators for use between the sub-base and the concrete foundation. A pin shall be installed
through the spring isolators, sub-base and bolted into concrete inserts for lateral movement limitation.
H. WARRANTY:
1. Provide manufacturer's warranty for a duration of not less than two (2) years from the date of substantial completion of the
project. The warranty shall include, but not be limited to, the replacement of materials and equipment used in natural gas
generator systems.
DIVISION 26 36 00
TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. SUMMARY:
1. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less. It includes the following items:
a. Automatic transfer switch (ATS).
b. Remote annunciation system.
B.
MANUFACTURERS:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Russelectric, Inc.
b. Zenith Controls, Inc.
c. Automatic Switch Company. (ASCO)
C. TRANSFER SWITCH PRODUCTS, GENERAL:
1. Units smaller than 400 amperes shall not have different current ratings for different classes or mixtures of loads, including
100 percent tungsten filament lamp or 100 percent inductive load.
2. Tested Fault-Current Ratings: Closing and withstand ratings shall exceed the indicated available rms symmetrical fault current at the equipment terminals based on testing according to UL Standard 1008, conducted at full-rated system voltage and
20 percent power factor. Rate each product for withstand duration time as follows when tested for rated short-circuit current
correlated with the actual type of circuit protective device indicated for transfer switches for this Project.
267
3.
a. 150 Amperes or Smaller: 1.5 closing and withstand duration cycles.
b. Larger than 150 Amperes: 3 closing and withstand duration cycles.
Annunciation and Control Interface Components: Provide devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote annunciators or annunciator/control panels which have communications capability matched with the remote device.
D. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATSS):
1. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110, "Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems."
2. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning
[except for neutral position, to enable programmed transition.]
3. Manual Switch Operation: The switch shall have provision for manual operation under load with the door closed with either
or both sources energized. Transfer time shall be the same as for electrical operation. Control circuit shall automatically disconnect from electrical operator during manual operation.
4. Digital Communications Interface: Provide full-duplex RS - 232 type, matched to capability of remote annunciator.
5. Programmed Transition: Switch Operator shall have a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between
the 2 working switch positions with an intentional, controlled, timed pause during transfer at the midpoint. The midpoint
pause shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds minimum, and factory set at 5 seconds, except as indicated. Time delay
shall occur for both transfer directions.
6. Provide dry contacts for connection to Building Automation System (BAS) head-end. Provide separate contacts to indicate:
a. Transfer to Emergency Power Source
b. Generator Start/Run.
E.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FEATURES:
1. Provide for normal source voltage sensing of each phase of normal source. Pick-up voltage shall be adjustable from 85 percent to 100 percent nominal, and drop-out voltage is adjustable from 75 percent to 98 percent pick-up value. Factory set for
pick-up at 95 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Provide for emergency source voltage sensing to prevent premature transfer. Voltage pick-up shall be adjustable from 85
percent to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 90 percent. Pick-up frequency shall be adjustable from 90 percent to 100 percent of nominal and factory set to pick-up at 98 percent.
3. Provide a transfer switch signal time delay to override normal source voltage-sensing, delay transfer signal and engine start
signal. Delay shall be adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds, and factory set at 5 sec.
4. Provide a transfer to emergency time delay to delay transfer switch changeover after transfer signal. Delay shall be adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes and factory set at 0 minutes.
5. Provide a retransfer time delay to provide for automatic defeat of the delay upon loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage
of the emergency source, provided the normal supply has been restored. Delay shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes
and factory set at 15 minutes.
6. Provide an engine shut-down time delay adjustable from 0 to 15 minutes and factory set at 5 minutes.
7. Provide source available indicating lights to supervise sources via the transfer switch normal and emergency sourcesensing circuits.
8. Provide a transfer override switch to override automatic retransfer control so the ATS will remain connected to the emergency power source regardless of the condition of the normal source. Provide a pilot light to indicate the override status.
9. Provide engine starting contacts, one isolated normally closed and one isolated normally open. Contacts shall be gold
flashed or gold plated and rated 10 amperes at 32 V d.c. minimum.
10. Provide two normally open and two normally closed spare SPDT contacts for each switch position, rated 10 amps at 240
VAC.
F.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM FEATURES:
1. Provide a remote annunciator panel which shall annunciate conditions at indicated transfer switches including:
a. Sources available (as defined by actual pick-up and drop-out settings of transfer switch controls).
b. Switch position.
c. Switch in test mode.
d. Failure of digital communications link.
e. Malfunction of the annunciator unit or communication link shall not affect functions of the ATS. In the event of a failure
of the communication link, the ATS automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation. No ATS sensing,
controlling, or operating function shall depend on the remote panel for proper operation.
f. Transfer switch shall be designed, constructed, and mounted to comply with applicable seismic zone requirements.
DIVISION 26 40 00
ELECTRICAL FOR AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
268
A.
SUMMARY
1. Furnish and install a complete system of conduits, and receptacle boxes, for the audio-visual system as indicated. The
sound reinforcement system, audio signal, video signal and control wiring, and components will be furnished, installed, and
terminated by the AV System Contractor.
2. All AV system conduit shall be metallic conduit only. Conduit installed in concrete slabs shall be metallic type conduit rated
for such use. No PVC conduit shall be used for sound reinforcement systems raceway.
3. Furnish and install conduit, j-boxes, wireways, and floor boxes for audio, video, and control wiring as shown on the AV
drawings. Conduit shall have pull strings left in place.
4. Provide non-metallic conduit connections from the wireways to AV system equipment racks to isolate equipment ground
from conduit ground.
5. Provide 20A, 120VAC, single-phase, dedicated circuits with independent third wire grounds. Terminate circuits as required
by the AV drawings.
6. Provide a separate insulated ground conductor run in conduit from the AV system equipment racks to the ground at the
electrical panel feeding 120VAC power to the equipment. Size of conductor to provide resistance of 0.1 Ohm or less to earth
ground based on length of run.
DIVISION 26 40 10
ELECTRICAL FOR THEATRE SYSTEMS
A. SUMMARY
1. Furnish and install all electrical conduit, wireways, wiring, plug boxes and receptacle boxes for electrical power and control
to stage and house lighting dimming system equipment, including control stations and distribution equipment. Stations and
back boxes identified as “Manufacturer-supplied” in the TE drawing legend will be provided by the Theatre Contractor and
installed by the Electrical Contractor.
2. Furnish and install all load wiring from dimmer racks to house lights, stage lighting, front-ofhouse distribution strips, pipemounted plug boxes, tormentor lighting position plug boxes, Juliet balcony plug boxes and stage floor pockets, as shown on
the electrical and theatre equipment drawings. Distribution strips, pipe-mounted plug boxes and grid iron junction boxes with
internal terminal strips will be furnished and installed by the Theatre Contractor, but terminated under the work of this Section 266133.
3. Load wiring is to have one hot wire and one neutral wire per circuit for every circuit in the house and stage lighting systems.
DO NOT COMMON NEUTRALS. Provide additional grounds as required.
4. All wiring and connections shall be installed in accordance with directions from the Theatre Contractor.
5. Furnish and install metallic conduit connections to dimmer racks and architectural interface equipment rack installed by
Theatre Contractor. Dimmers will be provided under Division 11 and will be furnished with circuit breakers prewired to the
terminal strip.
6. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes, control stations, power feeds, etc. with the Theatre Contractor. Verify locations of connections prior to installation.
7. House light circuits shall be connected to the theatre lighting dimmer rack. Refer to the Electrical drawings for house light
circuiting.
8. Provide 120VAC branch circuit, wiring outlets and receptacles for power to the lighting control positions.
9. Provide 120/208 VAC, 60Hz power to the motorized batten hoist system motors. Electrical Contractor shall provide, install
and terminate all associated conduit, power and control wiring according to riser diagrams and schematics provided by the
Theatre Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall test the system wiring for shorts or other damage prior to system energization. Install up/down control panels provided under Division 11.
10. Furnish and install power feeds to the dimmer racks including any fusing and disconnects required.
11. Furnish and install 120VAC branch circuit, wiring outlets and receptacles for power to the architectural equipment rack.
12. Terminate #12AWG, Type SO drop cables (provided and installed on the motorized batten hoist rigging by the Theatre Contractor) from the grid iron junction boxes to the theatre lighting distribution strips mounted on the rigging pipes above the
stage. Coordinate with the Theatre Contractor.
13. All conduit shown on the TE drawings shall be included.
14. Power wiring shall be in metallic conduit and shall be routed a minimum of 24 inches away from parallel runs with any sound
system conduit.
DIVISION 26 40 20
ELECTRICAL FOR PRESS BOX SOUND SYSTEM
A. SUMMARY
1. The sound reinforcement system, audio signal, and control wiring, and components will be furnished, installed, and terminated by the SS System Contractor.
269
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Prior to installation of raceway, verify conduit sizes and routing, and coordinate locations of all outlets with the SS System
Contractor.
Provide 120 VAC power for the sound system equipment.
All sound system conduit shall be metallic conduit only. Conduit installed in concrete slabs shall be metallic type conduit rated for such use. No PVC conduit shall be used for sound reinforcement systems raceways unless specifically noted otherwise.
Furnish and install conduit, j-boxes, wireways, and floor boxes for audio, and control wiring as shown on the SS drawings.
Conduit shall have pull strings left in place.
Provide non-metallic conduit connections from the wireways to sound system equipment racks to isolate equipment ground
from conduit ground.
Provide 20A, 120VAC, single-phase, dedicated circuits with independent third wire grounds as shown on the electrical drawings. Terminate circuits as noted on the SS drawings.
Provide a separate insulated ground conductor run in conduit from the sound system equipment racks to the ground at the
electrical panel feeding 120VAC power to the equipment. Size of conductor to provide resistance of 0.1 Ohm or less to earth
ground based on length of run.
DIVISION 26 40 30
TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
A. SUMMARY:
1. Types of TVSS equipment required may include the following:
a. Category b or c for distribution panelboards.
2. The specified system shall be factory-tested before shipment. Testing of each system shall include but shall not be limited to
quality control checks, "hi-pot" tests at twice rated voltage plus 1000 volts per UL requirements, IEEE c62.41 category b
surge tests, UL ground leakage test, and operation and calibration tests.
3. The project shall be life cycle tested following suggested wait times as defined by ANSI/IEEE C62.45 (1987) and shall be
capable of surviving 1000 sequential category C surges of 10,000 amps without failure.
4. The system shall be UL listed as a complete system under UL 1449 (rev 7/2/87) standard for transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) and the rating shall be permanently affixed to the TVSS.
B.
TVSS EQUIPMENT:
1. Components: The system shall be a symmetrically balanced, metal oxide varistor (MOV) array system, constructed using
surge current diversion modules. Each module shall be capable of withstanding over 1000 pulses of the 10 kAmps IEEE
C62.41 Category C surge current without degradation of clamping voltage. The module shall consist of multiple gap-less
metal oxide varistors, with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner which
ensures reasonable MOV surge current sharing. No gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes shall be used. The status of each
varistor shall be monitored and green LED shall be illuminated if the module is in full working order. When module performance is degraded, such as if one or more fuses or varistors have failed, the LED shall indicate a failed module.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
High Frequency Tracking Filter: The unit shall include a UL 1238 high-frequency extended range tracking filter. The filter
shall provide for high frequency transient filtering of up to 5 dB attenuation (per MIL-STD E220A) for the band width extending from 100 KHZ to 100 MHZ. This filtering must remove low level surges and sharp wavefronts associated with fast risetime transients, thus eliminating disturbances which may lead to "system upset".
Connections: Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections. The terminals shall accommodate wire sizes of #14 to #2/0 AWG for two conductors per required connection. The units shall use standard parallel
wiring techniques.
Internal Connections: All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by way of low impedance busbars or
wiring. Surge current diversion modules shall use low impedance connections. All module mounting hardware and power
wiring shall be captive or remain in place when a module is removed or replaced.
Enclosure: The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 12 dustight, driptight enclosure with no ventilation
openings.
.Integral Test Point: The unit shall incorporate an integral test point allowing easy off-line diagnostic testing which verifies
the operational integrity of the unit's suppression/filter system.
ACCESSORIES:
1. LED indicators shall be provided on the hinged front cover to redundantly indicate unit module status. Additionally, a Form C
(one N.O. and one N.C.) summary alarm contact rated for at least 120 VAC and 1 ampere shall be provided for remote annunciation of unit status. The summary alarm contact shall change state if any one or more of the surge current diversion
modules has failed.
270
2.
Integral Fused Disconnect Switch: The unit shall include an integral fused and safety interlocked disconnect switch located
in the unit enclosure with an externally mounted manual operator. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors from the distribution system to enable testing and maintenance without interruption of power to the facility's distribution system. The switch shall be rated for 600 Vac. Each current carrying ungrounded circuit conductor connected to the facility's distribution system shall be individually fused with 200,000 AIC rated fuses in order to provide maximum fault current
protection. The unit shall be UL 1449 Listed with the integral fused disconnect switch and the UL 1449 Suppression Rating
for this configuration shall be provided. (1.4.6 Performance Ratings.) Specify Integral Fused Disconnect Switch by adding a
"DF" suffix to the model number.
C. MANUFACTURERS:
1. Manufacturer: subject to compliance with requirements, provide TVSS products of the following:
a. Current technology
b. GE/Liebert
D. WARRANTY:
1. The manufacturer shall provide a full five year warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in
compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable national or local electrical
Codes.
DIVISION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
A. SUMMARY:
1. Extent, location, and details of project specific lighting will be indicated on drawings and in schedules. Types of lighting in
this section include the following:
a. High-intensity-discharge (HID). – (NOT ALLOWED)
b. Metal halide. – (NOT ALLOWED)
c. High Pressure Sodium (HPS). – (NOT ALLOWED)
d. Fluorescent.
e. Incandescent. – (Performance Stage only)
f. LED (Interior and Exterior applications)
g. Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL). – (Screw Ballast, exterior applications only)
h. Induction Lighting. – (Exterior applications only)
2. District Design Criteria:
a. HID is not allowed in Auditoriums; the basis of lighting for Auditoriums space should be dimmable LED system.
b. A/E shall consider LED lighting systems in Auditoriums both for house lighting and stage lighting. Review final recommendations with District prior to completing bidding documents.
c. Fixture accessibility must be considered when locating lights during the design phase. A/E shall pay specific attention
to insuring that fixtures are accessible in sloped floor conditions, high volume spaces and stairs.
d. Provide a spare circuit above each classroom and hallway to accommodate 120V spare circuit.
e. Conduit from all lighting controls to HVAC controllers shall be ¾”
f. Hardware all kiln to disconnects no exceptions.
g. Lighting control wire shall be to DMS, 24 volt.
B.
SUBMITTALS:
1. Interior: Provide isofootcandle(isolux) plot diagram of footcandles on horizontal workplane surface which shows composite
values of illuminance projected from the arrangement of light sources from indicated luminaire locations and heights. Show
on the graphic plots the locations, spacings and heights of luminaires. Indicate values of maximum, average, minimum and
maximum ratios.
2. Exterior: Provide isofootcandle (isolux) plot diagram of footcandles on horizontal pavement surface which shows composite
values of illuminance projected from the arrangement of light sources from indicated luminaire locations and heights. Show
on the graphic plots the locations, spacings and heights of luminaires.
C. EXTRA MATERIALS:
1. Lamps: Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15%, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and
size lamp used in each type luminaire.
2. Ballasts: Furnish stock or replacement ballasts amounting to 5%, but not less than 2 of each type used in each type luminaire.
271
3.
Lenses: Furnish stock or replacement lenses amounting to 3%, but not less than one, of each type and size used in each
type luminaire.
D. MANUFACTURERS:
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide luminaires as listed in the luminaire schedule or elsewhere on the drawings or specification.
a. Lamp Manufacturers:
1. G E Lighting
2. Osram Sylvania
3. Philips Lighting Company
b. Fluorescent Ballast Manufacturers:
1. Osram Sylvania
2. Advance
3. All other manufacturers shall request prior approval and supply test data from an independent testing laboratory
and comparison report to substantiate compliance with specifications and specified equipment.
c. High Bay Fixtures:
1. HE Williams high bay fixtures are only approved manufacture.
E.
EQUIPMENT:
1. Provide lighting of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to, housings, energy-efficient lamps,
lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship luminaires factory-assembled, with those components required for a complete installation. Design luminaire with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded
as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise and as to disconnect ballast when door is
opened for HQI lamps.
2. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within luminaire suitable for connecting to branch circuit wiring as follows:
a. NEC Type TFN for 120 and 277 volt and shall be minimum No. 18 AWG.
3. Lamps:
a. Fluorescent: Provide fluorescent lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Lamps shall be low mercury type. Provide 3500°K color temperature lamps unless otherwise noted in schedules or on drawings. Provide fluorescent fixtures for display cases.
b. Incandescent: Provide incandescent lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Provide frosted lamps unless otherwise noted.
c. High Intensity Discharge: Provide Metal Halide lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible
with luminaires. Lamps shall have burning position compatible with luminaire.
4. LED Lamps: Provide LED lighting systems as specified on drawings. System shall include LED lamps and electronic driver(s) as required for a complete and operable installation. LED lighting for site and parking lot fixtures is acceptable.
5. Interior Fluorescent Ballasts:
a. Provide high frequency programmed rapid start electronic ballasts for all fluorescent lamps with voltage as indicated on the plans and luminaire schedule.
b. The ballast total harmonic distortion shall be less than 20% with the number of lamps as identified per luminaire
type or as indicated in the luminaire schedule.
c. The ballast shall have a crest factor of less than 1.5 and shall have transient protection which meets IEEE 587,
Category A (ANSI C62.41) requirements.
d. The ballast shall have a power factor of 0.98 or higher, and shall have a ballast efficiency of 90% or higher.
e. The ballast shall be UL listed Class P and shall have a sound rating better than A.
f. The ballast electromagnetic interference and radio frequency interference shall comply with FCC CFR 47, Part 18
requirements for both conducted and radiated EMI/RFI.
g. The ballast shall contain no PCB's.
h. Minimum lamp starting temperature of 0 degrees F.
6. High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts: Provide multi-tap HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and makes as recommended
by lamp manufacturer, which properly mates and matches lamps to electrical supply by providing appropriate voltages and
impedances for which lamps are designed. Design ballast to operate lamp within the lamp’s power trapezoid requirements.
Minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. for exterior applications. Ballasts shall be constant wattage high
power factor type.
7. Exterior wall packs need to be 120V screw-shell medium base to accommodate self-ballasted compact fluorescent or LEDtype lamps.
F.
INSTALLATION:
272
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Luminaires shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system. The attachment device shall have a capacity of
100% of the luminaire weight acting in any direction.
When intermediate systems are used, No. 12 gauge hangers shall be attached to the grid members within 3" of each corner
of each luminaire.
When heavy-duty systems are used, supplemental hangers are not required if a 48" modular hanger pattern is followed.
When cross runners are used without supplemental hangers to support luminaires, these cross runners shall provide the
same carrying capacity as the main runner.
Luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements above, two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the luminaire housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack.
Luminaires weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the structure above by four No. 12 gauge hangers
connected from the luminaire housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack.
Pendant hung luminaires shall be supported directly from the structure above with No. 9 gauge wire or approved alternate
support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support.
DIVISION 26 50 10
EXTERIOR LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS
A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1. Applications of lighting poles and standards for a project may include the following:
a. Private roadways.
b. Automobile parking lots.
c. Vehicular storage areas.
d. Promenades/plazas.
e. Pedestrian walkways.
f. Building entrances.
B.
WALL MOUNTED FIXTIRES
1. Wall packs shall be 120V, screw shell, medium base, to accommodate self ballasted compact florescent or LED type bulbs.
C. POLES AND STANDARDS:
1. Metal Poles: Provide galvanized steel, tapered tubular seamless shaft poles, of sizes and types indicated, with 1/4inch bearing plates and ground sleeves for direct embedment. Provide removable step bolts 3/4 inch diameter and 6inches long with
threaded steel lugs welded to pole beginning 12 inches above finish grade. Space step bolts at 15 inches intervals on alternative sides of pole continuing to the top. Provide pole with adequately sized reinforced handhole complete with matching
cover and located on climbing side of pole, 18 inches above grade level. Weld 1/2 inch grounding nut on shaft with accessibility from handhole. Design poles to withstand loads developed by 100 MPH wind pressure, as adjusted for height above
ground level, structural shapes and cable/wire loading. Construct poles whose total length is over 40 feet in two sections for
shipping purposes.
2. All light pole bases shall be mounted to concrete cassons; standard exposure of cassion is 36” above, designer must have
written approval to mount them lower at pedestrian walkways.
3. Metal Pole Accessories: Provide accessories for metal poles, including crossarms, bolts, lifting eyes, and nuts as recommended by pole manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to meet erection and loading application requirements.
4. Pedestrian walkway lighting shall be pole mounted, no bollard type light fixtures or mountings. Pole height shall be a min of
12’-15’ high.
5. Provide only “stranded” THHN wires for underground locations (ie light poles)
6. No plastic underground rated electrical J-boxes, provide concrete only.
D. INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS:
1. Install lighting poles and standards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with
National Electrical Safety Code and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that poles and standards comply with requirements.
2. Where poles/standards are indicated to be embedded in soil, set poles approximately 1/6 of pole length, but not less than 5
feet 6 inches depth below finish grade.
E.
GROUNDING:
1. Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective grounds, where
indicated, for installed poles and standards.
a. Non-metallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting unit and foundations. Connect lighting to ground system
with No. 6 AWG conductor.
273
F.
MANUFACTURERS:
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of pole or standard).
a. Anchor Metals, Inc.
b. Marathon Steel Co.
c. Meyer Industries Div; ITT Corp.
d. Union Metal Mfg Co.
e. Valmont Industries, Inc.
DIVISION 26 50 20
SPORTS FIELD LIGHTING
A. SUMMARY
1. The purpose of these specifications is to define the performance and design standards for High School Track/Football field.
The manufacturer / contractor shall supply lighting equipment to meet or exceed the standards set forth by the criteria set
forth in these specifications. The sports lighting will be for the following fields:
a. Football / Soccer combo field
2. The primary design criteria for sports lighting associated with a performance field are:
a. Life Cycle Cost: In order to reduce the operating budget, the preferred lighting system shall be energy efficient and cost
effective to operate. All maintenance costs shall be eliminated, and the field(s) should be proactively monitored to detect fixture outages over a 25 year life cycle. To allow for optimized use of labor resources and avoid unneeded operation of the facility, customer requires a remote on/off control system for the lighting system.
b. Environmental Light Control: It is a primary goal of this project to minimize spill light and glare.
c. Guaranteed Light Levels: Selection of appropriate light levels impact the safety of the players and the enjoyment of
spectators. Therefore the lighting system shall be designed such that the light levels are guaranteed for a period of 25
years.
d. Number of Pole Stations and Height of Poles: Design consideration must be given to the minimization of pole height
and least number of poles to support desired lighting levels.
B.
LIGHTING PERFORMANCE
1. Performance Requirements: Playing surfaces shall be lit to an average constant light level and uniformity as specified in the
chart below. Light levels shall be held constant for 25 years. Lighting calculations shall be developed and field measurements taken on the grid spacing with the minimum number of grid points specified below. Measured average illumination
level shall be +/- 10% of predicted mean in accordance with IESNA RP-6-01, and measured at the first 100 hours of operation.
a. Area of Lighting Average Constant Light Levels
b. Maximum to Minimum Uniformity Ratio
c. Grid Points Grid Spacing
d. Football 40 footcandles 2:1.0 72 30’ x 30’
e. Soccer 40 footcandles 2:1.0 96 30’ x 30’
2. Mounting Heights: To ensure proper aiming angles for reduced glare and to provide better playability, the pole mounting
heights from the playing field surface shall be 90 feet max.
C. ENVIRONMENTAL LIGHT CONTROL
1. Spill Light Control: Average vertical illuminance at a distance of 100 feet from the perimeter of the field shall not exceed 8
footcandles. Average horizontal illuminance at a distance of 100 feet from the perimeter of the field shall not exceed 6
footcandles. Footcandle readings shall be taken at 30’ intervals along the specified line. Measured average illumination level
shall allow a 10% variance of predicted mean in accordance with IESNA RP-6-01, and be measured at the first 100 hours of
operation.
D. SYSTEM CONTROL/MAINTENANCE
1. Energy Consumption: The average kWh consumption for the field lighting system shall be 94 or less.
2. Complete Lamp Replacement: Manufacturer shall include all group lamp replacements required to provide 25 years of operation based upon 200 usage hours per year.
3. Preventative and Spot Maintenance: Manufacturer shall provide all preventative and spot maintenance, including parts and
labor for 25 years from the date of equipment shipment. Individual lamp outages shall be repaired when the usage of any
field is materially impacted. Owner agrees to check fuses in the event of a luminaire outage.
274
4.
5.
Remote Monitoring System: System shall monitor lighting performance and notify manufacturer if individual luminaire outage is detected so that appropriate maintenance can be scheduled. The manufacturer shall notify the owner of outages
within 24 hours, or the next business day. The controller shall determine switch position (Manual or Auto) and contactor status (open or closed).
Remote Lighting Control System: System shall allow owner and users with a security code to schedule on/off system operation via a web site, phone, fax or email up to ten years in advance. Manufacturer shall provide and maintain a two-way
TCP/IP communication link. Trained staff shall be available 24/7 to provide scheduling support and assist with reporting
needs. The owner may assign various security levels to schedulers by function and/or fields. This function must be flexible
to allow a range of privileges such as full scheduling capabilities for all fields, to only having permission to execute “early off”
commands by phone
E.
WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
1. 25-Year Warranty: Each manufacturer shall supply a signed warranty covering the entire system for 25 years. Warranty
shall guarantee light levels; lamp replacements; system energy consumption; monitoring, maintenance and control services,
spill light control, and structural integrity. Manufacturer shall maintain specifically-funded financial reserves to assure fulfillment of the warranty for the full term. Warranty may exclude fuses, storm damage, vandalism, abuse and unauthorized repairs or alterations.
2. Approved Product: Musco’s Light-Structure Green™ System is the approved product. All substitutions must provide a complete submittal package for approval as outlined in Submittal Information at the end of this section at least 10 days prior to
bid. Special manufacturing to meet the standards of this specification may be required. An addendum will be issued prior to
bid listing any other approved lighting manufacturers and designs.
3. Design Approval: The owner / engineer will review pre-bid shop drawings from the manufacturers to ensure compliance to
the specification. If the design meets the design requirements of the specifications, a letter will be issued to the manufacturer indicating approval for the specific design submitted.
F.
ALTERNATE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1. Compliance to Specifications: Acceptance of a bid alternate does not negate the contractor and lighting manufacturer’s responsibility to comply fully with the requirements of these specifications. Any exceptions to the specifications must be clearly
stated in the prior approval submittal documents.
2. Light Level Requirements: Manufacturer shall provide computer models guaranteeing light levels on the field over 25 years.
If a constant light level cannot be provided, a maximum Recoverable Light Loss Factor of 0.70 shall be applied to the initial
light level design to achieve the following Initial and target/maintained light levels.
3. System Description: Galvanized steel poles and crossarm assembly, Pre-stressed concrete base embedded in concrete
backfill allowed to cure for 12-24 hours before pole stress is applied. Alternate may be an anchor bolt foundation designed
such that the steel pole and any exposed steel portion of the foundation is located a minimum of 18 inches above final
grade. The concrete for anchor bolt foundations shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days before the pole stress is
applied.
4. All luminaires shall be constructed with a die-cast aluminum housing or external hail shroud to protect the luminaire reflector
system.
5. Manufacturer will remote all ballasts and supporting electrical equipment in aluminum enclosures mounted approximately
10’ above grade. The enclosures shall include ballast, capacitor and fusing for each luminaire. Safety disconnect per circuit
for each pole structure will be located in the enclosure.
6. Each pole shall also be equipped 1-1500w Quartz fixture to be used for emergency egress on the stadium stands and located 60’ above grade.
7. Lightning Protection: All structures shall be equipped with lightning protection meeting NFPA 780 standards. Contractor
shall supply and install a ground rod of not less than 5/8” in diameter and 8’ in length, with a minimum of 10’ embedment.
Ground rod should be connected to the structure by a copper main down conductor with a minimum size of #2 for poles with
less than 75’ mounting height and 2/0 for poles with more than 75’ mounting height.
8. Electric Power Requirements for the Sports Lighting Equipment: 480 Volt, 3 Phase
G. STRUCTURAL PARAMETERS
1. Support Structure Wind Load Strength: Poles and other support structures, brackets, arms, bases, anchorages and foundations shall be determined based on the 2006 edition of the IBC Building Code, wind speed of 110, exposure category C.
Luminaire, visor, and crossarm shall withstand 150 mph winds and maintain luminaire aiming alignment.
2. Providing engineered foundation embedment design by a registered engineer in the State of Colorado.
275
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
276
277
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
DIVISION 27 00 10
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
A. VISION
1. Technology and Low Voltage Systems - The St. Vrain Valley School District intends to provide a state-of-the-art infrastructure that advances information and educational technology in support of the District's Mission Statement. We provide a platform for enhanced educational opportunities by investing in systems that are nimble, reliable, and flexible. We envision an
environment that enables learning to occur at any time, from any place, and at any pace.
2. Application - The standards and “best practice” approaches described in this document are based on the principle that
Technology and Low Voltage Systems are similar to electrical power—a fundamental resource that should be readily available and easy to use, ubiquitous yet unobtrusive. Technology and Low Voltage Systems are a utility, a tool—not an end unto themselves. With this in mind, Technology and Low Voltage Systems for District facilities should advance the pedagogical
goals of the District, should be easy to use and maintain, should be standards-based, and should be applied consistently
across all schools district-wide.
B.
INTRODUCTION
1. General - This document serves as a technical specification guideline for the design of Technology and Low Voltage Systems for District facilities. The design of new facilities, additions to existing facilities, and renovations will conform to these
guidelines unless exceptions are granted by the District.
2. This specification shall also be used as a guideline for District-provided maintenance and repair.
3. Additional design and submittal requirements may apply for projects with unusual or highly technical content.
4. Since the industry standards, usage and concepts of technology systems advance at a rapid pace, these specifications and
guidelines shall be revisited and updated on a regular basis by St. Vrain Valley School District.
C. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. This document should be used in conjunction with the following related District documents:
a. High School Educational Specifications, November 14, 2008
b. Middle School Educational Specifications, November 14, 2008
c. Elementary School Educational Specifications, November 14, 2008
2. Reference Section 4 of this document for applicable Codes and Standards.
D. DESIGN GUIDELINES
1. Coordination - The Designer of Record will coordinate with the other design team members to ensure that all aspects of the
school facility are effective, compatible, and advance the District’s vision for technology and low voltage systems. Architectural, electrical, and mechanical design considerations, as they relate to technology and low voltage systems, are detailed
herein; it is the Designer of Record’s responsibility to coordinate these considerations with the architect, electrical engineer,
mechanical engineer and other members of the design team as necessary.
2. Systems Selection:
a. The type and complexity of technology and low voltage systems, and/or whether a particular system is necessary, will
depend upon the type of school, its size, and its location. There may also be special cases that justify the need for a
particular system or systems.
b. All design features must be weighed carefully for their initial cost, long-term maintenance cost and needs, durability,
and impact on the environment.
c. Ease of use and maintenance of systems is critical. The specification of systems that require extensive training to use
or require highly skilled personnel to maintain should be avoided to the extent possible. The systems ultimately selected for a school should be those that provide for optimal ease of use and maintenance while satisfying the stated performance criteria. In some cases, this may mean providing systems that are initially more costly, but that will have
markedly lower maintenance costs or are substantially easier to use.
3. Designer Qualifications - It is recommended that the Designer of Record for technology and low voltage systems be a consulting and/or engineering firm with one or more of the following credentials held by individuals on staff. These individuals
shall be responsible for the specific design aspects of the project.
a. RCDD (Registered Communications Distribution Designer), a certification from BICSI (Building Industry Consulting
Services International), exhibiting proficiency in understanding and design of voice/data transport systems.
b. CTS (Certified Technology Specialist), a certification from InfoComm International, exhibiting proficiency in understanding and design of audiovisual systems.
278
E.
F.
4. Documents - It is recommended that low voltage systems be specified under their own Division within the project specifications, and that they be shown on a T series of drawings. Electrical infrastructure, such as conduits, boxes, et cetera, shall
be either shown on the T series of drawings, or coordinated with the Electrical Engineer on the project.
CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES
1. Sub-contractor to the General Contractor - It is recommended that low-voltage systems be constructed by a contractor(s) directly subcontracted to the general contractor; however, may be subcontracted to the electrical subcontractor.
DEVIATION FROM THIS STANDARD
1. Request for Deviation -Requests for deviation from this standard must be in writing. Indicate the standard (paragraph number and item/issue) that is under consideration, the reason for the request, the proposed deviation, and the expected budgetary impact.
2. Written Approval - Deviations from this standard must be approved in writing by both the Chief Information Officer and the
Director of Construction Management.
G. CODES AND STANDARDS
1. General - All applicable codes, industry standards, and District standards will be followed.
a. Where conflicts exist between codes and standards, code will govern. However, if the non-code requirement of the
standard (or portion thereof) exceeds that of the code, and is furthermore not contrary to the code, the non-code requirement (or portion thereof) will prevail.
b. Where conflicts exist between industry standards and District Standards, in general the District Standards will prevail.
However, the Designer of Record will document and reconcile the conflicting standards with the District prior to the
completion of design.
2. Standards-based systems will enable District schools to make use of consistent training and operations and maintenance
(O&M) information across all facilities, and in turn enable personnel moving between schools to immediately use and/or
maintain the systems with little or no additional training. Technical knowledge will be consistent and thus more readily available, allowing staff to share knowledge between facilities and to provide each other with assistance when necessary.
H. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
1. Standards for low voltage systems will primarily consist of the Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industries Alliance (TIA/EIA) telecommunications standards and the applicable standards published by the Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Guidelines based upon these standards will also be used, the most notable of which are
the materials published by BICSI.
2. The technology and low voltage system designs will comply with the pertinent sections of the following:
a. ANSI J-STD-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
b. ANSI/EIA 310-D: Cabinets, Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment
c. BICSI: Outside Plant Design Reference Manual
d. BICSI: Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual
e. BICSI: Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual
f. BICSI: Network Design Reference Manual
g. BICSI: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
h. BICSI: Wireless Design Reference Manual
i. FCC Part 15
j. IEEE 802.3 (series): Local Area Network Ethernet Standards
k. IEEE 802.11 (series): Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications
l. IEEE C62.41: Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
m. NFPA 70: NEC: National Electrical Code (NFPA Article 70)
n. TIA/EIA 568: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
o. TIA/EIA 569: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces
p. TIA/EIA 606: The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
q. TIA/EIA 758: Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard
r. TIA/EIA: Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) (related to the above TIA/EIA standards)
s. UL 1449: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
3. In addition to the standards and guidelines noted above and listed below, all low voltage installations will comply with all pertinent national, state, and local regulations.
DIVISION 27 10 00
STRUCTURED CABELING
A. TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
279
1.
2.
B.
District Standard Manufacturers/Systems
a. AMP Netconnect: End-to-end cabling system including copper and fiber cabling, connectors, terminations and termination equipment (such as patch panels), other associated and incidental components, and testing and commissioning.
b. Panduit / General Cable: May be permitted as an alternate specification with SVVSD approval if AMP Netconnect
product is not available at time of construction.
c. Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI): Racks, frames, cabinets, enclosures, rack cable distribution hardware, cable runway
(ladder rack), and other distribution and associated incidental components.
d. Arlington: Loops and straps for supporting cables in ceiling spaces.
Contractors - Telecommunications Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and must be certified by AMP as an
Amp Netconnect Design and Installation (ND&I) Contractor.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS
1. General
a. Telecommunications Rooms (TR) provide a connection point between backbone cabling and horizontal cabling and
house equipment for other systems such as security, access control, public address and building automation systems.
b. At a minimum, every facility will have a Primary Telecommunications Room (also known as an MDF). Facilities requiring additional TRs will be equipped with one or more Secondary Telecommunications Rooms (also known as an IDF).
The type and quantity of equipment in the TRs will be determined by whether it is a Primary or Secondary TR.
2. Equipment
a. Racks - Equipment racks will be 19 inches wide with universal alternating hole pattern on both sides of the posts, 3
inch channels, 2 posts, top angles, self supporting bases, and assembly hardware.
b. Server frames will be 19 inch wide with 5/8 inch-5/8 inch-1/2 inch alternating square hole pattern complete with cage
nuts for mounting equipment, 3 inch by 1.265 inch C-channels, 4 posts, top angles, self-supporting bases, and top and
bottom extension pans, plate nuts and assembly hardware.
c. Primary TR (MDF): Typically two (2) server frames and two (2) equipment racks are required within a Primary TR (one
rack for station cabling, one for backbone cabling and two equipment frames for networking/server equipment and public address equipment). The Primary TR will have space for one (1) future equipment rack or server frame to be installed at one end. There must be a minimum of 3-feet of clearance to the front and rear of the rack/frame (the
rack/frame, when loaded with equipment, can be assumed to be 3-feet deep).
3. Configuration
a. This configuration is subject to change depending on the size of the room and alternative requirements coordinated
with the District, but any deviation resulting in a room smaller than that required by the above must be approved by the
District in writing.
Figure 1 – Typical Primary TR Layout (Quantity of racks will vary. All racks should be in one continuous row.)
280
b.
c.
Secondary TR (IDF): Typically two (2) equipment racks are required within a Secondary TR. The Secondary TR will
have space for one (1) future equipment rack to be installed at one end. There must be a minimum of 3-feet of clearance to the front and rear of the equipment mounted in each rack (the rack, when loaded with equipment, can be assumed to be 3-feet deep).
Configuration - This configuration is subject to change depending on the size of the area to be served by the TR, but
any deviation resulting in a room smaller than that required by the above must be approved by the District in writing.
Figure 1- Typical TR Layout (quantity of equipments racks will vary – 3 shown)
Figure 2 - Raceway for Typical Rack Elevations
45
45
45
44
44
44
43
43
43
42
42
42
41
41
41
40
40
40
39
39
39
38
38
38
37
37
37
36
36
36
35
35
35
34
34
34
33
33
33
32
32
32
31
31
31
30
30
30
29
29
29
28
28
27
27
26
26
25
25
24
23
FUTURE
24
23
28
27
26
PATCH
PANELS
25
24
EQUIPMENT
23
22
22
22
21
21
21
20
20
20
19
19
19
18
18
18
17
17
17
16
16
16
15
15
15
14
14
14
13
13
13
12
12
12
11
11
11
10
10
10
9
9
9
8
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
281
4.
Ladder rack
a. Ladder rack will be placed along each wall and affixed above and parallel to the racks in all Telecom Rooms. The color
of the ladder rack will be factory-painted black.
b. Radius dropout accessories shall be provided at horizontal ladder racks where cabling traverses vertically, i.e. dropping into rack vertical managers, or onto vertical ladder racks for wall-mounted equipment.
5.
Wall board - In all Telecommunications Rooms the walls will be covered with 8ft high backboards (3/4 inch thick, AC-grade,
fire rated). Terminal boards shall have fire-rated stamp visible, and not be painted.
A.
ARCHITECTURAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. TRs should be located in building “core” areas, and in areas more central to the space being served. TRs should not be colocated within or otherwise share space with mechanical, electrical or custodial spaces. Ceiling spaces in TRs should be left
open and false/suspended ceilings are neither required nor desirable. Doors should swing out of the room in order to maximize the use of the room. Fire protection, where required, is recommended to be FM-200 canister-type chemical agent, or
similar. If a wet pipe system, wire cages should be installed around sprinkler heads to prevent accidental operation. TRs
should also be located so as to eliminate any threat of flooding (i.e. not located adjacent to restrooms). TRs should not be
located on an exterior wall if possible.
2. Each TR should serve a radius of approximately 150 feet and approximately 25,000 square feet if the TR is centrally located. It is possible that additional TRs may be required due to the distance between outlets and the TR on a given floor. For
multi-floor facilities, TRs should be stacked – this eliminates the costly and difficult need to coordinate backbone raceway
between non-stacked TRs, decreases the cost of cabling between TRs, provides better backbone cabling security, and
eases future maintenance burden on the Owner.
3. Sizing:
a. Primary TR: The minimum size for a Primary TR (without co-located EF) is 9 feet by 12 feet, will walls to structure.
However, 10 feet by 14 feet (minimum) is recommended. In addition, a larger space may be required for Primary TRs
that are also serving as a Server Room or if there are significant Service Provider requirements to be accommodated
for in the space.
b. Secondary TR: The minimum size for a Secondary TR is 9 feet by 10 feet, with walls to structure. However, 10 feet by
12 feet is recommended.
B.
ELECTRICAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. Building - If a building generator and/or building UPS will be provided for the facility, circuits requiring backup power shall be
coordinated between the Low-Voltage Consultant, the District and the Electrical Engineer.
a. Telecommunications Rooms - The Designer of Record should work with the Owner to determine the projected and future expansion loads for a given TR, and provide that information to the Electrical Engineer for load sizing. The electrical sizing for the TR will be based upon that load.
1. One or more rack mounted Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) will be provided by the District for each TR.
These UPSes may require special receptacles. The Designer of Record is to provide this receptacle information
to the Electrical Engineer.
2. UPSes providing greater than 750 volt-amps capacity are typically required to have remote emergency power off
(RE: NEC Article 645). These requirements shall be coordinated with the Electrical Engineer.
a. At a minimum, a TR should be provided with convenience receptacles on each wall, and two (2) 20-amp dedicated twist-lock (NEMA L5-20R) receptacles for each equipment rack mounted on unistrut above the racks
(i.e. a TR with two racks would have four (4) 20-amp dedicated receptacles for the racks). In addition, the
Primary TR should have one (1) dedicated 30-amp twist-lock (NEMA L6-30R) receptacle over each four-post
rack.
b. Provisions will be made for additional circuits and receptacles as necessary for equipment to be mounted on
the walls and/or for other to be located within the room. Such equipment could consist of fire alarm, access
control equipment, AV equipment, etc.
c. Wall electrical receptacles will be flush mounted with the backboard (surface mounted electrical receptacles
interfere with the mounting of horizontal ladder racking and restrict the surface area available for wall mounting communications equipment.
d. One or more rack mounted UPS’ will be provided and installed by the District.
282
C. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. General
a. The Designer of Record should work with the Owner to determine the projected and future heat loads for a given TR,
and provide that information to the Mechanical Engineer for heat load sizing. The cooling requirements for the TR will
be based upon that load plus 50% spare/future capacity.
b. Positive air pressure will be required. Temperature should be maintainable at a maximum of 75°F.
c. Direct humidification is not required.
d. Dedicated environmental controls will be required in all TRs that house equipment with significant thermal load potential, such as core switches, Power over Ethernet (PoE) switches, computers, servers, and/or other equipment with significant power loads and/or heat output. Rooms can share systems with the core building environmental control system, but the room must be able to maintain its controlled environment 24/7.
e. In rooms that do not require the use of dedicated environmental control systems the room will require active ventilation
with a dedicated thermostat at a minimum.
D. LIGHTING CONSIDERATIONS
1. Lighting in a Telecommunications Room should be a minimum of 500 lux (50 foot candles) on the vertical surface at the
lowest point of termination.
2. Lighting fixtures should be installed in front of, behind and parallel to the racks. Lighting fixtures should not interfere with cable pathways. Light fixtures shall be installed with minimum clearances to telecommunications cabling systems considered.
E.
F.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS FOR MODULAR BUILDINGS, FIELD HOUSE, PRESS BOX, AND CONCESSION STANDS.
1. TRs for modular buildings or field houses do not need to satisfy the above requirements. However, space is to be provided
within each building to house an IT cabinet (or small closet). The cabinet may be wall mounted (or a wall-mounted rack
may be used in a small closet) and sized to accommodate all IT connections within the building, as well as the electronic
equipment (primarily switches and a rack-mountable UPS) necessary to serve the connections. The IT cabinet/rack should
be configured similar to that of the equipment racks in the TR’s described above (albeit on a smaller scale) and should also
be secured with a locking device.
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
1. Backbone cabling
a. Inside Plant (inside of the Building)
1. General - Backbone cabling connects the communications rooms to one another in a star topology. The backbone
cabling will consist of multimode fiber and multipair copper.
b. Fiber
1. Fiber backbone cabling will be 850nm Laser optimized 50/125 μm multimode cable, plenum rated. The minimum
fiber backbone size is 12-strand, aqua color.
2. Connector type will be LC, epoxy polish, with connectors specified to match the fiber core size.
c. Multipair - Multipair copper backbone cables will be provided for copper based communications signals, and shall be
rated Category 5e. The minimum copper backbone size will be 12-pair, but should be ultimately sized according to the
number of communications circuits to be served.
2. Outside Plant (outside of the building)
a. General - Outside plant (OSP) backbone cabling will connect a facility to service providers, the District backbone and
buildings external to the main facility (i.e. modular building or a concessions/field house building).
b. Service Entrance - Service Provider Cabling: OSP backbone cable for service provider connectivity will be provided by
the service provider. The District will coordinate with their selected Service Provider(s) for the installation of this cabling.
c. Multi-Building Site:
1. In addition to the service provider cabling (see Single Building Site above) there may be buildings external to a facility (such as modular building(s) or a concessions/field house near the athletic fields) that require OSP cabling for
communications with the main facility. These cables should be installed in conduits and not buried directly in the
ground.
2. Fiber backbone cabling between the main building and the external building will be 850nm Laser optimized 50/125
μm multimode cable, powder-filled non-armored cable, rated for outdoor direct-burial use. The minimum fiber
backbone size is 8-strand, aqua color. Transition cabinets for proper OSP/Premises cable transition and cable
bonding shall be installed on both ends of cable.
3. Multipair copper backbone cabling between the main building and the external building will be provided for
voice/analog grade communications. Cable will be rated Category 5e, rated for outdoor direct-burial use. These
backbone cables will be terminated on 66-type termination (wiring) blocks. The minimum copper backbone size will
283
be 25-pair, but should be sized according to the number of voice grade ports to be served. Building entrance protectors (BEPs) will be provided.
G. HORIZONTAL (WORKSTATION) CABLING
1. General
a. Station cabling will consist of Category 6 cable from each outlet to the outlet’s assigned TR. All horizontal cabling will
be terminated sequentially on patch panels in equipment racks. Cable will be plenum rated.
b. All Category 6 cable will be color coded based on application:
1. Blue – Data/Network
2. White – VoIP/Voice
3. Green – CCTV/Security
4. Yellow – Audiovisual
5. Others as determined by District.
c. All data jacks will be color coded based on application:
1. Red – Network
2. White – Voice
d. At the faceplate voice ports will be white/ivory in color and data ports will be orange in color. Port A (i.e. the 1 st or top
port) is designated for voice. All of the remaining ports are considered to be data.
e. In general, a typical outlet will consist of two ports (one voice and one data). Wireless Access Points (WAP), IP Security Cameras and the Multi-Media System will require only one data port.
1. Offices - Single occupant offices will be served with a minimum of two 2-port outlets. Cubicle areas, if present, will each be served with one 2-port outlet.
2. Classrooms/Science Labs - Typical classrooms will be served with six ports. Three ports (one voice and two
data) will be located near the teaching location. In addition, one voice and one data port will be located at an
alternate teaching location, and one data port will be provided for a wireless access point.
Figure 3- Typical Classroom Layout
3.
In addition to the ports required for a typical classroom, science labs will have a minimum of four additional ports for specialized science equipment. Locations for these additional outlets should be determined on a case-by-case basis.
284
2. Computer Labs - Computer labs will be cabled such that a dedicated data port will be provided for every network-accessing
device (PCs, printers, et cetera). These data ports should be fed from the wall. There will also be a teaching location with
three ports (one voice and two data).
3. Gymnasiums - Gymnasiums will be served with a minimum of two (2) one port outlets for wireless access points, and two
(2) two port outlets, one on each opposing wall.
4. Theaters - Locations and quantities of outlets will be determined on a case-by-case basis according to the requirements of
the space and as approved by the District.
H. PATCH CORDS/CABLES: All patch cords/cables will be furnished and installed by the Owner.
I.
TERMINATION EQUIPMENT
1. Patch panels
a. Copper: Horizontal cable patch panels will be 2U 48 port, modular type and rated Category 6. There should be an indefinite number of spare ports in the patch panel in the horizontal cabling rack, targeting 25% spare capacity. Patchpanels shall be unloaded type, and ports in patchpanels shall be color-coded snap-in type to match horizontal cabling
color coding.
b. Fiber: In the Primary TR the (FDU) will be a 2U rack mount enclosure with five (5) snap-in LC duplex adaptor plates
and blank inserts to cover unused openings. In the Secondary TR(s), Modular Buildings or Field Houses the FDU will
be a 1U rack mounted enclosure with one (1) snap-in LC duplex adaptor plate and blank inserts to cover unused openings.
2. Termination blocks: Termination blocks will be 110 type blocks.
J.
LOOPS/STRAPS - Main pathway trunks will use 5-inch loops, and branch pathways are to use 2-1/2-inch loops. Place straps
every four to five feet.
K.
TESTING/COMMISSIONING - Testing will be in accordance with applicable TIA/EIA standards. The Owner reserves the right to
have a representative present during all or a portion of the testing process. If the Owner elects to be present during the testing,
test results will only be acceptable when conducted in the presence of the owner representative. Testing shall be performed for
each and every cable in the system. Test results for each cable shall be provided to the Owner for review, an included with the
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual turned over by the Contractor.
L.
LABELING - Identifiers (labels) are to be as recommended in TIA/EIA 606-A. The contractor will be required to maintain an outlet
reference spreadsheet and cabling administration floor plan throughout construction (for the District’s use), documenting outlet
and patch panel port names correlating to the Drawings. Labeling spreadsheet and Cable Administration Drawings shall be
turned over to District in O&M Manual.
M. SPECIAL CASE AND RENOVATION CONSIDERATIONS (SEE SYSTEMS OVERVIEW MATRIX)
1. Renovations: All existing cabling and/or patch cords all areas of the facility that does not meet or exceed CAT5e rating will
be replaced with CAT6 cabling, even if the cables are located in areas that are not directly involved in the renovation. Existing CAT5e rated cabling may be retained when it is not to be used by systems requiring CAT6 infrastructure; Cat5e infrastructure shall be tested and certified to properly accommodate 1000BASE-TX in order to be reused.
DIVISION 27 40 00
AUDIO VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS
A. DISTRICT STANDARDS
1. Projector: Epson. Confirm manufacturer and model number with the District on a project-by-project basis.
2. Projection Screen: Da-Lite manual front-projection screen, 16:10 aspect ratio format, 94” diagonal, 1.0-1.1 screen gain.
Screens shall be ceiling- or wall-mounted depending on installation.
3. Multi-Media System: Calypso ezRoom . This system includes video and audio switching, control, amplifier, speakers, priority page control, cabling, interface plates and projector mounting. Confirm the use of this system with the District on a project-by-project basis.
4. Wireless Microphone Receiver: Standard with Multi-Media System.
B. CONTRACTORS - AV Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and must be certified by the primary AV equipment manufacturers.
285
C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – CLASSROOM MULTI-MEDIA SYSTEMS
1. Sound Reinforcement
a. Provide audio amplification for computer (or any other device) generated audio signals uniformly throughout the classroom via the Multi-Media System.
b. Provide voice reinforcement for teachers within the classroom using a wireless microphone accessory to the MultiMedia System.
2. Video Distribution - Provide video switching and distribution of various signal types from two (2) wall plate locations within
the classroom routed to the projection system via the Multi-Media System.
3. Low Voltage System Control - Provide a low voltage control system operated via a wall mounted button panel that will control the functionality of the Multi-Media System:
a. Audio and Video signal switching
b. Audio volume control/muting
c. Control of auxiliary devices as needed via bi-directional RS-232 serial data stream, Infrared or dry contact closure
Figure 5 – Multi-Media System Keypad Configuration
4.
Muting/Override
a. Provide audio muting signal from the Paging System to the Multi-Media System such that during an event the audio
signal being distributed via the classroom loudspeakers will be muted.
b. Provide assurance that override is operational as part of testing/commissioning procedure.
5.
Testing/Commissioning
a. Contractor/Vendor shall provide a full system testing and commissioning effort. The testing/commissioning agent shall
create a comprehensive system operation plan checklist for every system installed, and ensure installation passes all
modes of operation prior to turnover.
b. Testing will be in accordance with applicable standards. The Owner reserves the right to have a representative present
during all or a portion of the testing process. If the Owner elects to be present during the testing, test results will only
be acceptable when conducted in the presence of the owner representative. Testing shall be performed for each and
every component in the system. Test results for each component and sub-system shall be provided to the Owner for
review, an included with the Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual turned over by the Contractor.
DIVISION 27 50 00
SECURITY
286
A.
DISTRICT STANDARDS
1. Contractors - Security Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District. The District will provide pre-qualified contractors on
a project-by-project basis. The CCTV Control System/server will require 4 feet by 8 feet of wall space within the Primary
TR, a 120VAC dedicated circuit with UPS and cable pathway from the TR to Workstation locations.
2. Location - Location for the District provided CCTV Monitoring workstation will need to be determined. This will typically be
in the Administration area.
B.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Manufacturers/Systems
a. Access Control Head-End: Keyscan
b. Proximity Readers: HID
2. General
a. A Card Access Control System will require 4 feet by 8 feet of wall space within the Primary TR, a 120VAC dedicated circuit and cable pathway from the TR to device locations. This area may be shared with the Intrusion Detection System, but
each system will require a separate dedicated electrical circuit.
b. A location for the District provided access control workstation will need to be determined. This will typically be in the Administration area.
c. Raceway for controlled doors will be necessary. Consult District maintenance for specific installation examples pending
hardware use.
3. Equipment
a. Interior door hardware will typically consist of an electric strike and a door position switch.
b. Hardware for exterior controlled doors will typically consist of an electric latch retraction mechanism and a door position
switch.
c. Hardware for exterior monitored doors will only require a door position switch.
d. Card readers will be a proximity type reader.
4. Specific Requirements
a. Elementary and Middle schools
1. Interior Doors - Entry into the Administration area from the interior of the vestibule will be controlled with a controlled door for access after hours. During normal hours the door will remain unlocked so that visitors may enter
the admin area to sign in. A remote lock-disable interface will be located at the administration area front desk.
2. Exterior doors - Public entryways will require controlled doors. All other exterior doors will be monitored.
b. High schools
1. Interior Doors:
a. Entry into the Administration area from the interior of the vestibule will be controlled with a controlled door for
after-hours access. During normal hours the door will remain unlocked so that visitors may enter the admin
area to sign in.
b. Traffic flow in the building may be controlled using controlled doors. For example the athletic wing may have
an activity, but entry into the administrative area would be prohibited without proper card access.
c. If an SRO office is located in an interior vestibule then a button will be required in that office so that the SRO
can unlock the interior vestibule doors and allow people to pass through the vestibule and into the building.
2. Exterior Doors:
a. Public entryways will require controlled doors. All other exterior doors will be monitored.
5. Owner Provided Equipment
a. The computer used to host the Access Control System software will be provided by the District.
C. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CAMERA SYSTEM)
a. Systems Format: Hybrid (Analog / IP) capable.
b. DVR-Software: GeoVision, Axis, Honeywell.
c. Cameras: Honeywell, Pelco, Axis, Acti, Aerocont. Analog cameras are preferred. Confirm part numbers with the District on a project-by-project basis.
d. Computer: The DVR computer will be a Windows based system that exceeds the recommended requirements for the
operating system and the DVR software.
2. General
a. The video surveillance system will be a hybrid system which will enable it to use either IP or analog cameras.
b. CCTV Server will provide recording for up to 32 analog cameras capable of recording 30 fps on each channel at a 720
x 480 resolution. H.264 compression is also a requirement. Digital video recorder (DVR) will provide for recording and
287
viewing of camera video. The video will be stored for a minimum of two weeks. Video will be recorded at a minimum of
30 frames per second at 480 TV lines resolution, with a connected capacity of 32 cameras. DVR capacity specification
for IP-cameras shall be determined in concert with the District on a case-by-case basis.
c. UTP cabling used for Video Surveillance cabling will be green in color, in order to differentiate it from Telecommunications Cabling.
d. Video from the access control system cannot be sent over the District’s data network without coordination with the ITS
department and the Electrical department. If IP cameras are to be used, the cameras shall be installed on a physically
separate network from general data network.
e. Light poles used for mounting exterior mounted cameras should be reinforced to reduce movement due to wind and
other external forces.
f. Roof mounted cameras will be parapet mounted when possible.
g. Wireless communication devices may be required for exterior cameras located in areas where it may not be practical
or cost effective to extend cable (i.e. athletic facilities, parking lots).
h. Interior cameras shall be installed as directed by the District. Confirm locations during design.
i. Exterior cameras will be specified with appropriate environmental housings. Consideration shall be given to utilizing
pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras in justifying circumstances.
3. Areas of Coverage - Camera coverage areas will consist of areas exterior to the building, parking areas, driveways, courtyards and public areas, areas adjacent to the school property (e.g. a park across the street from a school where people
might gather) and athletic facilities (e.g. dugouts and other structures that might be subject to graffiti or other acts of vandalism). See the Systems Overview Matrix for more information.
D. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
a. Head-End: GE – NX-8E
b. Sensor: Honeywell
2. General
a. The Intrusion Detection System will require 4 feet by 8 feet of wall space within the Primary TR, a 120VAC dedicated
circuit and cable pathway from the TR to device locations. This area may be shared with Access Control System, but
each system will require a separate dedicated electrical circuit.
b. The system will disarmed by a validated card read by the Access Control System, and/or by coded keypad.
3. Equipment
a. Motion sensors will be ceiling mounted infrared motion sensors, or wall-mounted where ceilings are greater than 12’-0”.
b. Keypads in Elementary Schools: Keypad shall be located at main entry, near Administration area.
c. Keypads in Middle and High Schools:
1. Keypad shall be located in each wing of school, specifically at auxiliary building entrances.
2. Master keypad shall be located at main entry, near Administration area.
4. Areas of Coverage
a. Areas to be monitored include interior corridors and administration areas.
DIVISION 27 50 00
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM / INTERCOM /BELL
A. MANUFACTURERS/SYSTEMS - Rauland-Borg Telecenter ICS
B.
CONTRACTORS - Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and certified by the Manufacturer.
C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS –
1. Provide cabling infrastructure to support future two-way communications (i.e. future intercom call buttons) in classrooms.
2. During an emergency page, local Multi-Media systems are to be overridden/auto-muted to facilitate the broadcast of the
emergency message.
3. Integrate with the Wireless Clock System to provide synchronized bell operations.
D. HEAD-END
1. The public address head-end will provide telephone interface ports for connection to the facility phone system, enabling any
standard phone on the facility phone system to access the public address system and distribute a message (or initiate an intercom call).
2. The processor will provide the option for 2 two-way intercom type communication connectivity utilizing the facilities classrooms loudspeakers provided that additional software and electronic modules for the head-end are purchased.
288
3. Head-end cabinet shall be located in the building Primary TR (MDF).
DIVISION 27 50 10
WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
A. MANUFACTURERS/SYSTEMS - Sapling SMC 2000 Series
B. CONTRACTORS
1. Upon written approval from the District, the District will provide and install the Wireless Clock System (this is the case for
most projects).
2. Where the District will not be providing the Wireless Clock System, contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and certified by the manufacturer. The District will provide pre-qualified contractors where this is the case.
C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The clock system will be a wireless type system that continually synchronizes clocks throughout the facility, and integrates
with the Public Address system so that the clock and bell systems are synchronized.
2. The clocks will be battery powered
3. The type of clock face will be analog in classrooms, digital LED in corridors.
4. Head-end cabinet shall be located in building Primary TR (MDF).
DIVISION 27 50 20
RADIO RE-AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM (BDA, DAS, IRS, ETC)
A. SPECIAL CASE AND RENOVATION CONSIDERATIONS (SEE SYSTEMS OVERVIEW MATRIX)
1. Radio re-amplification systems are used for enhancing signals such as public safety radio frequencies or cellular coverage
and are not required by the District, but may be required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Determine if this system
is required by the AHJ. Provide as required.
DIVISION 27 50 30
ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN/INFRASTRUCTURE
A. COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
a. Standard Outlet Box: Electrical Contractor preference.
b. Floor Box: FSR, Wiremold, Hubbell.
c. Fire-Stopping Pathway Devices: STI/EZ-Path
B.
CONTRACTORS - No pre-qualification necessary. Contractor must be a licensed Electrician.
C. CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE - Raceway serving the outlets within a facility will be 1-inch (minimum) conduit
from the outlet device box to accessible ceiling space (with bushing). Each box will have a dedicated conduit to the ceiling (i.e.
“daisy chaining” of boxes is not acceptable). Flexible conduit is not acceptable in new construction. ENT ‘Smurftube’ conduit
may be considered for renovations.
D. SLEEVES
1. For multi-floor facilities, a minimum of four 4-inch sleeves will connect the TR to the TR(s) above and/or below. At least two
(2) sleeves shall be filled with 1-1/2” ENT innerducts. For TRs with a higher concentration of cable additional sleeves may
be required. If the TR is also an Entrance Facility (EF) then additional sleeves may be required. Backbone cabling and horizontal cabling will be placed in separate sleeves so additional sleeves may be required if there is backbone and horizontal
cable running between TRs.
2. One 2-inch conduit will provide a cable path from a TR (typically on the highest level) to the roof for future services/equipment (e.g. antenna, etc.).
E.
FIRE-STOPPING PATHWAY DEVICES
1. EZ-Path Fire-stopping pathway devices are the preferred pathway through smoke- or fire-rated structures and provide a
code-compliant pathway for communications cabling through smoke- or fire-rated barriers. Fire-stopping pathway devices
will be provided in quantities equal to the volume of the usable volume of the pathway (such as cable tray) it serves.
F.
DEVICE BOXES
1. Outlet device boxes will be 4-11/16-inch by 4-11/16-inch by 2-1/8-inch deep capable of accepting up to a 1-1/4-inch conduit
(1-inch conduit will be typical), with 1-inch extension ring, single-gang mud ring, and knockouts pre-manufactured to support
289
the conduit sizes serving the box. Surface raceway (such as Wiremold) will be avoided to the extent possible in new facilities, but may be provided where no other option is available.
2. Some equipment (i.e., security camera, speaker, etc.) may require the more standard 4-inch by 4-inch box.
G. FLOOR BOXES AND POKE-THROUGH DEVICES
1. Special Case and Renovation Considerations (see Systems Overview Matrix)
a. Special Case: The use of floor boxes and/or poke through devices will be avoided to the extent possible, but may be
provided where no other option is available and after consultation with the Owner and Architect. Conduits feeding
these devices will be fed underslab (for slab-on-grade installations) or fed from the ceiling space of the floor below.
H. GROUNDING AND BONDING
1. An industry standard telecommunications grounding system will connect all telecommunications spaces and the racks and
raceway equipment within them to the building ground. The primary TR will be equipped with a telecommunications main
grounding busbar (TMGB), and the other TRs will be equipped with the telecommunications grounding busbars (TGBs). The
busbars will interconnected with the grounding wire, sized per BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual,
and connected to the building ground.
DIVISION 27 50 40
SITE INFRASTRUCTURE
A. GENERAL
1. Site infrastructure consists of the vaults and pathway outside of the facility. This infrastructure will connect various buildings
and equipment located on the campus to the main building cable pathway. The site infrastructure will enter the building in
the entrance facility which will typically be the primary TR.
B.
OUTSIDE PLANT DUCTS / DUCTBANKS
1. Ductbanks will consist of a minimum of four 4-inch conduits (minimum one spare) and will run from the facility’s Primary TR
(MDF) to a communications vault located near the edge of the property (see below). If there are intermediary vaults then
additional conduits may be required.
2. In addition, a minimum of two 2-inch conduits (minimum one spare) will run from the facility’s Primary TR (MDF) to a television service provider vault located near the edge of the property.
3. For multi-building campuses, ductbanks will also run from the main facility’s Primary TR (MDF) to each of the outbuildings.
Size of the ductbanks will be determined on a case-by-case basis, but in no case shall consist of less than one (1) 2-inch
conduit.
4. Multiple ENT innerducts shall be provided in conduits, in a variety of sizes for varying uses.
C. OUTSIDE PLANT VAULTS
1. Outside plant vaults (man-holes) will be located in strategic areas where required due to distance limitations of duct bank
runs and cable performance requirements. One or more vault(s) will be placed near the edge of the property for connectivity
to service provider facilities. Additional vaults may be placed in intermediate locations for connectivity to other equipment
and/or building on the campus.
2. Vaults shall be standard load-bearing type. H20-rated vault lids are only required where absolutely necessary; determine
locations in concert with District.
D. SERVICE PROVIDER COORDINATION
1. The Designer of Record will coordinate with the various Service Providers to properly locate vaults near service provider facilities. The District will provide the contact information for those Service Providers.
DIVISION 27 50 50
OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. GENERAL
1. The equipment and systems in this section will be provided and installed by the District, except where such equipment is an
integral part of a system being provided by the contractor (such as servers used for management and storage related to security cameras).
2. Supporting cable infrastructure shall be provided and installed by the contractor, as is described in Division 27 10 00 of this
document.
3. Contractor: Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor is not responsible for the following equipment (i.e. the District will furnish and install these systems and equipment):
290
B.
DATA NETWORK
1. General: The Data Network consists of network infrastructure equipment (routers, switches, etc.)
2. Manufacturer: Cisco Systems
C. WIRELESS DATA NETWORK—SITE SURVEY
1. General: Wireless data network site survey consists of a radio frequency analysis of the site for planning the placement of
wireless equipment.
D. WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
1. General: Wireless data network consists of Wireless Access Points (WAPs), wireless network adapters, and related control
equipment.
E.
IP-BASED / NETWORK CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
1. General: IP-Based / network CATV distribution system consists of equipment related to distributing multimedia content—
such as DVD output, external cable/satellite television broadcasts, etc.—over the IP network infrastructure.
F.
RACK MOUNTED UPS’
1. General: UPS’ consist of rack mounted uninterruptible power supplies for use in Telecom Rooms (TRs).
2. Manufacturer: Liebert
G. TELEPHONE SYSTEM
1. Voice over IP (VoIP): VoIP systems consist of servers, software, and equipment used to provide telephone services over
the IP network infrastructure. The District has standardized on VoIP Phone systems going forward.
2. PBX/Analog: PBX/analog systems consist of a PBX and related equipment used to provide telephone services using analog signals. Analog phone system s are the “traditional” systems currently installed in most of the District’s schools. These
systems will be phased out as budget and opportunity allows.
3. Manufacturer: Nortel OX32
H. COMPUTERS
1. General: Computers include desktop computers, notebook/laptop computers, and servers.
2. Manufacturer: Various
DIVISION 27 50 60
SYSTEMS OVERVIEW MATRIX
A. GENERAL
1. The matrix shown below is intended to provide an overview of the District’s standard technology and low voltage systems,
indicate the entity typically responsible for furnishing and installing those systems, and highlight any significant issues. In
other words, the matrix provides an “at-a-glance” overview of all of the District’s technology and low voltage systems.
2. The matrix is not intended to be all-inclusive, nor is it intended to be used to exclude a system shown (or not shown) should
conditions clearly indicate a need for it.
3. The matrix is to be used to aid the Designer of Record in selecting and applying the various systems to their given project.
Once the matrix has been used to do so, the Designer of Record should review the outcomes with the District for final approval.
B.
HOW TO USE THE MATRIX
1. Systems are listed in the left-most column. Criteria are listed in the remaining columns. In general, a bullet under the “Provide” column indicates that the system is required for the project.
2. The Systems Overview Matrix is designed to be used in conjunction with, not exclusive of, this narrative. Together, these
documents provide the guidelines by which systems can be evaluated, selected, and applied to a given project.
C. CRITERIA
1. Required: The columns under this heading are used to determine whether or not a system is to be provided, along with
any special considerations for how the system is to be provided.
a. Standard. When this criterion is selected in the matrix for a given system, it means that the system is to be provided as
part of the project.
291
b.
Special Case Justification. Some systems should be provided only on a case-by-case basis, according to anticipated,
historical, and/or local needs. When this criterion is selected, there is additional information pertaining to the selection
and configuration of that system that is provided in the detail section for that system detailed later in this document.
2. Furnish: The columns under this heading are used to determine the entity responsible for furnishing a particular system.
a. Contractor: When this criterion is selected, the Contractor is responsible for furnishing the system.
b. Owner: When this criterion is selected, the District is responsible for furnishing the system.
3. Install: The columns under this heading are used to determine the entity responsible for installing and configuring a particular system.
a. Contractor: When this criterion is selected, the Contractor is responsible for installing and configuring the system.
b. Owner: When this criterion is selected, the District is responsible for installing and configuring the system.
Figure 7 - Systems Overview Matrix (continued on next 3 pages)
Category 6
tandar
d
Technology/Low Voltage System
Telecommunications Rooms
Telecom Room - Primary TR (MDF / EF / TR)
Telecom Room - Secondary TR (IDF / TR)
Communications Cabling
Backbone Cabling
Premises Cabling
Outside-Plant (OSP) Cabling
Horizontal (Workstation) Cabling
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Category 5e
Patchcords
Copper
Fiber
Audiovisual Systems
Classroom Environments
Install
cial
Case
trac
tor
SVVS
D
trac
tor
SVVS
D
Systems Overview Matrix
Required
Furnish
•
•
•
•
Projection Screen
Manual
•
•
•
•
•
Motorized
•
•
•
•
Projector
Multi-Media System
All new cabling installed shall be
Category 6.
Category 5e cabling may be left in
place in renovations if standards
are met. See Section 4.03.H.
•
•
•
Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Entity responsible for furnishing
projectors will be based on bid
price versus SVVSD pricing.
Motorized screens utilized only
where necessary.
multi-media systems will be based
on bid price versus SVVSD pricing.
Conference Rooms
Projector
projectors will be based on bid
price versus SVVSD pricing.
292
Projection Screen
Manual
•
•
•
•
Motorized
•
•
Multi-Media System
•
•
Electronic Safety & Security Systems
Access Control System
Controlled Portals - Interior
Controlled Portals - Exterior
Monitored Exterior Doors
Video Surveillance System
Public Entryways
Administration Front Desk
Playground Areas / Fields
Parking Areas
Bus Loading Areas
Courtyard Areas
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interior/Common Public Areas
•
•
•
Interior Thoroughfares
•
•
•
Recording Capability
Intrusion Detection System
Motion Detection
Low-Voltage Systems (School Systems)
Public Address (PA) / Intercom / Program Bell
Wireless Clock
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Distributed Antenna
•
Sound Reinforcement (Gymnasiums, Auditoriums,
Theatres, Music Classrooms)
•
Electrical Rough-In / Infrastructure
Communications
Pathway / Raceway to Outlets
Conduit to Accessible Ceiling Space
Conduit Home Run
Pathway / Raceway - Main Distribution
Loops / Straps
•
•
•
Motorized screens utilized only
where necessary.
multi-media systems will be based
on bid price versus SVVSD pricing.
Multi-media systems only provided
in conference rooms intended for
more than 6 persons.
Interior CCTV camera locations
shall be determined directly with
SVVSD.
Interior CCTV camera locations
shall be determined directly with
SVVSD.
Recording shall be via standalone
devices at each facility.
Provide only where required by
AHJ.
District standards for equipment
not developed. Each circumstance shall be designed closely in
concert with SVVSD.
293
Audiovisual
•
•
•
Equipment Mounting/Blocking/Structural Support
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Electronic Safety & Security
Low-Voltage
Miscellaneous Electrical Rough-In
Floorbox / Poke-thru
Communications Bonding & Grounding System
Site Infrastructure
Outside Plant Ductbank
Outside Plant Vaults
Service Provider Coordination
Owner-Provided Equipment
Data Network Equipment
Wirelss Data Network - Site Survey
Wireless Data Network - Equipment
IP-Based CATV Distribution
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Telephone System
Computers / Computer Equipment
CCTV PTZ Controller
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Applies to Multi-Media system and
Sound Reinforcement systems.
Applies to Multi-Media system and
Sound Reinforcement systems.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
294
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
295
296
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
DIVISION 31 20 00
EARTHWORK
A. SUMMARY - Section includes:
1. Grading
2. Excavation/fill
3. Erosion and sediment control
4. Topsoil
B.
1. Compaction standards per Geotechnical Report (standard proctor density, ASTM D698 or modified proctor density, ASTM
C1557.)
2. Materials and operations under this Section shall be per the recommendations of a Geotechnical Engineer employed by the
Owner who will place qualified personnel on the site during earthwork operations.
1. Balance, cut and fill to the extent possible without compromising maximum and minimum scope criteria. 4:1 maximum slope
typical, 3:1 maximum slope only as approved by Owner.
2. Grading from Building: shall be a min. of 2% away from bldg.
3. Provide flat graded area for modular classroom, size of area to be confirmed on a project by project basis. Provide District
standard vault for utilities and data connections.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control the
flow, drainage and accumulation of water as required to permit completion of the work under this Section to avoid damage
to the work.
5. Contractor shall export and dispose of debris, organic matter and soil that does not meet the criteria of the Geotechnical
Engineer.
6. Provide erosion and sediment control plan and supporting drainage data as required by the local jurisdiction.
7. Where sufficient existing topsoil exists on site, replace at a minimum depth of 4" in all areas to be landscaped after rough
grading is completed.
8. Rock Excavation: Material capable of removal using the equivalent of D-10 caterpillar tractor with a hydraulic single tooth
ripper is considered as normal excavation and no extra will be allowed
9. Rough grade shall be subject to verification by Owner-provided survey firm.
DIVISION 31 60 20
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS
A. SUMMARY - SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Drilling, casing (if necessary) and dewatering (if necessary) of drilled pier holes.
B.
SUBMITTALS REQUIRED:
1. Quality Control Submittals: Geotechnical Engineer Daily Reports (Drilling Log), daily reports filed by the Geotechnical Engineer during drilling shall contain as a minimum the following information:
a. Identification mark.
b. Shaft diameter.
c. Design bottom elevation.
d. Actual bottom elevation.
e. Top elevation.
f. Overrun or under-run.
g. Length and location of casing used.
1. Unit Prices: Bid proposals for piers shown on the drawings shall be on the basis of elevations given. If actual site conditions
differ from those indicated by the soils investigation, the unit cost overrun and under-run figures indicated on the bid form
will be applied to establish any extra due the Contractor or credit due the Owner due to changes in depths of piers. Unit
prices for pier overruns shall not exceed under-runs by more than 20%.
297
298
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
299
DIVISION 32 10 00
ASPHALTIC PAVING
1. Flexible pavement for parking areas and drives.
2. Base for elementary play areas and runways for track and field events.
B.
1. Recycled Content.: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material
integrity. Recycled content percentages may be assigned based on the Recycled Content Action Plan created by the General Contractor.
2. Regional Materials: Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within 500 miles of the project site
whenever possible. Regional Materials may be assigned based on the Regional Materials Action Plan created by the General Contractor.
C. REFERENCED STANDARDS/MINIMUM CRITERIA:
1. Comply with Section 400 - Pavements, Section 700 - Bituminous Materials, Section 702 - Bituminous, and Section 703 Aggregates, of the Colorado State Highway Department Standard Specifications, latest Edition.
2. Testing of base course compaction and sampling of asphalt concrete mixtures for quality control during paving will be done
by the testing laboratory (paid for by the Owner) using applicable ASTM and AASHTO testing procedures.
D. PRODUCTS
1. Base course materials: Gravel base type and thickness per Geotechnical report.
2. Asphaltic concrete mixture: Grades S and SX as defined by Colorado State Highway Department Standard Specifications.
Use Grade SX for top surface course and Grade S for all other fills. Only virgin materials shall be used in mixture, no reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) shall be allowed. Thickness of asphalt as per Geotechnical report.
3. Reinforcing Mesh: Reinforcing mesh shall be designed for use under asphalt paving as required by Geotechnical report.
4. Pre-Emergent: Elanco Treflan Pre-Emergent or approved substitute.
A.
1. The School District prefers to use fill depth asphalt design sections but will consider including alternates for asphalt on base
course design.
2. Permeable paving may be considered on a case by case basis by the owner where subgrade permeability is conducive and
is acceptable to local jurisdictions.
3. Immediately prior to application of aggregate base course or full depth asphalt, apply Pre-Emergent to subgrade.
4. Second and third lifts must be placed within 48 hours of preceding lift or a tack coat will be required.
5. Apply tack coat of emulsified asphalt to edge of curb and all other concrete surfaces adjoining asphalt paving.
DIVISION 32 10 10
CONCRETE PAVING, CURBS, GUTTERS, & SIDEWALKS
1. Rigid concrete paving.
2. Curbs and gutters.
3. Sidewalks.
4. Concrete curbs around gravel play areas.
5. Concrete stairs.
6. Concrete drainage swales.
B.
1. Recycled Content.: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material
integrity. Recycled content percentages may be assigned based on the Recycled Content Action Plan created by the General Contractor.
2. Regional Materials: Materials/products shall be extracted or harvested and manufactured within 500 miles of the project site
whenever possible. Regional Materials may be assigned based on the Regional Materials Action Plan created by the General Contractor.
300
C. REFERENCE STANDARDS/MINIMUM CRITERIA:
1. Concrete work: ACI 301 and ACI 304R.
a. Cold weather placement: ACI 306.
b. Hot weather placement: ACI 605
2. Concrete materials: Ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94 and ASTM C1116. No on-job mixed concrete will be
allowed. Slump tests by Contractor per ASTM C143.
3. Reinforcing mesh: 6" x 6" x w2.9 x w2.9 conforming to ASTM A18S for vehicle paving and 6" x 6" x w1.4 x w1.4 for sidewalks. Fibrous reinforcing complying with ASTM C1116.
4. Finish with Class B Tolerance. Finish shall be true planes within 1/4" in 10-ft. as determined by a 10-ft. straightedge placed
anywhere on the slab in any direction. Use broom finish.
5. Local jurisdiction standards for public sidewalks, curbs, gutters, ramps, driveway approaches and aprons.
6. All site paving shall be tested for positive drainage via waterflow/flood test conducted by General Contractor, coordinated
with District personnel.
1. Sidewalk Width: Provide a min. of 6’ wide sidewalks for plowing; sidewalks may be 10’ wide if they are used for maintenance truck access. Review with District.
2. Typical thickness of sidewalks is 4" with a minimum strength of 4,000 psi.
3. Score Joints: Maximum of 6 feet on center.
4. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints thirty (30) feet maximum on center, between site concrete and building. Expansion joints shall extend through the entire slab with bituminous fiber expansion joint filler. Hold top of joint filler down or use
5. removable zip-strip on top of filler at joints to allow for joint sealant.
6. Handicap Ramps: Ramps shall receive tactile warning surface texture in accordance with local jurisdiction Standards and
Specifications. Provide pigmented concrete as required by local jurisdiction Standards.
7. Concrete paving is required at all curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and trash pickup areas/dumpster pads.
8. Concrete paving is preferred at bus traffic/parking areas, and service vehicle/loading dock areas.
9. Curing and anti-spalling compound is required for all exterior flatwork.
10. Curb configuration to be vertical with full cut at drives and ramps.
11. Fibrous mesh additive is required for exterior flatwork.
DIVISION 32 10 20
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE TENNIS COURTS
A. Summary - Section includes:
1. Post-tensioning materials.
2. Post-tensioning operations.
B.
1. Provide vapor barrier under slab and over excavation and structural fill under slab if recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Cables shall be placed no more than 2'-6" on center in each direction based on engineering design.
3. Provide keyed construction joints between each individual court and at net line of each court. No other joints are allowed.
Contractor may opt to place concrete in one pour.
4. Concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation without joints with the exception of construction joints. Slab thickness
shall be uniform four (4) inches utilizing a minimum sixty-(60) foot long continuous mechanical screed. Finish surface of
concrete shall have no water-holding areas deeper than 1/8". Flood court surface to verify slope, drainage, and lack of
ponding areas.
5. Contractor shall not apply tensioning force until the concrete has reached a minimum strength of 2,000 psi. Strength of concrete in place shall be determined according to ACI 301. Contractor may make additional cylinders at his expense to determine correct strength. Tensioning may begin one (1) week after the concrete has been verified to have achieved the minimum strength.
6. Each tendon may initially be tensioned to a maximum of eighty percent (80%) ultimate breaking strength and anchored at a
minimum of seventy percent (70%) ultimate breaking strength.
7. The cable ends shall be cut off and cone holes shall be grouted flush with edge of slab.
C. PRODUCTS
1. The tensioning strands shall consist of one-half inch (1/2”) diameter, 7-wire, stress relieved strands, having a guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of 270,000 psi (270) Kips). Strands shall conform to ASTM-416. Cables shall be fabricated to proper
length for each slab, coated with a permanent rust preventative lubricant and encased in slippage sheathing. All breaks in
301
2.
the sheathing shall be repaired with tape prior to concrete placement. A maximum of six inches (6”) exposed strands is
permitted at the dead-end anchor.
The concrete shall have a compressive strength of not less than 3,500 psi after twenty-eight (28) days. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered according to ASTM C-94 specifications for ready-mixed concrete with a four inch (4”)
maximum slump. Mix design as follows: cement – type 1, six sack unit weight – 140.3 lbs. per cubic foot, air entrainment
6.0%.
DIVISION 32 10 30
PAVEMENT MARKING
A. SUMMARY - Section Includes:
1. Layout and painting of lines.
2. Direction arrows/signs in pavement.
B.
1. Thickness of paint to comply with Colorado State Highway Department specifications.
2. Pavement marking shall not be done in wet weather or when the temperature is below 40 degrees F.
3. Parking lot lines shall be 4" wide painted by mechanical striping machine.
C. PRODUCTS
1. Solvent base paint complying with Colorado State Highway Department specifications.
a. White and blue colors.
2. Thermoplastic crosswalk, symbols, and other markings as directed by Owner.
a. Thickness to be 90 mil.
DIVISION 32 10 40
SIGNAGE
1. Traffic control signs and posts.
B.
1. Comply with requirements of all regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
2. Comply with applicable requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and the International Building Code (IBC).
1. Verify type, location, and direction of sign face of signs with school district.
2. Aluminum traffic control signs mounted on galvanized steel framing and 12 gauge galvanized square tube steel posts with
perforations as required for attachment of signage to post. Set steel posts in square sleeving (next size up from steel post)
in concrete.
D. PRODUCTS
1. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. AAA Signs
b. Longmont Signs
c. Vulcan Signs, Inc.
d. J & S Signs
e. Colorado Barricade
f. Midwest Barricade
DIVISION 32 20 00
CINDER TRACK SURFACING
A. SUMMARY
1. Middle School Running Tracks: Shall be Scoria (Cinder) mixed with clay to comply with published standards of Colorado
High School Activities Association.
302
B.
MATERIALS
1. Base Layer - Clean 25mm Scoria Minus is required, with a minimum compacted depth over the subgrade of 90mm. One
layer of clean and graded 25mm Scoria Minus will be spread over the court area. The base material will be consolidated
and be a minimum of 90mm in depth. The base layer will then be appropriately levelled to the predetermined gradient of
1:200 on two planes.
2. Subsurface Layers - The first subsurface layer is 6mm Scoria Minus, which is spread over the entire base. It is levelled, watered, and rolled to a well-consolidated depth of 8-12mm. The second subsurface layer is 3mm Scoria Minus, which is
spread over the entire first subsurface layer. It is levelled, watered, and rolled to a well-consolidated depth of 3-5mm.
3. Red Porous Surfacing Layer - The material required is manufactured from bricks and has a maximum particle size of 23mm. The depth applied over the second subsurface layer is 12mm. A quantity of 6 cubic metres (approx) is required to be
spread uniformly over the track area. It is levelled, watered and rolled to a well-consolidated depth of 8-12mm. It will thus
be keyed into the 3mm Scoria bed.
4. Concrete curbing – Provide 5” wide min. concrete containment curbs at all cinder tracks.
DIVISION 32 20 20
SYNTHETIC TRACK SURFACING
A. SUMMARY
1. The contract work to be performed under this section consist of furnishing all required labor, materials, equipment, and supplies necessary for, the surfacing in accordance with these specifications and as indicated on drawings.
a. Base Bid: RSS 100 Latex Polymer bound running track surfacing.
b. Alternate Bid: RSS 2000 Polyurethane bound impermeable base mat structural spray running track surfacing.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. The track surface will be applied by a Certified Track Builder (CTB), which has successfully installed polyurethane materials
included in this specification. The contractor shall have all appropriate licenses and be bondable.
2. Contractor references for five (5) similar, successfully executed projects will be required. Successful contractor will provide
proof of Liability Insurance and Workman’s Compensation insurance to the district, as well as payment and performance
bonds if required.
C. WARRANTY
1. Provide manufacturers standard 5 year warranty.
D. PRODUCT AND MATERIAL DESCRIPTION – RSS 100
1. The specified running track surface is polyurethane bound SBR base. Total average thickness of finished surfacing is 10
mm.
2. Rubber (SBR): The basemat rubber shall be specifically graded Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR). Final gradation is to be
1.0-4.0 mm granulated SBR. SBR is to be dried to no less than 2.5% moisture and sealed in bags.
3. Basemat Binder: The basemat shall be bound by moisture-cured liquid polyurethane, compatible with the base mat rubber.
No asphaltic emulsions or epoxies are allowed in the base mat.
4. Full Pour Layer: The full layer polyurethane shall be a two component polyurethane compounded from polypropylenglycol
and isocyanes based on MDI with no solvents or fillers added.
E.
PRODUCT AND MATERIAL DESCRIPTION – RSS 2000
1. The specified running track surface is an impermeable polyurethane bound SBR base mat with a polyurethane structural
spray-wearing coat. Total average thickness of finished surfacing is 13mm.
2. Rubber (SBR): The basemat rubber shall be specifically graded Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR). Final gradation is to be
1.0-4.0 mm granulated SBR. SBR is to be dried to no less than 2.5% moisture and sealed in bags.
3. Colored Rubber (EPDM): The wearing course of rubber shall be synthetic colored EPDM, thesame color as the liquid polyurethane binder. Final graduation is to be .5mm-1.5mm. Specific gravity is to be 1.53 +/- .02.
F.
EXECUTION
1. Weather: Surfacing shall not be done when the threat of freezing exists for the following 24 hours, rain is imminent or gusting winds are occurring.
303
2.
3.
4.
5.
Site: While surfacing and striping are being done, sprinkler systems must be curtailed, shut off, or controlled so that no water falls on the track or event area surfaces. Other trades, general public and School District personnel must stay off the wet
or curing surfaces.
Do not apply rubberized topping when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
Provide temporary barriers as required to prevent public entry to construction area and to protect adjacent properties from
damage during construction.
Keep all personnel, other than employees of track installer a minimum of 100 feet from equipment and workers.
G. STRIPING AND RACE MONUMENTATION
1. The radius points and point of curves (6) shall be laid out and verified by a surveyor.
2. The surveyor shall prepare a set of computerized calculations and diagrams that shall verify the accurate distance around
the track for each lane and each race. All calculations should conform to the appropriate governing body for either the National Federation for State High School Associations, NCAA or IAAF.
3. The contractor shall consult with the owner prior to the start of his calculations for determination of the finish line, events to
be run, location of lane numbers and additional paint markings.
4. An experienced track-striping specialist utilizing polyurethane paint compatible with the track surfacing shall perform the
striping.
DIVISION 32 20 30
SYNTHETIC TURF - (PROJECT SPECIFIC ONLY)
A. SUMMARY
1. It shall be the responsibility of the successful turf contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment and tools necessary
for the complete installation of an infilled synthetic turf system. The scope of the project shall consist of but not necessarily
be limited to the following:
a. A synthetic turf system consisting of 2” to 2 ½” long plus or minus 1/8”, 100% polyethylene/mono-filament like fibers,
tufted into a triple primary backing of woven and non woven fabrics with a hot applied polyurethane secondary backing.
b. A resilient infill system consisting of cryogenically ground recycled SBR rubber granules or sand/rubber mix.
c. Lines and markings are to be incorporated into the material rolls. Sown lines are not acceptable.
d. An anti-shock pad.
B.
1. All Bidders shall submit a list of 5 completed installations over the last five years. The list shall include installations that are
similar in scope and no less than 50,000 square feet in size. The list shall include names and phone numbers of the contacts. The contacts cannot be current or former employees of the Bidder.
2. Must be a manufacturer’s warranty from a single source covering workmanship and all self-manufactured or procured materials.
3. Guarantee that the entire system must be maintain a G-Max rating of between 110 and 130 on the field held Kleg Hammer
Scale for the entire life of the system. Additional rubber infill must be added or removed or repositioned as required to maintain this rating over the 8 year life of the warranty. The initial acceptance test points shall be along the field every thirty feet
along the has markers and through the center of the football field. Upon completion of the synthetic turf the Contractor shall
test the GMax rating of the field, and shall provide the Owner with a copy of the test report.
4. Guarantee that the finished synthetic turf system shall be capable of water infiltration at the minimum rate of 50” per hour.
5. A written manufacturer’s warranty shall cover the following items:
a. All materials and labor shall be warranted against defect for a period of 8 years from the date of final acceptance.
b. The warranty shall not be limited by the amount of usage on the field.
c. The warranty shall not be limited by the filed evaluation above sea level.
d. The warranty shall not be limited by the type of footwear that can be worn on the field.
e. Guarantee that any replacement materials required will be available for the entire 8 year warranty period or a cash refund will be provided.
f. The warranty must be from a single source.
C. PRODUCTS
1. Synthectic Turf System Fibers: The pile fiber shall be Thiolon Grass LSR (low-slide resistance) as manufactured Ten Cate
Thiolon or approved equal. The fiber shall be non-abrasive polyethylene, measuring between two inches and two and one
half (2 ½”) inches tall. The fiber shall be a proven athletic caliber yarn designed specifically for outdoor use and treated with
UV inhibitor and stabilizers to resist the effects of ultraviolet degradation, heat, foot traffic, water and airborne pollutants.
The fiber shall contain no toxic substances or heavy metals. The fiber tufts shall be fanned or unfolded prior to installation,
rolling or spiraling will not be accepted.
304
2.
3.
4.
The primary fiber shall meet or exceed the following requirement:
a. Colors: Field – Green.
b. Striping: Football – white, Soccer – yellow. Lacrosse – blue. All striping shall meet the National Federation of High
School Standards latest layout. Five yard lines, goal, sidelines and hash marks to be included.
The finished playing surface shall appear as mowed grass with no irregularities and, resist abrasion and cutting from normal
use.
Turf system shall be perforated for drainage. Minimum rate of infiltration: 50” per hour.
D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1. Sprinturf Ultrablade MM, dual fiber monofilament, 73 oz. total product weight with 3 part backing. Provide a sample of the
material proposed with the bid documents.
2. Outdoor E-Turf 40 oz. face weight. (ETOF-IR) 2 ½” height, 10,000 denier UV resistant polyethylene yarn all rubber infill system. Stitch Gauge ¾” centers. Provide a sample of the material proposed with the bid documents.
E.
MATERIALS:
1. Primary Backing: The primary backing shall be double layered, woven/non-woven product. The primary backing shall provide dimensional stability in all directions to prevent stretching, shrinking, “creeping” and line distortion. The components
and performance shall meet or exceed the following requirements:
a. Weight: Minimum of 10-oz/sq. yard
b. 5% Elongation (Wrap): 410 Minimum
c. Force @ 5% Elongation (Weft): 615 Minimum
d. Grab Tear Strength (X-Y): 400-250 lbs.
e. Dimensional Stability: 47.10 N/sq. meter (wrap), 49.10 N/Sq. meter (weft).
f. Backing Roll Width: 15 feet.
2. Secondary Backing: The secondary backing shall saturate the primary backing and effectively lock the fiber tufts in place to
the primary backing. The components and performance shall meet or exceed the following requirements:
a. Material: Heat activated polyurethane coating.
b. Weight: 20-oz/sq. yard minimum.
c. Drainage Perforations: 3/16” to ¼” diameter at 4 inches or less on-center each way. Non-perforated backing is not acceptable.
d. Turf Bind Strength (w/out in-fill): >15 lbs.
e. Grab Tear X and Y (Turf Assembly): >400 lbs X direction and >250 lbs. Y direction.
f. Pill Burn Test (in-fill): Pass
3. Seam Adhesive: 2-K-Kunstrasenklebstoff 149. No substitutions.
4. Rubber In-fill Material: Recycled SBR Rubber. 1/8” minus granules. Fine grain rubber only will not be permitted. No steel filaments are allowed. All rubber granules must be certified from Colorado Tires as required to receive the DOLA Recycled
Tire Grant. The exposed fiber height above the in-fill material shall be approximately one half (1/2”) inch. The entire synthetic turf system shall be resistant to attack by bacterial and to fungal growths.
5. All synthetic yarn must be ultra violet (UV) protected for an altitude of 6,000 feet above sea level at the yarn manufacturer’s
factory before installation.
6. Surplus Material: The Turf Contractor shall provide the Owner at each installation as part of this contract, the following surplus materials (transported to a storage location selected by the Owner):
a. Turf Fabric (Field Green): Provide 5% extra turf to the Owner.
b. In-Fill Material: As required to in-fill 500 sq. ft. This material may not be used as top
c. dressing during the warranty period. The Contractor must at their expense supply
d. any and all in-fill needed to maintain the G-max values during the warranty period.
e. Seaming Tape: Provide 5% for the Owner’s use.
f. Seaming Epoxy: Provide 5% for the Owner’s use.
g. Striping fabric: Minimum 100 l.f. of each color specified for inlaid striping.
7. Anchor System: 2” x 4” composite lumber solid blocking mechanically anchored to the inside of the concrete curb.
8. Anti-Shock Pad: Dodge Regupol, Inc. 6010 SP or Amorim, thickness 10 mm. Weight 580 kg/m cubed. Temperature stability
shall be from -40 degrees to 240 degrees. Fire resistance class B.
DIVISION 32 20 40
TENNIS COURT SURFACING
1. Tennis court surfacing.
2. Tennis court boundary lines.
305
B.
1. All tennis courts should be post-tensioned slabs, no exceptions.
2. Two (2) year warrantee for materials and installation.
3. Do not apply surfacing during rainfall or when rainfall is imminent. Do not apply surfacing unless the air temperature is at
least 50 degrees F. for a 24hour period of time during and following application.
4. Line Marking: Apply marking conforming to the specifications of the United States Tennis Court and Track Builders Association
C. PRODUCTS
1. Acceptable tennis court surfacing systems:
a. TPS Coatings, Inc.
b. Nova Sports USA
c. Elite Systems
2. Primer: The prime coat shall be as specified by the color acrylic manufacturer.
3. Leveling Course(s): Only acrylic based patching compounds are to be used.
4. Acrylic Resurfacer: Acrylic resurfacer coats shall consist of the following components:
a. acrylic resurfacer
b. silica sand, #30
5. Acrylic Color: To be selected by Owner
6. Playing Lines: Playing lines shall be painted on using white, latex acrylic, line paint
DIVISION 32 20 50
BASEBALL FIELD SURFACING
1. Baseball field infield.
2. Skinned softball field.
3. Other unseeded surfaces inside baseball and softball fenced areas.
B.
1. Elevation and size of pitcher’s mound per Colorado State High School standards.
2. Remove debris and rocks larger than ½" from area to be surfaced.
3. Surface to be a minimum of 4" deep.
C. PRODUCTS
1. Surfacing Mix for Infields:
a. 70% fine fill sand.
b. 30% fine fill clay.
2. Surfacing Mix for Pitchers Mound:
a. 60% fine fill sand.
b. 40% fine fill clay.
3. Surfacing Mix for Warning Tracks:
a. Granite Crusher Fines (breeze) 3/8” minus sieve
DIVISION 32 20 60
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
A. SUMMARY
a. Organic loose-fill surface
b. Poured in place safety surfacing (alternate for Pre-Primary playgrounds only
B.
1. Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292
2. Accessiblity of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951
3. Child’s Play safety surfaces installed within equipment zones shall exceed the performance requirements for impact attenuation and Head Injury Criteria as per the requirements of U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) (confirming a
306
4.
5.
maximum deceleration of no more than 200 g’s and a HIC valve of no more than 1000 as per ASTM F-1292 method of testing).
The impact attenuation performance shall be documented by a certificate of compliance using Triax 2000 non-destructive
testing apparatus within 30 days of installation.
Child’s Play safety surface shall meet all requirements for accessibility including the American Disabilities Act Accessibilities
Guidelines (ADAAG) 28 DFR Part 36 as well as compliance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFS) REDSTD-795 and the Architectural and Engineer Instructions (AEI) Design Criteria.
C. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by the manufacturer.
2. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ANSI Z34.1 for testing indicated.
3. Source Limitations: Obtain playground surface system materials through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. PRODUCTS
1. Organic Loose-Fill Surface: Random-sized engineered wood fibers approximately 10 times longer than wide; containing no
bark, leaves, twigs or foreign or toxic materials according to ASTM F2075
a. Manufacturers:
Fibar, Inc.
Fibar System 300
2. Poured in Place Safety Surfacing (Alternate): Ensure that any and all contaminated material and wood fiber systems are
removed properly dispose of. Construct new base or recycle existing materials as pre Child’s Play specifications to provide
a stable firm base on which to install safety surface system.
3. SBR Rubber Products:
a. Strand rubber: .5 mm to 2mm thickness by 3 mm to 20 mm in length
i. Granulated Rubber: 1 mm to 3.5 mm
4. Polyurethane Binders: Specially formulated playground surfacing containing no TDI, filler mineral, such as plasticizers, catalysts, extenders or heavy metals. Weight shall be no less than 8.5 lbs./gal (1.02Kg/l). Pigments shall contain no heavy
metals and be 100% moisture free.
DIVISION 32 30 00
ATHLETIC AND RECREATION EQUIPMENT
A. SUMMARY
1. Athletic equipment work as shown on the drawings for tennis courts, basketball courts, baseball and softball fields, dugouts,
football field, track and field and similar items.
B.
PRODUCTS
1. Tennis Courts:
a. Net Posts w/ Sleeves - Douglas Tennis Systems, DTP-37 3” O.D. post w/internal winder, green or approved equal
b. Center Tie Down Anchors - Douglas Tennis Systems, Center tie down anchor, or approved equal
c. Tennis Nets -Douglas Tennis Systems, Edwards – 30DS, or approved equal
d. Tennis Court Wind Screen: Open mesh shade screen or approved substitute, 6 ft. high 7 oz. Open mesh polyester with
brass grommets 12" o.c., along all four sides. Provide hog rings and poly rope for attachment.
2. Baseball and Softball Fields:
a. Pitcher’s Rubber: Mid America Sales #01192 or approved equal.
b. Home Base: Stanchion mount complete with anchor plug.
c. 1st, 2nd, 3rd Bases: Hollywood type with anchors, official size.
d. Foul Poles: Yellow aluminum 4” O.D. 20’ high when installed with 3’ in-ground sleeves. Visibility panels 2’ wide x 12’
long. Sleeves w/caps.
e. Scoreboard: NEVCO Model #1510 with hand-held wireless.
f. Pitching Machine: Arm style pitching machine. “Iron Mike Pitching Machine” as supplied by Mid America Sales or approved equal.
g. Fence Guard: Provide and install heavy duty UV resistant polyethylene fence guard with zip ties every 2’ at permanent
field perimeter chain link fence. Tomark 11139 or approved equal. Outfield and sidelines to dugout.
h. Batters Box Mat: Provide and install Firm Foot Mats by “Beacon” (or approved equal) at batter’s boxes and pitcher’s
mounds. Install below playing field surface per manufacturer’s recommendations.
i. Bat Holder: Provide and install heavy duty bat holders with appropriate hardware as supplied by “Beacon” model
#MTC059 (or approved equal).
j. Benches: Performance Athletics permanent aluminum bench with back, Model #3100-20.
307
k.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Swing Field Dugout Roofs: Classic Recreation Systems 10’-6”x45’, 6-post dugout with HR- 36 roof or approved equal.
Post 6” x 6”. Color: Roofs to be selected.
l. Portable Fencing: Portable chain link fencing panels, 10’ x 4’ on T-stands constructed of galvanized steel, 11 gauge
fabric, with tension bars and brace bands. Patterson-Williams, model #1270-00. Contact: Recreation Plus at 303-2781455.
Football/ Soccer/ Track:
a. Football/Soccer Combination Goal: Kwikgoal 2D301.
b. Scoreboard: Complete multisport scoreboard with 1/10th of a second timing.
1.
Dimensions: 24' x 8' x 8" (7.32 x 2.44 x 0.2 meters)
2.
Manufactuer: Nevco 7530 or approved equal.
c. Prefabricated Press Box: Provide factory built, prefabricated press box capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
Wind Load: Meet the wind load requirement for site where press box will reside. If not specified our standard
will be 90 mph wind.
2.
Snow Load: Meet the snow load requirement for the site where the press box will reside. If not specified our
standard will be 30 psi.
3.
Live Load: When press box has a camera deck, meet the minimum live load applicable where press box will
reside.
4.
Manufacturer: Austin Mohawk and Company, Inc or approved equal
5.
Prefabricated aluminum press box with extruded 6036-T6 low-maintenance, corrosion-resistant aluminum
alloy framing system. All connections internally fastened with no exposed fasteners on building exterior.
6.
Camera deck - full length and width with roof hatch, internal ladder, and requisite 42” high perimeter railings
with cyclone fence to meet 4” sphere criteria.
7.
WP GFI Receptacle(s) at camera deck level.
8.
Fixed Windows: Clear tempered safety glass glazed within wall system extrusions and not fastened to the
exterior wall. Glass sealed with concealed gasket system (standard).
9.
End wall viewing panels for increased field of vision.
10.
Horizontal Sliding Windows: Shall have aluminum frame with clear tempered safety glass glazed. Windows
are equipped with insect screen and locking device (standard).
11.
Size: 8 feet x 24 feet
12.
Wall Panel: Overall thickness of panel shall be 3 inches (76.2 mm) with an exterior face of manufacturers
standard .032 aluminum, a 3 inch (76.2 mm) insulation core and a .032 interior aluminum face (standard R12).
d. Bleachers: Alum-A-Stand elevated aluminum bleacher, dull finish.
Pole Vault:
a. Vault Box: Gill Athletics Track and Field #502, aluminum.
b. Cover: Gill Athletics Track and Field #20501.
c. Shotput: Aluminum Shot Toeboard – model #364 by Gill Athletics, 800-637-3090.
d. Discus Cage: Aluminum Discus Cage, model #80401. Made by Gill Athletics, 800637-3090.
Starter’s Platform:
a. Aluminum Athletic Equipment – Model SP or equal.
b. Starting Blocks. AAE – Model #5SB2, or approved equal
Basketball:
a. Performance Athletics single post 5025 with backboard 8022 and goal ring and net 8039-32.
DIVISION 32 30 10
FENCES AND GATES
A. SUMMARY
1. Existing sites (adjacent to existing schools): Chain link or other fencing approved by SVVSD Project Manager for the Contractor's use around the construction site to isolate school activities from the construction area will be furnished, installed
and removed by the Contractor. Verify location before installation.
2. New Sites: Construction fencing should be furnished and installed to protect contractor's materials and equipment, and to
control access to the construction area. Consult with the Architect and Owner for location before installation.
3. Provide fencing at ponds with 12ft double access gate.
B.
DESIGN CRITERIA
1. Fencing criteria by school type:
308
a.
b.
c.
Elementary school – fence all general play areas / fields for ball containment; provide fencing to provide control of student movement before and after school activities.
Middle School – fence all general play areas / fields for ball containment; provide fencing to provide control of student
movement before and after school activities. All ball fields should be fenced in a manner that supports athletic play.
High School - fence all general play areas / fields for ball containment; provide fencing to provide control of student
movement before and after school activities. All ball fields should be fenced in a manner that supports athletic play.
C. APPLICATIONS /RESTRICTIONS
1. To facilitate snow removal, where possible set fence line 8'-0" (minimum) away from vehicle pavement.
2. Alternate types of fencing in lieu of chain link fencing may be considered, particularly at the elementary level, in order to satisfy local and unique conditions. Alternate types of fencing must be carefully evaluated to assure long-term durability, low
maintenance, ease of maintenance, proper control and comparable cost to chain link fence. Alternate fences not meeting
this criteria may be installed if adjacent property owners agree to maintain the fence and participate in excess costs of installing the al ternate fence type.
3. Decorative Fences: Not allowed.
D. MATERIALS SUMMARY
1. Chain Link Fence:
a. General: International Fence Industry Association Inc. Standard CI-71.
b. Standard Boundary Fence Height: 6'-0".
c. Fabric: 9-gauge galvanized wire, 12'-0" single height limit. Plastic clad fabric is discouraged.
d. 1-3/4" mesh at tennis courts and 2" mesh at baseball /softball backstops.
e. 2" mesh at all other locations.
f. Knuckle both selvages for 1-3/4" mesh and for fence height = 60" or less and at bicycle enclosures.
g. Knuckle both selvages for 2" mesh and for height over 60".
2. Posts: Schedule 40 galvanized.
a. Line Posts: 2" nominal (2.375" o.d.).
b. Terminal, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2-1/2" nominal (2.875" o.d.).
c. Single Gate Up to 6'-0" Posts: 2-1/2" nominal (2.875" o.d.).
d. Double Gate Posts and Single Over 6'-0": 3" nominal (3.5" o.d.) minimum.
3. Top Rail: 1-1/2" nominal (1.9" o.d.); longest lengths available. (Required.)
a. 6" expansion couplings with 3" overlap.
4. Center and Bottom Rail: 1-1/2" nominal (1.9" o.d.). (Bottom rail required.)
5. Truss Rods: None required.
6. Tension Bars: 1/4" x 3/4" (minimum) single piece lengths equal to fabric height.
7. Tension Clamps: 14 gauge x 1" pressed steel spaced at 15" O.C. maximum.
8. Cable Wire: 3/8” cable.
9. Fence Fasteners: 12-gauge wire on line posts and 24" O.C. on rails and braces.
10. Post Caps: Rounded, weather-tight closure; same material and diameter as post.
11. Gate Frames: 1-1/2" nominal (1.9" o.d.).
12. Gates, Swinging:
a. Frames: 1 1/2" nom. (1.9" O.D.) for all perimeter members and intermediate members if perimeters are over 8' apart.
Frames shall be welded and joints painted with zinc based paint.
b. Fabric: 9 gauge wire, 2" mesh, knuckled top and bottom, attached to frame with tension bars and clamps same as for
fence.
c. Hinges: Malleable iron, non-lift-off type, 180° swing, one pair for each gate to 6' height. Provide 11/2 pair for gates
over 6' height.
d. Latches: Fork type for single gate, plunger-bar for double gates. Operation either side, integral padlock eye, plungerbar strike set in concrete.
e. Hinges: Malleable iron; "Bulldog Hinges"; residential type for openings less than 4 feet.
f. Latches: Integral padlock eye; operable from either side.
Malleable fork type for single gate.
Fulcrum/Pioneer latches for double gates.
13. Barrier Post: 3" (min.) steel post x 48" (min.) with full concrete fill.
14. Bollard: No special requirements.
15. Backstops: Weld gates so gates cannot be lifted off hinges.
309
E.
EXECUTION
1. Chain Link Fences and Gates:
a. Set property line fence post centerline 6 inches inside property line.
b. Execute after finish grading is complete.
c. Mow strip: 8" wide concrete by 4” thick, continuous along fence centerline required at property line.
DIVISION 32 30 20
WOOD FENCE
A. SUMMARY
1. Locate fencing as indicated on the drawings including post footings and all related accessories.
B.
FENCING MATERIALS - Estate Rail
1. Line posts 6" x 6". Rough-Sawn Cedar. Length as required to provide the configuration as detailed on the drawings.
2. Rails: 2" x 6" Rough Sawn Cedar
3. Fasteners: Galvanized, per details.
4. Wire Mesh: Max-Tight Horse Fence Class 1 galvanized fence.
C. CLEAR FINISH SEALER
1. Olympic Water guard Clear Penetrating Sealer or approved substitute.
D. EXECUTION
1. Concrete: Set all posts in concrete designed to have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. Allow all
posts to get at least seven (7) days before rails and wire fabric are installed.
2. Line and Terminal Posts: Space line posts as required by length of rails and set in concrete as detailed. Slope top of footing
from posts out to edge approximately 1" to match finish grade at edges. Provide smooth troweled finish on all footings.
3. Rails: Set rails as nearly parallel to the finish grade as possible and at the specified height of fence. In the case of sloping
grades, the rails shall be sloped uniformly parallel to the finish grade as nearly as possible and in a manner to prevent any
abrupt changes in elevation of the rails.
4. All fencing traversing turf or native grasses must have a minimum 4”d x 12”w mow strip along the length of the fencing.
DIVISION 32 40 20
SITE FURNISHINGS
A. SUMMARY
a. Install bike racks.
b. Install trash receptacles.
c. Install recycling receptacles.
d. Picnic Tables
B.
PRODUCTS
1. Bicycle Racks: Heavy-duty Winder model no. HW238-9P by MADRAX, in ground mount, color to be selected. Contact Children’s Playstructures, 303-791-7626. District will accept multi-wave unit or multiple single units.
2. Trash Receptacles: Forms and Surfaces Universal Round Litter, model #SLUNI-36TOT, open top, 36 gallon, satin stainless
steel finish, surface mount, chain tether, black polyethelene lid, fire rated liner with drain. Qty (2). Contact Erik Correll at
303-829-8850.
3. Recycling Receptacles: Forms and Surfaces Universal Round, model #SLUNI-36RBD, 36 gallon, satin stainless steel finish,
surface mount, chain tether, black polyethelene lid, fire rated liner with drain. Qty (2). Contact Erik Correll at 303-829-8850.
4. Picnic Tables: any exterior tables should be movable. If fixed mounting is required, mounting type should be flush.
5. Benches: any exterior benches are to be installed on a concrete pad or other level concrete surface. If fixed mounting is
required, mounting type should be flush.
DIVISION 32 50 00
GRAVEL PLAY AREAS
2. Concrete curb at perimeter of play areas.
3. Pea gravel fill
4. Play equipment (by School District)
5. Drainage of play areas
310
B.
1. All play areas are to meet or exceed ASTM F223, F2373, F1487-07, and standards defined in the CPSC Handbook for Public Playground safety.
2. The perimeter of all gravel play areas to have 6" wide x 2-‘0" deep reinforced concrete curb. Top edges of curb to have 2"
radius (omit radius where curb abuts concrete sidewalk or asphalt play area).
3. Subgrade in play box shall be 14” below top of curb.
4. Slope grades at bottom of play areas a minimum of 1% and maximum of 2% toward perforated drainage pipe that runs the
full length of the play area. Perforated pipe to be set in minimum of 12" x 12" trench in bottom of play area. Trench to be
filled with 3/4" washed gravel with minimum of 2" below the perforated pipe. Pipe size and daylight connection to be determined by Civil Engineer. Perforated pipe shall include filter fabric sock.
5. Provide filter fabric sock around perforated drainage pipe with 3/4" washed gravel gravel trench.
DIVISION 32 80 00
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. SUMMARY
a. Excavation and Backfilling
b. Piping, Valves, and Heads
c. Automatic Control System
B.
SUBMITTALS
1. As Built or Record Drawings/Maintenance Manual: Acceptance of the system is based on the furnishing by the contractor of
a complete as-built plan showing exact location of all valves and any changes in location of sprinkler heads, piping, etc.
which is acceptable to the Architect. Submit record drawing information prepared by a qualified computer operator in AutoCAD format on site plan disk furnished by Owner's Representative. Show locations of main connection, pressure lines, zone
lines, all valves, additional wires, drip line blowout valves, changes in zoning, changes in numerical sequence at control
valves, and other items required by Owner's Representative. Alternative arrangements can be made in advance if a computer or computerized information is not available.
2. Contract Closeout Submittals: Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a mylar plot of irrigation system, and two 11" x 17" reductions of the drawings, product cut-sheets and operation instructions for same, and complete maintenance instructions,
including system winterization and start-up procedures, all neatly assembled in laminated pages into one hard-cover three
ring notebooks with project name on cover. Also provide:
a. Two manual drain valve keys
b. 2 Automatic controller keys
c. Two valve box keys
d. Two gate valve keys
e. Two sleeve locking cap keys
f. Two of each type of head installed on project
g. Two wrenches for each type of head cover
h. Two wrenches for removing and installing each type of head
i. Two nozzles for each type used
j. One valve key and hose swivel for every quick coupling valve indicated
3. As of the date of Final Acceptance for the entire project, the Owner shall be solely responsible for setting of irrigation controllers. Within three calendar days of the date of Final Acceptance, the landscaping subcontractor shall provide in writing,
the program of the existing irrigation settings, and any other information necessary to the proper operation of the irrigation
system, if not already provided.
4. During the warranty period for the project, the landscape subcontractor may inspect the clock to review controller settings.
If, as a result of a landscape subcontractor’s inspection, it is determined that adjustments to those settings are necessary,
the landscaping subcontractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, as to when the settings were inspected, what specific
changes are recommended, and why.
5. The landscape subcontractor shall not make any changes to the irrigation settings during the warranty period.
6. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the changes are necessary, the Owner will make the changes to the clock and controller settings and notify the landscape subcontractor in writing of the change. The Owner shall also notify the landscape subcontractor in writing if the Owner determines that the recommended changes are not necessary and the basis for this determination.
311
7.
If the landscaping subcontractor makes any changes to the irrigation control settings during the warranty period, the landscaping subcontractor assumes full financial responsibility for any damage and loss that occurs as a result of those changes.
C. GUARANTEE
1. Guarantee: During the period of one full year after the final payment of work, make all necessary repairs or replacements
due to defective workmanship or materials within two (2) calendar days of receipt of notice of malfunction by the Owner. Any
unwatered area due to poor placement or sufficient number of heads to be corrected by the contractor.
D. PRODUCTS
1. Pipe:
a. Schedule 40 for all mains and laterals 4" or less diameter.
b. C200 at 6"
c. C900 at 8"
2. Joints: Solvent weld on 4" or less pipe.
a. Mainlines above 4” to have Harco ductile iron fittings with knuckle joint restraints.
3. Fittings: Manufactured N.S.F./DW PVC type 1 Schedule 40D 2466. Pressure rating shall be same as piping system that the
fittings are used in.
4. Sprinkler Heads: Pop Up Impact Sprinklers, Manufacturer: Rain Bird, no substitutions, Model Numbers: 41-51A, 27A, 37A,
47A.
5. Pop Up Spray Sprinklers: Rain Bird, no substitutions, Model Numbers: 1804, 1806. Model 1812 and above pop-up sprays
are discouraged.
6. Pop Up Rotors: Hunter, Rain Bird, Model Numbers: Hunter I-25, I-20, I-40, (With Stainless Steel turrets). Rain Bird 7005,
8000 series or better.
7. Quick Coupler Valve: Rain Bird, one piece valve, bronze casting
8. Control Valves: Rain Bird, model PEBS, EFB, Self-flushing nylon screen, Pressure Regulation Module on drip zones, Grit
Filter, Flow Control Stem, Manual Open/Close Control, Normally closed, reverse flow position.
9. Isolation Valves: Manufacturer: Matco, Secure to mainline with megalugs, Construction Resilient wedge with square nut.
10. Drain Valves: Manufacturer: Cambridge, Type: Ball, quarter turn operation, Construction: Bronze, Ball: Hank chrome plate
brass ball, Seals and Packing: Teflon
11. Valve Boxes: Manufacturer: Armor with drop in lid and snap locks, no substitution. Type: Heavy duty. Material: Thermoplastic. Size as required by valve size for proper valve clearance and valve operation, All valve boxes shall be branded to
indicate zone number.
12. Automatic Irrigation Controllers: Irrigation controller to be Signature 200 station 2 wire controller as manufactured by Signature Central Control Systems and supplied by DBC Irrigation Supply, Longmont, Colorado. Contact Kerry Fritzler at 720219-7784.
13. Signature controller to be compatible with SVVSD Standards. Accessories: Hand held remote control with 14 pin universal
connector.
14. Two Wire Control Wire: Type: Paige P7072D – Paige decoder wire 12-2. Run extra 2 wire along entire main and loop 2’ into
every valve box.
E.
EXECUTION
1. Irrigation System Quality Assurance: A Distribution Uniformity Test shall be performed on each irrigation zone with the acceptable results being 60% or better. A net precipitation rate shall be furnished to SVVSD before acceptance of system.
2. Design Pressures: As indicated on Drawings, at connection to main pipe and at last head in circuit. Contractor to verify existing pressure prior to starting work.
3. Location of Valves: Design with a minimum of 4’-0” between valves on the mainline of 4” or smaller. Design with a minimum of 6’-0” between valves on the mainline of 6” or larger
4. Location of Heads: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments as necessary to avoid plantings and other obstructions.
5. Layout and stake system before beginning installation. Notify Owner five (5) working days in advance to inspect layout. Inspection does not relieve installer of coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking.
6. Minimum Water Coverage: Turf Areas: 100% minimum, Other Planting Areas: 100% or as indicated.
F.
TESTING
1. Flushing: Before sprinkler heads are set, thoroughly flush the lines to remove all foreign matter. Flush from dead end fittings
for a minimum of five minutes under a full head of pressure.
312
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Hydrostatic Test: Test main piping and valves, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi
for a period of 24 hours. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work. Remove and repair piping, connections, or
valves which do not pass hydrostatic testing. No pipe joints will be accepted within sleeve pipe.
Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill is in place, and sprinkler
heads adjusted to final position.
Demonstrate to Architect that system meets coverage requirements and that automatic controls function properly.
Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time.
After completion of grading, seeding or sodding, and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will
be flush with finish grade.
Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings.
If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and more adequate coverage, make such
adjustments prior to final acceptance at direction of Owner's Representative. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes and degrees of arc as required.
Correct areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation
practices.
DIVISION 32 90 00
LANDSCAPING
A. SUMMARY - this Section includes the following:
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Ground covers.
4. Soil Preparation and Amendments.
5. Fertilizers and mulches.
6. Stakes and guys.
7. Landscape edging.
B.
DESIGN CRITERIA
1. District shall provide each design consultant standard protocol for the design and specification of planting materials and details, that are to be incorporated into the project.
2. Refer to District acceptable plant materials list at the end of this section.
C. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful landscape establishment.
2. Installer’s Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during
times that landscaping is in progress.
3. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with applicable requirements of
ANSI Z 60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock:, and all applicable state and local rules and regulations.
4. Inspection: Landscape Architect may inspect plants either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with
requirements for name, variety, size and quality. Notify the Landscape Architect at least 5 working days in advance.
5. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject at any time or place prior to final acceptance all plant materials which in
the Landscape Architect’s opinion fail to meet specifications. Rejected material shall be removed from the site within 24
hours.
6. Pre-installation Conference: Contractor shall attend pre-installation conference at locations
7. specified by Owner’s Representative.
D. WARRANTY
1. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Special Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of one (1) year after date of Final Acceptance,
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting form lack of adequate maintenance,
neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor’s control.
a. Trees.
b. Shrubs.
c. Seeded Areas.
313
d. Sodded Areas.
3. All plants shall be true to name and meet all conditions of these specifications. Any plant which is not true to name as indicated by form, leaf, flower or fruiting characteristics shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
4. Seeded areas shall be accepted on the basis of having uniform grass growth over all the seeded areas. Acceptable uniform
grass growth shall be defined as when scattered bare spots, not greater than one square foot, do not exceed 5% of the
seeded area.
5. Inadequate or improper maintenance by the Owner shall not be cause for replacement, provided the Contractor shall have
submitted a letter or report to the Owner on improper or inadequate maintenance practices and recommended remedial actions.7. The warranty shall not be enforced should any plant die due to vandalism after Final Acceptance.
6. At the end of the warranty period the Contractor shall remove all stakes and guy materials and trim dead branches from all
trees. Depending on time of year the Contractor shall also remove tree wrapping.
E.
MAINTENANCE PERIOD:
1. Sod Turf Grass Maintenance
a. Begin maintenance of sodded turf grasses immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is
established, but for not less than the following period:
1. Maintenance Period: Until Final Acceptance.
2. Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) mowings of sodded areas during the Maintenance Period.
3. Contractor shall not allow sodded grass height to exceed 5” before mowing. Do not remove more than 2” per
mowing. Rake and remove clippings that accumulate in dense masses.
b. Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll,
regrade and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf.
2. Native Grass and Turf Seed Maintenance
a. Maintain irrigated native grass and turf seeded areas by weeding, watering, re-grading, reseeding, and mulching as required to insure erosion control and complete seed coverage. Begin maintenance of grasses immediately after each
area is planted and continue maintenance.
1. Maintenance Period: 90 days following Substantial Completion of all landscape work or until a healthy, uniform
stand of grass is established.
2. Contractor shall provide a minimum of one (1) mowing of irrigated native grass and turf seeded areas during the
Maintenance Period.
b. Weeding during the Maintenance Period shall be by herbicide method approved in advance by the Owners Representative. Do not apply herbicide while grass seed is in germination period or when rain is expected within 24 hours.
Schedule irrigation system with timing of herbicide application to avoid wash off. Do not allow weeds to develop to maturity with woody stems. Schedule herbicide application prior to mowing. Do not mow until herbicide has taken effect.
c. Where feasible and if required by local jurisdictions seeded areas without permanent irrigation may be manually watered during the maintenance period from quick couplers on the irrigation system. The Owner shall approve manual
watering on a project by project basis.
F.
RESTRICTIONS/CRITICAL CRITERIA
1. Planting Soil Preparation: Mechanically rip or till amendments into existing subsoil at a minimum depth of 6”. Spread
amendments and fertilizers at rates indicated:
a. A-1 Organics Premium 3 soil amendment: 4 Cubic Yards/1000 SF
b. Commercial Fertilizer: (20-10-5): 10 lbs./1000 SF
c. Superphosphate: 10 lbs./1000 SF
2. Seeding Application: Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. Deliver seed to
job site in the original unopened containers and submit the certified labels to the Landscape Architect.
3. Mechanical Application: Seed by mechanical landscape type drills. Drill seed with approximately ½” inch of cover. Seed
50% in one direction and 50% at a 90 degree angle.
4. Broadcast Application: Seed by broadcast method only when areas are inaccessible to drilling equipment.
5. Free-zone around perimeter of building: Provide a 5ft free zone around buildings. Some low water plants or ornamental
grasses are acceptable, only drip irrigation allowed in the free zone. Review with District for acceptance.
6. Excavation for Trees and Shrubs:
a. Planting Pits: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to assist drainage.
Roughen sides of planting pit.
b. Balled and Burlapped Trees: Excavate approximately 2 times as wide as ball diameter. The depth of the plant pit shall
be 2 inches less than the depth of the ball in well drained soils and 4 inches less than the ball depth in poorly drained
soils.
314
c.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Container-Grown Shrubs: Excavate approximately 2 times as wide as ball diameter. The depth of all plant pits shall be
1 inch less than depth of ball.
Drainage: Notify Owner’s Representative if subsoil conditions evidence water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.
a. Fill all tree pits with water and allow it to completely drain before planting occurs.
b. If water does not drain out of pit within 24 hours, notify Owner’s Representative.
c. All tree pits that fail to drain within 24 hours shall be mitigated at no additional cost to the Owner. Mitigation shall consist of over excavation of the pit and installation of a gravel sump with drain pipe as shown on the drawing detail.
Tree and Shrub Guying and Staking:
a. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5- inch (50 through 125 mm) caliper and Evergreen trees up to 8
foot height. Stake trees of less than 2 inch (50 mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out. Use a minimum of
2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches (1800 mm) above grade.
b. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating balls or root masses. Support trees with 2 strands of tie wire fed
through white PVC pipe and tree collar grommets. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Twist ends of wire
c. and trim off excess.
Guying and Staking: Guy and stake evergreen trees exceeding 8 feet and deciduous trees more than 5 inch caliper unless
otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 48 inches long, driven into ground. Stakes shall be 12”
above grade with approved plastic safety caps. Feed guy wire through white PVC pipe to hose chafing guard.
Tree Wrapping: Wrap trees with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branch. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
No tree shall be wrapped after May 21 nor before November. All deciduous trees shall be wrapped by November 15. Remove tree wrap by May 15. Contractor shall be responsible for wrapping and unwrapping trees during the warranty period.
All trees to receive a min. of 4’ circle mulch mat.
Plant Selection: Landscape plantings should be selected for drought tolerance (xeric) and should not be palatable to wildlife.
G. PRODUCTS
1. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader of height and caliper indicated,
conforming to ANSI Z 60.1 or type of trees required. Branching Height: ½ of tree height.
2. Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, and with relationship of caliper, height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z 60.1, and stem form as designated on Drawings.
3. Evergreen Trees: Specimen XXX quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, conforming to ANSI Z 60.1.
4. Shrubs: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z
60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. Root development shall be sufficient to hold soil in the shape of the container
when removed, but without visible circling roots. b. Normal quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height,
spread, and shape required, conforming to ANSI Z 60.1. Provide container-grown shrubs.
5. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts “Rules for Testing
Seeds” for purity and germination tolerances. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by
weight, and minimum percentages of purity and germination as indicated:
a. Low Grow Mix - Sown over all irrigated native seed areas. Distributed by Arkansas Valley Seeds at (303) 320-7500.
1. Species % P.L.S./Acre
2. Ephraim Crested Wheatgrass 30%
3. Dwarf Perennial Ryegrass 25%
4. SR3200 Blue Fescue 20%
5. Reubens Canada Bluegrass 15%
6. Chewings Fescue 10%
7. TOTAL 100%
b. Pro-Sports Turf Mix – Sown over all athletic fields not sodded. Distributed by Arkansas Valley Seeds
1. Species % P.L.S./Acre
2. Odyssey Kentucky Bluegrass (Midnight Type) 25%
3. SR2100 Kentucky Bluegrass (Shamrock Type) 25%
4. SR4600 Perennial Ryegrass 25%
5. Manhattan 4 Perennial Ryegrass 25%
6. TOTAL 100%
6. Seeding Rate: 40 lbs. per acre irrigated areas, 20-25 lbs. Per acre in non irrigated areas
7. Sod: Certified turfgrass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut thickness, size, strength, moisture content,
mowed height, and free of weeds and undesirable native grasses. Provide viable sod of uniform density, color and texture of
315
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
at least 3 improved varieties of bluegrass and perennial rye, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. Sod for sports fields and large areas shall be ordered in big rolls.
a. Sod at general areas shall be GVT 2000 Kentucky Bluegrass Blend, as supplied by Green Valley Turf Co., Littleton,
Colorado 303-798-6764 or approved equal.
b. Sod at athletic field area shall be GVT Sports Kentucky Bluegrass Blend #1, as supplied by Green Valley Turf Co., Littleton, Colorado 303-798-6764 or approved equal.
Soil Amendments: Organic material for soil preparation shall be a mixture of 100% Premium 3 Compost and shall be free
from subsoil, stones, and plants or their roots, sticks, weed stolons and seeds, high salt contents and other materials harmful to plant life. The Compost shall be coarsely ground and thoroughly mixed together to ensure an even composition.
Fertilizer: Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium
Organic Mulch: Organic mulch, shredded cedar mulch.
Rock Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay and other foreign substances, of following type, size
range, and color: Type: ¾” diameter crushed mountain granite, natural color range of greys, browns and reds as supplied by
Front Range Materials, Arvada, Colorado, 303-425-9992
Weed Control Barriers: Non-woven Fabric: Spunbound Polyester fabric, 3.7 oz per sq. yd., minimum permeability of 160 gal.
Per min. ft./2; Polyspun XL supplied by Direct Landscape Supply, Englewood, Colorado, 303-781-2270, or an approved
equal.
Stakes and Guys: Upright Stakes: Green 8 foot x 2 inch diameter wolmanized lodge pole pine. Guy and Tie Wires: 12
gauge galvanized wire. All guy and tie wires shall be covered with inch diameter PVC pipe, white. Tree Collar Strap: Minimum 2 inch wide non-stretch webbing with grommets for attachment of wire between strap and stake.
Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two (2) layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4 inches (102 mm) wide
minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.
316
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
Section #
Section Name
Comments / Changes
Date
317
318
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
DIVISION 33 10 00
UTILITY SERVICES
1. Water distribution/fire lines, fire hydrants, meter pits, and accessories 5' outside of building.
2. Sanitary sewage lines, manholes, cleanouts, and accessories 5' outside of building.
B.
REFERENCED STANDARDS:
1. For PVC pipe, conformance with C-900.
2. For DIP pipe, conformance with C-151.
3. Rules, regulations, standards and specifications of the applicable local municipality or water and sanitation district:
1. Coordinate design of water systems (domestic and irrigation) with the School District to reduce, where possible, the cost of
tap fees.
2. Avoid sanitary sewage lift stations to the extent possible.
DIVISION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE
1. Storm drainage
2. Ponds/outlet structures
B.
1. Rules, regulations, standards and specifications of the applicable Storm Sewer District, Municipality or County.
2. Design shall follow the jurisdictional Stormwater Management Plan.
1. Storm water shall not discharge over pedestrian walks, pipe underground where possible.
2. Design grades around buildings to achieve positive drainage away from building (prefer minimum of 2% slope around building.)
3. Protect inlet and outlet structures with tamper resistant screen to prevent passage of objects larger than 6 inches.
4. All day lighted pipes shall have concrete headwalls.
5. Permanent pond water will not be allowed.
6. Fencing around detention basins is not necessary except as required around outlet structures.
7. Storage and reuse of storm water for irrigation systems is not allowed by the State of Colorado except by special permit.
DIVISION 33 40 10
SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS
1. Gravel and drainage pipe around foundation and underslab drainage pipe.
2. Protective filler fabric.
3. Foundation drainage mat.
4. Cleanouts.
B.
1. Unperforated PVC pipe: ASTM C2779.
2. Perforated PVC pipe: ASTM D2729.
1. Include subdrain system when recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Geotechnical Engineer, employed by School District, will observe layout, excavation and installation of subdrain system.
3. Include grade cleanouts at each major change of direction of pipe. In planting areas pour 12" x 12" concrete pad around
cleanout.
4. Slope of drain and location of pipe to foundation per recommendation of Geotechnical Engineer. Use perforated pipe adjacent to foundations and unperforated elsewhere. All perforated pipe to be enclosed with ¾” washed gravel and gravel to be
isolated from adjacent soil with one layer of Mirafi filter fabric.
319
5.
Changes in direction of drain shall be made with 1/8 bends and Y fittings shall be used at all intersections.
D. PRODUCTS
1. Unperforated Pipe: Rigid polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and solvent welded fittings.
2. Perforated Pipe: Perforated rigid polyvinyl chloride leaching system piping and solvent welded fittings. Provide solid end
caps at terminations.
3. Cleanout pipe and fittings shall be of cast-iron soil pipe. Each cleanout shall have a brass ferrule and cast-brass screw
jointed plug with socket for wrench.
4. Bedding around drain pipe: Washed 3/4" to No. 4 aggregate with less than 3% passing the No. 200 sieve.
5. Foundation drainage mat:
a. Mirafi Miradrain 6000.
b. American Wick Drain, Amerdrain 200
320
ST. VRAIN VALLEY SCHOOL DISTRICT STANDARDS
Technology and Low Voltage Systems
March 18, 2011
V1.1
St. Vrain Valley School District Standards
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. VISION ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.01
Technology and Low Voltage Systems ..................................................................................................... 3
1.02
Application ............................................................................................................................................... 3
2. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 4
2.01
General .................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.02
Related Documents.................................................................................................................................. 4
2.03
Design Guidelines .................................................................................................................................... 4
2.04
Construction Guidelines........................................................................................................................... 5
2.05
Deviation from this standard ................................................................................................................... 5
3. CODES AND STANDARDS .............................................................................................................. 6
3.01
General .................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.02
Applicable Codes and Standards.............................................................................................................. 6
4. TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM ................................................................................... 7
4.01
District Standards..................................................................................................................................... 7
4.02
Telecommunications Rooms .................................................................................................................... 8
4.03
Communications Cabling ....................................................................................................................... 13
5. AUDIOVISUAL ............................................................................................................................ 17
5.01
District Standards................................................................................................................................... 17
5.02
General Requirements – Classroom multi-media systems .................................................................... 17
6. SECURITY ................................................................................................................................... 19
6.01
District Standards................................................................................................................................... 19
6.02
Access Control System ........................................................................................................................... 19
6.03
Video Surveillance System (Camera System) ......................................................................................... 21
6.04
Intrusion Detection System ................................................................................................................... 22
7. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................ 22
7.01
Public Address (PA) System / Intercom /Bell ......................................................................................... 22
7.02
Wireless Clock System ........................................................................................................................... 23
7.03
Radio re-amplification system (BDA, DAS, IRS, etc) ............................................................................... 23
8. ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN/INFRASTRUCTURE .................................................................................. 24
8.01
Communications Pathway ..................................................................................................................... 24
8.02
Grounding and Bonding ......................................................................................................................... 25
9. SITE INFRASTRUCTURE ............................................................................................................... 25
9.01
General .................................................................................................................................................. 25
9.02
Outside Plant Ducts / Ductbanks ........................................................................................................... 25
9.03
Outside Plant Vaults .............................................................................................................................. 26
9.04
Service Provider Coordination ............................................................................................................... 26
10. OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .......................................................................... 26
10.01
General .................................................................................................................................................. 26
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 1 of 32
10.02
Data Network ......................................................................................................................................... 26
10.03
Wireless Data Network—Site Survey ..................................................................................................... 26
10.04
Wireless Data Network .......................................................................................................................... 26
10.05
IP-Based / Network CATV Distribution System ...................................................................................... 27
10.06
Rack Mounted UPS’ ............................................................................................................................... 27
10.07
Telephone System ................................................................................................................................. 27
10.08
Computers ............................................................................................................................................. 27
APPENDIX A ..................................................................................................................................... 28
11. SYSTEMS OVERVIEW MATRIX ..................................................................................................... 28
11.01
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 28
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 2 of 32
1.
VISION
1.01
TECHNOLOGY AND LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
A. The St. Vrain Valley School District intends to provide a state-of-the-art infrastructure
that advances information and educational technology in support of the District's
Mission Statement. We provide a platform for enhanced educational opportunities by
investing in systems that are nimble, reliable, and flexible. We envision an environment
that enables learning to occur at any time, from any place, and at any pace.
1.02
APPLICATION
A. The standards and “best practice” approaches described in this document are based on
the principle that Technology and Low Voltage Systems are similar to electrical power—
a fundamental resource that should be readily available and easy to use, ubiquitous yet
unobtrusive. Technology and Low Voltage Systems are a utility, a tool—not an end unto
themselves. With this in mind, Technology and Low Voltage Systems for District facilities
should advance the pedagogical goals of the District, should be easy to use and
maintain, should be standards-based, and should be applied consistently across all
schools district-wide.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 3 of 32
2.
INTRODUCTION
2.01
GENERAL
A. This document serves as a technical specification guideline for the design of Technology
and Low Voltage Systems for District facilities. The design of new facilities, additions to
existing facilities, and renovations will conform to these guidelines unless exceptions are
granted by the District.
B. This specification shall also be used as a guideline for District-provided maintenance and
repair.
C. Additional design and submittal requirements may apply for projects with unusual or
highly technical content.
D. Since the industry standards, usage and concepts of technology systems advance at a
rapid pace, these specifications and guidelines shall be revisited and updated on a
regular basis by St. Vrain Valley School District.
2.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This document should be used in conjunction with the following related District
documents:
1. High School Educational Specifications, November 14, 2008
2. Middle School Educational Specifications, November 14, 2008
3. Elementary School Educational Specifications, November 14, 2008
4. St. Vrain Valley School District Technical Guide for Design Consultants, July 29, 2009
B. Reference Section 4 of this document for applicable Codes and Standards.
2.03
DESIGN GUIDELINES
A. Coordination
1. The Designer of Record will coordinate with the other design team members to
ensure that all aspects of the school facility are effective, compatible, and advance
the District’s vision for technology and low voltage systems. Architectural,
electrical, and mechanical design considerations, as they relate to technology and
low voltage systems, are detailed herein; it is the Designer of Record’s
responsibility to coordinate these considerations with the architect, electrical
engineer, mechanical engineer and other members of the design team as
necessary.
B. Systems Selection
1. The type and complexity of technology and low voltage systems, and/or whether a
particular system is necessary, will depend upon the type of school, its size, and its
location. There may also be special cases that justify the need for a particular
system or systems.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 4 of 32
2. All design features must be weighed carefully for their initial cost, long-term
maintenance cost and needs, durability, and impact on the environment.
3. Ease of use and maintenance of systems is critical. The specification of systems that
require extensive training to use or require highly skilled personnel to maintain
should be avoided to the extent possible. The systems ultimately selected for a
school should be those that provide for optimal ease of use and maintenance
while satisfying the stated performance criteria. In some cases, this may mean
providing systems that are initially more costly, but that will have markedly lower
maintenance costs or are substantially easier to use.
C. Designer Qualifications
1. It is recommended that the Designer of Record for technology and low voltage
systems be a consulting and/or engineering firm with one or more of the following
credentials held by individuals on staff. These individuals shall be responsible for
the specific design aspects of the project.
i.
RCDD (Registered Communications Distribution Designer), a certification from
BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Services International), exhibiting proficiency
in understanding and design of voice/data transport systems.
ii. CTS (Certified Technology Specialist), a certification from InfoComm
International, exhibiting proficiency in understanding and design of audiovisual
systems.
D. Documents
1. It is recommended that low voltage systems be specified under their own Division
within the project specifications, and that they be shown on a T series of drawings.
Electrical infrastructure, such as conduits, boxes, et cetera, shall be either shown
on the T series of drawings, or coordinated with the Electrical Engineer on the
project.
2.04
CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES
A. Sub-contractor to the General Contractor
1. It is recommended that low-voltage systems be constructed by a contractor(s)
directly subcontracted to the general contractor; however, may be subcontracted
to the electrical subcontractor.
2.05
DEVIATION FROM THIS STANDARD
A. Request for Deviation
1. Requests for deviation from this standard must be in writing. Indicate the standard
(paragraph number and item/issue) that is under consideration, the reason for the
request, the proposed deviation, and the expected budgetary impact.
B. Written Approval
1. Deviations from this standard must be approved in writing by both the Chief
Information Officer and the Director of Construction Management.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 5 of 32
3.
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01
GENERAL
A. All applicable codes, industry standards, and District standards will be followed.
1. Where conflicts exist between codes and standards, code will govern. However, if
the non-code requirement of the standard (or portion thereof) exceeds that of the
code, and is furthermore not contrary to the code, the non-code requirement (or
portion thereof) will prevail.
2. Where conflicts exist between industry standards and District Standards, in general
the District Standards will prevail. However, the Designer of Record will document
and reconcile the conflicting standards with the District prior to the completion of
design.
B. Standards-based systems will enable District schools to make use of consistent training
and operations and maintenance (O&M) information across all facilities, and in turn
enable personnel moving between schools to immediately use and/or maintain the
systems with little or no additional training. Technical knowledge will be consistent and
thus more readily available, allowing staff to share knowledge between facilities and to
provide each other with assistance when necessary.
3.02
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Standards for low voltage systems will primarily consist of the Telecommunications
Industry Association/Electronics Industries Alliance (TIA/EIA) telecommunications
standards and the applicable standards published by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Guidelines based upon these standards will also be used,
the most notable of which are the materials published by BICSI.
B. The technology and low voltage system designs will comply with the pertinent sections
of the following:
1. ANSI J-STD-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
2. ANSI/EIA 310-D: Cabinets, Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment
3. BICSI: Outside Plant Design Reference Manual
4. BICSI: Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual
5. BICSI: Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual
6. BICSI: Network Design Reference Manual
7. BICSI: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
8. BICSI: Wireless Design Reference Manual
9. FCC Part 15
10. IEEE 802.3 (series): Local Area Network Ethernet Standards
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 6 of 32
11. IEEE 802.11 (series): Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical
Layer (PHY) Specifications
12. IEEE C62.41: Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits
13. NFPA 70: NEC: National Electrical Code (NFPA Article 70)
14. TIA/EIA 568: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
15. TIA/EIA 569: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and
Spaces
16. TIA/EIA 606: The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
17. TIA/EIA 758: Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
18. TIA/EIA: Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) (related to the above TIA/EIA standards)
19. UL 1449: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
C. In addition to the standards and guidelines noted above and listed below, all low voltage
installations will comply with all pertinent national, state, and local regulations.
4.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
4.01
DISTRICT STANDARDS
A. Manufacturers/Systems
1. AMP Netconnect: End-to-end cabling system including copper and fiber cabling,
connectors, terminations and termination equipment (such as patch panels), other
associated and incidental components, and testing and commissioning.
2. Panduit / General Cable: May be permitted as an alternate specification with
SVVSD approval if AMP Netconnect product is not available at time of
construction.
3. Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI): Racks, frames, cabinets, enclosures, rack cable
distribution hardware, cable runway (ladder rack), and other distribution and
associated incidental components.
4. Arlington: Loops and straps for supporting cables in ceiling spaces.
B. Contractors
1. Telecommunications Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and must be
certified by AMP as an Amp Netconnect Design and Installation (ND&I) Contractor.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 7 of 32
4.02
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS
A. General
1. Telecommunications Rooms (TR) provide a connection point between backbone
cabling and horizontal cabling and house equipment for other systems such as
security, access control, public address and building automation systems.
2. At a minimum, every facility will have a Primary Telecommunications Room (also
known as an MDF). Facilities requiring additional TRs will be equipped with one or
more Secondary Telecommunications Rooms (also known as an IDF). The type and
quantity of equipment in the TRs will be determined by whether it is a Primary or
Secondary TR.
B. Equipment
1. Racks
i.
Equipment racks will be 19 inches wide with universal alternating hole pattern
on both sides of the posts, 3 inch channels, 2 posts, top angles, self supporting
bases, and assembly hardware.
ii. Server frames will be 19 inch wide with 5/8 inch-5/8 inch-1/2 inch alternating
square hole pattern complete with cage nuts for mounting equipment, 3 inch by
1.265 inch C-channels, 4 posts, top angles, self-supporting bases, and top and
bottom extension pans, plate nuts and assembly hardware.
iii. Primary TR (MDF): Typically two (2) server frames and two (2) equipment racks
are required within a Primary TR (one rack for station cabling, one for backbone
cabling and two equipment frames for networking/server equipment and public
address equipment). The Primary TR will have space for one (1) future
equipment rack or server frame to be installed at one end. There must be a
minimum of 3-feet of clearance to the front and rear of the rack/frame (the
rack/frame, when loaded with equipment, can be assumed to be 3-feet deep).
1) This configuration is subject to change depending on the size of the room
and alternative requirements coordinated with the District, but any
deviation resulting in a room smaller than that required by the above must
be approved by the District in writing.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 8 of 32
Figure 1 – Typical Primary TR Layout (Quantity of racks will vary.
All racks should be in one continuous row.)
iv. Secondary TR (IDF): Typically two (2) equipment racks are required within a
Secondary TR. The Secondary TR will have space for one (1) future equipment
rack to be installed at one end. There must be a minimum of 3-feet of clearance
to the front and rear of the equipment mounted in each rack (the rack, when
loaded with equipment, can be assumed to be 3-feet deep).
1) This configuration is subject to change depending on the size of the area to
be served by the TR, but any deviation resulting in a room smaller than that
required by the above must be approved by the District in writing.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 9 of 32
Figure 1- Typical TR Layout (quantity of equipments racks will vary – 3 shown)
Figure 2 - Raceway for Typical Rack Elevations
45
45
45
44
44
44
43
43
43
42
42
42
41
41
41
40
40
40
39
39
39
38
38
38
37
37
37
36
36
36
35
35
35
34
34
34
33
33
33
32
32
32
31
31
31
30
30
30
29
29
29
28
28
28
27
27
26
26
25
25
24
23
FUTURE
24
23
27
26
PATCH
PANELS
25
24
EQUIPMENT
23
22
22
22
21
21
21
20
20
20
19
19
19
18
18
18
17
17
17
16
16
16
15
15
15
14
14
14
13
13
13
12
12
12
11
11
11
10
10
10
9
9
9
8
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
2. Ladder rack
i.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Ladder rack will be placed along each wall and affixed above and parallel to the
racks in all Telecom Rooms. The color of the ladder rack will be factory-painted
black.
Page 10 of 32
ii. Radius dropout accessories shall be provided at horizontal ladder racks where
cabling traverses vertically, i.e. dropping into rack vertical managers, or onto
vertical ladder racks for wall-mounted equipment.
3. Wall board
i.
In all Telecommunications Rooms the walls will be covered with 8ft high
backboards (3/4 inch thick, AC-grade, fire rated). Terminal boards shall have
fire-rated stamp visible, and not be painted.
C. Architectural Considerations
1. TRs should be located in building “core” areas, and in areas more central to the
space being served. TRs should not be co-located within or otherwise share space
with mechanical, electrical or custodial spaces. Ceiling spaces in TRs should be left
open and false/suspended ceilings are neither required nor desirable. Doors
should swing out of the room in order to maximize the use of the room. Fire
protection, where required, is recommended to be FM-200 canister-type chemical
agent, or similar. If a wet pipe system, wire cages should be installed around
sprinkler heads to prevent accidental operation. TRs should also be located so as to
eliminate any threat of flooding (i.e. not located adjacent to restrooms). TRs
should not be located on an exterior wall if possible.
2. Each TR should serve a radius of approximately 150 feet and approximately 25,000
square feet if the TR is centrally located. It is possible that additional TRs may be
required due to the distance between outlets and the TR on a given floor. For
multi-floor facilities, TRs should be stacked – this eliminates the costly and difficult
need to coordinate backbone raceway between non-stacked TRs, decreases the
cost of cabling between TRs, provides better backbone cabling security, and eases
future maintenance burden on the Owner.
3. Sizing
i.
Primary TR: The minimum size for a Primary TR (without co-located EF) is 9 feet
by 12 feet, will walls to structure. However, 10 feet by 14 feet (minimum) is
recommended. In addition, a larger space may be required for Primary TRs that
are also serving as a Server Room or if there are significant Service Provider
requirements to be accommodated for in the space.
ii. Secondary TR: The minimum size for a Secondary TR is 9 feet by 10 feet, with
walls to structure. However, 10 feet by 12 feet is recommended.
D. Electrical Considerations
1. Building
i.
If a building generator and/or building UPS will be provided for the facility,
circuits requiring backup power shall be coordinated between the Low-Voltage
Consultant, the District and the Electrical Engineer.
2. Telecommunications Rooms
i.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
The Designer of Record should work with the Owner to determine the projected
and future expansion loads for a given TR, and provide that information to the
Page 11 of 32
Electrical Engineer for load sizing. The electrical sizing for the TR will be based
upon that load.
1) One or more rack mounted Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) will be
provided by the District for each TR. These UPSes may require special
receptacles. The Designer of Record is to provide this receptacle
information to the Electrical Engineer.
2) UPSes providing greater than 750 volt-amps capacity are typically required
to have remote emergency power off (RE: NEC Article 645). These
requirements shall be coordinated with the Electrical Engineer.
ii. At a minimum, a TR should be provided with convenience receptacles on each
wall, and two (2) 20-amp dedicated twist-lock (NEMA L5-20R) receptacles for
each equipment rack mounted on unistrut above the racks (i.e. a TR with two
racks would have four (4) 20-amp dedicated receptacles for the racks). In
addition, the Primary TR should have one (1) dedicated 30-amp twist-lock
(NEMA L6-30R) receptacle over each four-post rack.
iii. Provisions will be made for additional circuits and receptacles as necessary for
equipment to be mounted on the walls and/or for other to be located within the
room. Such equipment could consist of fire alarm, access control equipment, AV
equipment, etc.
iv. Wall electrical receptacles will be flush mounted with the backboard (surface
mounted electrical receptacles interfere with the mounting of horizontal ladder
racking and restrict the surface area available for wall mounting
communications equipment.
v. One or more rack mounted UPS’ will be provided and installed by the District.
E. Environmental Considerations
1. General
i.
The Designer of Record should work with the Owner to determine the projected
and future heat loads for a given TR, and provide that information to the
Mechanical Engineer for heat load sizing. The cooling requirements for the TR
will be based upon that load plus 50% spare/future capacity.
ii. Positive air pressure will be required. Temperature should be maintainable at a
maximum of 75°F.
iii. Direct humidification is not required.
iv. Dedicated environmental controls will be required in all TRs that house
equipment with significant thermal load potential, such as core switches, Power
over Ethernet (PoE) switches, computers, servers, and/or other equipment with
significant power loads and/or heat output. Rooms can share systems with the
core building environmental control system, but the room must be able to
maintain its controlled environment 24/7.
v. In rooms that do not require the use of dedicated environmental control
systems the room will require active ventilation with a dedicated thermostat at
a minimum.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 12 of 32
F. Lighting Considerations
1. Lighting in a Telecommunications Room should be a minimum of 500 lux (50 foot
candles) on the vertical surface at the lowest point of termination.
2. Lighting fixtures should be installed in front of, behind and parallel to the racks.
Lighting fixtures should not interfere with cable pathways. Light fixtures shall be
installed with minimum clearances to telecommunications cabling systems
considered.
G. Telecommunications Rooms for Modular Buildings, Field House, Press Box, and
Concession Stands.
1. TRs for modular buildings or field houses do not need to satisfy the above
requirements. However, space is to be provided within each building to house an
IT cabinet (or small closet). The cabinet may be wall mounted (or a wall-mounted
rack may be used in a small closet) and sized to accommodate all IT connections
within the building, as well as the electronic equipment (primarily switches and a
rack-mountable UPS) necessary to serve the connections. The IT cabinet/rack
should be configured similar to that of the equipment racks in the TR’s described
above (albeit on a smaller scale) and should also be secured with a locking device.
4.03
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
A. Backbone cabling
1. Inside Plant (inside of the Building)
i.
General
1) Backbone cabling connects the communications rooms to one another in a
star topology. The backbone cabling will consist of multimode fiber and
multipair copper.
ii. Fiber
1) Fiber backbone cabling will be 850nm Laser optimized 50/125 μm
multimode cable, plenum rated. The minimum fiber backbone size is 12strand, aqua color.
2) Connector type will be LC, epoxy polish, with connectors specified to match
the fiber core size.
iii. Multipair
1) Multipair copper backbone cables will be provided for copper based
communications signals, and shall be rated Category 5e. The minimum
copper backbone size will be 12-pair, but should be ultimately sized
according to the number of communications circuits to be served.
2. Outside Plant (outside of the building)
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 13 of 32
i.
General
1) Outside plant (OSP) backbone cabling will connect a facility to service
providers, the District backbone and buildings external to the main facility
(i.e. modular building or a concessions/field house building).
ii. Service Entrance
1) Service Provider Cabling: OSP backbone cable for service provider
connectivity will be provided by the service provider. The District will
coordinate with their selected Service Provider(s) for the installation of this
cabling.
iii. Multi-Building Site
1) In addition to the service provider cabling (see Single Building Site above)
there may be buildings external to a facility (such as modular building(s) or a
concessions/field house near the athletic fields) that require OSP cabling for
communications with the main facility. These cables should be installed in
conduits and not buried directly in the ground.
2) Fiber backbone cabling between the main building and the external building
will be 850nm Laser optimized 50/125 μm multimode cable, powder-filled
non-armored cable, rated for outdoor direct-burial use. The minimum fiber
backbone size is 8-strand, aqua color. Transition cabinets for proper
OSP/Premises cable transition and cable bonding shall be installed on both
ends of cable.
3) Multipair copper backbone cabling between the main building and the
external building will be provided for voice/analog grade communications.
Cable will be rated Category 5e, rated for outdoor direct-burial use. These
backbone cables will be terminated on 66-type termination (wiring) blocks.
The minimum copper backbone size will be 25-pair, but should be sized
according to the number of voice grade ports to be served. Building
entrance protectors (BEPs) will be provided.
B. Horizontal (Workstation) Cabling
1. General
i.
Station cabling will consist of Category 6 cable from each outlet to the outlet’s
assigned TR. All horizontal cabling will be terminated sequentially on patch
panels in equipment racks. Cable will be plenum rated.
ii. All Category 6 cable will be color coded based on application:
1) Blue – Data/Network
2) White – VoIP/Voice
3) Green – CCTV/Security
4) Yellow – Audiovisual
5) Others as determined by District.
iii. All data jacks will be color coded based on application:
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 14 of 32
1) Red – Network
2) White – Voice
iv. At the faceplate voice ports will be white/ivory in color and data ports will be
orange in color. Port A (i.e. the 1st or top port) is designated for voice. All of
the remaining ports are considered to be data.
v. In general, a typical outlet will consist of two ports (one voice and one data).
Wireless Access Points (WAP), IP Security Cameras and the Multi-Media System
will require only one data port.
2. Offices
i.
Single occupant offices will be served with a minimum of two 2-port outlets.
Cubicle areas, if present, will each be served with one 2-port outlet.
3. Classrooms/Science Labs
i.
Typical classrooms will be served with six ports. Three ports (one voice and two
data) will be located near the teaching location. In addition, one voice and one
data port will be located at an alternate teaching location, and one data port
will be provided for a wireless access point.
Figure 3- Typical Classroom Layout
ii. In addition to the ports required for a typical classroom, science labs will have a
minimum of four additional ports for specialized science equipment. Locations
for these additional outlets should be determined on a case-by-case basis.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 15 of 32
4. Computer Labs
i.
Computer labs will be cabled such that a dedicated data port will be provided
for every network-accessing device (PCs, printers, et cetera). These data ports
should be fed from the wall. There will also be a teaching location with three
ports (one voice and two data).
5. Gymnasiums
i.
Gymnasiums will be served with a minimum of two (2) one port outlets for
wireless access points, and two (2) two port outlets, one on each opposing wall.
6. Theaters
i.
Locations and quantities of outlets will be determined on a case-by-case basis
according to the requirements of the space and as approved by the District.
C. Patch Cords/Cables: All patch cords/cables will be furnished and installed by the
Owner.
D. Termination Equipment
1. Patch panels
i.
Copper: Horizontal cable patch panels will be 2U 48 port, modular type and
rated Category 6. There should be an indefinite number of spare ports in the
patch panel in the horizontal cabling rack, targeting 25% spare capacity.
Patchpanels shall be unloaded type, and ports in patchpanels shall be colorcoded snap-in type to match horizontal cabling color coding.
ii. Fiber: In the Primary TR the (FDU) will be a 2U rack mount enclosure with five
(5) snap-in LC duplex adaptor plates and blank inserts to cover unused openings.
In the Secondary TR(s), Modular Buildings or Field Houses the FDU will be a 1U
rack mounted enclosure with one (1) snap-in LC duplex adaptor plate and blank
inserts to cover unused openings.
2. Termination blocks: Termination blocks will be 110 type blocks.
E. Loops/Straps
1. Main pathway trunks will use 5-inch loops, and branch pathways are to use 2-1/2inch loops. Place straps every four to five feet.
F. Testing/Commissioning
1. Testing will be in accordance with applicable TIA/EIA standards. The Owner reserves
the right to have a representative present during all or a portion of the testing
process. If the Owner elects to be present during the testing, test results will only
be acceptable when conducted in the presence of the owner representative.
Testing shall be performed for each and every cable in the system. Test results for
each cable shall be provided to the Owner for review, an included with the
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual turned over by the Contractor.
G. Labeling
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 16 of 32
1. Identifiers (labels) are to be as recommended in TIA/EIA 606-A. The contractor will
be required to maintain an outlet reference spreadsheet and cabling
administration floor plan throughout construction (for the District’s use),
documenting outlet and patch panel port names correlating to the Drawings.
Labeling spreadsheet and Cable Administration Drawings shall be turned over to
District in O&M Manual.
H. Special Case and Renovation Considerations (see Systems Overview Matrix)
1. Renovations: All existing cabling and/or patch cords all areas of the facility that does
not meet or exceed CAT5e rating will be replaced with CAT6 cabling, even if the
cables are located in areas that are not directly involved in the renovation. Existing
CAT5e rated cabling may be retained when it is not to be used by systems
requiring CAT6 infrastructure; Cat5e infrastructure shall be tested and certified to
properly accommodate 1000BASE-TX in order to be reused.
5.
AUDIOVISUAL
5.01
DISTRICT STANDARDS
1. Projector: Epson. Confirm manufacturer and model number with the District on a
project-by-project basis.
2. Projection Screen: Da-Lite manual front-projection screen, 16:10 aspect ratio
format, 94” diagonal, 1.0-1.1 screen gain. Screens shall be ceiling- or wallmounted depending on installation.
3. Multi-Media System: Calypso ezRoom . This system includes video and audio
switching, control, amplifier, speakers, priority page control, cabling, interface
plates and projector mounting. Confirm the use of this system with the District on
a project-by-project basis.
4. Wireless Microphone Receiver: Standard with Multi-Media System.
B. Contractors
1. AV Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and must be certified by the
primary AV equipment manufacturers.
5.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – CLASSROOM MULTI-MEDIA SYSTEMS
A. Sound Reinforcement
1. Provide audio amplification for computer (or any other device) generated audio
signals uniformly throughout the classroom via the Multi-Media System.
2. Provide voice reinforcement for teachers within the classroom using a wireless
microphone accessory to the Multi-Media System.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 17 of 32
B. Video Distribution
1. Provide video switching and distribution of various signal types from two (2) wall
plate locations within the classroom routed to the projection system via the MultiMedia System.
C. Low Voltage System Control
1. Provide a low voltage control system operated via a wall mounted button panel that
will control the functionality of the Multi-Media System:
i.
Audio and Video signal switching
ii. Audio volume control/muting
iii. Control of auxiliary devices as needed via bi-directional RS-232 serial data
stream, Infrared or dry contact closure
Figure 5 – Multi-Media System Keypad Configuration
D. Muting/Override
1. Provide audio muting signal from the Paging System to the Multi-Media System such
that during an event the audio signal being distributed via the classroom
loudspeakers will be muted.
2. Provide assurance that override is operational as part of testing/commissioning
procedure.
E. Testing/Commissioning
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 18 of 32
1. Contractor/Vendor shall provide a full system testing and commissioning effort. The
testing/commissioning agent shall create a comprehensive system operation plan
checklist for every system installed, and ensure installation passes all modes of
operation prior to turnover.
2. Testing will be in accordance with applicable standards. The Owner reserves the
right to have a representative present during all or a portion of the testing process.
If the Owner elects to be present during the testing, test results will only be
acceptable when conducted in the presence of the owner representative. Testing
shall be performed for each and every component in the system. Test results for
each component and sub-system shall be provided to the Owner for review, an
included with the Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual turned over by the
Contractor.
6.
SECURITY
6.01
DISTRICT STANDARDS
A. Contractors
1. Security Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District. The District will provide
pre-qualified contractors on a project-by-project basis. The CCTV Control
System/server will require 4 feet by 8 feet of wall space within the Primary TR, a
120VAC dedicated circuit with UPS and cable pathway from the TR to Workstation
locations.
2. Location for the District provided CCTV Monitoring workstation will need to be
determined. This will typically be in the Administration area.
6.02
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Access Control Head-End: Keyscan
2. Proximity Readers: HID
B. General
1. A Card Access Control System will require 4 feet by 8 feet of wall space within the
Primary TR, a 120VAC dedicated circuit and cable pathway from the TR to device
locations. This area may be shared with the Intrusion Detection System, but each
system will require a separate dedicated electrical circuit.
2. A location for the District provided access control workstation will need to be
determined. This will typically be in the Administration area.
3. Raceway for controlled doors will be necessary. Consult District maintenance for
specific installation examples pending hardware use.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 19 of 32
C. Equipment
1. Interior door hardware will typically consist of an electric strike and a door position
switch.
2. Hardware for exterior controlled doors will typically consist of an electric latch
retraction mechanism and a door position switch.
3. Hardware for exterior monitored doors will only require a door position switch.
4. Card readers will be a proximity type reader.
D. Specific Requirements
1. Elementary and Middle schools
i.
Interior Doors
1) Entry into the Administration area from the interior of the vestibule will be
controlled with a controlled door for access after hours. During normal
hours the door will remain unlocked so that visitors may enter the admin
area to sign in. A remote lock-disable interface will be located at the
administration area front desk.
ii. Exterior doors:
1) Public entryways will require controlled doors. All other exterior doors will
be monitored.
2. High schools
i.
Interior Doors:
1) Entry into the Administration area from the interior of the vestibule will be
controlled with a controlled door for after-hours access. During normal
hours the door will remain unlocked so that visitors may enter the admin
area to sign in.
2) Traffic flow in the building may be controlled using controlled doors. For
example the athletic wing may have an activity, but entry into the
administrative area would be prohibited without proper card access.
3) If an SRO office is located in an interior vestibule then a button will be
required in that office so that the SRO can unlock the interior vestibule
doors and allow people to pass through the vestibule and into the building.
ii. Exterior Doors:
1) Public entryways will require controlled doors. All other exterior doors will
be monitored.
E. Owner Provided Equipment
1. The computer used to host the Access Control System software will be provided by
the District.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 20 of 32
6.03
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CAMERA SYSTEM)
1. Systems Format: Hybrid (Analog / IP) capable.
2. DVR-Software: GeoVision, Axis, Honeywell.
3. Cameras: Honeywell, Pelco, Axis, Acti, Aerocont. Analog cameras are preferred.
Confirm part numbers with the District on a project-by-project basis.
4. Computer: The DVR computer will be a Windows based system that exceeds the
recommended requirements for the operating system and the DVR software.
B. General
1. The video surveillance system will be a hybrid system which will enable it to use
either IP or analog cameras.
2. CCTV Server will provide recording for up to 32 analog cameras capable of recording
30 fps on each channel at a 720 x 480 resolution. H.264 compression is also a
requirement. Digital video recorder (DVR) will provide for recording and viewing
of camera video. The video will be stored for a minimum of two weeks. Video will
be recorded at a minimum of 30 frames per second at 480 TV lines resolution, with
a connected capacity of 32 cameras. DVR capacity specification for IP-cameras
shall be determined in concert with the District on a case-by-case basis.
3. UTP cabling used for Video Surveillance cabling will be green in color, in order to
differentiate it from Telecommunications Cabling.
4. Video from the access control system cannot be sent over the District’s data
network without coordination with the ITS department and the Electrical
department. If IP cameras are to be used, the cameras shall be installed on a
physically separate network from general data network.
5. Light poles used for mounting exterior mounted cameras should be reinforced to
reduce movement due to wind and other external forces.
6. Roof mounted cameras will be parapet mounted when possible.
7. Wireless communication devices may be required for exterior cameras located in
areas where it may not be practical or cost effective to extend cable (i.e. athletic
facilities, parking lots).
8. Interior cameras shall be installed as directed by the District. Confirm locations
during design.
9. Exterior cameras will be specified with appropriate environmental housings.
Consideration shall be given to utilizing pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras in justifying
circumstances.
C. Areas of Coverage
1. Camera coverage areas will consist of areas exterior to the building, parking areas,
driveways, courtyards and public areas, areas adjacent to the school property (e.g.
a park across the street from a school where people might gather) and athletic
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 21 of 32
facilities (e.g. dugouts and other structures that might be subject to graffiti or
other acts of vandalism). See the Systems Overview Matrix for more information.
6.04
INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
1. Head-End: GE – NX-8E
2. Sensor: Honeywell
B. General
1. The Intrusion Detection System will require 4 feet by 8 feet of wall space within the
Primary TR, a 120VAC dedicated circuit and cable pathway from the TR to device
locations. This area may be shared with Access Control System, but each system
will require a separate dedicated electrical circuit.
2. The system will disarmed by a validated card read by the Access Control System,
and/or by coded keypad.
C. Equipment
1. Motion sensors will be ceiling mounted infrared motion sensors, or wall-mounted
where ceilings are greater than 12’-0”.
2. Keypads in Elementary Schools:
i.
Keypad shall be located at main entry, near Administration area.
3. Keypads in Middle and High Schools:
i.
Keypad shall be located in each wing of school, specifically at auxiliary building
entrances.
ii. Master keypad shall be located at main entry, near Administration area.
D. Areas of Coverage
1. Areas to be monitored include interior corridors and administration areas.
7.
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
7.01
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM / INTERCOM /BELL
1. Rauland-Borg Telecenter ICS
B. Contractors
1. Contractors must be pre-qualified by the District and certified by the Manufacturer.
C. General Requirements
1. Provide cabling infrastructure to support future two-way communications (i.e.
future intercom call buttons) in classrooms.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 22 of 32
2. During an emergency page, local Multi-Media systems are to be overridden/automuted to facilitate the broadcast of the emergency message.
3. Integrate with the Wireless Clock System to provide synchronized bell operations.
4. Head-end
i.
The public address head-end will provide telephone interface ports for
connection to the facility phone system, enabling any standard phone on the
facility phone system to access the public address system and distribute a
message (or initiate an intercom call).
ii. The processor will provide the option for 2 two-way intercom type
communication connectivity utilizing the facilities classrooms loudspeakers
provided that additional software and electronic modules for the head-end are
purchased.
iii. Head-end cabinet shall be located in the building Primary TR (MDF).
7.02
WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
1. Sapling SMC 2000 Series
B. Contractors
1. Upon written approval from the District, the District will provide and install the
Wireless Clock System (this is the case for most projects).
2. Where the District will not be providing the Wireless Clock System, contractors must
be pre-qualified by the District and certified by the manufacturer. The District will
provide pre-qualified contractors where this is the case.
C. General Requirements
1. The clock system will be a wireless type system that continually synchronizes clocks
throughout the facility, and integrates with the Public Address system so that the
clock and bell systems are synchronized.
2. The clocks will be battery powered
3. The type of clock face will be analog in classrooms, digital LED in corridors.
4. Head-end cabinet shall be located in building Primary TR (MDF).
7.03
RADIO RE-AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM (BDA, DAS, IRS, ETC)
A. Special Case and Renovation Considerations (see Systems Overview Matrix)
1. Radio re-amplification systems are used for enhancing signals such as public safety
radio frequencies or cellular coverage and are not required by the District, but may
be required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Determine if this system is
required by the AHJ. Provide as required.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 23 of 32
8.
ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN/INFRASTRUCTURE
8.01
COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
1. Standard Outlet Box: Electrical Contractor preference.
2. Floor Box: FSR, Wiremold, Hubbell.
3. Fire-Stopping Pathway Devices: STI/EZ-Path
B. Contractors
1. No pre-qualification necessary. Contractor must be a licensed Electrician.
C. Conduit to Accessible Ceiling Space
1. Raceway serving the outlets within a facility will be 1-inch (minimum) conduit from
the outlet device box to accessible ceiling space (with bushing). Each box will have
a dedicated conduit to the ceiling (i.e. “daisy chaining” of boxes is not acceptable).
Flexible conduit is not acceptable in new construction. ENT ‘Smurftube’ conduit
may be considered for renovations.
D. Sleeves
1. For multi-floor facilities, a minimum of four 4-inch sleeves will connect the TR to the
TR(s) above and/or below. At least two (2) sleeves shall be filled with 1-1/2” ENT
innerducts. For TRs with a higher concentration of cable additional sleeves may be
required. If the TR is also an Entrance Facility (EF) then additional sleeves may be
required. Backbone cabling and horizontal cabling will be placed in separate
sleeves so additional sleeves may be required if there is backbone and horizontal
cable running between TRs.
2. One 2-inch conduit will provide a cable path from a TR (typically on the highest
level) to the roof for future services/equipment (e.g. antenna, etc.).
E. Fire-Stopping Pathway Devices
1. EZ-Path Fire-stopping pathway devices are the preferred pathway through smokeor fire-rated structures and provide a code-compliant pathway for communications
cabling through smoke- or fire-rated barriers. Fire-stopping pathway devices will
be provided in quantities equal to the volume of the usable volume of the pathway
(such as cable tray) it serves.
F. Device Boxes
1. Outlet device boxes will be 4-11/16-inch by 4-11/16-inch by 2-1/8-inch deep capable
of accepting up to a 1-1/4-inch conduit (1-inch conduit will be typical), with 1-inch
extension ring, single-gang mud ring, and knockouts pre-manufactured to support
the conduit sizes serving the box. Surface raceway (such as Wiremold) will be
avoided to the extent possible in new facilities, but may be provided where no
other option is available.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 24 of 32
2. Some equipment (i.e., security camera, speaker, etc.) may require the more
standard 4-inch by 4-inch box.
G. Floor Boxes and Poke-Through Devices
1. Special Case and Renovation Considerations (see Systems Overview Matrix)
i.
8.02
Special Case: The use of floor boxes and/or poke through devices will be
avoided to the extent possible, but may be provided where no other option is
available and after consultation with the Owner and Architect. Conduits
feeding these devices will be fed underslab (for slab-on-grade installations) or
fed from the ceiling space of the floor below.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. An industry standard telecommunications grounding system will connect all
telecommunications spaces and the racks and raceway equipment within them to the
building ground. The primary TR will be equipped with a telecommunications main
grounding busbar (TMGB), and the other TRs will be equipped with the
telecommunications grounding busbars (TGBs). The busbars will interconnected with
the grounding wire, sized per BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual,
and connected to the building ground.
9.
SITE INFRASTRUCTURE
9.01
GENERAL
A. Site infrastructure consists of the vaults and pathway outside of the facility. This
infrastructure will connect various buildings and equipment located on the campus to
the main building cable pathway. The site infrastructure will enter the building in the
entrance facility which will typically be the primary TR.
9.02
OUTSIDE PLANT DUCTS / DUCTBANKS
A. Ductbanks will consist of a minimum of four 4-inch conduits (minimum one spare) and
will run from the facility’s Primary TR (MDF) to a communications vault located near the
edge of the property (see below). If there are intermediary vaults then additional
conduits may be required.
B. In addition, a minimum of two 2-inch conduits (minimum one spare) will run from the
facility’s Primary TR (MDF) to a television service provider vault located near the edge of
the property.
C. For multi-building campuses, ductbanks will also run from the main facility’s Primary TR
(MDF) to each of the outbuildings. Size of the ductbanks will be determined on a caseby-case basis, but in no case shall consist of less than one (1) 2-inch conduit.
D. Multiple ENT innerducts shall be provided in conduits, in a variety of sizes for varying
uses.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 25 of 32
9.03
OUTSIDE PLANT VAULTS
A. Outside plant vaults (man-holes) will be located in strategic areas where required due to
distance limitations of duct bank runs and cable performance requirements. One or
more vault(s) will be placed near the edge of the property for connectivity to service
provider facilities. Additional vaults may be placed in intermediate locations for
connectivity to other equipment and/or building on the campus.
B. Vaults shall be standard load-bearing type. H20-rated vault lids are only required where
absolutely necessary; determine locations in concert with District.
9.04
SERVICE PROVIDER COORDINATION
A. The Designer of Record will coordinate with the various Service Providers to properly
locate vaults near service provider facilities. The District will provide the contact
information for those Service Providers.
10.
OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
10.01 GENERAL
A. The equipment and systems in this section will be provided and installed by the District,
except where such equipment is an integral part of a system being provided by the
contractor (such as servers used for management and storage related to security
cameras).
B. Supporting cable infrastructure shall be provided and installed by the contractor, as is
described in the Telecommunications Cabling System section of this document.
C. Contractor: Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor is not responsible for the following
equipment (i.e. the District will furnish and install these systems and equipment):
10.02 DATA NETWORK
A. General: The Data Network consists of network infrastructure equipment (routers,
switches, etc.)
B. Manufacturer: Cisco Systems
10.03 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK—SITE SURVEY
A. General: Wireless data network site survey consists of a radio frequency analysis of the
site for planning the placement of wireless equipment.
10.04 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
A. General: Wireless data network consists of Wireless Access Points (WAPs), wireless
network adapters, and related control equipment.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 26 of 32
10.05 IP-BASED / NETWORK CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. General: IP-Based / network CATV distribution system consists of equipment related to
distributing multimedia content—such as DVD output, external cable/satellite television
broadcasts, etc.—over the IP network infrastructure.
10.06 RACK MOUNTED UPS’
A. General: UPS’ consist of rack mounted uninterruptible power supplies for use in
Telecom Rooms (TRs).
B. Manufacturer: Liebert
10.07 TELEPHONE SYSTEM
A. Voice over IP (VoIP)
1. General: VoIP systems consist of servers, software, and equipment used to provide
telephone services over the IP network infrastructure. The District has
standardized on VoIP Phone systems going forward.
B. PBX/Analog
1. General: PBX/analog systems consist of a PBX and related equipment used to
provide telephone services using analog signals. Analog phone systems are the
“traditional” systems currently installed in most of the District’s schools. These
systems will be phased out as budget and opportunity allows.
2. Manufacturer: Nortel OX32
10.08 COMPUTERS
A. General: Computers include desktop computers, notebook/laptop computers, and
servers.
B. Manufacturer: Various
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 27 of 32
APPENDIX A
11.
SYSTEMS OVERVIEW MATRIX
11.01 OVERVIEW
A. General
1. The matrix shown below is intended to provide an overview of the District’s
standard technology and low voltage systems, indicate the entity typically
responsible for furnishing and installing those systems, and highlight any
significant issues. In other words, the matrix provides an “at-a-glance” overview of
all of the District’s technology and low voltage systems.
2. The matrix is not intended to be all-inclusive, nor is it intended to be used to
exclude a system shown (or not shown) should conditions clearly indicate a need
for it.
3. The matrix is to be used to aid the Designer of Record in selecting and applying the
various systems to their given project. Once the matrix has been used to do so,
the Designer of Record should review the outcomes with the District for final
approval.
B. How to Use the Matrix
1. Systems are listed in the left-most column. Criteria are listed in the remaining
columns. In general, a bullet under the “Provide” column indicates that the system
is required for the project.
2. The Systems Overview Matrix is designed to be used in conjunction with, not
exclusive of, this narrative. Together, these documents provide the guidelines by
which systems can be evaluated, selected, and applied to a given project.
C. Criteria
1. Required: The columns under this heading are used to determine whether or not a
system is to be provided, along with any special considerations for how the system
is to be provided.
i.
Standard. When this criterion is selected in the matrix for a given system, it
means that the system is to be provided as part of the project.
ii. Special Case Justification. Some systems should be provided only on a case-bycase basis, according to anticipated, historical, and/or local needs. When this
criterion is selected, there is additional information pertaining to the selection
and configuration of that system that is provided in the detail section for that
system detailed later in this document.
2. Furnish: The columns under this heading are used to determine the entity
responsible for furnishing a particular system.
i.
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Contractor: When this criterion is selected, the Contractor is responsible for
furnishing the system.
Page 28 of 32
ii. Owner: When this criterion is selected, the District is responsible for furnishing
the system.
3. Install: The columns under this heading are used to determine the entity
responsible for installing and configuring a particular system.
i.
Contractor: When this criterion is selected, the Contractor is responsible for
installing and configuring the system.
ii. Owner: When this criterion is selected, the District is responsible for installing
and configuring the system.
Figure 7 - Systems Overview Matrix (continued on next 3 pages)
Install
Contractor
SVVSD
Furnish
SVVSD
Special Case
Technology/Low Voltage System
Standard
Required
Contractor
Systems Overview Matrix
Notes
Telecommunications Rooms
Telecom Room - Primary TR (MDF / EF / TR)
Telecom Room - Secondary TR (IDF / TR)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communications Cabling
Backbone Cabling
Premises Cabling
Outside-Plant (OSP) Cabling
Horizontal (Workstation) Cabling
Category 6
•
Category 5e
•
All new cabling
installed shall be
Category 6.
Category 5e cabling
may be left in place in
renovations if
standards are met.
See Section 4.03.H.
•
•
Patchcords
Copper
Fiber
•
•
•
•
•
•
Audiovisual Systems
Classroom Environments
Projector
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
•
•
•
•
Entity responsible for
furnishing projectors
will be based on bid
price versus SVVSD
Page 29 of 32
pricing.
Projection Screen
Manual
•
Motorized
Multi-Media System
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motorized screens
utilized only where
necessary.
furnishing multi-media
systems will be based
on bid price versus
SVVSD pricing.
Conference Rooms
Projector
•
•
Projection Screen
Manual
•
•
Motorized
•
•
Multi-Media System
•
•
•
•
furnishing projectors
will be based on bid
price versus SVVSD
pricing.
•
•
•
•
Motorized screens
utilized only where
necessary.
furnishing multi-media
systems will be based
on bid price versus
SVVSD pricing.
Multi-media systems
only provided in
conference rooms
intended for more
than 6 persons.
Electronic Safety & Security Systems
Access Control System
Controlled Portals - Interior
Controlled Portals - Exterior
Monitored Exterior Doors
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Video Surveillance System
Public Entryways
Administration Front Desk
Playground Areas / Fields
Parking Areas
Bus Loading Areas
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Page 30 of 32
Courtyard Areas
•
•
•
Interior/Common Public Areas
•
•
•
Interior Thoroughfares
•
•
•
Recording Capability
•
•
•
Interior CCTV camera
locations shall be
determined directly
with SVVSD.
Interior CCTV camera
locations shall be
determined directly
with SVVSD.
Recording shall be via
standalone devices at
each facility.
Intrusion Detection System
Motion Detection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low-Voltage Systems (School Systems)
Public Address (PA) / Intercom / Program Bell
Wireless Clock
Distributed Antenna
Sound Reinforcement (Gymnasiums, Auditoriums,
Theatres, Music Classrooms)
•
Provide only where
required by AHJ.
District standards for
equipment not
developed. Each
circumstance shall be
designed closely in
concert with SVVSD.
Electrical Rough-In / Infrastructure
Communications
Pathway / Raceway to Outlets
Conduit Home Run
Pathway / Raceway - Main Distribution
Loops / Straps
Audiovisual
•
•
•
•
•
Equipment Mounting/Blocking/Structural Support
•
•
•
Electronic Safety & Security
Low-Voltage
•
•
•
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
Applies to MultiMedia system and
Sound Reinforcement
systems.
Applies to MultiMedia system and
Sound Reinforcement
systems.
Page 31 of 32
Miscellaneous Electrical Rough-In
Floorbox / Poke-thru
Communications Bonding & Grounding System
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Site Infrastructure
Outside Plant Ductbank
Outside Plant Vaults
Service Provider Coordination
Owner-Provided Equipment
Data Network Equipment
Wirelss Data Network - Site Survey
Wireless Data Network - Equipment
IP-Based CATV Distribution
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Telephone System
Computers / Computer Equipment
CCTV PTZ Controller
Revised: 2011-10-19 8:41 AM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 32 of 32

project name - St Vrain Valley School District

Transcription

Similar documents

Zak McKracken – Mayan Maze Map

CheckValves

Rilo Kiley After Hours

Marvel Outdoor Mobile Beer Dispensers

Owner`s Manual

Brochure SFBM.indd - Werkhuizen Hengelhoef Industrial Contracting

SABIC_Newsletter_Issue _4_DRAFT_2.p65

Jibou - Iserlohn

the program brochure

6Clit Pi3349 opeciattg dough.